EPower™ Controller

User Guide

EPower™ Power management and control units

Versions 3.06 and later

HA179769 Issue 15
March 2020
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

INSTALLATION AND OPERATION MANUAL

LIST OF SECTIONS

1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
2 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
3 OPERATOR INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
4 QUICKSTART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
5 OPERATOR MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
6 ENGINEER AND CONFIGURATION LEVEL MENUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
7 USING ITOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
8 PARAMETER ADDRESSES (MODBUS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
9 PREDICTIVE LOAD MANAGEMENT OPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
10 ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
11 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
12 MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
APPENDIX A REMOTE DISPLAY UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
APPENDIX B THREE PHASE FEEDBACK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

Associated Documents
HA179770 Communications Manual
HA028838 iTools help manual

Software Effectivity
This manual relates to units with software version 3.05
Patents
This product is covered by one or the more of the following patents:
France: FR 06/02582 (Published 2899038)
Europe: 07104780.7 (Pending)
US: 11/726,906 (Pending)
China: 200710089399.5 (Pending)

HA179769 Contents
Issue 15 March 20 Page i
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section Page
List of Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
USER GUIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
1.1 UNPACKING THE UNITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
2 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
2.1 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
2.1.1 Fixing details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
2.2 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
2.2.1 Driver Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
SUPPLY VOLTAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
FAN SUPPLIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
ENABLE INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
PROTECTIVE EARTH GROUND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
SIGNAL WIRING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
WATCHDOG RELAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
RELAY 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
PREDICTIVE LOAD MANAGEMENT OPTION CONNECTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
CONFIGURATION PORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
COMMUNICATIONS PINOUTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
2.2.2 Power modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
LINE/LOAD CABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Power Connection Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
RIBBON CABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
EXTERNAL CURRENT FEEDBACK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
REMOTE VOLTAGE INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
NEUTRAL/PHASE REFERENCE INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
ACCESS TO LINE AND LOAD TERMINATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
THREE-PHASE STAR CONFIGURATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
THREE-PHASE DELTA CONFIGURATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
TWO-LEG CONFIGURATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
THREE PHASE CONFIGURATIONS WITH EXTERNAL FEEDBACK . . . . . . . . . . 55
3 OPERATOR INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
3.1 DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
3.2 PUSHBUTTONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
3.2.1 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
3.2.2 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
3.2.3 Menu item value selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
3.3 BEACONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
3.4 FRONT PANEL MESSAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
3.4.1 Instrument events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
3.4.2 Indication alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
3.4.3 System alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
3.4.4 Process alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
3.4.5 Configuration errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
3.4.6 Standby errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
3.4.7 Power module errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Contents HA179769
Page ii Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT.)

Section Page
3.4.8 General errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
3.4.9 Reset errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
3.4.10 Fatal errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
4 QUICKSTART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
4.1 QUICKSTART MENU PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
4.2 SOME DEFINITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
4.2.1 Firing modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
LOGIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
BURST FIXED FIRING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
BURST VARIABLE FIRING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
PHASE ANGLE CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
HALF CYCLE MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
4.2.2 Feedback type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
4.2.3 Transfer Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
4.2.4 Limitation features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
FIRING ANGLE LIMITING (IN PHASE ANGLE MODE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
DUTY CYCLE LIMITING (IN BURST MODE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
5 OPERATOR MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
5.1 SUMMARY PAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
5.1.1 Single phase summary page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
5.1.2 Two or three phase summary page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
5.1.3 Two by two phase summary page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
5.2 TOP LEVEL OPERATOR (USER) MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
5.2.1 Alarm Summary pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
5.2.2 Event Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
5.2.3 Strategy Standby mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
6 ENGINEER AND CONFIGURATION LEVEL MENUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
6.1 ACCESS TO THE ENGINEER AND CONFIGURATION MENUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
6.1.1 Engineer level menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
6.1.2 Configuration level menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
6.2 TOP LEVEL MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
6.3 ACCESS MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
6.3.1 Engineer level menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
6.3.2 Configuration level access menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
GOTO MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
PASS CODE EDITING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
6.4 ANALOGIP MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
6.4.1 Analogue input parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
6.5 ANALOGOP MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
6.5.1 Analogue output ‘Main’ submenu parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
6.5.2 Analogue output ‘Alm’ parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
6.6 COMMS MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
6.6.1 Communications User menu parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
6.6.2 COMMS REMOTE PANEL PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
6.7 CONTROL MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
6.7.1 Control Setup Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
6.7.2 Control Main Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

HA179769 Contents
Issue 15 March 20 Page iii
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT.)

Section Page
6.7.3 Control Limit parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
6.7.4 Control Diag parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
6.7.5 Control Alarm disable parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
6.7.6 Control Alarm detection parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
6.7.7 Control Alarm signalling parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
6.7.8 Control Alarm Latch parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
6.7.9 Control Alarm Acknowledgement parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
6.7.10 Control Alarm Stop parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
6.8 COUNTER MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
6.8.1 Counter configuration menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
6.8.2 Cascading counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
6.9 DIGITAL I/O MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
6.10 ENERGY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
6.10.1 Energy counter parameters ....................................... 99
6.10.2 Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
6.11 EVENT LOG MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
6.12 FAULT DETECTION MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
6.13 FIRING OUTPUT MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
6.14 INSTRUMENT MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
6.14.1 Instrument Display parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
6.14.2 Instrument Config parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
6.15 IP MONITOR MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
6.16 LGC2 (TWO INPUT LOGIC OPERATOR) MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
6.16.1 Lgc2 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
6.17 LGC8 (EIGHT-INPUT LOGIC OPERATOR) MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
6.18 MATH2 MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
6.19 MODULATOR MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
6.20 NETWORK MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
6.20.1 Meas submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
6.20.2 Network Setup Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
PARTIAL LOAD FAILURE CALCULATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
6.20.3 Network alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
NETWORK ALMDIS SUBMENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
NETWORK ALMDET SUBMENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
NETWORK ALMSIG SUBMENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
NETWORK ALMLAT SUBMENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
NETWORK ALMACK SUBMENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
NETWORK ALMSTOP SUBMENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
6.21 PLM (STATION AND NETWORK LM PARAMETERS) MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
6.21.1 Main . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
6.21.2 Predictive Load management ‘Station’ menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
6.21.3 Predictive Load Management ‘Network’ menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
6.21.4 Predictive Load Management ‘Alarm’ menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
6.22 PLMCHAN (LOAD MANAGEMENT OPTION INTERFACE) MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
6.23 LOAD TAP CHANGER (LTC) OPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
6.23.1 MainPrm parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
6.23.2 LTC Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Contents HA179769
Page iv Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT.)

Section Page
PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
6.23.3 LTC Application wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
6.24 RELAY MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
6.24.1 Relay parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
6.25 SETPROV MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
6.25.1 Setpoint provider parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
6.26 TIMER MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
6.26.1 Timer configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
6.26.2 Timer examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
6.27 TOTALISER MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
6.28 USER VALUE MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
7 USING ITOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
7.1 iTools CONNECTION .................................................. 140
7.1.1 Serial communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
7.1.2 Ethernet (Modbus TCP) communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
7.1.3 Direct Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
WIRING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
7.2 SCANNING FOR INSTRUMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
7.3 GRAPHICAL WIRING EDITOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
7.3.1 Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
7.3.2 Wiring editor operating details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
COMPONENT SELECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
BLOCK EXECUTION ORDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
FUNCTION BLOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
WIRES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
THICK WIRES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
COMMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
MONITORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
DOWNLOADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
COLOURS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
DIAGRAM CONTEXT MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
COMPOUNDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
TOOL TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
7.4 PARAMETER EXPLORER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
7.4.1 Parameter explorer detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
7.4.2 Explorer tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
7.5 FIELDBUS GATEWAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
EE CHECKSUM FAIL ERROR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
7.6 DEVICE PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
7.7 WATCH/RECIPE EDITOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
7.7.1 Creating a Watch List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
ADDING PARAMETERS TO THE WATCH LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
DATA SET CREATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
7.7.2 Watch Recipe toolbar icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
7.7.3 Watch/Recipe Context Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
7.8 USER PAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
7.8.1 User Page creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

HA179769 Contents
Issue 15 March 20 Page v
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT.)

Section Page
7.8.2 Style examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
7.8.3 User Pages Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
8 PARAMETER ADDRESSES (MODBUS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
8.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
8.2 PARAMETER TYPES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
8.3 PARAMETER SCALING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
8.3.1 Conditional scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
8.4 PARAMETER TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
9 PREDICTIVE LOAD MANAGEMENT OPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
9.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
9.1.1 Load Management layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
9.1.2 Power modulation and accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
9.2 LOAD SEQUENCING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
9.2.1 Incremental control type 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
9.2.2 Incremental control type 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
9.2.3 Rotating Incremental control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
9.2.4 Distributed control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
9.2.5 Incremental/Distributed control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
9.2.6 Rotating Incremental Distributed control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
9.3 LOAD SHARING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
9.3.1 Total power demand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
9.3.2 Sharing Efficiency Factor (F) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
9.3.3 Sharing algorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
9.4 LOAD SHEDDING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
9.4.1 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
9.4.2 Reduction of power demand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
SHEDDING ABILITY FACTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
9.4.3 Load shedding comparisons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
WITHOUT LOAD SHARING, SYNCHRONISED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
WITHOUT LOAD SHARING, SYNCHRONISED, REDUCTION FACTOR 50% . . 215
WITHOUT LOAD SHARING NOT SYNCHRONISED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
WITHOUT LOAD SHARING, NON-SYNCHRONISED, REDUCTION FACTOR 50% 216
WITH LOAD SHARING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
WITH LOAD SHARING, REDUCTION FACTOR = 50% . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
9.5 CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
9.5.1 iTools Graphical wiring ............................................ 218
STANDARD POWER CONTROL LOOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
LOAD MANAGEMENT CHANNELS (LMCHAN 1 TO LMCHAN 4) . . . . . . . . . . . 218
GLOBAL LOAD MANAGEMENT CONTROL (LOADMNG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
CALCULATION AND COMMUNICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
9.5.2 Predictive Load Management function block details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
LM TYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
PERIOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
ADDRESS .......................................................... 222
Ps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
SHEDFACTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
GROUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

Contents HA179769
Page vi Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT.)

Section Page
PZMAX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
STATUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
NUMCHAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
TOTALSTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
TOTALCHANNELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
PMAX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
PT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
PR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
EFFICIENCY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
MASTER ADDRESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
9.6 MASTER ELECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
9.6.1 Master Election triggers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
9.7 ALARM INDICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
PROVERPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
9.8 TROUBLE SHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
9.8.1 Wrong Station status .............................................. 227
DUPLICATE LM ADDRESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
STATION STATUS PERMANENTLY ‘PENDING’ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
STATION TYPE MISMATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
10 ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
10.1 SYSTEM ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
10.1.1 Missing mains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
10.1.2 Thyristor short circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
10.1.3 Thyristor open circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
10.1.4 Fuse blown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
10.1.5 Over temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
10.1.6 Network dips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
10.1.7 Mains frequency fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
10.1.8 Power board 24V fail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
10.2 PROCESS ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
10.2.1 Total Load Failure (TLF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
10.2.2 Analogue Output Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
10.2.3 Chop Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
10.2.4 Mains Voltage Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
10.2.5 Temperature pre-Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
10.2.6 Closed loop break . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
10.2.7 Partial Load Failure (PLF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
10.2.8 Partial Load Unbalance (PLU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
10.3 INDICATION ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
10.3.1 Process Value Transfer active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
10.3.2 Limitation active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
10.3.3 Load Over-Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
10.3.4 Over Load Shedding (Ps over Pr) alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
11 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
12 MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
12.1 SAFETY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
12.2 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

HA179769 Contents
Issue 15 March 20 Page vii
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT.)

Section Page
12.3 THYRISTOR PROTECTION FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
APPENDIX A REMOTE DISPLAY UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
A1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
A1.1 SAFETY AND EMC INFORMATION NOTES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
SYMBOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
A2 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
A3 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ............................................ 248
A3.1 PINOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
A3.2 WIRING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
SUPPLY VOLTAGE RANGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
ANALOGUE (MEASURING) INPUTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
OUTPUT WIRING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
A3.3 OVER TEMPERATURE APPLICATION WIRING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
A4 FIRST SWITCH ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
A5 OPERATING MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
A5.1 FRONT PANEL LAYOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
REM/MAN BEACONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
A5.2 LEVEL 1 OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
A5.3 LEVEL 2 OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
A5.4 LEVEL 3 AND CONF LEVEL OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
AUTO SCROLLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
A6 OTHER FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
A6.1 ALARMS AND ERRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
A6.2 RECIPES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
A6.3 EPOWER SETPROV CONFIGURATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
MULTIPLE SINGLE PHASE CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
A6.4 PV RETRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
A6.5 DIGITAL ALARM OPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
A6.6 HOME PAGE TIMEOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
APPENDIX B THREE PHASE FEEDBACK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
B1 TRANSFORMER REPRESENTATION AND LABELLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
B2 EXTERNAL FEEDBACK PHASING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
B2.1 CURRENT TRANSFORMER CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
B2.2 FEEDBACK EXAMPLES FOR TYPICAL THREE PHASE NETWORKS . . . . . . . . . . . 274
B2.2.1 Two phase control with Delta-Star transformer and 3S load . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
B2.2.2 Two phase control with Delta-Star transformer and 3D load . . . . . . . . . . . 275
B2.2.3 Three phase control with Delta-Star transformer and 3S load . . . . . . . . . . 275
B2.2.4 Three phase control with Delta-Star transformer and 3D load . . . . . . . . . . 276
B2.2.5 Three phase control with Star-Star transformer and 4S load . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
B2.2.6 Three phase control with Delta-Delta transformer and 3S load . . . . . . . . . 277
B2.2.7 Three phase control with 6D primary and 4S secondary with 4S load . . . 278
B2.2.8 Three phase control with 6D primary /secondary with three independent loads
278
Index. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

Contents HA179769
Page viii Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT.)

Section Page

This page is deliberately left blank

HA179769 Contents
Issue 15 March 20 Page ix
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

Contents HA179769
Page x Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

SAFETY NOTES
W DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRICAL SHOCK, EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH
1. If the product (EPower) is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection provided by
the product might be impaired.
2. Any adjustment, maintenance and repair of the opened apparatus under voltage, is forbidden for safety
reasons.
3. The product must be installed and maintained by suitably qualified personnel, authorized to work in an
industrial low voltage environment.
4. The product is not suitable for isolation applications, within the meaning of EN60947-1.
5. Do not exceed the device’s ratings.
6. The product is designed to be installed in a cabinet connected to the protective earth ground
CE: protective earth ground minimum size must be selected according to IEC 60364-5-54 table 54.2 or
IEC61439-1 table 5 or applicable national standards
U.L.: protective earth ground minimum size must be selected according to NEC table 250.122 or NFPA79
table 8.2.2.3 or applicable national standards
7. The product has been designed for pollution degree 2 according to IEC60947-1 definition: Normally, only
non-conductive pollution occurs. Occasionally, however, a temporary conductivity caused by condensation
may be expected.
Electrically conductive pollution must be excluded from the cabinet in which the product is mounted. To
ensure a suitable atmosphere in conditions of conductive pollution, fit adequate air conditioning/filtering/
cooling equipment to the air intake of the cabinet, e.g. fitting fan-cooled cabinets with a fan failure detec-
tion device or a thermal safety cut-out.
8. Before carrying out any wiring to the product, it must be ensured that all relevant power and control cables,
leads or harnesses are isolated from voltage sources.
9. Before any other connection is made, the protective earth ground terminal shall be connected to a protec-
tive conductor. The earth connection must be made by using a lug terminal of size as given in table 2.2.1..
The cables must be rated 90°C stranded copper only
CE: protective earth ground minimum size must be selected according to IEC 60364-5-54 table 54.2 or
IEC61439-1 table 5 or applicable national standards
U.L.: protective earth ground minimum size must be selected according to NEC table 250.122 or NFPA79
table 8.2.2.3 or applicable national standards. The earth connection must be made using a UL-listed lug
terminal.
10.The protective earth ground connections must be tightened according to the torque values defined in
table 2.2.1. Appropriate regular inspections must be performed. Periodicity depends on the local environ-
ment, but should not exceed 1 year.
11.Any interruption of the protective earth ground conductor inside or outside the product, or disconnection
of the protective earth ground terminal is likely to make the product dangerous under some conditions.
Intentional interruption is prohibited. Whenever it is likely that protection has been impaired, the unit shall
be made inoperative, and secured against accidental operation. The manufacturers nearest service centre
must be contacted for advice.
12.According to the CE and UL certifications, high speed fuses (supplemental fuses) are mandatory for com-
pliant installation and protection of the EPower controller against short circuit. See paragraph 12.3 for
details.
13.The EPower’s rated short-circuit conditional current is defined for co-ordination type 1. If opening of either
the branch circuit protective or the supplemental (high speed) fuses occurs, the product shall be examined
by suitably qualified personnel and replaced if damaged.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 11
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

W DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRICAL SHOCK, EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH
14.To achieve IP10 rating according to IEC60529, power connections must be made by using lug terminals of
size as given in Table 2.2.2.. U.L.: Power connections connection must be made using UL-listed lug termi-
nals.
15.The mains supply fuse within the Driver Module is not replaceable. If it is suspected that the fuse is faulty,
the manufacturer’s local service centre should be contacted for advice.
16.The I/O Input & Output, the Communications ports are SELV circuit. They must be connected to SELV or
PELV circuit.
17. The relays outputs are compliant to the SELV requirements; they can be connected to SELV, PELV circuit or
to voltage up to 230V (maximum value of rated operational voltage to earth:300V)
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

HA179769
Page 12 Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

W DANGER
HAZARD OF FIRE
18.This product does not contain any branch-circuit protection or internal safety overload protection. The
installer must add branch-circuit protection upstream of the unit, and provide external or remote safety
overload protection to the end installation. Branch circuit shall be rated according to maximum current in
each phase.
CE: branch-circuit protection must be selected according to IEC 60364-4-43 or applicable local regula-
tions.
UL: branch-circuit protection must be selected according to NEC article 210.20, it is necessary for compli-
ance with National Electric Code(NEC) requirements.
19.Power connections: The cables must be rated 90°C stranded copper only, the cross section must be
selected according to the branch circuit protection rating.
CE: Wire conductor cross sections must comply with IEC 60364-5-52 or applicable national standards
U.L.: Wire conductor cross sections must comply with NEC Table 310.15(B)(16) (formerly Table 310.16) tak-
ing account of table 310.15(B)(2) for the ampacity correction factors or NFPA79 Table 12.5.1 taking account
of Table 12.5.5(a) for the ampacity correction factors or applicable national standards.
20.Power terminals must be tightened according to the torque values defined in Table 2.2.2.. Appropriate reg-
ular inspections must be performed. Periodicity depends on the local environment, but should not exceed
1 year.
21.The tightening torques for supplemental (high speed) fuses should be checked according to value defined
in table 12.3. Ceramic fuse bodies should be checked for visible cracks. Appropriate regular inspections
must be performed. Periodicity depends on the local environment, but should not exceed 1 year.
22.Neutral cross-sectional area when neutral is connected to the star point of the load (4S load type):
Without current limit activated, maximum neutral current is not upper than maximum current in each
phase. The cross-sectional area of the neutral conductor, shall be sized to carry the maximum phase cur-
rent.
With current limit activated, maximum neutral current may reach √3 x current limit setting. The cross-sec-
tional area of the neutral conductor shall be sized to carry up to √3 x current limit setting.
CE: Wire conductor cross sections must comply with IEC 60364-5-52 or applicable national standards
U.L.: Wire conductor cross sections must comply with NEC Table 310.15(B)(16) (formerly Table 310.16) tak-
ing account of table 310.15(B)(2) for the ampacity correction factors or NFPA79 Table 12.5.1 taking account
of Table 12.5.5(a) for the ampacity correction factors or applicable national standards.
23.The cables used to connect the remote voltage sensing inputs (if fitted) and the cable used to connect the
reference input in 4S, 6D and two-leg configurations must be correctly protected by branch-circuit protec-
tion. It is the responsibility of the user to add branch-circuit protection. Such branch-circuit must comply
with applicable local regulations.
UL: The above-mentioned branch-circuit protection is necessary for compliance with National Electric
Code (NEC) requirements.
24.The cables used to connect the EPower auxiliary/fans supply must be correctly protected by 3A branch-cir-
cuit protection. (3A rating selected to protect AWG18 fan supply wiring). It is the responsibility of the
installer to add branch-circuit protection. Such branch-circuit protection must comply with applicable local
regulations.
UL: The Auxiliary (Fan) supply is Installation category II. Supply to Auxiliary (Fan) supply shall be provided
by isolated transformer secondary grounded protected by a Listed 3A branch circuit fuse. The above-men-
tioned branch-circuit protection is necessary for compliance with National Electric Code (NEC) require-
ments.
25.EPower alarms protect thyristors and loads against abnormal operation, and provide the user with valuable
information regarding the type of fault. Under no circumstances must these alarms be regarded as a
replacement for proper personnel protection. It is strongly recommended that the installing authority
include independent, system-safety mechanisms to protect both personnel and equipment against injury
or damage, and that such safety mechanisms be regularly inspected and maintained. Consult the EPower
supplier for advice.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 13
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

Reasonable use and responsibility

The information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice. While every effort has been
made to ensure the accuracy of the information, your supplier shall not be held liable for errors contained
herein.
EPower is an “AC semiconductor controllers for non-motor loads” designed according to IEC60947-4-3 &
UL60947-4-1, it meets the requirements of the Low voltage and EMC European Directives which covers
safety and EMC aspects
Use in other applications, or failure to observe the installation instructions of this manual may impair safety
or EMC.
The safety and EMC of any system incorporating this product is the responsibility of the assembler/installer
of the system.
Failure to use approved software/hardware with our hardware products may result in injury, harm, or
improper operating results
Eurotherm shall not be held responsible for any damage, injury, losses or expenses caused by inappropriate
use of the product (EPower), or failure to comply with these instructions.

HA179769
Page 14 Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

W WARNING
HAZARD OF FIRE
1. EPower has been designed for a maximum temperature of 40°C at 1000m altitude at nominal current (35°C
at 2000m altitude at nominal current), refer to derating curve for upper temperature. At commissioning
ensure that the ambient temperature inside the cabinet does not exceed the limit under maximum load
condition.
2. The product is designed to be mounted vertically. There must be no obstructions (above or below) which
could reduce or hamper airflow. If more than one instance of the product is located in the same cabinet,
they must be mounted in such a way that air from one unit is not drawn into another.
3. To reach the thermal performance the gap between two EPower must be at minimum 10mm.
4. The Driver Module power supply can work from any supply voltage between 85V ac and 265V ac. The fans
(if fitted) on the power modules are specified for use at 115V ac or 230V ac, as defined at time of order. It
must therefore be ensured that the fan voltage matches the supply voltage, or the fan will either fail within
a short period, or it will be ineffective at cooling.
5. To maintain maximum cooling efficiency, the heat-sink and fans must be cleaned regularly and fan opera-
tion need to be checked. Periodicity depends on the local environment, but should not exceed 1 year.
6. Product current rating must be upper or equal to the maximum current of the load. The maximum current
of the load shall be calculated taking account of load resistive tolerance (tolerance and variation due to
temperature) and voltage tolerance. Failure to follow these instructions may result in Branch circuit protec-
tion fuses, high-speed fuses (supplemental fuses) and product overload.
7. Current limit function by phase angle reduction may be selected to limit the inrush current of the load and
reduce the current rating of the product.
With Current limit function by phase angle reduction the product rating must be greater than or equal to
the nominal current of the load and to Current limit function by phase angle reduction setting.
8. With External current feedback, Current limit function by phase angle reduction will limit the inrush current
in the load which may not be the current in the product (ie resistive load at the secondary side of a trans-
former). Ensure that the current in the product does not exceed the product current rating with the setting
of Current limit function by phase angle reduction.
9. The current limit function by phase angle reduction is not available with Intelligent Half Cycle (IHC), The
product rating shall be selected to cope with inrush current according to warning 6. Failure to follow these
instructions may results in Branch circuit protection fuses, high-speed fuses (supplemental fuses) and prod-
uct overload.
10.Duty cycle current limiting features (in burst mode), does not limit the peak current value. The product rat-
ing shall be selected to cope with the peak current value according to warning 6. Failure to follow these
instructions may results in Branch circuit protection fuses, high-speed fuses (supplemental fuses) and prod-
uct overload.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury or equipment damage.

W WARNING
HAZARD OF ELECTRICAL SHOCK, EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH
11.The product shall have one of the following as a disconnecting device, fitted within easy reach of the oper-
ator, and labelled as the disconnecting device:
A switch or circuit breaker which complies with the requirements of IEC60947-1 and IEC60947-3.
A separable coupler which can be disconnected without the use of a tool.
12.In 4S, 6D and two-leg configurations do not use the reference terminal to replicate voltage signals (in a
‘daisy chain’), as the PCB track between the two poles is not designed to withstand short-circuit.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury or equipment damage.

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 15
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

W WARNING
UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
13.External feedback connections must be correctly phased (figure 2.2.2b) or the unit might switch to full con-
duction at start-up.
14.With external feedback: The current transformer should be chosen such that its full-scale output is 5 amps
15.Signal and power voltage wiring must be kept separate from one another. Where this is impractical, all
wires must be rated to the power voltage & shielded cables are recommended for signal wiring.
16.This product has been designed for environment A (Industrial). Use of this product in environment B
(domestic, commercial and light industrial) may cause unwanted electromagnetic disturbances in which
cases the installer may be required to take adequate mitigation measures.
17.To ensure that EPower complies with Electromagnetic Compatibility requirements, ensure that the panel to
which it is attached is correctly grounded. The ground connection, designed to ensure ground continuity,
is not in any way a substitute for the protective earth ground connection.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury or equipment damage.

W CAUTION
HAZARD OF BURNS
1. Under some circumstances, the EPack heatsink temperature may rise by more than 50°C and it can take up
to 15 minutes to cool after the product is shut down.
Ensure that any contact with hot surfaces is avoided.
Do not allow flammable or heat-sensitive parts in the immediate vicinity of hot surfaces
Give consideration to additional warnings and barriers to prevent injury.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.

W CAUTION
UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
2. In burst mode and primary of transformer load, the star-star configuration is not recommended as it may
become unstable, high speed fuse may blow.
3. Fans have limited lifetime which depends on environment. As preventive maintenance their periodic
replacement need to be considered.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.

NOTICE
EQUIPMENT PROTECTION
1. For software versions prior to version 3 only. The EEPROM, used to retain configuration parameters whilst
power is off, has a lifetime of at least 100,000 writes. If the Fieldbus Gateway is configured to include such
configuration parameters (see list below), then the lifetime of the EEPROM may be reduced. In this case an
‘EE Checksum Fail Error’ message appears at power up, and the Driver Module will fail to start, and will have
to be replaced.
2. In order to maintain protection against damage due to electrostatic discharge, any ribbon cable which is
chafed, scratched or otherwise damaged must be replaced. Periodicity depends on the local environment,
but should not exceed 1 year.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

HA179769
Page 16 Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

SELV
Safety Extra Low Voltage. This is defined (in EN60947-1) as an electrical circuit in which the voltage cannot
exceed ‘ELV’ under normal conditions or under single fault conditions, including earth faults in other circuits.
The definition of ELV is complex as it depends on environment, signal frequency etc. See IEC 61140 for
further details.

SYMBOLS USED ON THE INSTRUMENT LABELLING

One or more of the symbols below may appear as a part of the instrument labelling.

Protective conductor terminal Risk of electric shock

Precautions against static electrical discharge

AC supply only
must be taken when handling this unit.

Underwriters laboratories listed

mark, for Canada and the U.S. ! Refer to the manual for instructions

Do not touch heatsink Hot Surface CE Mark. Indicates compliance with the
appropriate European Directives and Standards

EAC (EurAsian Conformity) customs Regulatory Compliance Mark (RCM) to

union mark of conformity Australian Communication and Media Authority

40 Complies with the 40 year Environment Friendly Usage Period

Hazardous Substances
This product conforms to European Restriction of Hazardous Substances (RoHS) (using exemptions) and
Registration, Evaluation, Authorisation and Restriction of Chemicals (REACH) Legislation.

RoHS Exemptions used in this product involve the use of lead. China RoHS legislation does not include
exemptions and so lead is declared as present in the China RoHS Declaration.

Californian law requires the following notice:

WWARNING: This product can expose you to chemicals including lead and lead compounds which are
known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. For more
information go to: http://www.P65Warnings.ca.gov.

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 17
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

USER GUIDE

1 INTRODUCTION
This document describes the installation, operation and configuration of an EPower ‘station’ (Driver Module
plus one or more Power Modules). The Driver Module comes in one version, but the Power Modules are
available in a number of different power ratings, which are identical in operation and configuration, but
which differ in physical size according to the number of phases being controlled and the maximum current
being supplied. All but the 50 Amp and 100 Amp unit come with cooling fans attached.
The Driver Module includes the following analogue and digital inputs and outputs, fitted as standard:
10V supply
Two analogue inputs
One analogue output
Two digital Inputs/Outputs.
One change-over relay under software control, configurable by the user.
Also fitted are a Watchdog relay, a configuration port and an isolated EIA485 port for attaching an optional
Remote Display.
Three further (optional) I/O modules may be fitted, similar to the standard module but with the addition of
an output change-over relay. Other options provide for external voltage and current feedback and for
predictive load management.
Section two of this manual gives connector locations and pinouts.
The operator interface consists of a display comprising four lines of 10-characters (where each character is
formed using a 5 x 7 LCD dot matrix) and four push buttons for navigation and data selection.

1.1 UNPACKING THE UNITS

The units are despatched in a special pack, designed to give adequate protection during transit. If any of the
outer boxes show signs of damage, open them immediately and examine the instrument. If there is evidence
of damage, do not operate the instrument and contact your local representative for instructions.
After the instrument has been removed from its packing, examine the packing to ensure that all accessories
and documentation have been removed.
Store the packing for future transport requirements. Or please dispose of your packaging in a responsible
and environmentally conscious manner. Where possible, reuse or recycle materials. Please ensure all
disposal and recycling is undertaken in compliance with your local law and regulations.

HA179769
Page 18 Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

2 INSTALLATION
DANGER
The product is designed to be installed in a cabinet connected to the protective earth ground
CE: protective earth ground minimum size must be selected according to IEC 60364-5-54 table 54.2
or IEC61439-1 table 5 or applicable national standards
U.L.: protective earth ground minimum size must be selected according to NEC table 250.122 or
NFPA79 table 8.2.2.3 or applicable national standards.

DANGER
The product is not suitable for isolation applications, within the meaning of EN60947-1.

WARNINGS
1. EPower has been designed for a maximum temperature of 40°C at 1000m altitude at nominal
current (35°C at 2000m altitude at nominal current), refer to derating curve for upper
temperature. At commissioning ensure that the ambient temperature inside the cabinet does not
exceed the limit under maximum load condition.
2. The product is designed to be mounted vertically. There must be no obstructions (above or
below) which could reduce or hamper airflow. If more than one instance of the product is located
in the same cabinet, they must be mounted in such a way that air from one unit is not drawn into
another.
3. To reach the thermal performance the gap between two EPower units must be at minimum
10mm.

2.1 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION

2.1.1 Fixing details
Units are designed to operate at an operating temperature not exceeding 40°C (unless the modules are de-
rated - see specification). Units must be installed in a fan-cooled cabinet (with fan failure detection or thermal
safety cutout). Condensation and conductive pollution should be excluded to IEC 60664-1 pollution degree
2. The cabinet must be closed and connected to the protective earth according to IEC 60634 or applicable
national standard.
Units must be mounted with the heat sink vertical with no obstructions above or below which impede the
airflow. Where more than one set of modules is enclosed in the same cabinet, they must be mounted such
that air from one unit is not drawn in by another mounted above it. An air gap of at least 5 cm should be
maintained between adjacent sets of modules.
The units are designed for fitting to the front face of a mounting panel using the fixings supplied. The
thyristor power modules are heavy, so a Health and Safety risk assessment should be carried out before
personnel attempt to lift the units. It should also be ensured, prior to fitting, that the mechanical strength of
the panel is sufficient for the mechanical load being applied. Table 2.1.1 gives the weights of the various
units.
GENERAL
Figure 2.1.1a, below, shows details of a generalised mechanical assembly for the top of the units. Assembly
details for the bottom brackets is similar, except that there is no protective earth ground fixing. The power
module shown is a 400 Amp unit for which the module is fixed to the support brackets using holes A and B.
Lower current power modules use only one screw (C) to secure the module to the support bracket.

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 19
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

Weight (including 2 kg (4.4 lb) for driver module) lb oz

Current 1 phase 2 phases 3 phases 4 phases 0.1 1.6
kg lb kg lb kg lb kg lb 0.2 3.2
50/100 A 6.5 14.3 11.0 24.3 15.5 34.2 20.0 44.1 0.3 4.8
Weights 0.4 6.4
160 A 6.9 15.2 11.8 26.0 16.7 36.8 21.6 47.6
± 50gm (2 oz) 0.5 8.0
250 A 7.8 17.2 13.6 30.0 19.4 42.8 25.2 55.6 0.6 9.6
400 A 11.8 26.0 21.6 47.6 31.4 69.2 41.2 90.8 0.7 11.2
500 A 14.0 30.9 26.0 57.3 38.0 83.8 50.0 110.2 0.8 12.8
630 A 14.5 32.0 27.0 59.5 39.5 87.1 52.0 114.6 0.9 14.4

Table 2.1.1 Unit Weights

Single-phase power module

mounting shown.
250A
Multi-phase mountings similar
400A

Protective
Earth Ground

B A
See table 2.2.1 for
Protective Earth 500/630A Driver
Ground details module bracket
Power unit

Driver module

Figure 2.1.1a Bracket fixing details

HA179769
Page 20 Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

2.1.1 FIXING DETAILS (Cont.)

Figures 2.1.1a to 2.1.1f show fixing centres and other mechanical details for the various modules.

Cable entry
Recommended fixing bolt size = M6 21.5 (0.85)

Protective Earth Ground (M6)

Recommended tightening Insert uninsulated 5mm Insert uninsulated 5mm Insert uninsulated 5mm
(1/4 in) screwdriver here, (1/4 in) screwdriver here, (1/4 in) screwdriver here,
torque = 5 Nm (3.7 ft lb)
and pull down to release and pull down to release and pull down to release
door door door
317 mm (12.480 in)
330 mm (12.99 in)

Front view
Communications

Dimensions in millimetres (inches)

Door
(open)
252.2 mm (9.93 in)

194.4 mm (7.65 in)

Cable exit/entry

View on underside

Overall Widths (mm) Note: Units are shown with individual mounting
No of phases 1 2 3 4 brackets. Multi-phase units come supplied with
Door closed 149.5 234.5 319.5 404.5 two, three or four phase brackets as appropriate.
Door open 211.0 296.0 381.0 466.0 See table below for details.

Overall Widths (inches) Upper bracket Lower bracket

No of phases 1 2 3 4 2-phase Use A and B Use E and F
Door closed 5.89 9.23 12.58 15.93 3-phase Use A, B and C Use E and G
Door open 8.31 11.65 15.00 18.35 4-phase Use A, B, C and D Use E, F, G and H

Figure 2.1.1b Fixing details (50 Amp and 100 Amp units)

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 21
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

2.1.1 FIXING DETAILS (Cont.)

CL
Cable entry
Recommended fixing bolt size = M6
21.5 (0.85)
42.0
6.5 (0.26) 61.4 (2.42) 107.5 (4.232) 85.0 (3.346) 85.0 (3.346) 85.0 (3.346) (1.65)

A B C D

Protective Earth Ground (M6)

Insert 5mm screw-
Recommended tightening
driver here, and pull
torque
Insert uninsulated 5mm Insert uninsulated 5mm Insert uninsulated 5mm
(1/4 in) screwdriver here, (1/4 in) screwdriver here, (1/4 in) screwdriver here,
= 5 Nm down (3.7 ft lb)
and pull down to release and pull down to release and pull down to release
to release door door door door
361 mm (14.21 in)

348 mm (13.70 in)

Front view
Communications

Dimensions in millimetres (inches)

Door
(open)

CL

E F G H
252.2 mm (9.93 in)

View on underside
194.4 mm (7.65 in)
Cable exit/entry

N
L

N
L
E

Overall Widths (mm) Note: Units are shown with individual

No of phases 1 2 3 4 mounting brackets. Multi-phase units come
Door closed 149.5 234.5 319.5 404.5 supplied with two, three or four phase
brackets as appropriate. See table below for
Door open 211.0 296.0 381.0 466.0
details.

Overall Widths (inches) Upper bracket Lower bracket

No of phases 1 2 3 4 2-phase Use A and B Use E and F
Door closed 5.89 9.23 12.58 15.93 3-phase Use A, B and C Use E, F and G
Door open 8.31 11.65 15.00 18.35 4-phase Use A, B, C and D Use E, F, G and H

Figure 2.1.1c Fixing details (160 Amp unit)

HA179769
Page 22 Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

2.1.1 FIXING DETAILS (Cont.)

Cable entry
Recommended fixing bolt size = M6
21.5 (0.85)
42.0
6.5 (0.26) 61.4 (2.42) 107.5 (4.232) 85.0 (3.346) 85.0 (3.346) 85.0 (3.346) (1.65)

A B C D

Insert uninsulated 5mm Insert uninsulated 5mm Insert uninsulated 5mm

Protective Earth Ground(1/4(M8)
in) screwdriver here, (1/4 in) screwdriver here, (1/4 in) screwdriver here,
Recommended tighteningandtorque
pull down to release
door
and pull down to release
door
and pull down to release
door
PWR LOC = 12.5 Nm (9.2 ft lb)
ALM

Front view
388 mm (15.276 in)
401 mm (15.79 in)

Communications

Dimensions in millimetres (inches)

Door
(open)

CL

E F G H
252.2 mm (9.93 in)

View on underside
194.4 mm (7.65 in)
Cable exit/entry

N
L

N
L
E

Overall Widths (mm) Note: Units are shown with individual mounting
No of phases 1 2 3 4 brackets. Multi-phase units come supplied with
Door closed 149.5 234.5 319.5 404.5 two, three or four phase brackets as
Door open 211.0 296.0 381.0 466.0 appropriate. See table below for details.

Overall Widths (inches) Upper bracket Lower bracket

No of phases 1 2 3 4 2-phase Use A and B Use E and F
Door closed 5.89 9.23 12.58 15.93 3-phase Use A, B and C Use E, F and G
Door open 8.31 11.65 15.00 18.35 4-phase Use A, B, C and D Use E, F, G and H

Figure 2.1.1d Fixing details (250 Amp unit)

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 23
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

2.1.1 DIMENSIONAL DETAILS (Cont.)

Recommended fixing bolt size = M8 Line entry 25 (0.98)
127.5mm (5.02in) 125mm (4.921in) 125mm (4.921in) 125mm (4.921in) 62 (2.44)

A B C D
8.5 (0.33)

Protective Earth Ground (M10)

Recommended tightening
torque = 15 Nm (11.1 ft lb)
PWR LOC ALM
474.5 mm (18.681 in)
489.5 mm (19.28 in)

Front view
Communicatio

Door Dimensions in millimetres (inches)

(open)

E F G H
Load entry 10mm (0.39in)
252.2 mm (9.93 in)

208.4 mm (8.20 in)

Cable exit/entry

View on underside
N
L

N
L
E

Overall Widths (mm) Note: Units are shown with individual mounting
No of phases 1 2 3 4 brackets. Multi-phase units come supplied with
Door closed 189.5 314.5 439.5 564.5 two, three or four phase brackets as
Door open 251.0 376.0 501.0 626.0 appropriate. See table below for details.

Overall Widths (inches) Upper bracket Lower bracket

No of phases 1 2 3 4 2-phase Use A and B Use E and F
Door closed 7.46 12.38 17.30 22.22 3-phase Use A, B and C Use E, F and G
Door open 9.88 14.80 19.72 24.65 4-phase Use A, B, C and D Use E, F, G and H

Figure 2.1.1e Fixing details (400 Amp unit)

HA179769
Page 24 Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

2.1.1 DIMENSIONAL DETAILS (Cont.)

68 (2.68)
Recommended fixing bolt size = M8 Line cable entry
30
127.5mm (5.02in) 125mm (4.921in) 125mm (4.921in) 125mm (4.921in) 62 (2.44) (1.18)

A B C D

8.5 (0.33)

Protective Earth Ground (M12)

Recommended tightening
torque = 25 Nm (18.4 ft lb)
PWR LOC ALM
474.5 mm (18.681 in)
489.5 mm (19.27 in)

Communicatio
Communications

Front view

Door Dimensions in millimetres (inches)

(open)

E F G H
63 (2.48)
Load cable entry 25
(0.98)
296 mm (11.65 in)

212 mm (8.35 in)

Cable exit/entry

View on underside
N
L

N
L
E

Overall Widths (mm) Note: Units are shown with individual

No of phases 1 2 3 4 mounting brackets. Multi-phase units come
Door closed 189.5 314.5 439.5 564.5 supplied with two, three or four phase brackets
Door open 251.0 376.0 501.0 626.0 as appropriate. See table below for details.

Overall Widths (inches) Upper bracket Lower bracket

No of phases 1 2 3 4 2-phase Use A and B Use E and F
Door closed 7.46 12.38 17.30 22.22 3-phase Use A, B and C Use E, F and G
Door open 9.88 14.80 19.72 24.65 4-phase Use A, B, C and D Use E, F, G and H

Figure 2.1.1f Fixing details (500 Amp/630A units)

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 25
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

2.2 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION

DANGER
1. If the product (EPower) is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection
provided by the product might be impaired.
2. Any adjustment, maintenance and repair of the opened apparatus under voltage, is forbidden
for safety reasons.
3. The product must be installed and maintained by suitably qualified personnel, authorized to
work in an industrial low voltage environment.
4. The product is designed to be installed in a cabinet connected to the protective earth ground
CE: protective earth ground minimum size must be selected according to IEC 60364-5-54 table
54.2 or IEC61439-1 table 5 or applicable national standards
U.L.: protective earth ground minimum size must be selected according to NEC table 250.122 or
NFPA79 table 8.2.2.3 or applicable national standards
5. The product has been designed for pollution degree 2 according to IEC60947-1 definition:
Normally, only non-conductive pollution occurs. Occasionally, however, a temporary conductivity
caused by condensation may be expected.
Electrically conductive pollution must be excluded from the cabinet in which the product is
mounted. To ensure a suitable atmosphere in conditions of conductive pollution, fit adequate air
conditioning/filtering/cooling equipment to the air intake of the cabinet, e.g. fitting fan-cooled
cabinets with a fan failure detection device or a thermal safety cut-out.
6. Before carrying out any wiring to the product, it must be ensured that all relevant power and
control cables, leads or harnesses are isolated from voltage sources.

WARNING
1. The product shall have one of the following as a disconnecting device, fitted within easy reach of
the operator, and labelled as the disconnecting device:
A switch or circuit breaker which complies with the requirements of IEC60947-1 and IEC60947-3.
A separable coupler which can be disconnected without the use of a tool.

WARNING
1. Signal and power voltage wiring must be kept separate from one another. Where this is
impractical, all wires must be rated to the power voltage & shielded cables are recommended for
signal wiring.
2. This product has been designed for environment A (Industrial). Use of this product in
environment B (domestic, commercial and light industrial) may cause unwanted electromagnetic
disturbances in which cases the installer may be required to take adequate mitigation measures.
3. To ensure that EPower complies with Electromagnetic Compatibility requirements, ensure that
the panel to which it is attached is correctly grounded. The ground connection, designed to
ensure ground continuity, is not in any way a substitute for the protective earth ground
connection.

2.2.1 Driver Module

DANGER
The mains supply fuse within the Driver Module is not replaceable. If it is suspected that the fuse is
faulty, the manufacturer’s local service centre should be contacted for advice.

HA179769
Page 26 Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

SUPPLY VOLTAGE
The Line and neutral supply voltage connections are terminated using a 2-way connector (SK8), located on
the underside of the unit, as shown in figure 2.2.1a, below. It is recommended that a 3 Amp slow-blow fuse
be incorporated in order to protect the supply voltage wiring.
The Auxiliary (Fan) supply is Installation category II. U.L.: supply to Auxiliary (Fan) supply shall be provided
by isolated transformer secondary grounded protected by a Listed 20A branch circuit fuse.

FAN SUPPLIES

DANGER
The cables used to connect the EPower auxiliary/fans supply must be correctly protected by 3A
branch-circuit protection. (3A rating selected to protect AWG18 fan supply wiring). It is the
responsibility of the installer to add branch-circuit protection. Such branch-circuit protection must
comply with applicable local regulations.
UL: The Auxiliary (Fan) supply is Installation category II. Supply to Auxiliary (Fan) supply shall be
provided by isolated transformer secondary grounded protected by a Listed 3A branch circuit fuse.
The above-mentioned branch-circuit protection is necessary for compliance with National Electric
Code (NEC) requirements.

WARNING
The Driver Module power supply can work from any supply voltage between 85V ac and 265V ac.
The fans (if fitted) on the power modules are specified for use at 115V ac or 230V ac, as defined at
time of order. It must therefore be ensured that the fan voltage matches the supply voltage, or the
fan will either fail within a short period, or it will be ineffective at cooling.

The three way connector (SK9) provides supply voltage for cooling fans which are fitted to all power modules
except 50A and 100A modules. Suitable looms (harnesses) for the fans are supplied with the units. SK9 is
not used for 50/100A modules, because there are no cooling fans.

Supply output socket

for power module fan(s)
View on underside

Supply in

Driver module Power module Power module Power module

Protective
Earth Ground

SK1 Internal Internal connections

(part of) connection diagrammatic only

Enable
interlock Internal To PSU
connection

Integral with fan Integral with fan Integral with fan

Fuse (3A)
SK9 not used
with 50/100A Fan cassette Fan cassette Fan cassette
Supply power modules
Slow blow
voltage
Fan looms supplied with the modules

Figure 2.2.1a Driver module wiring

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 27
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

2.2.1 Driver Module (Cont.)

ENABLE INPUT
In order for the power module thyristors to operate, the Enable input to the driver module must be valid, In
the default configuration, this is achieved by shorting pins 8 and 10 of SK1 (Digital input 1 - figure 2.2.1b),
or by using a User Value block to apply a logic high to the enable input to the relevant firing block in iTools.
If required, DI1 can be reconfigured as a voltage input, and in this case it requires a high signal (figure 2.2.1a)
to be applied to SK1 pin8 with the relevant zero voltage connected to pin 10.

PROTECTIVE EARTH GROUND

DANGER
1. Before any other connection is made, the protective earth ground terminal shall be connected to
a protective conductor. The protective earth ground connection must be made by using a lug
terminal of size as given in table 2.2.1. The cables must be rated 90°C stranded copper only
CE: protective earth ground minimum size must be selected according to IEC 60364-5-54 table
54.2 or IEC61439-1 table 5 or applicable national standards
U.L.: protective earth ground minimum size must be selected according to NEC table 250.122 or
NFPA79 table 8.2.2.3 or applicable national standards. The protective earth ground connection
must be made using a UL-listed lug terminal.
2. The protective earth ground connections must be tightened according to the torque values
defined in table Protective Earth Ground Details. Appropriate regular inspections must be
performed. Periodicity depends on the local environment, but should not exceed 1 year.
3. Any interruption of the protective earth ground conductor inside or outside the product, or
disconnection of the protective earth ground terminal is likely to make the product dangerous
under some conditions. Intentional interruption is prohibited. Whenever it is likely that protection
has been impaired, the unit shall be made inoperative, and secured against accidental operation.
The manufacturers nearest service centre must be contacted for advice.

The protective earth ground connection for the driver/power module set is made to the mounting bracket
above the unit as shown in figures 2.1.1a to 2.1.1f.
The connection must be made using the correct size of terminal and correct gauge of cable, as given in table
2.2.1 below.
The protective earth ground connection should be tightened at the torque defined in table 2.2.1. It is
recommended to perform regular inspection of the tightening
EPower Protective Earth Ground
rating Terminal
(Amps) Size Tightening torque
50A M6 5 Nm (3.7 ft lb.)
100A M6 5 Nm (3.7 ft lb.)
160A M6 5 Nm (3.7 ft lb)
250A M8 12.5 Nm (9.2 ft lb)
400A M10 15 Nm (11.1ft lb)
500A M12 25 Nm (18.4 ft lb)
630A M12 25 Nm (18.4 ft lb)
Table 2.2.1 Protective Earth Ground details

HA179769
Page 28 Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

SIGNAL WIRING
Figure 2.2.1b shows the location of the various connectors; pinouts and typical wiring for SK1 (fitted as
standard) are shown in figure 2.2.1a. Wiring for optional I/O units (SK 3 to SK5) is similar, except that they
contain a relay in addition to the analog and digital circuits, and the digital circuits are inputs only.

Front

Configuration
PWR LOC ALM
port (EIA232)

View on
underside
Load
management
Communications
14 11 12 Relay 1

Com
NO

NC
04 01 02
Watchdog
relay

Remote display
(isolated
EIA485)

Figure 2.2.1b Connector locations

Note: It is physically possible to insert an RJ11 plug into an RJ45 socket. Care must therefore be
taken to ensure that the Configuration port cable is not mistakenly plugged into an RJ45
communications connector (if fitted) or the Remote display connector.

Connector Terminal Capacity Torque

0.5 mm² to 1.5mm² 0.4 Nm
SK1 to SK5
22 AWG to 14 AWG 3.5 lb.in
0.25 mm² to 2.5mm² 0.55 Nm
SK6 to SK8
24 AWG to 12 AWG 5 lb.in
Table 2.2.1 I/O terminals connections details

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 29
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

2.2.1 Driver Module (Cont.)

Predictive Load
SK1 Standard I/O SK2 Management Relevant manual sections
1 1 +10 Volts out 1 1 Terminator A Analogue I/P Section 6.4
2 Analogue i/p 1 + 2 Low Analogue O/P Section 6.5
3 Analogue i/p 1 3 Shield Digital I/O Section 6.9
4 Analogue i/p 2 + 4 High Relays Section 6.21
5 Analogue i/p 2 - 5 5 Terminator B Load Management Section 9
6 Analogue o/p 1 +
7 Analogue o/p 1 0V
8 Digital i/o 1 +
9 Digital i/o 2 + Mating Polarising key
10 10 Digital i/o 0V connector (Position 3)
(section)

= Polarising pin
SK3 Optional I/O 1 SK4 Optional I/O 2 SK5 Optional I/O 3
1 1 +10 Volts out 1 1 +10 Volts out 1 1 +10 Volts out
2 Analogue i/p 3 + 2 Analogue i/p 4 + 2 Analogue i/p 5 +
3 Analogue i/p 3 - 3 Analogue i/p 4 - 3 Analogue i/p 5 -
4 Analogue o/p 2 + 4 Analogue o/p 3 + 4 Analogue o/p 4 +
5 Analogue o/p 2 0V 5 Analogue o/p 3 0V 5 Analogue o/p 4 0V
6 Digital input 3 + 6 Digital input 5 + 6 Digital input 7 +
7 Digital input 4 + 7 Digital input 6 + 7 Digital input 8 +
8 Digital 0V 8 Digital 0V 8 Digital 0V
9 Not used 9 Not used 9 Not used
10 Relay 2 No (24) 10 Relay 3 No (34) 10 Relay 4 No (44)
11 Relay 2 Com (21) 11 Relay 3 Com (31) 11 Relay 4 Com (41)
12 12 Relay 2 NC (22) 12 12 Relay 3 NC (32) 12 12 Relay 4 NC (42)
Polarising pins: Polarising pins: Polarising pins:
Fixed connector: pins 1 and 2; Fixed connector: pins 2 and 3; Fixed connector: pins 1 and 3;
Mating connector: pin 3 Mating connector: pin 1 Mating connector: pin 2

SK1 SK1 +10V output

potentiometric

1 +10V output 1
+ Analogue +
Analogue 2 2
inputs

- V input input 1 -
input 1 3 3
+ +
Analogue 4 mA input Analogue 4
5 - 5 -
input 2 (240R internal shunt) input 2
6 + 6
Analogue Analogue
0V mA or Voltage output
output 1 7 output 1 7 -30V < Vin < +2V = Low
I/ O 1 I/ O 1 +4V < Vin < 30V = High
8 8 +2 < Vin < 4V = not defined
Digital I/O I/ O 2 Digital I/O I/ O 2
9 9 High (4 to 30 V)
(Contact 0V (logic input) 0V
10 10 Low (-30V to +2 V)
I/O 2 shown; I/O 1 similar

I/ O 1
8
Digital I/O 9 I/ O 2
(output) 0V 15V 10mA current source
10
I/O 2 shown; I/O 1 similar
SK1

Notes:
1. Analogue input type selected during configuration as one of: 0 to 5V, 0 to 10V, 1 to 5V, 2 to 10V, 0 to 20mA, 4 to 20
mA
2. Analogue output type selected during configuration as one of : 0 to 5V, 0 to 10V, 0 to 20mA, 4 to 20mA.
Resolution 12 bits; accuracy ±1% scale.
3. Each analogue input -ve terminal is individually connected to 0V via a 150 Ohm resistor.

Figure 2.2.1a Driver unit connector pinouts

HA179769
Page 30 Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

2.2.1 Driver Module (Cont.)

WATCHDOG RELAY
The ‘watchdog’ relay is wired to a connector on the underside of the Driver Module (figure 2.2.1b).

= Polarising pin Front

Watchdog relay Relay 1
Relay 1

14 11 12
View on
underside Mating connector polarising pin locations

NO Com NC

Relay 1
NC NC
Watchdog
relay Com Com

NO NO
04 01 02

Relay not energised Relay energised

(Com shorted to NC) (Com shorted to NO)
NO Com NC
RELAY CONTACT DEFINITIONS
Watchdog relay

Figure 2.2.1b Relay connector location and pinout.

Under normal operating conditions, the watchdog relay is energised (that is the common and normally open
contacts are shorted). Should a system error (listed below) become active (or power to the Driver Module
fail), the relay is de-energised (common and normally closed contacts shorted).
1. Missing mains. One or more Power Module supply voltage lines is missing.
2. Thyristor short circuit*
3. Thyristor open circuit*
4. Fuse Blown. Thyristor-protection fuse ruptured in one or more Power Modules.
5. Unit over temperature
6. Network dips. A reduction in supply voltage exceeding a configurable value (VdipsThreshold), causes
firing to be inhibited until the supply voltage returns to a suitable value. VdipsThreshold represents a
percentage change in supply voltage between successive half cycles, and can be defined by the user
in the Network.Setup menu, as described in section 6.20.2.
7. Supply frequency fault. The supply frequency is checked every half cycle, and if the percentage change
between successive 1/2 cycles exceeds a threshold value (max. 5%), a Mains Frequency System Alarm
is generated. The threshold value (FreqDriftThold) is defined in the Network.Setup menu described in
section 6.20.2.
8. Power Module 24V Failure.
* Note: It is not possible to detect a thyristor short circuit when the unit is delivering 100% output
power. Similarly, it is not possible to detect thyristor open circuit when the unit is delivering 0%
output.

RELAY 1
This relay, supplied as standard, is located adjacent to the watchdog relay (figure 2.2.1b). The energisation/
de-energisation of the relay coil is under software control and is fully configurable by the user. The terms
Normally open (NO) and Normally closed (NC) refer to the relay in its de-energised state. Up to three further
relays are available if optional I/O Modules are fitted (see figure 2.2.1a).

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 31
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

2.2.1 Driver Module (Cont.)

PREDICTIVE LOAD MANAGEMENT OPTION CONNECTOR

This option allows a number of systems to communicate with one another to allow load management
techniques such as Load Sharing and Load Shedding to be implemented. The connector is located as shown
in figure 2.2.1b.
Note: Connecting pins 1 and 5 together has the effect of introducing a terminating (120 Ohm)
resistor across pins 2 and 4. It is recommended that this be done at each end of the transmission
line.

SK2
1 1 Terminator A 1
2 Signal Low
3 Shield
4 Signal High
5 5 Terminator B 5

Signal low Station 1 Station 2 Station i Station n

Shield
Signal high
nmax = 64

Maximum Trunk line length = 100 metres (328 ft)

Maximum individual drop length = 5 metres (16 ft)
Maximum cumulative drop length = 30 metres (98 ft)
Conductor pair size = 24 gauge (0.25 mm2)
Characteristic impedance at 500kHz = 120 Ohms ±10%
Nominal capacitance @ 800Hz = ≤40pF
Unbalance capacitance = ≤4 ± 10%pF/m
Capacitance between conductors = 100pF/metre)
Attenuation at 500kHz = 1.64dB/100 metres)

Note: The figures above are for a network of up to 100 metres with up to 64 units
connected. The actual network impedance is a function of cable type, cable length and the
number of units connected. For futher details contact the manufacturer or local agent.
Figure 2.2.1c Predictive Load Management wiring

Load Sharing
In a system with several heating zones, this allows a strategy to be implemented which distributes power over time
in such a way that the overall power consumption remains as steady as possible, thus reducing the peak power
demand of the system.

Load Shedding
In a system with several heating zones, this allows a strategy to be implemented which limits the available load
power at each heating zone and/or switches zones off according to a defined priority level, thus allowing the
maximum running power consumption to be controlled. The total running power is the maximum power supplied
to the loads, integrated over a 50 minute period.
See the Predictive Load Management option description (section 9), for more details.

HA179769
Page 32 Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

2.2.1 Driver Module (Cont.)

CONFIGURATION PORT
This RJ11 connector located on the front of the Driver Module (figure 2.2.1b) is used for direct connection
to a PC using EIA232C standard.

Optional jack plug

6 integral with D-type
1 +24 V

0V
24 V dc 1 1 (N.C)
(N.C.) 2 2 Rx

0V 3 3 Tx
Tx 4 4 DTR
Rx 5 5 0V
(N.C.) 6 Note: 6 DSR
Jack plug option available from the 7 RTS
(6-way RJ11 Male to EPower manufacturer
Processor module) 8 CTS
9 (N.C)
9-way D-type socket
(To PC EIA232 port)

6 1
REAR VIEW

24 V dc 1 1
(N.C.) 2 2 Tx

0V 3 3 Rx
Tx 4 4
Rx 5 5
(N.C.) 6 6
(6-way RJ11 Male to 7 0V
Processor module)

25
25-way D-type socket
(To PC EIA232 port)

REAR VIEW 1 13
6 1 7
14 25

Figure 2.2.1d Configuration port wiring details

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 33
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

2.2.1 Driver Module (Cont.)

COMMUNICATIONS PINOUTS
Serial communications is discussed in the Communications Manual HA179770. Pinouts for the relevant
protocols are given here for convenience.
Pi Signal
Green
n (EIA485) Pin Function
8 Reserved 8 N/C
7 Reserved
Yellow
8 7 N/C
6 N/C 6 Rx-
MODBUS / RTU

MODBUS / TCP
5 N/C 5 N/C
8
1 4 N/C 4 N/C
3 Isolated 0V 3 Rx+
8 2 A 1 2 Tx-
1 B 1 Tx+
1 Internal connections: LEDs:
Pin 1 to 5V via 100kΩ Green Green = Tx activity
Pin 2 to 0V via 100kΩ Yellow = Network activity
Yellow LEDs:
Green = Tx activity
Connectors Yellow = Rx activity
in parallel
Figure 2.2.1e Modbus RTU pinout Figure 2.2.1h Modbus TCP (Ethernet 10baseT) pinout

NS (Network status) LED (1)

LED state Interpretation
Off No power or no IP address
Steady green Module is in Process Active or Idle state
Flashing green On-line, waiting for connection
Steady red Duplicate IP address, or FATAL event
Flashing red Process Active Timeout

MS (Module status) LED (2) LINK LED (3, 4)

LED state Interpretation LED state Interpretation
Off No power Off No link; no activity
Steady green Normal operation Steady green Link established
Steady red Major fault (Exception state, fatal error etc.) Flickering green Activity
Flashing red Minor fault in diagnostic object, IP
conflict

Figure 2.2.1i Modbus TCP connector pinout, double port version

HA179769
Page 34 Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

2.2.1 Driver Module (Cont.)

COMMUNICATIONS PINOUTS (Cont.)

Network status LED Indication
LED state Interpretation
Network Pin Function
Off Off-line or no power
Status 1 V- (negative bus supply voltage)
Steady green On-line to 1 or more units
Flashing green On-line - no connections 2 CAN_L
1 3 Cable shield
Steady red Critical link failure
Flashing red 1 or more connections timed out 4 CAN_H
5 V+ (positive bus supply voltage).
Module status LED Indication
Notes:
LED state Interpretation
1. See DeviceNet specification for power
Off No power 5 supply specification
Steady green Operating normally
Module 2. During startup, an LED test is
Flashing green Missing or incomplete configuration
performed, satisfying the DeviceNet
Steady red Unrecoverable fault(s) Status
standard.
Flashing red Recoverable fault(s)

Figure 2.2.1j DeviceNet® connector pinout

OPERATION MODE LED INDICATION

LED state Interpretation Mode
Off Off line or no power Pin Function Pin Function
Steady green On-line, data exchange 5 Isolated ground
9 N/C
Flashing green On-line, clear 4 RTS
8 A (RxD -/TxD -)
3 B (RxD+ / TxD+)
PROFIBUS / DP

Red single flash Parametrisation error

7 N/C
Red double flash PROFIBUS configuration error 9 5 2 N/C
6 +5 V (See note 1)
1 N/C
STATUS LED INDICATION
LED state Interpretation 6 1 Notes:
1. Isolated 5 Volts for termination purposes.
Off No power or not initialised
Any current drawn from this terminal affects
Steady green Initialised
the total power consumtion.
Flashing green Diagnostic event present 2. The cable screen should be terminated to
Steady red Exception error Status the connector housing.

Figure 2.2.1k Profibus connector pinout

‘RUN’ LED Indication Pin Function

1 DA (Rx+/Tx+) 110R, 1/2W, 5% across
LED state Interpretation RUN pins 1 and 2 of first and
Off Off-line or no power 2 DB (Rx-/Tx-) last connectors
Green Normal operation 3 DG (Signal ground)
Red Major fault (fatal error) 4 SLD (Cable shield) SLD and FG
1 5 FG (Functional ground) connected internally

Notes:
‘ERR’ LED Indication 1. A 110 Ohm (±5% 1/2 watt) terminating resistor
LED state Interpretation should be connected across pins 1 and 2 of the
connectors at each end of the transmision line.
Off No error or no power
Steady red Exception or fatal event
5 2. The cable shield should be connected to pin 4 of
each CC-Link connector.
Flickering red CRC Error
3. The shield and Functional ground terminals (pins 4
Flashing red Station number or Baud rate has
ERR and 5) are internally connected.
changed since startup.

Figure 2.2.1l CC-Link connector pinout

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 35
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

NS (Network status) LED (1)

LED state Interpretation
NS
Off No power or no IP address
Steady green On-line; one or more connections established (CIP class 1 or 3)
Flashing green On-line, no connections enabled
Steady red Duplicate IP address (‘fatal’ error)

ETHERNET/IP
Flashing red One or more connections timed out (CIP class 1 or 3)

MS (Module status) LED (2) LINK LED (3, 4)

LED state Interpretation LED state Interpretation
Off No power Off No link; no activity
Steady green Controlled by a scanner in Run state Steady green Link established
LINK Flashing green Not configured or scanner in Idle state Flickering green Activity in progress
MS Steady red Major fault (Exception state, fatal error etc.)
Flashing red Recoverable fault

Figure 2.2.1m EtherNet/IP connector pinout, both single and double port versions

NS (Network status) LED (1)

LED state Interpretation
Off No power or IP address
Steady green On-line (RUN); connection with I/O controller established.
Controller in ‘Run’ state
On-line (STOP); connection with IO controller established. Controller
Flashing green
in ‘Stop’ state.

MS (Module status) LED (2)

LED state Interpretation
Off Not initialised No power, or the module is in ‘SETUP’ or
‘NW_INIT’ state.
Green steady Normal operation The module has shifted from the ‘NW_INIT’
state.
Green 1 flash Diagnostic event One or more Diagnostic Event present.
Green 2 flash Blink Used by engineering tools to identify the node
on the network.
Red steady Exception error The module is in the ‘EXCEPTION’ state.
Red1 flash Configuration error The Expected Identification differs from the
LINK LED (3, 4) Real Identification.
LED state Interpretation Red 2 flash IP address error The IP address is not set.
Off No link; no activity Red 3 flash Station Name error The Station name is not set.
Steady green Link established Red 4 flash Internal error The module has encountered a major internal
Flickering green Activity in progress fault.

Figure 2.2.1n Profinet IO connector pinout, both single and double port versions

HA179769
Page 36 Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

REMOTE PANEL CONNECTOR

Located on the underside of the driver module (figure 2.2.1b) this RJ45 connector supplies isolated 3-wire
EIA485 outputs for an optional remote panel display unit. Figure 2.2.1n gives the pinout. See section 6.6.2
for configuration details. Parity is set to ‘None’. See also Appendix A for details of a suitable remote panel
unit.

Pin Definition
8 Reserved
7 Reserved
6 N/C
8 5 N/C
4 N/C
3 Isolated 0V
2 A
1 1 B
Internal connections:
Pin 1 to 5V via 100kΩ
Pin 2 to 0V via 100kΩ

Figure 2.2.1o Remote panel connector

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 37
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

2.2.2 Power modules

LINE/LOAD CABLES
Line power is routed through the top of the unit and load power emerges from the bottom of the unit.
Protective Earth Ground wiring is discussed in section 2.2.1, above.

DANGER
1. Before carrying out any wiring to the product, it must be ensured that all relevant power and
control cables, leads or harnesses are isolated from voltage sources.
2. To achieve IP10 rating according to IEC60529, power connections must be made by using lug
terminals of size as given in Table 2.2.2. U.L.: Power connections connection must be made using
UL-listed lug terminals.

DANGER
1. This product does not contain any branch-circuit protection or internal safety overload
protection. The installer must add branch-circuit protection upstream of the unit, and provide
external or remote safety overload protection to the end installation. Branch circuit shall be rated
according to maximum current in each phase.
CE: branch-circuit protection must be selected according to IEC 60364-4-43 or applicable local
regulations.
UL: branch-circuit protection must be selected according to NEC article 210.20, it is necessary for
compliance with National Electric Code(NEC) requirements.
2. Power connections: The cables must be rated 90°C stranded copper only, the cross section must
be selected according to the branch circuit protection rating.
CE: Wire conductor cross sections must comply with IEC 60364-5-52 or applicable national
standards
U.L.: Wire conductor cross sections must comply with NEC Table 310.15(B)(16) (formerly Table
310.16) taking account of table 310.15(B)(2) for the ampacity correction factors or NFPA79 Table
12.5.1 taking account of Table 12.5.5(a) for the ampacity correction factors or applicable national
standards.
3. Power terminals must be tightened according to the torque values defined in Table 2.2.2a.
Appropriate regular inspections must be performed. Periodicity depends on the local
environment, but should not exceed 1 year.

Figures 2.2.2m to 2.2.2p show typical connection details.

HA179769
Page 38 Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

EPower Internal Lug terminal size

Tightening Cable entry
current Maximum Maximum
Stud Diameter Torque diameter
rating Length (L) Capacity
50A
100A
M8 45 mm 70mm2 9 Nm 17 mm
(3/8 inch) (1.75 inch) (AWG 2/0) (6.6 ft lb) (0.7 inch)
160A

250A
M10 60 mm 120mm2 15 Nm 21.5 mm
(1/2 inch) (2.35 inch) (250 Kcmil) (11.1 ft lb) (0.825 inch)

400A
M12 80 mm 240mm2 28.8 Nm 30 mm
(1/2 inch) (3.15 inch) (500 Kcmil) (21.2 ft lb) (1.18 inch)
500A 2 x M12 65 mm 185mm2 30 Nm 35 mm
630A (2 x 1/2 inch) (2.55 inch) (350 Kcmil) (22.1 ft lb) (1.38 inch)

Table 2.2.2a Line/Load termination details

Diameter (Ø)

Length (L)

Figure 2.2.2a Lug terminal dimensions

Power Connection Adapter

According to standards, ambient temperature, or wiring arrangement, a larger wire section may be
requested.
To connect larger wire section, a power connection adapter (optional) can be fitted on the product. It
consists of extra copper bars which enable connection of lug terminals outside of the product.
Products equipped with power connection adapter are rated CE: IP00 and remains UL: open type.
.
EPower Maximum Bolt Tightening Torque
Reference
current rating Size Inside & outside(1) product
50A
Power Connection M8 9 Nm
100A
Adapter 100A-160A (5/16 inch) (6.6 ft lb)
160A
Power Connection M12 15 Nm
250A
Adapter 250A (7/12 inch) (11.1 ft lb)
Power Connection M16 28.8 Nm
400A
Adapter 400A (5/8 inch) (21.2 ft lb)
500A Power Connection M16 30 Nm
630A Adapter 500A-630A (5/8/ inch) (22.1 ft lb)

Table 2.2.2b Power Connection Adapter termination details

(1) When applying torque to the screw outside product establish balance on the nut.

This optional power connection adapter can also be used to connect flex copper bar.

DANGER
Do not connect solid copper bar to the product.

Mechanical stresses linked to thermal expansion may damage product internal fuse and/or thyristor.

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 39
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

The following figures show Power Connection Adapter connection details.

Figure 2.2.2b Power Connection Adapter

Figure 2.2.2c Power Connection Adapter 100A-160A fitted (detail)

Figure 2.2.2d Power Connection Adapter 100A-160A fitted (side view)

HA179769
Page 40 Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

Figure 2.2.2e Power Connection Adapter 250A fitted (detail)

Figure 2.2.2f Power Connection Adapter 250A fitted (side view)

Figure 2.2.2g Power Connection Adapter 400A fitted (detail)

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 41
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

Figure 2.2.2h Power Connection Adapter 400A fitted (side view)

Figure 2.2.2i Power Connection Adapter 500A/630A fitted (detail)

Figure 2.2.2j Power Connection Adapter 500A/630A fitted (side view)

HA179769
Page 42 Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

RIBBON CABLE
The ribbon cable is daisy-chained from the Driver Module to the power modules.

NOTICE
In order to maintain protection against damage due to electrostatic discharge, any ribbon cable
which is chafed, scratched or otherwise damaged must be replaced. Periodicity depends on the
local environment, but should not exceed 1 year.

EXTERNAL CURRENT FEEDBACK

If the option is fitted, a two-pin connector on the underside of the unit allows the connection of an external
current transformer to measure the load current. The option also includes the Remote Voltage sensing input,
described below. Both connectors have polarising devices fitted (description below) to prevent
misconnection by the user.
The current transformer ratio must be such that its full scale output is 5 Amps. For example when measuring
up to 400 Amps, a 400:5 ratio transformer should be chosen.
WARNING
1. External feedback connections must be correctly phased (figure 2.2.2b) or the unit might switch
to full conduction at start-up. See also Appendix B for more details about external feedback.
2. With external feedback: The current transformer should be chosen such that its full-scale output
is 5 amps.

Voltage feedback connector

V1 V2 V1&V2 None
Load cable exit V2 V1&V2
V1 None

V1 V2 V1 V2 V1 V2 V1 V2

Underneath view
Module 1 Module 2 Module 3 Module 4
I2 I1 I1& I2 None
I1 I2 None I1&I2

Current feedback connector

Load Load voltage Neutral / phase
reference (Either pin)
External feedback
Figure 2.2.2k External feedback, and neutral/phase reference connectors

Connector Terminal Capacity Torque

Voltage feedback connector 0.25 mm² to 2.5mm² 0.55 Nm
& Current feedback connector 24 AWG to 12 AWG 5 lb.in
Table 2.2.2 Voltage & Current feedback terminals connections details

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 43
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

REMOTE VOLTAGE INPUT

DANGER
The cables used to connect the remote voltage sensing inputs (if fitted) and the cable used to
connect the reference input in 4S, 6D and two-leg configurations must be correctly protected by
branch-circuit protection. It is the responsibility of the user to add branch-circuit protection. Such
branch-circuit must comply with applicable local regulations.
UL: The above-mentioned branch-circuit protection is necessary for compliance with National
Electric Code (NEC) requirements.

If the option is fitted, the two end pins of a four-pin connector (figure 2.2.2k) are used for terminating remote
voltage sensing cable. It is recommended that each input be fitted with slow-blow fuse (figure 2.2.2a) of a
lower current rating than that of the sensing cable harness. If the option is fitted, the Current Transformer
input, described above, is also fitted.
Single phase shown; multiple phases similar
Current
Supply Supply transformer Secondary
Isolating device Isolating device
Power Power Detail
Phase/neutral
Phase/neutral Module reference Module
reference Primary

Use either Use either

terminal terminal Fuses

Load
Fuse Fuse Load

Return Return
Isolating device Isolating device
Internal feedback connections (Standard) External feedback connections (Option)

Figure 2.2.2a Fusing for remote voltage sensing input and neutral reference inputs

HA179769
Page 44 Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

NEUTRAL/PHASE REFERENCE INPUT

DANGER
The cables used to connect the remote voltage sensing inputs (if fitted) and the cable used to
connect the reference input in 4S, 6D and two-leg configurations must be correctly protected by
branch-circuit protection. It is the responsibility of the user to add branch-circuit protection. Such
branch-circuit must comply with applicable local regulations.
UL: The above-mentioned branch-circuit protection is necessary for compliance with National
Electric Code (NEC) requirements.

WARNING
In 4S, 6D and two-leg configurations do not use the reference terminal to replicate voltage signals
(in a ‘daisy chain’), as the PCB track between the two poles is not designed to withstand short-circuit.

In order to ensure correct firing for 4S, 6D and two-leg configurations, a connection to neutral or to the
relevant phase must be made using the relevant two-pin connector on the underside of the unit (figure
2.2.2k). (Both pins are connected together internally, so either may be used). This is used as a potential
reference for voltage measurements within the unit, see figure 2.2.2a and figure 2.2.2e for more detail.
The unit has been designed to detect the loss of any of the reference signals and to suspend firing should
any of them ‘fail’. Firing may not be correct during the detection period.

Polarising pins are fitted to the connectors as shown in the figure below.

Load cable exit

Module 1 Module 2 Module 3 Module 4

Underneath view

Neutral/phase reference connector

Neutral/phase reference connector polarising pins

Connector Terminal Capacity Torque

Neutral/phase reference 0.25 mm² to 2.5mm² 0.55 Nm
connector 24 AWG to 12 AWG 5 lb.in
Table 2.2.2 Voltage & Current feedback terminals connections details

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 45
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

ACCESS TO LINE AND LOAD TERMINATIONS

DANGER
Before carrying out any wiring to the product, it must be ensured that all relevant power and control
cables, leads or harnesses are isolated from voltage sources.

For 50A, 100A, 160A and 250A units, to remove the doors, insert a non-insulated screwdriver with a 5 mm
flat blade into the slot near the top of the door, and gently lever downwards to disengage the catch, and pull
the top of the door away from the unit. Once free, the door can be lifted off its pivots which are located at
the bottom of the case.
For the 400A unit, the door is released by undoing the two fasteners near the top of the door and then
pulling the top of the door away from the unit. Once free, the door can be lifted off its pivots which are
located at the bottom of the case.
The 500A/630Amp module door is similar to the 400Amp module, but once released, the bottom of the
door is pulled downwards to disengage it from its securing lugs, not lifted off, as described for the 400A
module.

Door removal (500/630A units)

HA179769
Page 46 Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

2.2.2 POWER MODULES (Cont.)

Supply
voltage
termination

Fuse

Nut
Spring washer
Washer
Crimp tag

Termination detail

Ribbon Cable termination recommended

cable torque:
(in) 50A/100A/160A = 9Nm (6.6 ft lb)
250A = 15Nm (11.1 ft lb)

Load
termination

Figure 2.2.2a Line and load termination (50A, 100A and 160A units) (250A units similar)

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 47
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

2.2.2 POWER MODULES (Cont.)

Fuse Supply
voltage
termination

Recommended torque = 28.8 Nm (21.2 ft lb)

Bolt (M12 x 25)

‘Serrated’ washer
Flat washer
Ring terminal
Copper busbar

Termination detail
Ribbon
cable (in)

Load
termination

Figure 2.2.2b Line and Load termination (400A units)

HA179769
Page 48 Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

2.2.2 POWER MODULES (Cont.)

Supply voltage
termination

Fuse
Recommended torque = 30 Nm (22.1 ft lb)
M12 Nut
(19mm A/F)

Spring washer
Flat washer
Ring terminal

Copper busbar

Termination detail

Ribbon
cable (in)

Load
termination

Figure 2.2.2c Line and Load termination (500A units) (630A units similar)

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 49
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

2.2.2 POWER MODULES (Cont.)

Supply
voltage
termination

Fuse
Recommended torque = 30 Nm (22.1 ft lb)

M12 Nut
(19mm A/F)

Spring washer
Flat washer
Ring terminal

Copper busbar

Termination detail

Ribbon
cable (in)

Load
termination

Figure 2.2.2d Line and Load termination (630A units)

HA179769
Page 50 Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

2.2.2 POWER MODULES (Cont.)

The illustrations which make up figure 2.2.2e, below, show schematic and practical wiring arrangements for
a number of common three-phase configurations. Earthing and driver module wiring are omitted for the
sake of clarity. Fuses (where fitted) should have values compatible with the current carrying capacity of the
associated wiring. Appendix B contains a discussion of external feedback.

DANGER
1. Neutral cross-sectional area when neutral is connected to the star point of the load (4S load type):
Without current limit activated, maximum neutral current is not upper than maximum current in
each phase. The cross-sectional area of the neutral conductor, shall be sized to carry the
maximum phase current.
With current limit activated, maximum neutral current may reach √3 x current limit setting. The
cross-sectional area of the neutral conductor shall be sized to carry up to √3 x current limit setting.
CE: Wire conductor cross sections must comply with IEC 60364-5-52 or applicable national
standards
U.L.: Wire conductor cross sections must comply with NEC Table 310.15(B)(16) (formerly Table
310.16) taking account of table 310.15(B)(2) for the ampacity correction factors or NFPA79 Table
12.5.1 taking account of Table 12.5.5(a) for the ampacity correction factors or applicable national
standards.
2. The cables used to connect the remote voltage sensing inputs (if fitted) and the cable used to
connect the reference input in 4S, 6D and two-leg configurations must be correctly protected by
branch-circuit protection. It is the responsibility of the user to add branch-circuit protection. Such
branch-circuit must comply with applicable local regulations.
UL: The above-mentioned branch-circuit protection is necessary for compliance with National
Electric Code (NEC) requirements.

CAUTION
In burst mode and primary of transformer load, the star-star configuration is not recommended as it
may become unstable, high speed fuse may blow.

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 51
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

THREE-PHASE STAR CONFIGURATIONS

Fuse rating must be lower

than cable current rating

Phase EPower 1 Phase 1

Phase 2

Load 1 (Z)
Phase 3
Neutral
Vline Isolating
device

EPower 1

EPower 2

EPower 3
Fused
Neutral Neutral
reference
) Lo
Vline2 Vline3 2 (Z2 ad
3
ad (Z3
Lo )

Load 1

Load 2

Load 3
Phase EPower 2

Phase EPower 3

Star with neutral (4S)

1/L1 2/T1
Phase EPower 1 Phase 1
Phase 2
Load 1 (Z)

Phase 3
Isolating
device 1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
V3

EPower 1

EPower 2

EPower 3
Vline
V
Vline3
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3

) Lo
Z2 ad
2( 3(
ad Z3
Lo V2 )
Load 1

Load 2

Load 3
Reference inputs
Phase 3/L2 EPower 2 4/T2 connected
Vline2 together
Phase 5/L3 EPower 3 6/T3

Star without neutral (3S)

Figure 2.2.2e Typical wiring schemes (Star)

HA179769
Page 52 Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

2.2.2 POWER MODULES (Cont.)

THREE-PHASE DELTA CONFIGURATIONS

1/L1 2/T1
Phase EPower 1
Phase 1
Phase 2
Phase 3
Isolating
device
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
Vline V V3

EPower 1

EPower 2

EPower 3
1

Lo
ad

ad
Vline3 Lo

3
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3

Reference inputs

Load 3
Load 1

Load 2
connected together
Phase EPower 2 Load 2
3/L2 4/T2

Vline2 V2
Phase EPower 3 6/T3
5/L3

Closed Delta (3D)

Phase
1/L1
Phase 1
φ1
Phase 2 φ2
V3 φ3
1

Phase 3
er

Lo
ow

Isolating
ad
EP

device 1/L1 3/L2 5/L3

3

2/T1

EPower 1

EPower 2

EPower 3
6/T3
Vline3 Vline
All reference
V
EP

inputs fused
ow
d1

2/T1 4/T2 6/T3

er

φ2
a

φ3 φ1
Lo

5/L3

3/L2 4/T2
Load 2
Load 1

Load 3

Phase EPower 2 Load 2

Vline2 V2

Phase

Open Delta (6D)

Figure 2.2.2g (Cont.) Typical wiring schemes (Delta)

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 53
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

2.2.2 POWER MODULES (Cont.)

TWO-LEG CONFIGURATIONS

Phase EPower 1 Phase 1

Phase 2

Load 1
Phase 3
Isolating
device

EPower 1

EPower 2
Vline3 Vline Fuse

2 Lo
ad ad
Lo 3 Reference inputs

Load 1

Load 2

Load 3
Phase EPower 2 connected together
to phase 3.
Vline2
Phase

Star (3S)

Phase EPower 1
Phase 1
Phase 2
Phase 3
Isolating
device

EPower

EPower
Lo
d1

Vline3 Vline
ad
a

Fuse
Lo

Reference inputs
Load 1

Load 2

Load 3
connected together to
Phase EPower 2 Load 2 phase 3.

Vline2
Phase
Delta (3D)

Figure 2.2.2g (Cont.) Typical wiring schemes (2-leg)

HA179769
Page 54 Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

2.2.2 POWER MODULES (Cont.)

THREE PHASE CONFIGURATIONS WITH EXTERNAL FEEDBACK

WARNING
1. External feedback connections must be correctly phased (figure 2.2.2b) or the unit might switch
to full conduction at start-up.
2. With external feedback: The current transformer should be chosen such that its full-scale output
is 5 amps.

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 55
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

Phase 1 V2 V1 I2 I1
EPower 1 S1 S2
Load 1
Phase
Reference

Load 3
S1 S2

Phase 2 EPower 2
V2 V1 I2 I1

Load 2
S1
S2

I2 I1
EPower 3
V2 V1
Phase
Reference Fuse rating must be lower
Phase 3 than cable current rating

Star without neutral (3S)

Phase 1

2 phase reference

Load 3
r1

S1 S2
we 2
EPo V1 V
I2

S2 S1
I1

I1

Load 2
I2
EPo
V1
we
V2

φ1 phase
r3

reference
EPower 2
Phase 2 V2 V1 I2 I1

φ3 phase
reference
Load 2
S1 S2

Phase 3

Open Delta (6D)

Figure 2.2.2g (cont.) Typical 3-phase external feedback wiring

HA179769
Page 56 Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

2.2.2 POWER MODULES (Cont.)

THREE PHASE CONFIGURATIONS WITH EXTERNAL FEEDBACK (Cont.)

Phase EPower 1
I2 I1 V2 V1

S2 S1
Load 1 Load 3

Phase
EPower 2
I2 I1 V2 V1

Phase
Load 2
Reference
S1 S2
Phase 3

2-leg Delta (3D)

Phase
Reference
EPower 1
Phase 1 V2 V1 I2 I1

S2 S1
Load 1
Load 3
Phase S1 S2
Reference
EPower 2
Phase 2 V2 V1 I2 I1

Load 2
S1 S2
I2 I1
EPower 3

Phase
V2 V1

Reference

Phase 3

Closed Delta (3D)

Figure 2.2.2g (cont.) Typical 3-phase external feedback wiring

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 57
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

3 OPERATOR INTERFACE
Located at the front of the Driver Module, the operator interface consists of a display, featuring four lines of
up to 10 characters each, four push-button switches and three LED ‘beacons’.

PWR

Figure 3 Operator interface

3.1 DISPLAY
As mentioned above, the display consists of four lines of characters, these characters being formed using a
seven-high, by five-wide dot matrix. This display, together with the four pushbuttons allows full operation
and configuration of the unit.

3.2 PUSHBUTTONS
The functions of the four pushbuttons below the display depend on whether the unit is in configuration
mode or in operating mode:

Return Scroll Scroll Enter

Down Up

3.2.1 Configuration

Return Generally, this button reverses the last operation of the ‘Enter’ button
Scroll down/up Allows the user to scroll through the available menu items or values. The up/down
arrow symbol appears against menu items that can be edited.
Enter Goes to next menu item.

3.2.2 Operation
In operation, two pushbuttons may be operated simultaneously to carry out the following functions:

Scroll up + Scroll down Acknowledge alarms

Scroll up + Enter Toggle between ‘Local’ and ‘Remote’ operation.
Scroll down + Enter PLF adjustment request

3.2.3 Menu item value selection

Menu items are scrolled through using the enter key. Editing of the item’s value is carried out by scrolling
through the available choices, using the up and down scroll keys. Once the desired value is displayed, it will
become the selected value approximately two seconds after the final scroll key operation, this selection
being indicated by a single off/on flash of the desired value.

HA179769
Page 58 Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

3.3 BEACONS
There are three LED illuminated ‘beacons’ between the display area and the pushbuttons. For clarity, figure
3, above, shows the locations of these beacons in an enhanced way; on the real instrument, they are
‘invisible’ unless illuminated.

PWR
PWR ‘Power’. Illuminated green whilst power is applied to the unit. The Beacon flashes if any of
the associated power modules is not firing, or if the unit is in Standby (for any reason
other than that the unit is in ‘config’ mode).
LOC ‘Local’. Illuminated orange when setpoints are to be read from the operator interface or
from PC/iTools.
ALM ‘Alarm’. Illuminated red when one or more enabled alarms is active.

3.4 FRONT PANEL MESSAGES

A number of messages can appear at the display panel. These messages and their interpretations are listed
below. See section 10 for a more detailed description of some of these alarms.

3.4.1 Instrument events

Cold Start The instrument has been cold-started.

Conf Entry The instrument has been placed in configuration mode.
Conf Exit The instrument has been taken out of configuration mode.
GlobalAck A global acknowledgement of all safe latched alarms has been performed.
Power down The instrument has restarted after a power down.
QS Entry The Quick Start menu has been re-entered.
QS Exit The Quick Start menu has been left.

3.4.2 Indication alarms

LimitAct One or more limits are active in the control block

LoadOverI An over current alarm has become active in one or more Network blocks.
LMoverSch (Predictive Load Management over schedule). The actual power (Pr) is greater than the
requested shed power value (Ps) (detected in the PLM block).
PrcValTfr Process value transfer is active in one or more control blocks,

3.4.3 System alarms

FuseBlown One or more thyristor protection fuses is ruptured.

MainsFreq Mains Frequency is outside the acceptable range.
Missmains One or more supply phases is missing.
NetwDip One or more ‘network dip’ alarms has been detected.
OverTemp One or more ‘over temperature’ alarms has been detected.
PMod24V A power supply problem has been detected on the Driver Unit power board.

3.4.4 Process alarms

ChopOff One or more ‘Chop-off’ alarm has been detected.

ClosedLp One or more Control block ‘Closed Loop’ alarm has been detected.
InputBrk An ‘Input Break’ alarm has been detected in one or more Analogue input blocks.
MainVFault One or more ‘Mains Voltage Fault’ (over or under) has been detected.
OutFault An ‘Output short Circuit’ alarm has been detected in one or more Analogue output
blocks.
PLF One or more ‘Partial Load Failure’ alarm has been detected.
PLU One or more ‘Partial Load Unbalance’ alarm has been detected.
TLF One or more ‘Total Load failure’ alarm has been detected.

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 59
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

3.4.5 Configuration errors

InvPAdata (Invalid parameter database). The non-volatile parameter database has become
corrupt and should not be relied upon.
InvWires (Invalid wiring table). The non-volatile storage of user (soft) wiring has become corrupt
and should not be relied upon.

3.4.6 Standby errors

PwrModRev (Power Module revision). One or more power units has an invalid revision number, or
its revision level is not compatible with the firmware version of the driver module.
HWDiffers The fitted hardware does not match the instrument configuration.
ErrDSP Error(s) reported by the Digital Signal Processor, during the instrument’s start-up self
test procedure.
Pwr1Ribbon A fault was detected in the power module 1 ribbon cable during the instrument’s start-
up self test procedure.
Pwr2(3)(4)Ribbon As above but for power module 2, 3 or 4.

3.4.7 Power module errors

Ph1(2)(3)(4)ComErr The phase 1, 2, 3 or 4 power module has attempted to communicate with the driver
module, and either the driver module or the power module (or both) has failed to
‘understand’ the communication commands/responses.
Ph1ComTout (Comms timeout). The phase 1, 2, 3 or 4 power module indicated that it wished to
report a fault to the driver module but the communications transaction was not
completed.
Ph2(3)(4)ComTout As for phase 1, above but for phase 2, 3 or 4.
Pwr1EEProm Header information in power module 1 non-volatile memory was found to be invalid at
the instrument’s start-up self test procedure.
Pwr2(3)(4)EEProm As for power module 1, above but for power module 2, 3 or 4.
Ph1(2)(3)(4)Wdog The phase 1, 2, 3 or 4 power module microprocessor has detected that its watchdog
timer has timed out. A reset has been performed and this has caused the power
module to report the fault.

3.4.8 General errors

Watchdog The driver module’s microprocessor has detected that its watchdog timer has timed
out, and has therefore performed a reset, causing the instrument to restart.
LogFault The event log could not be restored at start-up.
PWR1(2)(3)(4)cal The calibration data stored in the non-volatile memory of power module 1, 2, 3 or 4 is
invalid, and the default calibration will be used instead.

3.4.9 Reset errors

InvRamCsum (Invalid RAM checksum). Internal fault

DSPnoRSP (DSP no response). Internal fault.
DSP Wdog (DSP task watchdog). Internal fault.

3.4.10 Fatal errors

FuseConfig The driver module’s internal fuses are incorrectly configured.

ErrRestart An error has occurred that requires the instrument to be restarted.

HA179769
Page 60 Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

4 QUICKSTART
At first switch-on, the Driver Module enters the ‘QuickStart’ menu which allows the user to configure the
major parameters without having to enter the full configuration menu structure of the unit. Figure 4 shows
an overview of a typical Quickstart menu. The actual displayed menu items will vary according to the number
of options fitted.

Use up/down scroll to select:

Select Language English, French, German, Italian

Use up/down scroll to select 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4

Power Modules
Change confirmation is required, as shown.

Use up/down scroll to select nominal current.

Nominal Current Maximum value = Current rating of power modules

Use up/down scroll to select nominal voltage

Nominal Voltage (see text for more details)

Use up/down scroll to select 1, 2, 3 or 4 phase. Availa-

Network Type ble values depend on the number of power modules PWR

selected.

Use up/down scroll to select: Note: Confirmation is required if the number of

Load Coupling 3Star, 3Delta, 4Star, 6Delta
power modules is edited

Use up/down scroll to select:

Load Type Resistive or Txformer (i.e. Transformer)

Use up/down scroll to select: None, Logic, Burst Var, Use up/down scroll to select: Unused,
Firing Mode Burst fix, Half cycle, Ph. Angle Analog OP 1 Func Power, Current, Voltage, Impedance

Use up/down scroll to select: Appears only if OP Func is not ‘Unused’

Feedback Analog OP 1 Type Use up/down scroll to select: 0-10V,
Open loop, V2, I2, Power, Vrms, I rms
1-5V, 2-10V, 0-5V, 0-20mA, 4-20mA

Appears only if Feedback is not ‘Open Loop’ Use up/down scroll to select:
Transfer Mode Digital IP 2 func
Use up/down scroll to select: None, I2 or I rms Unused, RemSP Sel, Alarm Ack

Use up/down scroll to select: Unused, Setpoint, Use up/down scroll to select:
Analog IP 1 Func SP limit, I limit, V limit, P limit, Transfer Relay 1 func Unused, Any Alarm, NetwAlarm, Fuse Blown

Appears only if IP Func is not ‘Unused’

Appears only if Energy Counter option enabled.
Analog IP 1 Type Use up/down scroll to select: Energy Use up/down keys to select Energy Counter on or off
0-10V, 1-5V, 2-10V, 0-5V, 0-20mA, 4-20mA
Management’ option
Appear only if ‘Load

Use up/down scroll to select: Unused, Setpoint, Use up/down keys to select Load Management
Analog IP 2 Func SP limit, I limit, V limit, P limit, Transfer Load Man Type type (see text)
fitted

Appears only if IP Func is not ‘Unused’ Use up/down keys to set Load Management
Analog IP 2 Type Use up/down scroll to select: 0-10V, 1-5V, Load Man Addr address.
2-10V, 0-5V, 0-20mA, 4-20mA

Finish Use up/down scroll to select:

No Yes No, Yes

Finish Yes? Confirm

Cancel OK

Figure 4 Typical Quickstart menu

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 61
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

4 QUICKSTART MENU (Cont.)

Notes:
1. If the unit has been fully configured at the factory, the Quickstart menu will be skipped, and the
unit will go into operation mode at first switch on.
2. Once quit, the Quickstart menu can be returned to at any time from the Engineer or
Configuration menus (described later in this document) by holding the ‘Return’ key operated for
approximately two seconds. If values have been changed ‘outside’ the Quickstart menu, these
values are displayed as ‘---’ on re-entry to the Quickstart menu.

4.1 QUICKSTART MENU PARAMETERS

Language Initially, English, French, German and Italian may be selected. Other languages may be
added during the lifetime of this issue of the manual. Once confirmed (single blink
after approximately two seconds), then all further displays appear in the selected
language.
Power Modules Select the number of power modules between 0 and 4 that the driver module is to
control. The number of phases offered (in Network type, below) depends on this value.
Editing this value causes a confirmation screen to appear. ‘OK’ confirms the change.
Nominal Current A value, normally between the maximum current the Power Modules are each able
safely to sustain and a quarter of this value. Thus, for a 400 Amp unit, any nominal
current value between 100 and 400 may be selected. (Lower values are not
recommended as in such cases, the resulting accuracy and linearity are not guaranteed
to be within specification.)
Nominal Voltage A value between the maximum permanent supply voltage (+10%) to the modules, and
a quarter of this value. Available values are 100, 110, 115, 120, 127, 200, 208, 220, 230,
240, 277, 380, 400, 415, 440, 460, 480, 500, 575 and 600.
Network Type Allows the user to select 1, 2 or 3 phases depending on the Power Modules Network Type
selection made in ‘Power Modules’, above. The table shows the 0 0
choices. 1 1
2 1 or 2
Load Coupling For Network Type entries other than single phase: 3 1 or 3
2 phase: allows 3 Star or 3 Delta to be selected 4 1 or 2

3 phase: allows 3 Star, 3 Delta, 4 Star or 6 Delta to be selected.

Load Type Allows ‘Resistive’ or ‘Txformer’ (transformer) to be selected as the type of load. If
Txformer is selected, this modifies the start up procedure to limit the inrush current.
Firing Mode Select from ‘Logic’, ‘BurstVar’, ‘BurstFix’, ‘HalfCycle’ or ‘Ph.Angle’.
Feedback Allows the user to choose open Loop, V2, I2, Power, Vrms or Irms.
Transfer Mode If Feedback is set to any value other than ‘Open Loop’, ‘None’, ‘I2’ or ‘Irms’ can be
selected as transfer mode. If Feedback is set to ‘Open Loop’, the Transfer Mode page
does not appear.
Analog IP1 Func Selects the Analogue input 1 function as ‘Unused’, ‘Setpoint’, ‘SP limit’, ‘I limit’, ‘V limit’,
‘P limit’ (power limit) or ‘Transfer’. Allows (for example) a potentiometer to be
connected to Analogue input 1, so that setpoint can be dynamically varied.
Analog IP 1 Type Allows the user to select the analogue input type as 0 to 10V, 1 to 5V, 2 to 10V, 0 to 5V,
0 to 20mA, 4 to 20mA. This menu item does not appear if ‘Unused’ is selected in IP1
Func (above).
Analog IP 2 Func As for Analog IP 1 Func, except ‘Setpoint’ does not appear if it has already been
selected as Analog IP 1 type
Analog IP 2 Type As for Analog IP 1 type
Analog OP 1 Allows the user to select ‘Unused’. ‘Power’, ‘Current’, ‘Voltage’ or ‘Impedance’ to be
Func selected as output type.
Analog OP 1 Allows the user to select the analogue output type as 0 to 10V, 1 to 5V, 2 to 10V, 0 to 5V,
Type 0 to 20mA, 4 to 20mA. This menu item does not appear if ‘Unused’ is selected in OP1
Func (above).
Digital IP2 Func Select Digital input 2 function as ‘Unused’, ‘RemSP Sel’ (Remote setpoint select) or
‘Alarm Ack’
Relay 1 Func Allows the function of Relay 1 to be set as ’Unused’, ‘Any Alarm’, ‘NetwAlarm’, or ‘Fuse
Blown’.

HA179769
Page 62 Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

4.1 QUICKSTART PARAMETERS (Cont.)

Relay 1 Func Allows the function of Relay 1 to be set as ’Unused’, ‘Any Alarm’, ‘NetwAlarm’, or ‘Fuse
Blown’.
Energy Appears only if one or more Energy counter blocks (section 6.10) are included in the
configuration. Allows energy counters to be enabled and disabled.
Load Man Type Appears only if the Predictive Load Management option is fitted. Allows the user to
select one of LMNo (disabled), Sharing, IncrT1, IncrT2, RotIncr, Distrib, DistIncr,
RotDisInc.
See section 9 for more details.
Load Man Address Appears only if the Predictive Load Management option is fitted. Allows the user to
enter a Predictive Load Management address.
Finish Select ‘No’ to return to the top of the Quickstart menu, or ‘Yes’ to enter the User
menu, after confirmation. (See also note below.)

Note: The ‘Finish’ item might not appear if an inconsistent or incomplete configuration is entered. In
such a case, the ‘Language’ selection page at the top of the menu re-appears.

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 63
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

4.2 SOME DEFINITIONS

4.2.1 Firing modes

LOGIC
Power switches on, two or three zero crossings of the supply voltage after the logic input switches on. Power
switches off two or three zero crossings of current after the logic input switches off. For resistive loads,
voltage and current cross zero simultaneously. With inductive loads, a phase difference exists between the
voltage and current, meaning that they cross zero at different times. The size of the phase difference
increases with increasing inductance.

Power on-off delay = two or three mains

periods depending on where in the mains
cycle the logic output changes state. Power applied

Logic output from controller

Figure 4.2.1a Logic firing mode

BURST FIXED FIRING

This means that there is a fixed ‘cycle time’ equal to an integer number of supply voltage cycles as set up in
the Modulator menu. Power is controlled by varying the ratio between the on period and the off period
within this cycle time (figure 4.2.1b).
Tcyc

Power applied Power applied

Ton Toff Ton

Tcyc = Ton + Toff

Figure 4.2.1b Burst Fixed mode

HA179769
Page 64 Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

4.2.1 FIRING MODES (Cont.)

BURST VARIABLE FIRING

Burst Firing Variable is the preferred mode for temperature control. Between 0 and 50% of setpoint, the on
time is the ‘Min on’ time set in the modulator menu and the off time is varied to achieve control. Between
50% and 100%, the off time is the value set for ‘Min on’ and power is controlled by varying the number of on
cycles.
Power Power
applied applied
Power applied Power applied Min on Min off Min on
Min off
Ton Toff Ton Ton Toff Ton

Toff = 1/2 Min on = 66.7% duty cycle Toff = Min on = 50% duty cycle

Min On = Min Off = Power applied Power applied

Min on
2 for these examples
Ton Toff Ton

Toff = 2 x Min on = 33.3% duty cycle

Figure 4.2.1c Burst variable firing

PHASE ANGLE CONTROL
This mode of firing controls power by varying the amount of each cycle which is applied to the load, by
switching the controlling thyristor on part-way through the cycle. Figure 4.2.1d shows an example for 50%
power.

On On On On On On On On

50% shown.
Power is proportional to area under curve

Figure 4.2.1d Phase angle mode

HALF CYCLE MODE
Burst mode firing with a single firing (or non-firing) cycle is known as ‘Single cycle’ mode. In order to reduce
power fluctuations during firing time, Intelligent half-cycle mode uses half cycles as firing/non-firing periods.
Positive and negative going cycles are evened out, to ensure that no dc component arises. The following
examples describe half-cycle mode for 50%, 33% and 66% duty cycles.
50% DUTY CYCLE
The firing and non-firing time corresponds to a single supply cycle (figure 4.2.1e).
Ton Toff

For 50% duty cycle Tn = Toff = 2 half cycles

Figure 4.2.1e Half cycle mode: 50% duty cycle

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 65
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

4.2.1 FIRING MODES (Cont.)

33% DUTY CYCLE

For duty cycles less than 50%, the firing time is one half-cycle. For a 33% duty cycle, firing time is one half
cycle; the non-firing time is two half-cycles (figure 4.2.1f).
Ton Toff Ton Toff

For 33% duty cycle

Ton = 1 half cycle; Toff = 2 half cycles
Figure 4.2.1f Half cycle mode: 33% duty cycle

66% DUTY CYCLE

For duty cycles of greater than 50%, the non-firing time is one half-cycle. For 66% duty cycle, the firing time
is two half cycles; the non-firing time is one half cycle (figure 4.2.1g).

Ton Toff Ton Toff

For 66% duty cycle

Ton = 2 half cycles; Toff = 1 half cycle
Figure 4.2.1g Half cycle mode: 66% duty cycle

4.2.2 Feedback type

All feedback types (except ‘Open Loop’) are based on real-time measurement of electrical parameters that
are normalised to their equivalent Nominal values. Thus VRMS is normalised to Nominal Voltage; V2 is
normalised to the square of Nominal Voltage and ‘P’ is normalised to the product of Nominal Voltage and
Nominal Current.
V2 Feedback is directly proportional to the square of the RMS voltage measured across
the load. For two- or three-phase systems, feedback is proportional to the average of
the squares of the individual phase-to-phase or phase-to-Neutral RMS voltage across
each load.
Power Feedback is directly proportional to the total true power delivered to the load network.

I2 Feedback is directly proportional to the square of the RMS current through the load.
For two- or three-phase systems, feedback is proportional to the average of the
squares of the individual RMS load currents.
Vrms Feedback is directly proportional to the RMS voltage measured across the load or, for
multi-phase systems, to the average of the individual phase-to-phase or phase-to-
neutral RMS load voltages.
Irms Feedback is directly proportional to the RMS current through the load or, for multi-
phase systems, to the average of the individual RMS load currents.
Open loop No measurement feedback. The thyristor firing angle in Phase angle mode, or the duty
cycle in burst-firing mode, are proportional to the setpoint.

Note: VRMS and Irms require a specific wiring in Burst mode. Contact your local distributor.

HA179769
Page 66 Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

4.2.3 Transfer Mode

The control system can use automatic transfer of certain feedback parameters. For example with loads with
very low cold resistance, I2 feedback should be used to limit inrush current, but once the load has started to
warm up, Power feedback should be used; the control program can be configured to change feedback
mode automatically.
The Transfer mode can be selected as I2 to P as appropriate to the type of load being controlled.
None No feedback parameter transfer to the control program
I2 Selects transfer mode: I2 to the selected Feedback Mode (above).

4.2.4 Limitation features

This limiting is implemented using phase angle or duty cycle reduction depending on the type of control
(e.g. phase angle, burst firing).
To prevent damage on some particular applications the 'chop off' function can be used.
Note: The limiting function 'Chop-Off' is considered an 'Alarm' in EPower.

In order, for example, to prevent potentially damaging inrush currents, it is possible to set a value for power
or Current squared which is not to be exceeded during the mains period. For this case, limitation has to be
configured to run by phase angle reduction.
For loads exhibiting low impedance at low temperatures but a higher impedance at working temperature,
the current drawn reduces as the load warms and limiting gradually becomes unnecessary.
Section 6.7.3 describes the configuration parameters which allow the user to enter a Process Variable (PV)
and a setpoint (SP) for each phase, where the PV is the value to be limited (e.g. I2) and the SP is the value that
the PV must not exceed.

FIRING ANGLE LIMITING (IN PHASE ANGLE MODE)

For phase angle control, limiting is achieved by reducing the firing
angle on each half mains cycle such that the limit value of the relevant
parameter is not exceeded. Limiting is reduced, by the firing angle
gradually increasing, until the target setting is achieved.

FIRING ANGLE LIMITING (IN BURST MODE)

Target phase angle
Limiting
In Burst Mode limiting can also be achieved by reducing firing (gradually reducing)
Angle during the 'ON' time such that the limit value of the relevant
parameter is not exceeded.
In this way the PV must not exceed the limit SP during the ON time.
We get 'Burst of Phase Angle'. See figure.

DUTY CYCLE LIMITING (IN BURST MODE)

For Burst Firing only, limiting reduces the ‘On’ state of the burst firing driving the load. Load current, voltage
and active power are calculated over the period of each (Ton + Toff) period.
Ton Toff Ton Ton Toff Ton

Normal running. During limitation, amplitude increases when duty

cycle decrease

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 67
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

WARNING
1. Product current rating must be upper or equal to the maximum current of the load. The
maximum current of the load shall be calculated taking account of load resistive tolerance
(tolerance and variation due to temperature) and voltage tolerance. Failure to follow these
instructions may results in Branch circuit protection fuses, high-speed fuses (supplemental fuses)
and product overload
2. For high coefficient temperature resistive load Current limit function by phase angle reduction
may be selected to limit the inrush current of the load and downsized the rating of the product.
With Current limit function by phase angle reduction the product rating must be upper or equal
to the nominal current of the load and to Current limit function by phase angle reduction setting.
Failure to follow these instructions may results in Branch circuit protection fuses, high-speed
fuses (supplemental fuses) and product overload
3. With External current feedback, Current limit function by phase angle reduction will limit the
inrush current in the load which may not be the current in the product (ie resistive load at the
secondary side of a transformer). Ensure that the current in the product does not exceed the
product current rating with the setting of Current limit function by phase angle reduction.
4. The current limit function by phase angle reduction is not available with Intelligent Half Cycle
(IHC), The product rating shall be selected to cope with inrush current according to warning 6.
Failure to follow these instructions may results in Branch circuit protection fuses, high-speed
fuses (supplemental fuses) and product overload.
5. Duty cycle current limiting features (in burst mode), does not limit the peak current value. The
product rating shall be selected to cope with the peak current value according to warning 6.
Failure to follow these instructions may results in Branch circuit protection fuses, high-speed
fuses (supplemental fuses) and product overload.

CHOP OFF
This is a technique which detects an over-current alarm state and stops further thyristor firing for the duration
of that alarm state. All the relevant parameters are to be found in the Network Setup menu (see section
6.20.2).
There are two alarms which may trigger Chop Off, as follows:
1. The alarm is active when ChopOff1Threshold is exceeded for more than five seconds. This threshold
can be set to any value between 100% and 150% inclusive, of the unit’s nominal current (INominal).
2. The alarm is active if ChopOff2Threshold is exceeded more than a specified number of times
(NumberChop Off)) within a specified time period (Window Chop Off). ChopOff2Threshold is
adjustable between 100% and 350% inclusive, of INominal; NumberChop Off can be selected to any
value between 1 and 16 inclusive; Window Chop Off can be set to any value between 1 and 65535
seconds (approximately 18 hours 12 minutes).
Each time the threshold is exceeded, the unit stops firing, raises a chop off condition alarm, then after
100ms, restarts using an up-going safety ramp. The condition alarm is cleared if the unit successfully
restarts. If the alarm is raised more than the specified number of times within the specified window,
then the Chop Off alarm is set and the unit stops firing. Firing is not resumed until the operator
acknowledges the Chop Off alarm.

HA179769
Page 68 Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

5 OPERATOR MENU
At power up or after quitting the Quickstart menu, the unit initialises itself (figure 5) and then enters the first
summary page of the Operator menu (figure 5.2).

EN.NN = software
revision level

Return key Enter key

Figure 5 Initialisation screens
Note: If any faults are detected during initialisation (e.g. supply voltage missing), then error
messages appear on the display screen. The up and down arrow keys must be operated
simultaneously to acknowledge each alarm in turn, before any further operations can take place.

5.1 SUMMARY PAGES

Each summary page displays the voltage, current and power status described below calculated over the
mains period when in Phase Angle mode or over the Modulation Period when in Burst Mode. The user may
also edit the local setpoint from the summary pages. Where more than one, single phase unit is being
driven, the parameter names have a numeric suffix (e.g. V2) to indicate which phase is being displayed. The
enter key can be used to scroll through the available phases.
The Return key can be operated briefly to access the top level operator menu, which contains all summary
pages and Alarm and Event Log entries. (Operation of the Return key for an extended interval calls the
Access page - see section 6.3)
Notes:
1. A suffix ‘n’ below represents the number of the network currently being displayed.
2. ‘LSP’ is replaced in the display by ‘RSP’ for remote working.

5.1.1 Single phase summary page

Vn The RMS load voltage measurement for network ‘n’.
In The RMS load current measurement for network ‘n’.
Pn The true power delivered to network ‘n’.
LSPn The local setpoint value for network ‘n’ - see also Note 2 above.

5.1.2 Two or three phase summary page

Vavg The average RMS load voltage over all three loads.
Iavg The average RMS load current over all three loads.
P The true power delivered to the load network.
LSP The local setpoint value - see also Note 2 above.

5.1.3 Two by two phase summary page

This is a mode of operation whereby a single four-power-module unit can control two independent, three-
phase networks.
Vavn The RMS load voltage averaged over all three loads for network ‘n’.
Iavn The RMS load current averaged over all three loads for network ‘n’.
Pn The true power delivered to load network ‘n’.
LSPn The local setpoint value for network ‘n’ - see also Note 2 above.

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 69
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

5.2 TOP LEVEL OPERATOR (USER) MENU

1st Summary page appears:
1. After quitting the Quickstart menu.
2. On power up if the unit was left in Access level 1
(operator) or 2 (Engineer) at power down. (If pow-
ered off in Config mode, it restarts in Config mode.)

Use the ‘Enter’ key to scroll through summary pages.

The number of summary pages depends on the num-
Vn 248.9V ber (n) of separate power networks in the system.
In 120.3A n = 1, 2, 3 or 4 according to which Summary page is
Summary Page 1 being displayed.
Pn 29943W n is not present if there is only one summary page.
LSPn 55%
Hold the Enter key continuously operated to return to
Summary Page 2 the summary pages.
Hold the Return key continuously operated to call the
Access (Goto) page.

Summary Page 3
Enter Return

Summary Page 4
Alm summry Use the Enter key to scroll through alarms, acknowl-
Hold operated Miss Mains edging them as required.
for 2 secs min. Hold the Enter key continuously operated to return to
the summary pages.
USER Menu Hold the Return key continuously operated to call the
Alarms Please wait Access (Goto) page.

Use the Enter or up/down keys to scroll through the

USER Menu Event Log event log.
EventLog Event 1 Hold the Enter key continuously operated to return to
the summary pages.
ErrStandby Hold the Return key continuously operated to call the
HwDiffers Access (Goto) page.

Figure 5.2 User menu overview

Note: The summary page is displayed at switch on only if the unit has been configured, either via the
Quickstart menu, or at the factory. Otherwise, at first switch on, the Quickstart menu is entered.

Summary pages are discussed in section 5.1, above.

5.2.1 Alarm Summary pages

This page contains a list of currently active alarms, together with a group of four flashing bell symbols if the
alarm is unacknowledged. The ‘Enter’ key is used to scroll through the list, and the up/down arrow keys are
operated, simultaneously, to acknowledge each alarm, as required.

5.2.2 Event Log

This is a list of up to 40 event items where Event 1 is the latest. As shown in the figure below, Event number,
Event Type and Actual Event (known as ‘Event ID’) appear on the screen.
Event Types and Event IDs are given in table 5.2.2.

EventLog EventLog
EventNN Event30
Event Type Instrument
Event ID Conf Exit

General Typical example

HA179769
Page 70 Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

5.2.2 EVENT LOG (Cont.)

Event Type Event ID
Config error EXTERNAL PROCESS ALARMS
POWER MODULE POST ERRORS
DSP Error Deviation Band Comms error
Fatal error Deviation High
Comms timeout
General error Deviation Low
Fuse blown
Indication Alarm Network ‘n’ Active High
Power rail fail
Indication Alarm Network ‘n’ Inactive Low Watchdog
Indication Alarm Network ‘n’ FATAL ERRORS
PROCESS ALARMS
Acknowledged Internal Fuse configuration
Chop Off
Instrument event Restart Failure Closed loop
Network ‘n’ error CONFIG ERRORS
Main voltage fault
Power Module ‘n’ error Invalid parameter database
Output short circuit
Process Alarm External ‘n’ Active Invalid wiring table Partial load fault
Process Alarm External ‘n’ Inactive INDICATION ALARMS
Partial load unbalance
Process Alarm External ‘n’ Acknowledged Limit active
Temperature pre-alarm
Process Alarm Network ‘n’ Active Load over current Total Load Failure
Process Alarm Network ‘n’ Inactive Load Management over schedule
RESET ERRORS
Process Alarm Network ‘n’ Acknowledged Process Value transfer
Invalid RAM checksum
Restart Error GENERAL ERRORS DSP no response
Standby Error Processor watchdog
DSP task Watchdog
System Alarm Network ‘n’ Active Event Log fault
STANDBY ERRORS
System Alarm Network ‘n’ Inactive Power Module ‘n’ Calibration Invalid Power Module
System Alarm Network ‘n’ Acknowledged INSTRUMENT EVENTS
Revision
Cold start
Hardware mismatch
Config entry Power Module ‘n’ Ribbon
Config exit
Fault
Global Acknowledge
SYSTEM ALARMS
Power down Fuse Blown
‘n’ = 1, 2, 3 or 4 Quickstart entry
Mains Frequency Fault
Quickstart exit
Missing mains
NETWORK ERRORS NetworkDip
Phase ‘n’ power module Comms
Over Temperature
err
Power Module 24V fault
Phase ‘n’ power module Timeout Thyristor Open circuit
Phase ‘n’ power module watchdog
Thyristor Short circuit

Table 5.2.2 Event types and IDs

Notes:
1. Event ID ‘Fuse blown’ may appear in association with either Event Type ‘System Alarm Network
‘n’’ or Event Type ‘Power module ‘n’ Error’.
2. Event ID ‘Watchdog’ appears in association with Event Type ‘General error’ and indicates that the
microprocessor in the Driver Module has performed a watchdog reset.
3. Event ID ‘Watchdog fault’ appears with Event Type ‘Power Module ‘n’ Error’ and indicates that the
relevant Power Module PIC microprocessor has performed a watchdog reset.

5.2.3 Strategy Standby mode

For SCADA systems, in order to determine Standby mode, the user should use bit 8 of the Faultdet.Strategy-
Status parameter, not the Instrument.Mode parameter.
This is because Instrument Mode reflects user selection, not error states such as Hardware Mismatch.

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 71
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

6 ENGINEER AND CONFIGURATION LEVEL MENUS

These two menu sets are mostly identical, displaying the unit’s parameters in a number of sub-menus. As the
Engineer level menu is accessible whilst the Driver Module is on-line to the power module(s), the majority of
the displayed items are Read Only (i.e. they can be viewed, but not edited), although some non-critical items
can be changed.
Full configuration may be carried out from the Configuration level menus, which (apart from the access
menu) contain the same parameters as the equivalent Engineering level menus. It is normally
recommended, however, that configuration be carried out from a pc running iTools configuration software.
In either case, the unit goes off-line as soon as Configuration mode is entered.

6.1 ACCESS TO THE ENGINEER AND CONFIGURATION MENUS

6.1.1 Engineer level menu

The Engineer level menu is entered as follows (figure 6.1.1):
1. Operate the return key repeatedly, until no further changes occur, Enter key Return key
then hold the Return key continuously operated until the ‘Access’
‘Goto’ display appears.
2. Use the up or down arrow key until ‘Engineer’ appears.
3. Either wait for a few seconds or operate the Enter key.
4. Use the up or down arrow key to change the code to the Engineer level code (factory default = 2, but
reconfigurable in the CONFIG level menu)
5. Either wait for a few seconds or operate the Enter key to display the first Summary Page. Press and hold
the Enter key until the first page of the top level Engineer menu appears.
Note: when entering from configuration level no password is required. Once Engineer level has
been selected, the unit restarts in the Engineer top level menu

Operate ‘Return’ [rtn key] repeatedly until no further changes occur,

Any Menu then hold continuously operated until the access page appears.

Hold 4 to 5 secs

Access Goto Display depends on existing access level.

Operator

Access Goto Use up/down arrow key to select Engineer.

Once selected, wait a few seconds or operate
Engineer the ‘Enter’ key for pass code page.
Wait or

Access Pass code

0
Code =1 Default code = 2, but this may be edited in
Code =2 the Configuration menu

Wait or

V1 248.9
I1 120.3A
P1 29943w Summary page
LSP1 55%
Hold ‘Enter’ operated until first engineer level
menu page appears

ENG
Access
AnalogIP
AnalogOP

Figure 6.1.1 Access to the Engineer level menu

HA179769
Page 72 Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

6.1.2 Configuration level menu

The Configuration level menu is entered as follows (figure 6.1.2):
1. Operate the return key repeatedly, until no further changes occur, then hold the Return key
continuously operated until the ‘Access’ ‘Goto’ display appears.
2. Use the up or down arrow key until ‘Configuration’ appears.
3. Either wait for a few seconds or operate the Enter key.
4. Use the up or down arrow key to change the code to the Engineer level code (factory default = 3, but
reconfigurable in the CONFIG level Access menu)
5. Either wait for a few seconds or operate the Enter key to display the first page of the top level
Configuration menu.

Operate ‘Return’ [rtn key] repeatedly until no further changes occur,

Any Menu then hold continuously operated until the access page appears.

Hold 4 to 5 secs

Access Goto Use up arrow key twice to select Config

Operator

Access Goto
Engineer

Access Goto Once selected, wait a few seconds or operate

Config ‘Enter’ key for Pass code page.

Wait or

Access Pass code Use up arrow key to enter the Config Pass
0 code

Code =1
Code =2 Default code = 3, but this may be edited as
described in section 6.3.2
Code =3

Wait or

Top level
Config menu

Figure 6.1.2 Access to the Configuration level menu

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 73
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

6.2 TOP LEVEL MENU

Figure 6.2 shows the top level menu for Configuration level. Engineer top level menu similar (Default code
= 2).
Submenus are discussed in the following sections:

Note: Section 6 contains descriptions of all the menus which can appear. If an option or a feature is
not fitted and/or enabled, then it does not appear in the top level menu.

Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 6.3 Lgc2 logic operator . . . . . . . . Section 6.16

Analogue I/P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 6.4 Lgc8 logic operator . . . . . . . . Section 6.17
Analogue O/P . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 6.5 Math2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 6.18
Comms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 6.6 Modulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 6.19
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 6.7 Network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 6.20
Counter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 6.8 Predictive Load Management Section 6.21
Digital I/O. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 6.9 PLM Channels. . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 6.22
Energy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 6.10 Load tap changer. . . . . . . . . . Section 6.23
Event Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 6.11 Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 6.24
Fault Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 6.12 Setpoint provider. . . . . . . . . . Section 6.25
Firing O/P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 6.13 Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 6.26
Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 6.14 Totaliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 6.27
IP Monitor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 6.15 User value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 6.28

Use the up/down arrows to select the required

Pass code = 3 configuration area, then use the enter key to access

CONF Section 6.3 CONF Section 6.12 CONF Section 6.21

Access Faultdet PLM

CONF Section 6.4

CONF Section 6.13 CONF Section 6.22
AnalogIP FiringOP PLMChan

CONF Section 6.5 CONF CONF Section 6.23

Section 6.14
AnalogOP Instr PLMChan

CONF Section 6.6 CONF Section 6.15

CONF Section 6.24
Comms IPMon Relay

CONF CONF Section 6.16 CONF Section 6.25

Section 6.7
Control Lgc2 SetProv

CONF Section 6.8 CONF Section 6.17

CONF Section 6.26
Count Lgc8 Timer

CONF Section 6.9 CONF Section 6.18

CONF Section 6.27
Digital Math2 Totaliser

CONF Section 6.10 CONF Section 6.19 CONF Section 6.28

Energy Modultr UsrVal

CONF Section 6.11

CONF Section 6.20
EventLog Network

Figure 6.2 Top level menu

HA179769
Page 74 Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

6.3 ACCESS MENU

6.3.1 Engineer level menu

Entered from the Engineer top level menu, this allows the user to go to any other menu for which the access
code is known. The default access codes are Operator = 1; Engineer = 2, Config = 3, Quickstart = 4.
Figure 6.3.1 below, shows details.

ENG
Access

Access
Goto

Access Goto
Engineer

Wait or
Access Goto
Config

Wait or
Access Goto
Use up/down arrows to enter
Quick code for required level, then
wait or use ‘Enter’ key

Access Goto Operator Menu Access Pass Code

Operator 0
Wait or
Default codes
Config = 3 Quick = 4

Figure 6.3.1 Engineer level Access menu

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 75
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

6.3.2 Configuration level access menu

This menu allows:
1. The user to quit the Configuration level menu and ‘Goto’ a different access level. Operator and
Engineer level menus require no Pass code as they are considered to be at a lower security level than
Configuration. (Figure 6.3.2a shows the menu layout.)
2. The user to edit the current Pass codes for Engineer, Configuration and Quickstart menus (figure
6.3.2b),
3. Access to the Operator Interface push-buttons to be restricted in Operator and Engineer Level menus
(figure 6.3.2b).

GOTO MENU

ENG
Access

Access See figure 6.3.2b for other

Goto Access menu items

Access Goto Use up/down arrows to select required

Config level, then wait or use ‘Enter’ key

Access Goto
Engineer Engineer Menu

Access Goto
Operator Operator Menu

Access Goto Access Pass Code

Quick Start Menu
Quick 4
Use up/down arrows to select pass code
(default = 4) then wait or use ‘Enter’ key

Figure 6.3.2a GoTo menu

To change access level, the ‘Enter’ key is operated once to select ‘Goto’, then for a second time to enter the
Goto selection page.
The up/down keys are used to select the required access level. After a few seconds, or after a further entry
of the ‘Enter’ key, the unit restarts in the selected level (except for ‘Quick Start’ which requires the relevant
Pass Code (default = 4) to be entered).

HA179769
Page 76 Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

6.3.3 CONFIGURATION LEVEL ACCESS MENU (Cont.)

PASS CODE EDITING

CONF
Access

Access Access See figure 6.3.2a for

Goto Goto Config GoTo menu items

(If access level left unchanged)

Access Access Engineer Use up/down arrows to set

Engineer... Code 2 new pass code (default = 2)

Access Access Config Use up/down arrows to set

Config C... Code 3 new pass code (default = 3)

Access Access Quick Use up/down arrows to set

Quick Co... Code 4 new pass code (default = 4)

Access Use up/down arrows to set

Access Keylock user interface access for
Keylock None Operator/Engineer levels

Back to ‘Goto’

Figure 6.3.2b Access configuration

Code As depicted above, the ‘Enter’ key is used to select ‘GoTo’, then the up/down keys are
used to select the required access level’s Pass code for editing. Once the required level
is selected (e.g. Engineer), the ‘Enter’ key is used once more, to enter the edit page,
where the current Pass Code is displayed (e.g. 2). The up/down keys can now be used
to enter a new value of between 0 and 9999. If 0 is selected, then the relevant menu
will no longer be pass code protected.
After a few seconds, the new value blinks once to confirm that it has been written into
the configuration.
KeyLock None: No restriction. All parameters at the current access level may be viewed and
edited.
All: All editing and navigation is prevented. All keys are locked so it is not
possible to ‘undo’ this action from the Operator interface. Once ‘All’ is
selected, the keyboard can be released only via iTools.
Edit: Parameter editing is possible only in Configuration level; parameters are
Read Only in other levels. In the Operator or Engineer level menus, the ‘Back’
key is still active allowing access to the ‘Goto’ menu so that the access level
may be changed if the relevant Pass code is known.

Note: Keylock is available only from the user interface (i.e. it cannot be accessed from iTools or over
a communications link.)

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 77
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

6.4 ANALOGIP MENU

This menu item appears only if one or more analogue inputs have been configured as anything but ‘Off’ in
Quickstart, or if one or more analogue inputs has been enabled using iTools.

CONF Use up/down arrows to select AnalogIP, then ‘Enter’

AnalogIP

Use up/down arrows to select the required Analogue input (2 in this exam-
AnalogIP 1 ple), then ‘Enter’
Type Use the up/down arrows to select the parameter to be edited

Use the up/down arrows to

AnalogIP 2 Type select: 0 to 10V, 1 to 5V, 2 to 10V,
Type 0-10V 0 to 5V, 0 to 20mA or 4 to 20mA

AnalogIP 2 RangeHigh Use the up/down arrows to set

RangeHigh 10.0 Range High

AnalogIP 2 RangeLow Use the up/down arrows to set

RangeLow 0.0 Range Low

AnalogIP 2 PV The input in process units, clipped by Range

PV 1.0 High/Low if input is over/under range.

AnalogIP 2 MaesVal The input value in electrical units.

MaesVal 0.0

Back to’ Type’.

Figure 6.4 Analogue input menu

6.4.1 Analogue input parameters

Type Allows the type of input to be set as one of: 0 to 10V, 1 to 5V, 2 to 10V, 0 to 5V, 0 to
20mA, 4 to 20mA.
RangeHigh High range of input for scaling from measurement units to process units. PV is
clipped to range high if input goes over range.
RangeLow Low range of input for scaling from measurement units to process units. PV is
clipped to range low if input goes under range.
PV The scaled value in process units. Clipped to the Range High or Range Low value if
the signal goes over range or under range respectively.
MeasVal The value at the instrument terminals in electrical units.

HA179769
Page 78 Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

6.5 ANALOGOP MENU

This menu item appears only if one or more analogue outputs have been configured as anything but ‘Off’ in
Quickstart, or if one or more analogue outputs has been enabled using iTools.
This provides a current or voltage output scaled from a Process Variable (PV) using Range High and Range
Low. Figure 6.5.1 shows the ‘Main’ configuration submenu; figure 6.5.2 shows the alarm parameters.

6.5.1 Analogue output ‘Main’ submenu parameters

CONF Use up/down arrows to select AnalogOP, then ‘Enter’

Use up/down arrows to select the required Analogue output, then ‘Enter’
AnalogOP Use up/down arrows to select parameter to edit

AnalogOP 1 See figure 6.5.2 for Alarm parameters

Type

Main Type Use the up/down arrows to select:

0 to 10V, 1 to 5V, 2 to 10V, 0 to 5V,
Type 0-10V 0 to 20mA or 4 to 20mA.

Main RangeHigh Use the up/down arrows to set

RangeHigh 100.0 Range High

Main RangeLow Use the up/down arrows to set

RangeLow 0.0 Range Low

Main PV Input value for retransmission

PV 0.0

Main MeasVal Output value (PV scaled to Range low and Range
MeasVal 0.0 high values)

Back to’ Type’.

Figure 6.5.1 Analogue output ‘Main’ menu

Type Allows the output type to be set as one of: 0 to 10V, 1 to 5 V, 2 to 10V, 0 to 5V, 0 to
20mA, 4 to 20mA.
RangeHigh Used to scale the Process Variable (PV) from Process units to electrical units.
RangeLow Used to scale the PV from Process units to electrical units.
PV The value to be output by the analogue output.
MeasVal The electrical output value derived by mapping the input PV via input range to
output range.

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 79
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

6.5.2 Analogue output ‘Alm’ parameters

Use up/down arrows to select AnalogOP, then ‘Enter’
CONF Use up/down arrows to select the required Analogue output, then ‘Enter’
AnalogOP Use up/down arrows to select parameter to edit

AnalogOP 1 See figure 6.5.1 for ‘Main’ menu

Key is yellow outline
Main Key is solid yellow

AnalogOP 1 AlmDis Output Fault = Alarm enabled;

AlmDis Output F... = Alarm disabled

AnalogOP 1 AlmDet Output Fault = Alarm not detected;

AlmDet Output F... = Alarm detected

AnalogOP 1 AlmSig Output Fault = Alarm not detected;

AlmSig Output F... = Alarm detected

AnalogOP 1 AlmLat Output Fault = Alarm not latched;

AlmLat Output F... = Alarm latched

AnalogOP 1 AlmAck Output Fault = Alarm not acknowledged;

AlmAck Output F... = Alarm acknowledged

AnalogOP 1 AlmStop Output Fault = output enabled;

AlmStop Output F... = output stopped on alarm

Figure 6.5.2 Analogue output alarm parameter access

AlmDis Allows the user to view the current disable status of the output Fault alarm.
AlmDet Indicates whether the alarm has been detected and is active.
AlmSig Signals that the alarm has occurred and whether it is latched. To assign the alarm to a
relay (for example), it is the AlmSig parameter that should be wired.
AlmLat Allows the user to set the alarm as latching or non-latching.
AlmAck Allows the user to view the current acknowledgement status of the output Fault
alarm.
AlmStop Allows the user to set up the alarm to disable Power Module firing whilst active.

Note: Output fault may be triggered by either short circuit or open circuit.

HA179769
Page 80 Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

6.6 COMMS MENU

CONF
Comms
See fig 6.6.2
Comms Comms User Enter fourth Byte of Subnet Mask
User RmtPanel Subnet4... address.

User Displays type of communications fit- User Enter first Byte of Gateway address.
Ident ted Gateway1 E.G. 111.222.333.444

User Displays the protocol for the type of User Enter second Byte of Gateway address.
Protocol communications fitted Gateway2 E.G. 111.222.333.444

Allows Baud Rate to be selected for

User relevant protocols. Selectable values
User Enter third Byte of Gateway address.
Baud Rate depend on communications type DefGate3 E.G. 111.222.333.444

Allows the unit address to be set. Each

User instrument on the link must have a
User Enter fourth Byte of Gateway address.
Address unique address. DefGate4 E.G. 111.222.333.444

Displays the number of addresses User

User occupied by this EPower unit (See text
Enter first Byte of Preferred Master address.
Occupied... IP1 Pref... E.G. 111.222.333.444
for details).

User Allows ‘Odd’, ‘Even’ or ‘None’ to be User Enter second Byte of Preferred Master
Parity selected for relevant protocols. IP2 Pref... address.

User Select Comms delay on or off for rel- User Enter third Byte of Preferred Master address.
Comms De... evant protocols. IP3 Pref... E.G. 111.222.333.444

User Allows Unit ID checking ensble to User Enter fourth Byte of Preferred Master
Unit IDe... be set up. IP4 Pref... address.

User Choose ‘Fixed’ or ‘Dynamic’. User Select ‘Yes’ to view MAC

DHCP ena... Show MAC address or ‘No’ to hide MAC

First Byte of MAC address

User Enter first Byte of IP address. User E.G. 11.22.33.44.55.66
IP1 Addr... E.G. 111.222.333.444 MAC1 (Appears only if ‘Show MAC’ = ‘Yes’.

Second Byte of MAC address

User Enter second Byte of IP address. User E.G. 11.22.33.44.55.66
IP2 Addr E.G. 111.222.333.444 MAC2 (Appears only if ‘Show MAC’ = ‘Yes’.

Third Byte of MAC address

User Enter third Byte of IP address. User
E.G. 11.22.33.44.55.66
IP3 Addr E.G. 111.222.333.444 MAC3 (Appears only if ‘Show MAC’ = ‘Yes’.

Fourth Byte of MAC address

User Enter fourth Byte of IP address. User E.G. 11.22.33.44.55.66
IP4 Addr E.G. 111.222.333.444 MAC4 (Appears only if ‘Show MAC’ = ‘Yes’.

Fifth Byte of MAC address

User Enter first Byte of Subnet Mask address. User
E.G. 11.22.33.44.55.66
Subnet1... E.G. 111.222.333.444 MAC5 (Appears only if ‘Show MAC’ = ‘Yes’.

Enter second Byte of Subnet Mask User Sixth Byte of MAC address
User
address. E.G. 111.222.333.444 MAC6 E.G. 11.22.33.44.55.66
Subnet2...
(Appears only if ‘Show MAC’ = ‘Yes’.

Enter third Byte of Subnet Mask address.

User User Shows status of Ethernet network
E.G. 111.222.333.444
Subnet3... Network

Figure 6.6 Communications User menu

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 81
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

6.6 COMMS MENU (Cont.)

This menu allows the user to view, and in some cases, to edit communications parameters associated with
the communications option. The user may also view the Address and Baud Rate parameters associated with
the Remote Panel option.

6.6.1 Communications User menu parameters

The following parameter list includes all parameters which can appear. Only those parameters which are
relevant to the fitted communications option appear in the menu list.
ID Displays the type of communications board fitted: RS-485 (EIA 485), Ethernet, or a
Network comms board such as Profibus or DeviceNet. (These options are fully
discussed in the Communications manual, HA179770.) ID is not user editable.
Protocol Read only. Displays the current transmission protocol: Modbus, Modbus TCP,
Network, Profibus, DeviceNet, CANopen, CC-Link, EtherNet/IP.
Baud Allows the Baud rate setting for the unit to be set. Available values vary according to
the type of communications board fitted.
Address Allows the instrument address to be set up. Each instrument in a communications
link must have a unique address allocated to it. The available address ranges vary
according to link protocol.
Occupied Stations Appearing for CC-Link protocol only, this read-only value shows the number of
addresses occupied by the unit, according to the number of input and output
definitions are set up (in iTools Fieldbus I/O Gateway) , and as shown in the table
below. For example, if the address of this unit is 4, and the number of occupied
stations is 3, then the next available address is 7.
Number of Maximum No. of Maximum No. of
occupied stations input definitions output definitions Input definition:
1 3 4 2-byte word parameter to be read by the master.
2 7 8 Output definition:
2-byte word parameter to be written by master.
3 11 12
4 15 16

Parity Allows the parity setting to be selected as None, odd or Even. None is often used
because there are other corruption detection methods (e.g. CRC) in use, and
selecting ‘Odd’ or ‘Even’ increases the number of bits transmitted, thus reducing
throughput.
Delay Selects Transmission Delay ‘On’ or ‘Off’. ‘On’ inserts a guaranteed 10 millisecond
delay between reception and response. This is needed by some converter boxes in
order to switch driver direction.
Unit ident Enables/disables the checking of the Modbus TCP Unit Identity field.
Strict: The Modbus TCP Unit Identity Field (UIF) does not have to match the
instrument address. The instrument responds only to Hex value FF in the UIF.
Loose The Modbus TCP Unit Identity Field (UIF) does not have to match the
: instrument address. The instrument responds any value in the UIF.
Instr: The Modbus TCP Unit Identity Field (UIF) must match the instrument address
or no response will be made to messages.
A value of 0 in the UIF is treated as a ‘Broadcast Message’.
DHCP Enable Allows the user to choose whether the IP address and subnet mask are fixed or to be
supplied by a DHCP Ethernet server.
IP1 Address The first byte of the IP address. (If the IP address were to be 111.222.333.444, then
the first byte would be 111; the second byte 222, and so on).
IP2 to IP4 Address As IP address 1, but for the remaining three Bytes.
Subnet1 to Subnet4 Mask Local network information
As IP Address 1 to 4, but for the Subnet Mask (IP address, subnet mask
Gateway1 to 4 As IP Address 1 to 4, but for the Default Gateway. address etc.) is normally sup-
IP1 Pref Master to IP4 Pref Master plied by the user’s IT depart-
ment.
As for IP Address 1 to 4, but for the Preferred Master.

HA179769
Page 82 Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

6.6.1 COMMUNICATIONS USER MENU PARAMETERS (Cont.)

Show MAC Allows the user to choose whether the unit’s MAC address may be shown (Yes), or
not (No).
MAC1 Appears only if Show MAC (above) is set to ‘Yes’. This is the first byte of the non-
editable MAC address. (If the MAC address were to be 11.22.33.44.55.66 then the
first byte would be 11; the second byte 22, and so on).
MAC2 to MAC6 As for MAC1, but for bytes two to six respectively
Network Read Only. Also known as ‘Ethernet Status’. Shows the status of the communictions
link, as follows:
Running: Link connected and running
Init: Communications initialising
Ready: Network ready to accept connection
Offline: Network offline
Bad: Network Status Bad GSD (Profibus only)
NetStatus Read Only. Appears to ‘Fieldbus’ protocols only. Shows the status of the
communications network, as follows:
Setup: Anybus module set-up in progress
Init: Anybus module is initialising network-specific functionality
Ready: Process Data channel ready but inactive
Idle: Interface is inactive
Active: Process Data channel is active and error free
Error: One or more errors have been detected
Fault: Host fault detected.

6.6.2 COMMS REMOTE PANEL PARAMETERS

CONF
Comms
See fig 6.6
Comms Comms
RmtPanel User

Rmt Panel Address Set a unique address between 1 and 254

Address 1 inclusive for each instrument

Use the up/down arrows to select

Rmt Panel Baud 9600 or 19200 as Baud rate for the
Baud 9600 remote panel network

Figure 6.6.2 Communications remote panel menu

Address Each instrument on the link must be given a unique address between 1 and 254
inclusive.
This may be the same or different from the address set in the CONF ‘User’ Menu
(section 6.6.1).
Baud Displays the Baud rate for the Remote panel communications. Either 9600 or 19200.
This may be the same or different from the Baud rate set in the CONF ‘User’ Menu
(section 6.6.1).

Note: Remote Panel parity setting should be set to ‘No parity’ or ‘None’.

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 83
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

6.7 CONTROL MENU

The control menu provides the control algorithm to perform power control and transfer, threshold limiting
and phase angle reduction (in the case of burst firing). Figure 6.7, below, gives an overview of the menu,
which is described in the following sections:
6.7.1 Setup
6.7.2 Main
6.7.3 Limit
6.7.4 Diag (Diagnostics)
6.7.5 AlmDis (Alarm disable)
6.7.6 AlmDet (Alarm detection)
6.7.7 AlmSig (Alarm signalling)
6.7.8 AlmLat (Alarm latch)
6.7.9 AlmAck (Alarm Acknowledge)
6.7.10 AlmStop (Stop firing on alarm)

CONF
Comms

Control N Use up/down arrows, to select the required control algorithm, then Enter. Use
return key one or more times from within menu to return to this page

Section 6.7.1 Section 6.7.2 Section 6.7.3 Section 6.7.4 Section 6.7.5 Section 6.7.6
Control Control Control Control Control Control
Setup Main Limit Diag AlmDis AlmDet

Setup Main Limit Diag AlmDis AlmDet

Standby PV PV1 Status ClosedLo... ClosedLo...

Setup Main Limit Diag AlmDis AlmDet

NominalPV SP PV2 Output PVTransf... PVTransf...

Setup Main Limit Diag AlmDis AlmDet

Limit En... Trans PV PV3 PA Limit Limitati... Limitati...

Setup Main Limit

Trans En... Trans SP... SP1

Setup Main Limit

FF Type TI SP2

Setup Limit
FF Gain SP3

Setup Limit
FF Offset TI

Section 6.7.7 Section 6.7.8 Section 6.7.9 Section 6.7.10

Control Control Control Control
AlmSig AlmLat AlmAck AlmStop

AlmSig AlmLat AlmAck AlmStop

ClosedLo... ClosedLo... ClosedLo... ClosedLo...

AlmSig AlmLat AlmAck AlmStop

PVTransf... PVTransf... PVTransf... PVTransf...

AlmSig AlmLat AlmAck AlmStop

Limitati... Limitati... Limitati... Limitati...

Figure 6.7 Control menu

HA179769
Page 84 Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

6.7.1 Control Setup Parameters

This contains parameters for setting the type of control to be performed.
CONF
Control

Control N Use up/down arrows, to select the required control loop, then Enter. Use [rtn
Setup return key one or more times from within menu to return to this page

Control
Setup

Setup Standby Use up/down arrows to set the

Standby unit to standby (Yes) or not (No).

Setup Nominal PV Enter Nominal PV value

NominalPV 57500 (see text for more details)

Setup Limit Enable Enables threshold limit feature

Limit En...

Setup Trans Enable Enable Transfer (Propor-

Trans En... tional limit)

Setup FF Type Select the type of Feed

FF Type Tri Forward to be used.

Setup FF Gain Enter Feed Forward gain

FF Gain 0% value to be applied.

Setup FF Offset Enter Feed Forward off-

FF Offset 0.0 set value to be applied.

Back to Standby

Figure 6.7.1 Control setup menu

Standby If Yes, the controller enters Standby mode and zero % power is demanded. When
removed from Standby the unit returns to operating mode in a controlled manner.
Nominal PV Normally the nominal value for each control type. For example, for feedback mode =
V2, Vsq should be wired to the Main PV, and Nominal PV set to the nominal value
expected for V2 (usually VLoadNominal2).
Limit Enable Used to enable/disable threshold limit.
Trans Enable Select Transfer Enable (Proportional limit) as ‘Yes’ (enabled) or ‘No’ (not enabled).
FFType Feedforward Type.
Off: Feedforward is disabled
Feedforward value is the dominant element of the output. Trimmed by
Trim:
the control loop based on the Main PV and setpoint.
The feedforward value is the output from the controller. Open loop
FFonly:
control may be configured by this means.
Feedforward is for use only with the main control elements, and the limit loop will
override feedforward.
FFGain The entered gain value is applied to the Feedforward input.
FFOffset The entered value is applied to the Feedforward input after the Gain value has been
applied to it.

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 85
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

6.7.2 Control Main Parameters

This menu contains all the parameters associated with the Main control loop.
CONF
Control

Control N Use up/down arrows, to select the required control loop, then Enter. Use [rtn
Setup return key one or more times from within menu to return to this page

Control Use up/down arrows, to select ‘Main’, then Enter.

Main

Main PV Use up/down arrows to set the value of

PV 0 the Main PV of the controller

Main Use the up/down arrows to set

SP the main Setpoint
SP 0.0 (% of Nominal PV).

Main Trans PV The PV measurement for transfer.

Trans PV 0

Main Trans Span Use the up/down arrows to define the

Trans Sp... 0 span of operation for transfer.

Main TI Use the up/down arrows to define the

TI 1 integration time of the main PI loop

Back to PV

Figure 6.7.2 Control Main parameters

PV Displays the main Controller Process Variable (PV). Wired to the measurement which
it is to be controlled. For example, to perform V2 control. Vsq should be wired to this
(PV) parameter and Nominal PV configured appropriately (section 6.7.1).
SP The Setpoint to control at, as a percentage of Nominal PV (the upper range of the
loop in engineering units). For example, if NominalPV = 500V RMS, and SP is set to
20%, the controller attempts to regulate at 500 x 20/100 = 100V RMS. If Transfer or
Limit is enabled, these will override SP.
Trans PV Transfer PV. This is the PV measurement for transfer. For example, if a V2 to I2 transfer
is required, the Vsq should be wired to MainPV and Isq to TransferPV. Appears only if
Trans Enable (section 6.7.1) is set to ‘Yes’ (via iTools).
Transfer Span The span of operation for transfer. Appears only if Trans Enable (section 6.7.1) is set
to ‘Yes’ (via iTools).
TI Allows the user to define an integral time for the main PI control loop.

HA179769
Page 86 Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

6.7.3 Control Limit parameters

Parameters relating to the limit control loop.
CONF
Control

Control N Use up/down arrows, to select the required control loop, then Enter. Use [rtn ke
Setup return key one or more times from within menu to return to this page

Control Use up/down arrows, to select ‘Limit’, then Enter.

Limit

PV1 The Process Variable value which

Limit is to perform first threshold limit
PV1 0 control

The Process Variable value which

Limit PV2 is to perform second threshold
PV2 0 limit control

The Process Variable value which

Limit PV3 is to perform third threshold limit
PV3 1 control

Limit SP1 The setpoint for PV1

SP1 1

Limit SP2
1
The setpoint for PV2
SP2

Limit SP3 The setpoint for PV3

SP3 1

Limit TI Use the up/down arrows to define the inte-

TI 1 gral time for the limit control loop

Back to PV1

Figure 6.7.3 Control Limit menu

PV1 to PV3 Threshold value for limit loops 1 to 3 respectively. This is the value to perform
threshold limit control. ‘Limit Enable’ must be set to ‘Yes’ in the Setup menu (section
6.7.1).
SP1 to SP3 The setpoint for limit loops 1 to 3 respectively.
TI The integration time for the limit PI control loop.
Example:
If I2 threshold limiting is required, Isq is wired to PV1, and the required threshold value is entered at SP1. In
phase angle configuration, the phase angle is reduced to achieve the limit setpoint; in burst firing, the unit
continues to fire in bursts, but these bursts are of phase angle in order to achieve the limit setpoint. The
modulation continues to attempt to reach the main setpoint.
Also known as phase angle reduction burst firing.

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 87
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

6.7.4 Control Diag parameters

This menu contains diagnostic parameters related to Control.

CONF
Control

Control N Use up/down arrows, to select the required control loop, then Enter. Use
Setup return key one or more times from within menu to return to this page

Control Use up/down arrows, to select ‘Diag’, then Enter.

Diag

Diag Status Displays the current operating

Status Main PV state of the controller.

Diag Output Displays the output demand

Output 0.0 of the controller, in %

Diag PA Limit Phase angle output for Phase

PA Limit 100 Angle reduction in burst firing

Back to status

Figure 6.7.4 Control Diag menu

Status Indicates the current operating state of the controller:

Main PV: The control strategy is using Main PV as the control input
Transfer function The transfer input us being used as the input to the control
active: strategy.
Control limiting is currently active using limit PV1(2)(3) and
Limit 1(2)(3) active:
limit SP 1(2)(3).
Output The current output demand in percent. Normally wired to Modulator.In or
FiringOP.In
PA Limit Applies only to Burst Firing control modes. If this parameter is wired to
FiringOP.PALimit, the power module will deliver bursts of phase angle firing
depending both on the Main Setpoint and on the Limit Setpoint.

HA179769
Page 88 Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

6.7.5 Control Alarm disable parameters

Allows each alarm of the control block to be disabled, individually. May be wired.

CONF
Control

Control N Use up/down arrows, to select the required control loop, then Enter. Use
Setup return key one or more times from within menu to return to this page

Control Use up/down arrows, to select ‘AlmDis’, then Enter.

AlmDis

AlmDis ClosedLoop Used to disable the ‘Loop Break’ alarm

ClosedLo... Solid yellow = Alarm disabled

AlmDis PVTransfer Used to disable the ‘Transfer Active’ alarm

PVTransf... Solid yellow = Alarm disabled

AlmDis Limitation Used to disable the ‘Control Limit Active’ alarm

Limitati... Solid yellow = Alarm disabled

Back to Closed Loop

Figure 6.7.5 Control Alarm disable menu

Closed Loop The ‘piano key’ in the bottom right corner of the display indicates the current enable
status of the closed loop alarm. The up and down arrows are used to enable/disable
the alarm. An ‘empty’ key indicates that the alarm is enabled; a solid yellow key
means that the alarm is disabled.
PV Transfer As for Closed Loop, but for the ‘Transfer Active’ alarm.
Limitation As for Closed Loop, but for the ‘Control limit active’ alarm.

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 89
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

6.7.6 Control Alarm detection parameters

Indicates whether each alarm has been detected and whether or not it is currently active.

CONF
Control

Control N Use up/down arrows, to select the required control loop, then Enter. Use
Standby return key one or more times from within menu to return to this page

Control Use up/down arrows, to select AlmDet, then Enter.

AlmDet

AlmDet ClosedLoop Solid yellow = Closed loop alarm is active.

ClosedLo...

AlmDet PVTransfer Solid yellow = Transfer is currently active

PVTransf...

AlmDet Limitation Solid yellow = Limitation control loop is active

Limitati...

Back to ClosedLoop

Figure 6.7.6 Control Alarm detection menu

Closed Loop The ‘piano key’ in the bottom right corner of the display shows whether or not the
closed loop alarm is currently active. An ‘empty’ key indicates that the alarm is
inactive; a solid yellow key means that the alarm is active.
PV Transfer As for Closed Loop, but for the ‘Transfer Active’ alarm.
Limitation As for Closed Loop, but for the ‘Control limit active’ alarm.

HA179769
Page 90 Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

6.7.7 Control Alarm signalling parameters

Signals that an alarm has occurred and has been latched (if so configured in ‘Alarm Latch’ (section 6.7.8)). If
it is required that an alarm is to be assigned to a relay (for example), then the appropriate alarm signalling
parameter should be used.
CONF
Control

Control N Use up/down arrows, to select the required control loop, then Enter. Use
Setup return key one or more times from within menu to return to this page

Control
Use up/down arrows, to select ‘AlmSig’, then ‘Enter’.
AlmSig

AlmSig ClosedLoop Solid yellow = Indicates that the loop alarm has
ClosedLo... occurred.

AlmSig PVTransfer Solid yellow = Signals that the transfer alarm has
occurred.
PVTransf...

AlmSig Limitation Solid yellow = Signals that the transfer alarm has
Limitati... occurred.

Back to ClosedLoop

Figure 6.7.7 Control Alarm Signalling menu

Closed Loop The ‘piano key’ in the bottom right corner of the display indicates whether the closed
loop break alarm is currently active. An ‘empty’ key indicates that the alarm is
inactive; a solid yellow key means that the alarm is active.
PV Transfer As for Closed Loop, but for the ‘Transfer Active’ alarm.
Limitation As for Closed Loop, but for the ‘Control limit active’ alarm.

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 91
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

6.7.8 Control Alarm Latch parameters

Allows each alarm to be configured as latching or not latching. The latched status is shown in the Network
AlmSig submenu (ref section 6.20.3).

CONF
Control

Control N Use up/down arrows, to select the required control loop, then Enter. Use
Setup return key one or more times from within menu to return to this page

Control Use up/down arrows, to select ‘AlmLat’, then Enter.

AlmLat

AlmLat ClosedLoop Solid yellow = Indicates that the loop alarm is

configured as a latching alarm.
ClosedLo...

AlmLat PVTransfer Solid yellow = Signals that the transfer alarm is

PVTransf... configured as a latching alarm.

AlmLat Limitation Solid yellow = Signals that the limitation alarm is

configured as a latching alarm.
Limitati...

Back to ClosedLoop

Figure 6.7.8 Control Alarm latching menu

Closed Loop Use the up/down arrows to change the latching status of the alarm. The ‘piano key’ in
the bottom right corner of the display indicates whether the closed loop alarm is
latching (solid yellow) or non-latching (‘empty’).
PV Transfer As for Closed Loop, but for the ‘Transfer Active’ alarm.
Limitation As for Closed Loop, but for the ‘Control limit active’ alarm.

HA179769
Page 92 Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

6.7.9 Control Alarm Acknowledgement parameters

This menu allows individual alarms to be acknowledged. On acknowledgement, the related Signalling
parameter is cleared. The Acknowledge parameters automatically clear after being written.
If the alarm is still active (as shown by the Alarm Detection display) it may not be acknowledged.

CONF
Control

Control N Use up/down arrows, to select the required control loop, then Enter. Use
return key one or more times from within menu to return to this page

Control
Use up/down arrows, to select ‘AlmAck’, then ‘Enter’.
AlmAck

AlmAck ClosedLoop Solid yellow = the closed loop alarm has not
been acknowledged.
ClosedLo...

AlmAck PVTransfer Solid yellow = the transfer alarm has not been
PVTransf... acknowledged.

AlmAck Limitation Solid yellow = the limitation alarm has not been
Limitati... acknowledged.

Back to ClosedLoop

Figure 6.7.9 Control Alarm Acknowledge menu

Closed Loop The ‘piano key’ in the bottom right corner of the display shows whether the closed
loop alarm has been acknowledged or not. An ‘empty’ key indicates that the alarm is
acknowledged; a solid yellow key indicates that the alarm is unacknowledged. The
up/down arrow keys are used to acknowledge.
PV Transfer As for Closed Loop, but for the ‘Transfer Active’ alarm.
Limitation As for Closed Loop, but for the ‘Control limit active’ alarm.

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 93
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

6.7.10 Control Alarm Stop parameters

Allows individual channels to be configured such that it will stop the associated power channel from firing
whilst the alarm is active. This feature is activated by the signalling parameters, so the alarm stop may be
latching.

CONF
Control

Control N Use up/down arrows, to select the required control loop, then Enter. Use
Setup return key one or more times from within menu to return to this page

Control Use up/down arrows, to select ‘AlmStop’, then Enter.

AlmStop

AlmStop ClosedLoop Solid yellow = the closed loop alarm pre-

vents firing when active.
ClosedLo...

AlmStop PVTransfer Solid yellow = the transfer alarm pre-

PVTransf... vents firing when active.

AlmStop Limitation Solid yellow = the limitation alarm pre-

vents firing when active.
Limitati...

Back to ClosedLoop

Figure 6.7.10 Control Alarm Stop menu

Closed Loop The ‘piano key’ in the bottom right corner of the display shows whether the closed
loop alarm has been configured to disable firing or not. An ‘empty’ key indicates that
the firing is enabled; a solid yellow key indicates that the firing is disabled.
PV Transfer As for Closed Loop, but for the ‘Transfer Active’ alarm.
Limitation As for Closed Loop, but for the ‘Control limit active’ alarm.

HA179769
Page 94 Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

6.8 COUNTER MENU

The counter output is a 32-bit integer the value of which is recalculated every sample period. When a clock
state change from 0 (false) to 1 (true) is detected the counter value is incremented if the count direction is
‘up’ or decremented if the direction is ‘down’.
At reset, the counter value is set to 0 for count up counters or to the ‘Target’ value for count down counters.

6.8.1 Counter configuration menu

CONF
Count

Count N Use up/down arrows to select Counter number, then Enter. Use return
key one or more times from within menu to return to this page
Enable

Count N Enable Use up/down arrows to enable or

Enable disable the selected counter

Count N Direction Use up/down arrows to set count

Direction direction as ‘Up’ or ‘Down’.

Count N Ripple Carry Shows whether ripple carry is

Ripple C... active (On) or not (Off).

Count N ‘Yes’ if up counter has exceeded tar-

Overflow get. OR if down counter has reached
Overflow zero. Otherwise ‘No’.

Use up/down arrows to change state of

Count N Clock clock. (Counter increments or decre-
Clock 0 ments on 0 to 1 Clock transition)

Count N Target Target value for count-up counters, or

Target 9999 starting value for count-down counters.

Count N Count The current value of the counter.

Count 0

Count N Reset Use up/down arrows to select ‘Yes’ to carry

Reset out counter reset.

Count N Clear Overflow Use up/down arrows to clear the over-

Clear Ov... flow ‘flag’.

Back to ‘Enable’

Figure 6.8.1 Counter menu

Enable The counter responds to clock transitions when enabled; the count is frozen when
disabled.
Direction Select up or down as the direction of count. Up counters start at (and are reset to)
zero; down counters start from (and are reset to) the Target value (below)
Ripple Carry The Ripple carry output of one counter can act as the enabling input for the next
counter in a cascade. Ripple carry is set ‘true’ when the counter is enabled and its
value is either zero (for count down timers) or equal to the Target value (count up
counters).
Overflow Overflow becomes ‘true’ when the value of the counter is either zero (for count down
timers) or equal to the Target value (count up counters).
Clock The counter increments or decrements on a positive going edge (0 to 1; False to
true).

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 95
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

6.8 COUNTER MENU (Cont.)

Target Up counters: Start at zero and count towards the Target value. When this value is
reached, Overflow and Ripple-carry are set true (value = 1).
Down counters: Start at the Target value and count towards zero. When zero is
reached, Overflow and Ripple-carry are set true (value = 1).
Count The current value of the counter. This is a 32-bit integer which accumulates clock
transitions. Minimum value is zero.
Reset Resets up-counters to zero or down-counters to the Target value. Reset also sets
Overflow to False (i.e. Overflow = 0)
Clear Overflow Sets Overflow to False (i.e. Overflow = 0)

6.8.2 Cascading counters

As implied above, it is possible to ‘wire’ counters in cascade mode. Details for an ‘up’ counter are shown in
figure 6.8.2, below. Down counter configuration is similar.
Clock

Counts clock rising edges Counts the number of

Clock times Counter 1 tar-
get is exceeded
Enable Count 1 Clock
(high= enabled)
Direction Ripple/carry 1 Enable Count 2

Target
Counter 1 Direction Ripple/carry To further
Overflow 1
Counter 2 counters
Reset Target Overflow
(high= reset values)
Reset
Clear overflow
Clear overflow
Clear overflow
(High = Clear overflow flag) Clear overflow

Clock
Clock Count 2 Count 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 0 0 0
1 0 1
Count 1
4 4 2 0 2
(Target = 4) 3 3
2 2 2 3 0 3
1 1 1
0 0 0 4 0 4
Ripple/Carry 1 5 1 0
6 1 1
7 1 2
Overflow 1 8 1 3
9 1 4
10 2 0
Count 2 2
11 2 1
0
1 12 2 2

Figure 6.8.2 Cascading up counters

Note: Counter 2 above counts the number of times that Counter 1 target is exceeded. By
permanently enabling counter 2, and wiring counter 1 ‘Ripple Carry’ output to counter 2 ‘Clock’
input (replacing the connection to the clock pulse stream), counter 2 will indicate the number of
times counter 1 target is reached, rather than exceeded.

HA179769
Page 96 Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

6.9 DIGITAL I/O MENU

Digital I/O configuration.

CONF
Control

Digital N Use up/down arrows to select Digital I/O number, then Enter. Use return [rtn
key one or more times from within menu to return to this page

Use up/down arrows to

Digital N Type select IP Contact, IPVolts
Type IPContac (Input volts) or OP (Digital

Use up/down arrows to select Yes

Digital N Invert or No (to invert the signal or not,
Invert No respectively).

Digital N PV Desired output value, or the state of

PV 0 the input (see text for further details).

Sense of the output (0 or 1), or the

Digital N Meas Val electrical input at the terminals (see
Meas Val 0 text for further details).

Back to ‘Type’

Figure 6.9 Digital I/O menu

Type Selects I/O type: Logic Input, IPContact or digital output. For pinout details, see
figure 2.2.1a.
Invert Sets the inversion status to ‘No’ or ‘Yes’.
When set to ‘No’, there is no inversion (e.g. if MeasVal = 0 then PV = 0).
When set to ‘Yes’, an inversion takes place (e.g. if MeasVal = 0 then PV = 1)
MeasVal For inputs, this shows the value measured at the instrument terminals, in electrical
units. For outputs, this shows 1 or 0 according as the output is high or low.
PV For inputs, this is the current state of the input, after any inversion has been applied.
For outputs, this is the desired output value (before any inversion is applied).

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 97
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

6.10 ENERGY
Provides a number of energy counters to totalise consumed energy. The value(s) can be displayed at the
driver module front panel (using iTools User Pages), and at the remote panel, if fitted. The power consumed
can be displayed in one of number of units, ranging from W to GW. Figure 6.10 shows the menu.
CONF
Energy

Use up/down arrows to select energy number, then Enter.

Energy N Use return key one or more times from within menu to return to
Input this page

Shows the instantaneous measured power.

Energy N Input Normally wired to Network Meas.P parameter.
Input 0 Does not appear for the Global Energy Counter.

Energy N Reset 1 = Output fleetingly reset to zero; 0 = Output totalises.

Reset 0 (Resetting the global counter resets all Energy counters.)

Energy N 1 = Output frozen at current value

Hold
Hold 0 0 = Output totalises.
(Holding the global counter holds all Energy counters.)

Energy N UsrEnergy Energy consumed by this network since reset

UsrEnergy 0.0

Energy N TotEnergy Global energy consumption (this network).

TotEnergy 0.0 The parameter value is not resettable

Energy N Pulse 0 = No pulse output

Pulse 0 1 = Pulse output enabled

Units scaling for this Network.

Energy N UsrUnit Select ‘1Wh’, ‘10Wh’, ‘100Wh’, ‘1kWh’, ‘10kWh’,
UsrUnit 1Wh ‘100kWh’, ‘1MWh’, ‘10MWh’, ‘100MWh’, ‘1GWh’

Energy N TotUnit As above, but for Global consumption value

TotUnit 1Wh

Energy N PulseScale Pulse length scaling. Select ‘Disable’, ‘1Wh’, ‘10Wh’,

PulseSca... 1Wh ‘100Wh’, ‘1kWh’, ‘10kWh’, ‘100kWh’, ‘1MWh’

Energy N PulseLen Minimum pulse length in ms

PulseLen 0 Valid entries 0 to 32000 inclusive

Energy N IsGlobal ‘Global’ = This is the global counter

IsGlobal No ‘No’ = This is a network counter

Energy N AutoScale ‘No’ = use power scaling configured in UsrUnit (or TotUnit).
AutoScale No ‘Yes’ = Autoscale the power display

Back to ‘Input’
(or to ‘Reset’ for Global Counter)

Figure 6.10 Energy counter menu

HA179769
Page 98 Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

6.10.1 Energy counter parameters

Input Shows the instantaneous power input from the measuring source. Normally wired to
the Meas.P output of a Network block. Does not appear for the Global Energy
Counter (see ‘IsGlobal’, below).
Reset 1 = Energy counter output goes to zero and immediately starts accumulating.
0 = Energy counter not reset.
If the Global Energy counter is reset, it resets all other Energy counters (see
‘IsGlobal’, below).
Hold 1 = Hold output value. This freezes the output value for the block at the current value.
The input continues to be totalised, so when the Hold input returns to 0, the output
value is instantaneously updated to the new current value.
0 = output value is not held, and represents the current accumulated Energy value.
If the Global Energy counter is held, all other Energy counters are held as well (see
‘IsGlobal’, below).
UsrEnergy Shows the current value for the selected Energy Counter block. If this is the global
counter, this value is the sum of the energy values of all those networks being
totalised.
TotEnergy Shows the total energy value for the relevant network. Not reset by ‘Reset’ above.
Pulse This enables a pulse output which causes a pulse to be generated at a specified
number of watt-hours (1, 10, 100kW-h or 1MW-h). The length of the pulse and a
scaling factor can be entered, as described below.
UsrUnit Allows a scaling units value to be entered for the energy display. Selectable as ‘1Wh’,
‘10Wh’, ‘100Wh’, ‘1kWh’, ‘10kWh’, ‘100kWh’, ‘1MWh’, ‘10MWh’, ‘100MWh’ or ‘1GWh’.
TotUnit As ‘UsrUnit’, above, but for the total energy counter.
PulseScale One pulse is generated every ‘n’ Watt-hours, where ‘n’ can be selected as 1, 10, 100,
1k, 10k, 100k, 1M Watt-hours. This value, and that of Pulse Len(gth) must be chosen
to suit the application, such that the next pulse is not requested before the previous
one is finished. (In such a case, the PulseScale factor is automatically increased.)
PulseLen* Select pulse length between 0 and 32000 ms. The actual pulse length is rounded to
the next longest multiple of 1/2 the supply frequency. Thus, for a 50Hz system
(multiple = 10ms) pulse length entries of 1 to 10 will result in a pulse length of 10ms.
For entries of 11 to 20 the pulse length will be 20ms, and so on. This value, and that
of Pulse Scale must be chosen to suit the application, such that the next pulse is not
requested before the previous one is finished. (In such a case, the PulseScale factor is
automatically increased.)
IsGlobal One (only) of the Energy blocks can be defined as being ‘Global’. This means that it
sums the values of all the other Energy counters. The block ‘input’ is disabled. The
‘IsGlobal’ parameter becomes non-editable (set to ‘No’) for all other Energy counter
blocks. If the Global energy Counter is held or reset, all other counters are held and
reset as well.
‘No’ = This counter is not the Global counter.
‘Global’ = this counter is the Global counter.
Autoscale No = Use UsrUnit and TotUnit settings.
Yes = Autoscale power value display. Table 6.10.1 shows the breakpoints.

* Note: due to the computing time required, the pulse-length may vary according to circumstance.
For example, if a 20ms pulse is selected, the actual pulse length may be a mixture of 20ms and 30
ms pulses.

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 99
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

6.10.1 ENERGY COUNTER PARAMETERS (Cont.)

Power Range (Watt-hours) Scaler value
0 to 65,535 1
65,535 to 65,535,000 1k
65,535,000 to 655,350,000 10k
655,350,000 to 6,553,500,000 100k
6,553,500,000 to 65,535,000,000 1M
65,535,000,000 to 655,350,000,000 10M
655,350,000,000 to 6,553,500,000,000 100M
6,553,500,000,000 upwards 1G
Table 6.10.1 Autoscale breakpoints

6.10.2 Resolution
The resolution of the stored energy value varies according to the totalised value, as shown in table 6.10.2
below. For example, for stored values between 33,554,432 watt-hours and 67,108,863 watt-hours, the value
increases in 4 watt-hour increments.
Resolutio Resolution
Power Range (Watt-hours) Power Range (Watt-hours)
n (W-h) (W-h)
0 to 16,777,215 1 17,179,869,184 to 34,359,738,367 2,048
16,777,216 to 33,554,431 2 34,359,738,368 to 68,719,476,735 4,096
33,554,432 to 67,108,863 4 68,719,476,736 to 137,438,953,471 8,192
67,108,864 to 134,217,727 8 137,438,953,472 to 274,877,906,943 16,384
134,217,728 to 268,435,455 16 274,877,906,944 to 549,755,813,887 32,768
268,435,456 to 536,870,911 32 549,755,813,888 to 1,099,511,627,775 65,536
536,870,912 to 1,073,741,824 64 1,099,511,627,776 to 2,199,023,255,551 131,072
1,073,741,824 to 2,147,483,647 128 2,199,023,255,552 to 4,398,046,511,103 262,144
2,147,483,648 to 4,294,967,295 256 4,398,046,511,104 to 8,796,093,022,207 524.288
4,294,967,296 to 8,589,934,591 512 8,796,093,022,208 to 17,592,186,044,415 1,048,576
8,589,934,592 to 17,179,869,183 1,024
Table 6.10.2 Energy counter resolution

6.11 EVENT LOG MENU

This topic is identical with the Event log in the User/Operator menu, and is described in section 5.2.2.

HA179769
Page 100 Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

6.12 FAULT DETECTION MENU

This manages Alarm logging and provides an interface for the General Alarm Acknowledgement

CONF Bit Value Description

Faultdet 0 1 Network 1 not firing
Network 1 not synchro-
1 2
nized
2 4 Network 2 not firing
Faultdet Global Ack
Network 2 not synchro-
Global A... 3 8
nized
4 16 Network 3 not firing
Network 3 not synchro-
Faultdet Any Alarm 5 32
nized
Any Alarm Active 6 64 Network 4 not firing
Network 4 not synchro-
7 128
nized
Faultdet Network Alarm 8 256 Strategy in standby mode
Network... Inactive 9 512 Strategy in Telemetry mode
10 1024 Reserved
11 2048 Reserved
Faultdet Fuse Alarm 12 4096 Reserved
Fuse Ala... Inactive 13 8192 Reserved

See text for details

14 16384 Reserved

Faultdet Global Disable Bit Value Description Bit Value Description

Global D... No 0 1 Missing Mains Power Module Comms
0 1
1 2 Thyristor short circuit error
2 4 Open Thyristor Pwr Module Comms time-
1 2
Faultdet out
Strat Status 3 8 Fuse blown
Strat St... 259 4 16 Over temp 2 4 Closed Loop
3 8 Transfer active
5 32 Network Dips
4 16 Limit active
6 64 Frequency fault
Faultdet Watchdog... 7 128 PB24V fault 5 32 PLM Pr over Ps fault
Watchdog... Active 8 256 Total Load Failure 6 64 Output fault
7 128 LTC Fuse
9 512 Chop Off
8 256 LTC Temp
10 1024 Partial Load Failure
Faultdet Alarm Status 1 11 2048 Partial Load Unbalance 9 512 Reserved
Alarm St... 8209 12 4096 Volt fault 10 1024 Reserved
11 2048 Reserved
13 8192 Pre Temp
12 4096 Reserved
14 16384 Over current
Faultdet Alarm Status 2 13 8192 Reserved
15 32768 Power Module wdog fault
Alm St... 256 14 16384 Reserved
Table 6.12b 15 32768 Reserved

Back to Alarm Status 1 word Table 6.12c

Global Ack Alarm Status 2 word
Figure 6.12 Fault detect menu

Global Ack Performs a global acknowledgement of alarms. Latched alarms are cleared if their
trigger sources are no longer in an alarm state.
Any Alarm ‘Active’ indicates that there is one or more System, Process or ‘Chop Off’ alarm active.
If the relevant alarms are enabled, System alarms and Chop Off alarms always cause
the power module to stop firing. Process alarms can also be configured to prevent
firing in ‘Alarm stop’.
Network Alarm Indicates that a process alarm has occurred in one or more Power Modules.
Fuse Alarm Indicates that a fuse has blown in one or more Network blocks.
Global Disable Allows the user to disable/enable all alarms.
StratStatus A coded status word giving strategy information as shown in table 6.12a.
Watchdog Watchdog relay status (Active or Inactive). The watchdog relay is active (non-
energised) under fault conditions.
Alarm Status 1/2 Two 16-bit words containing alarm status information as shown in tables 6.12b and
6.12c respectively.

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 101
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

6.13 FIRING OUTPUT MENU

This forms the link between the control strategy and the physical load. Configuration includes Firing mode,
Network Type and the type of Load coupling. This block also supplies Phase-Angle Ramp (Soft start) and
Safety Ramp.
In Engineer level, these items are mostly Read only (i.e. their values cannot be edited).

CONF
Firing OP = wired input

Firing OP N Use up/down arrows to select Firing op number, then Enter. Use return
Mode key one or more times from within menu to return to this page

Firing OP N Mode Displays the active firing mode of the control

Mode Logic strategy as one of: IHC, Burst, PA or No Mode.

Firing OP N Load Type Select ‘Resistive’ or TxFormer’ (transformer).

Load Type Resistive

Safety Ramp duration, applied at startup, in mains peri-

Firing OP N Safety Ramp ods, from 0 to 255. The ramp is from 0 to the target
Safety R... 0 phase angle, or from 0 to 100% for burst firing.

Firing OP N Soft Start Use up/down arrows to select soft-start dura-

Soft Sta... Off tion in mains 1/2 cycles.

Firing OP N Soft Stop Use up/down arrows to select soft-stop

Soft Stop 1 duration in mains 1/2 cycles.

For transformer loads, use the up/down arrows

Firing OP N Delayed Trigger to select delayed trigger phase angle between
Delayed... 85 0 to 90 degrees

Firing OP N Enable Enable/disable the Firing output block. Ena-

Enable 0 ble value must be non-zero.

Firing OP N In Displays the input power demand value that

In 0 the firing must deliver.

Displays the phase angle reduction factor, in %, used

Firing OP N PA Limit in Burst Firing. If this value is below 100, the unit deliv-
PA Limit 100 ers a burst of phase angle. Can be used to perform
threshold current limting in burst firing.

Firing OP N Ramp Status Displays the safety ramp status

Ramp Sta... Ramping

Back to Mode

Figure 6.13a Configuration firing Output

Mode Displays the current firing mode as Intelligent half cycle (IHC), Burst firing, Phase
angle firing or no mode. Configured in the ‘Modultr’, menu described below.
Load Type Allows the load type to be selected as ‘Resistive’ or ‘Transformer’. For Load type =
Resistive, the load must be connected directly to the power module and only
resistive loads may be so connected. For Load Type = Transformer, the load is
connected to the power module via a transformer, and may be resistive or reactive.

HA179769
Page 102 Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

6.13 FIRING OUTPUT (Cont.)

Safety Ramp Displays the safety ramp duration, in supply voltage cycles (0 to 255), to be applied
at startup. The ramp is either a phase angle ramp from zero to the requested target
phase angle or, for Burst Firing, from 0 to 100%. See figure 6.13b. Safety Ramp is not
applicable to Half cycle Mode.
Soft Start For Burst Firing only, this is the soft start duration, in main period, applying a phase
angle ramp at the beginning of each on period. (Figure 6.13c).
Soft Stop In Burst Firing, the soft stop duration, in main period, applying a phase angle ramp at
the end of each on period.
Delayed Trigger Appears only if Mode = Burst, Soft Start = Off, and Load Type = TxFormer. Delayed
Trigger specifies the triggering delay, in phase angle, when delivering power into a
transformer load. Used to minimize inrush current on transformer load. See figure
6.13d.
Enable Enables/disables firing. Must be wired to a non-zero value to enable firing (typically a
digital input).
In Displays the input power demand value that the power module is to deliver.
PA Limit Phase angle limit. This is a phase angle reduction factor used in Burst Firing. If lower
than 100% the power module will deliver a burst of phase angle firing. Used,
typically, to perform threshold current limiting in Burst Firing.
Ramp Status Displays the safety ramp status as ‘Ramping’ or ‘Finished’.

Safety (Magnetisation) Ramp

Safety Ramp (10 cycles) (4 cycles)

Output
voltage

Output
voltage Line
Line supply
Delayed trigger angle
supply
Resistive load Inductive load

Figure 6.13b Safety ramp (burst firing) examples

Soft start = 2

Output
voltage
Line
supply

Figure 6.13c Soft start example

High current transient

Load voltage Load voltage

Load current Load current

0 0

Switch at zero volts Switch at zero current

= Delayed Trigger angle

Figure 6.13d Delayed trigger definition

Note: Waveforms have been idealised for clarity

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 103
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

6.14 INSTRUMENT MENU

Allows the user to select the display language, and to view the unit’s Serial number and the current Network
configuration.
CONF
Instr

Instr See figure 6.14.1

Display

Instr See figure 6.14.2

Config

Figure 6.14 Instrument menu

6.14.1 Instrument Display parameters

Allows the user to select display language and to view the unit’s serial number.

CONF
Instr

Instr Instr See figure 6.14.2 for Config menu

Display Config

Display Select Language Use up/down arrows to

Select L... English select display language

Display Serial Num Displays unit’s serial num-

ber (read only)
Serial N... 0

Back to ‘Select Language’

Figure 6.14.1 Instrument Display submenu

Serial Num Read only. Displays the factory-set Serial number of the unit.
Select Language The up and down arrow keys are used to select the required language from English,
French, German or Italian. (Correct at time of writing - further languages may be
added during the life of this manual.)

HA179769
Page 104 Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

6.14.2 Instrument Config parameters

Allows the user access to the current power network configuration.
CONF
Instr

Instr See figure 6.14.1

Display for Display menu

Instr
Config

Use up/down arrows to enter the

Config Power Modules number of power modules fitted.
Power Mo... 4 (Confirmation required)

Use up/down arrows to

Config IO Modules enter number of I/O mod-
IO Modul... 0 ules fitted (if any).

Config Network Type Use up/down arrows to

Network... 2Phase select power network type

Config Load Coupling Use up/down arrows to

Load Cou... 3Star select coupling type

For 2 x 2-leg systems, use up/down

Config Load 2 Coupling arrows to select coupling type for
Load 2 C... 3Star second load.

Config PwrMod1Rev Displays revision level of

PwrMod1R... VN.N power module 1

Config PwrMod2Rev Displays revision level of

PwrMod2R... VN.N power module 2

Config PwrMod3Rev Displays revision level of

PwrMod3R... VN.N power module 3

Config PwrMod4Rev Displays revision level of

PwrMod4R... VN.N power module 4

Back to ‘Power Modules’

Figure 6.14.2 Instrument Config submenu

Power Modules Configures the number of power modules fitted. If left at zero, the system
automatically determines the number of modules fitted and sets the parameter
accordingly.
IO Modules Specifies the number of optional I/O modules fitted. If left at zero, the system
automatically determines the number of modules fitted and sets the parameter
accordingly.
Network Type Selects the type of network to be used, from 3 Phase, Single Phase or 2 Phase.
Load Coupling For a three-phase system this allows the user to select the wiring configuration from
3Star, 3Delta, 4Star or 6Delta. For a two-phase system, only 3Delta or 3Star is
selectable.
Load 2 Coupling As Load Coupling, above, but for the second load in 2 x 2-leg systems.
PwrMod1Rev Shows the revision level of power module ‘1’.
PwrMod2Rev Shows the revision level of power module ‘2’.
PwrMod3Rev Shows the revision level of power module ‘3’.
PwrMod4Rev Shows the revision level of power module ‘4’.

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 105
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

6.15 IP MONITOR MENU

This monitors a wired parameter and records its maximum value, minimum value and the cumulative time
that its value spends above a configurable threshold. An alarm can be set up to become active when the
time-over-threshold exceeds a further threshold.

CONF
IPMon

IPMon N Use up/down arrows to select input monitor number, then Enter. Use return
key one or more times from within menu to return to this page
In

IPMon N In The parameter being monitored. Normally

In 0.0 wired to a parameter using iTools.

IPMon N Max The maximum value reached by the parameter

Max 0.0 since last reset

IPMon N Min The minimum value reached by the parameter

Min 0.0 since last reset

IPMon N Threshold The trigger value for accumulating ‘Time

Threshold 0.0 Above’ values

IPMon N Days Above

Days Abo... 0
The total time (since last reset) that the parameter
value has spent above the threshold value, in
whole days plus hours and minutes
IPMon N Time Above
Time Abo... 00:00.0

IPMon N Alarm Days

Alarm Da... 0
The total time that the parameter value may
spend above the threshold value before
triggering ‘Alarm out’.
IPMon N Alarm Time
Alarm Ti... 00:00.0

IPMon N Alarm Out Alarm out goes ‘True’ (on) if the Days above +
Alarm Out Off Time Above exceeds Alarm days + Alarm Time

IPMon N Reset Sets Max and Min values to zero.

Reset No Sets ‘Days Above’ and ‘Time Above’ values to zero.

IPMon N Status The status of the parameter input

Status Good (Good or Bad).

Back to ‘In’

Figure 6.15 IP Monitor menu

HA179769
Page 106 Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

6.15 IP MONITOR MENU (Cont.)

In The parameter to be monitored. Normally wired (using iTools) to a parameter, but a
numeric entry can be made for testing purposes.
Max The maximum value reached by the parameter since last reset.
Min The minimum value reached by the parameter since last reset
Threshold This value acts as a trigger for the ‘Time Above’ measurement.
Days above Shows how many complete days the parameter value has spent above the Threshold
value (continuously or intermittently) since last reset. The ‘Time Above’ value should
be added to ‘Days Above’ in order to find the total time.
Time Above Shows how many hours, minutes and tenths of minutes that the parameter value has
spent above the threshold value (continuously or intermittently) since last reset, or
since the last complete day. (once the value exceeds 23:59.9, it increments the ‘Days
Above’ value and resets itself to 00:00.0.) The ‘Time Above’ value should be added
to ‘Days Above’ in order to find the total time.
Alarm Days Together with ‘Alarm Time’ this defines a ‘total time above threshold’ value, which,
when exceeded, sets the Alarm out parameter ‘On’.
Alarm Time See ‘Alarm Days’ above.
Reset Resetting causes the Max. and Min. values to be set to the current value, sets the
‘Days Above’ value to zero, and the ‘Time Above’ value to 00:00.0.
Status Shows the status of the input parameter as either ‘Good’ or ‘Bad’.

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 107
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

6.16 LGC2 (TWO INPUT LOGIC OPERATOR) MENU

This logic operator block provides a number of two-input logic operations. The output is always a ‘Boolean’
(logic 0 or 1) no matter whether the inputs are analogue or digital. For analogue inputs, any value below 0.5
is deemed to be logic 0 (off). A value equal to or greater than 0.5 is treated as a logic 1 (on).
Either input can be ‘inverted’ as a part of the configuration (that is, a high input is treated as a low input and
vice-versa.)
Figure 6.16 shows the LGC2 menu.
CONF
Lgc2 = wired input

Lgc2 N Use up/down arrows to select Lgc2 number, then Enter. Use return key [rtn ke one or
Oper more times from within menu to return to this page

Select operator as:

Lgc2 N Oper ’OFF’, ‘AND’, ‘OR’, ‘XOR’, ‘LATCH’,
Oper OFF ‘==’, ‘<>’, <,>’, ‘>=’, ‘<=’

Lgc2 N Input1 Shows current value of input 1. If not wired,

Input1 0 allows a value to be entered.

Lgc2 N Input2 Shows current value of input 2. If not wired,

Input2 0.4900 allows a value to be entered.

Lgc2 N Fall Type Select ‘FalseBad’, ‘TrueBad’, ‘FalseGood’ or

Fall Type FalseBad ‘TrueGood’ as fallback type.

Lgc2 N Invert Select ‘None’, ‘Input1’, ‘Input2’ or ‘Both’

Invert None for input inversion

Lgc2 N Output Shows current value of the output

Output Off

Lgc2 N Status Shows current status of the output

Status Good

Lgc2 N Hyst
Hyst 0

Back to ‘Oper’

Figure 6.16 LGC2 menu

6.16.1 Lgc2 Parameters

Oper Allows the user to select a logic operation for the block. The descriptions below
assume neither input is inverted. High = 1 or on; Low = 0 or off.
Off No logic operation selected.
AND Output high if both inputs high, otherwise output is low.
OR Output high if either or both inputs high, otherwise output low.
XOR Output high if either (but not both) inputs high. Low if neither or both inputs high.
LATCH If i/p2 low, output latches next transition of i/p1. Value remains latched until i/p2
goes low, when output = i/p1 (see figure 6.16.1).
== Output high if both inputs are equal, otherwise output is low.
<> Output high if inputs are unequal. Output is low if both inputs are equal.
> Output high if i/p1 value greater than i/p2 value, otherwise output is low.
< Output high if i/p1 value less than i/p2 value, otherwise output is low.
>= Output high if i/p1 value is equal to or greater than i/p2 value, otherwise output is
low.
<= Output high if i/p1 value is less than or equal to i/p2 value, otherwise output is low.

HA179769
Page 108 Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

6.16.1 LGC2 PARAMETERS (Cont.)

Input 1 If wired, shows the value of input 1; if not, allows the user to enter a value.
Input 2 If wired, shows the value of input 1; if not, allows the user to enter a value.
Fall type Allows a fallback type to be selected. This defines the output value and status
displays if the status of one or both inputs is ‘bad’.
FalseGood Output value displays ‘False’ ; Status displays ‘Good’
FalseBad Output value displays ‘False’ ; Status displays ‘Bad’
TrueGood Output value displays ‘True’ ; Status displays ‘Good’
TrueBad Output value displays ‘True’ ; Status displays ‘Bad’
Invert Allows none, either or both inputs to be inverted.
Output Shows the current output value
Status Shows the status of the output (‘Good’ or ‘Bad’).
Hysteresis For comparison operators only (e.g. >) this
allows a hysteresis value to be entered. For
example, if the operator is ‘>’ and hysteresis I/P1 > (I/P2-H) I/P1 > (I/P2-H)
O/P
I/P1
is H, then the output goes high when input 1 I/P2
H
exceeds input 2, and remains high until input
Hysteresis
1 falls to a value less than (Input 2 - H). Not
applicable to the ‘==’ (equals) function.

X X X

i/p 1

o/p latches first o/p follows o/p latches first o/p follows o/p latches first
i/p 2
transition of i/p1 i/p1 transition of i/p1 i/p1 transition of i/p1

o/p

When i/p2 goes low, o/p follows the next positive or negative transition of i/p 1 (points ‘X’) and
latches at this value until i/p2 goes high. When i/p2 is high, o/p follows i/p1.

Figure 6.16.1 Latch operation

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 109
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

6.17 LGC8 (EIGHT-INPUT LOGIC OPERATOR) MENU

This allows between 2 and 8 inputs to be combined using an AND, OR or Exclusive OR (EXOR) logic function.
The inputs may be individually inverted, and the output can also be inverted, thus allowing the full range of
logic functions to be implemented.
CONF
Lgc8

Lgc8 N Use up/down arrows to select Logic number, then Enter. Use return key [rtn
Operation key] one or more times from within menu to return to this page

Lgc8 N Operation Select AND, OR, Exclusive OR or OFF.

Operation AND

Lgc8 N Number of Select number of inputs from two to eight.

Number o... 8

Use Enter key to move from input to input (current

Lgc8 N Invert 1 8 selection flashes). Use up/down key to select
Invert invert (solid yellow) or not for the current selection.
Final Enter quits Invert configuration.

Lgc8 N Out Invert No = Output not inverted

Out Inve... No Yes = Output inverted

Lgc8 N In1
In1 Off

Input states 1 to N, where N is the num-

ber of inputs selected (two to eight inclu-
sive).

Lgc8 N In8
In8 Off

Lgc8 N Out The output status of the selected logic function.

Out Off

Back to ‘Operation’

Figure 6.17 Lgc8 Menu

Operation Allows selection of AND, OR or Exclusive OR functions (or OFF).

AND = output is high only if all inputs are high
OR = output is high if any or all inputs are high
XOR = output is high if an odd number of inputs are high, and low if an even number
of inputs are high. Logically, a cascaded XOR function: (((((((In1 ⊕ In 2) ⊕ In 3) ⊕ In
4).... ⊕ In 8)
Number of inputs Set the number of inputs to between two and eight inclusive. This number defines
how many invert keys appear in ‘Invert’, and how many Input value pages appear.
Invert Between two and eight piano keys appear (according to the number of inputs
selected) at the bottom line of the display, with the left-most one (input 1) flashing.
The up or down arrow can be used to select ‘invert’ for this input (key goes solid
yellow), and/or the ‘Enter’ key can be used to move to the next input. Once all the
inputs have been accessed, the final operation of the Enter key quits the Invert
configuration, and ‘output invert’ is entered.
Out Invert No = normal output; ‘Yes’ means that the output is inverted, allowing NAND and
NOR functions to be implemented.
In1 The state (on or off) of the first input
In2 onwards The state of the remaining inputs
Out The Output value of the function (i.e. On or Off)

HA179769
Page 110 Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

6.18 MATH2 MENU

This feature allows a range of two-input mathematical functions to be performed. The available functions are
listed below.

CONF
Math2

Math2 N Use up/down arrows to select Math2 number, then Enter. Use return key [rtn key]
Operation one or more times from within menu to return to this page

Math2 N Operation Use the up/down keys to select required

Operation maths function (see text for details).
Off

Math2 N Input1 Scale Use the up/down keys to enter the scaling
Input1 S... 1.0 factor to be applied to input 1

Math2 N Input2 Scale Use the up/down keys to enter the scaling
Input2 S... 1.0 factor to be applied to input 2

Math2 N Out Units Use the up/down arrows to select

Out Units None output units (see text for details)

Math2 N Out Resolution Use the up/down arrows to select the number
Out Reso... XXXXX of decimal places for the output value

Math2 N Low Limit Use the up/down arrow keys to

Low Limit -99999 enter the output low limit

Math2 N High Limit Use the up/down arrow keys to

High Lim... 99999 enter the output high limit

The state to which the output and status

Math2 N Fallback parameters are forced under fault condi-
Fallback Clip bad tions. See text for details.

Math2 N Fallback Value Specifies the value which the output takes
Fallback... 0 under fault conditions.

Math2 N In1 Input 1, normally wired to an input source.

In1 0

Math2 N In2 Input 2, normally wired to an input source.

In2 0

Math2 N Out Displays the current output value

Out 0

Math2 N Status Displays ‘Good’ or ‘Bad’.

Status Good

Back to ‘Operation’

Figure 6.18 Analogue maths functions menu

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 111
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

6.18 MATH2 MENU (Cont.)

Note: For the sake of this description, ‘High’, ‘1’ and ‘True’ are synonymous, as are ‘Low’, ‘0’ and
‘False’.

Operation Defines the mathematical function to be applied to the inputs:

None No operation.
Add Adds input one to input two.
Sub Subtracts input two from input one.
Mul Multiplies inputs one and two together.
Div Divides input one by input two.
AbsDif The difference in value between inputs one and two, ignoring sign.
SelMax Output = the higher of inputs one and two.
SelMin Output = the lower of inputs one and two.
HotSwp Input one appears as the output for as long as input one is ‘good’. If input one
status is bad, input two appears as the output instead.
SmpHld Sample and Hold. The output follows input one, for as long as input two is high
(sample). When input two goes low (hold), the output is held, at the value current
when the output went low, until input two goes high again. Input two is normally
a digital value (low = 0 or high =1); when it is an analogue value, then any
positive non-zero value is interpreted as a high.
Power Output = Input one raised to the power of input two (In1In2). For example if input
one has the value 4.2, and the value of input two is 3, then output = 4.23 = 74.09.
Sqrt The output is the square root of input one. Input two is not used.
Log Output = Log10 (input one). (Log base 10). Input two is not used.
Ln Output = Logn (input one). (Log base e). Input two is not used.
Exp Output = e(input one). Input two is not used.
10 x Output = 10(input one). Input two is not used.
Select If the Select input is high, input two appears at the output; if the Select input is
low, input one appears at the output.
Input1 Scale The scaling factor to be applied to input one.
Input2 Scale The scaling factor to be applied to input two.
Out Units Allows the user to choose units for the output.
Out
Use the up and down arrows to position the decimal point as required.
Resolution
Low Limit The low limit for all inputs to the function and for the fallback value.
High Limit The high limit for all inputs to the function and for the fallback value.
Fallback The fallback strategy comes into play if the status of the input value is ‘Bad’, or if its value lies
outside the range (High limit- Low limit).
Fall Good: The output is set to the fallback value (below); output status is set to ‘Good’.
Fall Bad: The output is set to the fallback value (below); output status is set to ‘Bad’.
Clip Good: The output is set to the high or low limit as appropriate; output status is set to
‘Good’.
Clip bad: The output is set to the high or low limit as appropriate; output status is set to
‘Bad’.
DownScale: The output is set to the low limit and Status is set to ‘Bad’.
Upscale: The output is set to the high limit and Status is set to ‘Bad’.
Fallback Allows the user to enter the value to which the output is set for Fallback = Fall Good, or Fall
value Bad.
Select Appears only if Operation = Select. Allows input one or input two to be selected for output.
In1 Input one value (normally wired to an input source).
In2 Input two value (normally wired to an input source).
Out The output value resulting from the configured mathematical operation. If either input is ‘Bad’,
or if the result is out of range, the fallback strategy is adopted.
Status Indicates the status of the operation as ‘Good’ or ‘Bad’. Used to flag error conditions and can
be used as an interlock for other operations.

HA179769
Page 112 Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

6.19 MODULATOR MENU

This function implements the modulation type firing modes such as fixed and variable period modulation.
CONF
Modultr

Modultr N Use up/down arrows to select modulator number, then Enter. Use return key [rtn key]
one or more times from within menu to return to this page
Mode

Allows modulation firing mode to be selected from:

Modultr N Mode ‘Logic’, ‘PA’ (phase angle), ‘Half Cycle’, ‘BurstVar’ or
Mode Logic ‘BurstFix’

Load
Tap 3
Modultr N Input Input signal representing the required power
Input 0.0 output

Modulator logical output for controlling

Modultr N Output the power module(s). If mode = PA, this is a
Output 0.0 phase angle demand.

Modultr N Min On time Appears only for Mode = BurstVar.

Mutually exclusive

Min On 16

Modultr N Cycle Time Appears only for Mode = BurstFix

Cycle Ti... 75

For Mode = Logic only, defines when the output from

Modultr N Logic Mode the modulator block is to be stopped.
Logic Mo... Full cycle Half Cycle = stops on next zero crossing
Full Cycle = stops at next full cycle zero crossing

Modultr N LMIn Use up/down arrows to select the

LMIn 1 load management interface input.

Modultr N InFiltTime Input fillter time in modulation periods.

InFiltTi... 1 0 = Filter disabled

Modultr N Switch PA Use up/down arrows to select:

Switch PA Burst Burst or Phase Angle

Figure 6.19 Modulator menu

Mode Select the required firing mode from “Logic’, ‘PA’ (Phase angle) ‘Half cycle’, ‘BurstVar’
(Burst firing - minimum on time) or ‘BurstFix’ (Burst firing - cycle time).
Input This is the value that the modulator is required to deliver.
Output The output logic signal controlling the power module on and off times, normally wired
to the input of the firing block. For Mode = Phase angle, this is a phase angle demand.
Min on Time For Variable Period Modulation, this sets the minimum on time in supply voltage
periods. At 50% demand from the modulator, Ton = Toff = Minimum on time, and Cycle
time is 2 x Minimum on time = Modulation period. The minimum off time is equal to
‘Min on time’.
Cycle Time For Fixed Period Modulation, this is the cycle time in supply voltage periods.
Logic Mode For Logic Firing Modulation, Half cycle sets firing stop to the next zero crossing; Full
cycle sets firing stop at the zero crossing of the next full cycle.
LMIn Load Management Interface input. Defines a connection from the modulator to a load
management channel (if fitted).
InFiltTime Modulator input filter time as a number of modulation periods. When set to zero, filter is
disabled.
Switch PA Allows the user to impose Phase Angle firing, overriding the configured Burst Mode as
displayed in ‘Mode’, above.

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 113
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

6.20 NETWORK MENU

This identifies the type of electrical network to be controlled, and this, in turn defines how the network’s
electrical measurements are presented. The configuration is related to a power channel, not necessarily the
Power Module number. For a network of four single-phase units, four network blocks are required; for two
leg control of a three-phase network, two network blocks are used; for three-phase control of a single
network, one Network block is required.
CONF
Network

Use up/down arrows to select network number, then Enter.

Network N Use return key one or more times from within menu to
Meas return to this page

Network N Figure 6.20.1

Meas

Network N Figure 6.20.2

Setup

Network N
AlmDis

Network N
AlmDet

Network N
AlmSig
Figure 6.20.3

Network N
AlmLat

Network N
AlmAck

Network N
AlmStop

Figure 6.20 Network menu

HA179769
Page 114 Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

6.20.1 Meas submenu

CONF 2nd and 3rd phase menu items appear

Network only if network type is two or three
phase respectively (section 6.20.2).
Use up/down arrows to select network number, then Enter.
Network N Use return key one or more times from within menu to
Meas return to this page.

Displays the average of the RMS

Network N Meas voltage for three phase and two
Meas V Average leg systems

For Burst firing only, the average

Meas Displays Mains frequency of the rele- Meas value of V2 taken over the duration
Frequency vant power channel V2 Burst of the burst period.

Meas Displays Line voltage measurement Meas The main-period average value
VLine of primary unit (see text) V2 of V2 used for V2 control.

Meas The maximum value out of V2,

Displays 2nd phase Line voltage
Meas
V22, V32. Used in current limiting
VLine2 V2 Maximum and alarm strategies

The RMS value of V2 maximum over

Meas Displays 3rd phase Line voltage
Meas the mains period. Used for voltage
VLine3 Vrms Maximum limiting or voltage transfer.

Displays true power measurement for

Meas Displays Load RMS curent in primary Meas the power network, over the modula-
I unit. PBurst tion period.

Displays true power measurement for

Meas Displays 2nd phase Load curent Meas the power network on the main period
I2 (RMS) P in phase angle and in burst firing

Meas Displays 3rd phase Load curent Meas Apparent power measurement
I3 (RMS) S

Meas Displays the average of the RMS

current for three phase and two
Meas Power Factor calculation
I Average leg systems PF

For Burst firing only, the average

Meas Meas Reactive power Calculation
value of I2 taken over the dura-
I2 Burst tion of the burst period.
Q

Meas The main-period average value Meas Load impedance for primary unit
I2 of I2 used for I2 control. Z

The maximum value out of I2, I22,

Meas Meas 2nd Phase load impedance
I32. Used in current limiting and
I2 Maximum alarm strategies
Z2

Meas The RMS value of I2 maximum Meas 3rd Phase load impedance
Irms Maximum over one mains period Z3

Displays load voltage of primary Meas

Meas power module (phase-to-phase or
Heatsink temperature 1
V phase-neutral according to setup). HSink1 T... Used in alarm strategy

Displays load voltage of 2nd phase

Meas power module (phase-to-phase or
Meas Heatsink temperature 2
V2 phase-neutral according to setup). HSink2 T...

Displays load voltage of 3rd phase

Meas power module (phase-to-phase or
Meas Heatsink temperature 3
V3 phase-neutral according to setup). HSink3 T...

Figure 6.20.1 Meas submenu layout

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 115
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

6.20.1 MEAS SUBMENU (Cont.)

This submenu presents power network measurements, according to the network type. All available
measurements are listed below, but which values actually appear depends on the network configuration.
Frequency Displays the calculated frequency of the supply voltage of the power channel associated
with this network.
Vline Supply voltage measurement on the primary power module. Displays line to neutral
except in three phase or two-leg control when line to line voltage is displayed.
Vline2, Vline 3 As for VLine but for power modules two and three respectively
I Load Irms measurement on primary power module. The time base measurement is the
main period in Phase Angle, and the modulation period in Burst Mode.
I2, I3 As for I, above, but for power modules two and three respectively.
I Average This is the average of the current in the three channels of a three-phase system. This is
relevant only for 3 phase and 2 leg controlled systems:- IRMSAvg = (IRMS + IRMS2 + IRMS3)/3
I2 Burst Average square value of load current in burst firing. The average Isq in burst firing, the
average is taken over the duration of the burst period. This is typically used for
monitoring and alarming over the burst period.
I2 Square value of load current in Burst Firing and over the main period in phase angle.
Typically used for Isq control. In 3-phase or 2-leg control this is the average of the three
network squared currents, calculated as I2 = (I2Phase1 + I2Phase2 + I2Phase3)/3
I2Maxim... In a three-phase network, this is the maximum of I2, I22 and I32. Used in current limiting in
three-phase networks, and in alarm strategies.
Irms Max... The RMS value of I2Max measured over the mains period. Typically used for current
limiting or current transfer in 3-phase networks, in phase angle mode.
V Load Vrms measurement on primary power module of this channel of power control.
Displays load to neutral (or to second line) except in three phases star or delta load
coupling displays load1 to load2 voltage The time base measurement is the main period
in phase angle, and the modulation period in burst mode.
V2, V3 As for V, but for 2nd and 3rd Power Modules respectively.
V Average The average of the voltage in the three channels of a three-phase system. This is relevant
only for three-phase and two-leg power networks VRMSAvg = (VRMS + VRMS2 + VRMS3)/3
V2 Burst Average square value of load voltage in burst firing taken over the duration of the burst
period. Typically used for monitoring and alarm strategies over the burst period.
V2 Square value of load voltage in Burst Firing and on main period in Phase Angle Firing.
Typically used for Vsq control. In three-phase or Two-leg control this is the average of the
three network squared voltages, calculated as Vsq = (VsqPhase1 + VsqPhase2 +
VsqPhase3)/3
V2 Maxim... The maximum squared voltage out of VsqPhase1, VsqPhase2, VsqPhase3. Typically used
for voltage limiting in three-phase networks and for alarm strategies.
Vrms Max... The RMS value of V2Max measured over the mains period. Typically used for voltage
limiting or transfer in 3-phase networks, in phase angle mode.
P Burst Measurement of true power on the network. This is calculated over the modulation
period in Burst Firing mode. Typically used for monitoring, alarm strategy and in Load
management (if option fitted).
P True power measurement in Burst Firing and over the modulation period in Phase Angle
firing. Typically used for true power control
S Apparent power measurement. For phase angle firing S=Vline x IRMS; for burst firing
S=VRMS x IRMS
PF Calculation of power factor. Defined as Power Factor = True Power / Apparent Power. In
phase angle this is PF=P/S; in burst firing PF = PBurst/S = Cosφ(Load)
Q Calculation of the reactive power defined in phase angle as Q = 66666
S2 - P2 , or in burst
firing as
Q = 66666
S2 - PBurst
2 .
Z Load impedance measurement on first power module, defined as:- Z=Vrms/Irms.
Measurement uses line current (not leg current) and load voltage, so value may not be
accurate for some multi-phase wiring configurations.
Z2, Z3 Load impedance measurement on the 2nd and 3rd phase of the network respectively.
HSink1(2)(3) T... Heat sink temperatures. Used to protect the Power Modules from overheating.

HA179769
Page 116 Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

6.20.2 Network Setup Submenu

This displays the setup of the network and associated functions.

Use up/down arrows to request adjust.

Network Vdips Threshold PLF Use Enter key to select next phase.
Setup 10 Adjust Req Solid yellow = Setup adjust requested

Setup FreqDrift Threshold PLF Adjusted

Network 2 Solid yellow = Adjustment complete

Network Type ChopOff1 PLF Sensitivity

3P Threshold 120 2

Vline Nominal ChopOff2 Zref

230 Threshold 200 0

Vload Nominal Number Zref2

230 Chop Off 5 0

I Maximum Window Zref3

Chop Off 60 0

I Nominal OverVolt PLU Threshold For 3-phase networks only

250.0 Threshold 10 10

Iext Scale UnderVolt Over I Threshold

5.0 Threshold 15 120

Vext Scale PreTemp Heater Type

230.0 Heatsink 100 Resistive

Heatsink Tmax
120

Figure 6.20.2 Network Setup submenu

Network Type Displays the Network type as Three phase, Single phase or Two-leg control.
Vline Nominal Line voltage nominal value required to calibrate the stack. This is the line to line
voltage except for Single phase to Neutral and Three-phase Star with Neutral
networks, when the measurement is line to neutral.
VloadNominal Nominal Load voltage, required to calibrate the Power Module. This is the same as
the Vline Nominal except when external feedback is used e.g. from a transformer
secondary. In which case this value must be correctly set to scale the measurement.
IMaximum Indicates the maximum current of the stack (50, 100, 160, 250, 400, 500, 630). For
transformer-driven loads, select EXT100 etc. and configure IextScale appropriately.
INominal Nominal current supplied by the Power Module. This value is used for calibrating the
current measurement in the stack. This is limited by IMaximum, which imposes the
limit of the physical channels unless external feedback is configured, in which case
the limit is 4000A.
IextScale External current scale adjustment for use when IMaximum is set to external feedback.
If an external current transformer is fitted, IextScale should be set to the normal
primary current of the current transformer. If an external current transformer is not
being used, IextScale should be set to 5A.

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 117
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

6.20.2 NETWORK SETUP SUBMENU (Cont.)

VextScale External voltage scale adjustment for use when IMaximum is set to external
feedback. If an external transformer is fitted, VextScale should be set to the nominal
primary voltage of the external transformer. If an external transformer is not fitted,
VextScale should be set to Vnominal.
HeatsinkTmax Displays the maximum permissible temperature of the heat sink. This forms an alarm
threshold for the ‘Heat sink Overtemperature’ alarm.
VdipsThreshold Voltage dips threshold. This is a percentage difference (relative to Vline Nominal)
between 2 consecutive half cycles. Each half cycle voltage measurement is
integrated and at the end of each half cycle the last 2 voltage integrals are
compared.
FreqDriftThold The supply frequency is checked every half cycle, and if the percentage change
between 1/2 cycles exceeds this threshold value, a Mains Frequency System Alarm is
generated. The threshold may be set to a maximum of 5% to cater for the effects of
heavily inductive networks.
ChopOff1Threshold The ‘Chop-off’ alarm becomes active if load current exceeds this threshold for more
than five seconds. Threshold values lie between 100% and 150% of INominal.
ChopOff2Threshold The Chop-off’ alarm also becomes active if this second current threshold is exceeded
more than a predefined number of times (NumberChopOff ) within a predefined
time period (WindowChopOff). Current threshold values lie between 100% to 350%
of INominal.
NumberChopOff can be set to between one and 16 (inclusive) and any value
between 1 and 65535 seconds may be configured for WindowChopOff.
Each time an over-current is detected, the unit stops firing, raises a ‘Chop-off’
condition alarm, waits for about 100ms and then restarts firing using an up-going
safety ramp. The ‘Chop-off’ condition alarm is cleared if the unit restarts successfully
after an over-current event.
If NumberChopOff is reached within the WindowChopOff period, the unit stops
firing and remains stopped. A chop-off state alarm is triggered, making it necessary
for the user to acknowledge the chop-off state alarm before restarting firing.
NumberChopOff Displays the number of ‘Chop Off’ events that can occur within the WindowChopOff
period before a ‘Chop Off’ alarm is enabled. Used only with ChopOff2Threshold.
WindowChopOff Displays the ‘Chop Off’ window in seconds. Used only with ChopOff2Threshold.
OverVoltThreshold The threshold for detecting an over voltage condition as a percentage of
VLineNominal. If Vline rises above the threshold a Mains Voltage Alarm is set
(DetMainsVoltFault).
UnderVoltThreshold This is the threshold for detecting an under voltage condition as a percentage of
VLineNominal. If Vline falls below the threshold a Mains Voltage Alarm occurs
(DetMainsVoltFault).
PreTempHeatsink The threshold for the heat sink temperature pre-alarm in degrees C, which, if
exceeded, causes a pre-temperature (DetPreTemp) alarm to occur.
PLFAdjustReq Partial load failure adjustment request. To make the Partial Load Failure (PLF) alarm
operate correctly, the normal steady-state condition must be known to the
instrument. This is done by activating the PLF Adjust Req, for each Network, once the
controlled process has achieved a steady state condition. This causes a load
impedance measurement to be made which is used as a reference for detecting a
partial load failure. If the load impedance measurement is successful PLFAdjusted
(below) is set. The measurement fails if the load voltage (V) is below 30% of
(VNominal) or the current (I) is below 30% of (INominal). The PLF alarm becomes
active as setup in ‘PLF Sensitivity’, below.
PLFAdjusted Partial load failure adjusted acknowledge. Indicates that the user requested a PLF
adjustment and that the adjustment was successful.
PLFSensitivity Partial load failure sensitivity. This defines how sensitive the partial load failure
detection is to be as the ratio between the load impedance for a PLFadjusted load
and the current impedance measurement. For example for a load of N parallel,
identical elements, if the PLF Sensitivity (s) is set to 2, then a PLF alarm will occur if N/
2, or more elements are broken (i.e. open circuit). If PLF Sensitivity is set to 3, then a
PLF alarm occurs if N/3 or more elements are broken. If (N/s) is non-integer, then the
sensitivity is rounded up.
E.G. if the N = 6 and s= 4, then the alarm is triggered if 2 or more elements are
broken.

HA179769
Page 118 Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

6.20.2 NETWORK SETUP SUBMENU (Cont.)

Zref Reference load impedance for phase 1, as measured when PLF adjust is requested.
Zref2, Zref3 As for Zref but for phases 2 and 3 respectively.
PLUthreshold Partial load unbalance threshold. Defines the threshold for detecting a partial load
unbalance condition. This is only applicable to a three phase system. This occurs
when the difference between the maximum and minimum current of the three phase
system exceeds the threshold as a percentage of Inominal. The alarm can be
detected between 5 and 50%.
OverIThreshold The threshold for detecting an over current condition as a percentage of INominal. If
I is above the threshold a Mains Current Alarm occurs (DetoverCurrent).
HeaterType Shows the type of heater used in the load as: ‘Resistive’, ‘SWIR’ (Short wave infra-red),
‘CSi’ (Silicon Carbide), ‘MoSi2’ (Molybdenum Disilicide).
MaxInom Fix limit to I Nominal

PARTIAL LOAD FAILURE CALCULATIONS

The PLF alarm detects a static increase in load impedance (low temperature coefficient loads and Short wave
Infra Red heaters can be controlled by this feature).
The alarm works by comparing the reference load impedance with the actual measured load impedance.
The user must set the reference impedance (by requesting PLFAdjust) and the partial load failure sensitivity.
Notes:
1. All elements are assumed to be identical and connected in parallel
2. For three phase loads, the impedance reference can be set only if the load is balanced.

The impedance comparison takes place over a mains cycle (in phase angle firing) or over the burst period
(for burst and logic firing). For star with neutral (4S) or open delta (6D) networks, the measured load voltage
and current correspond directly to the load parameters. In these configurations the partial load failure
sensitivity is limited only by measurement accuracy and element impedance inaccuracies. For star without
neutral (3S) and closed delta (3D) configurations, equivalent impedances are calculated using line-to-line
voltages and line currents, this resulting in minor inaccuracies.
Special care must be taken for short burst firing modes (e.g. IHC or single cycle firing) if no phase rotation is
applied for Burst start (suppression of DC component in current transformers) and for logic firing without DC
component suppression feature, for the same reason.
A minimum voltage of 30% of nominal adjusted value (Vload nominal) and a minimum of 30% of INominal
must be applied to the load, as below these thresholds, no partial load failure detection or impedance
reference setting takes place.

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 119
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

6.20.3 Network alarms

CONF
Network

Network N Use up/down arrows to select network number, then Enter. Use return key [rtn key]
Meas one or more times from within menu to return to this page

Network N Figure 6.20.1

Meas

Network N Figure 6.20.2

Setup

Network N AlmDis Use up/down arrows to select alarm (e.g.

Missing mains) then Enter key to display it.
AlmDis Miss Mai... Use up/down keys to change disable status
= Alarm not disabled;
= Alarm disabled.
AlmDet Network N AlmDis
Miss Mai... AlmDet Once one alarm is displayed, the Enter key
Miss Mains can be used to scroll through the others.

AlmDet
Miss Mains
Use up/down arrows to select alarm (e.g. Missing mains) Use up/down arrows to select alarm (e.g.
Network N AlmSig Missing mains) then Enter key to display it.
then Enter key to display its detected/current status. AlmSig Miss Mai...
= detected; = not detected = OK; = Alarm active
Use Enter key to scroll through other alarms. Number of phases depends on network
configuration.
AlmSig
Miss Mains Use Enter key to scroll through other alarms.
AlmLat Network N φ1 φ2 φ3
Miss Mai... AlmLat

Use up/down arrows to select alarm (e.g.

AlmLat Network N AlmAck Missing mains) then Enter key to display it.
Miss Mains AlmAck Miss Mai... Use up/down key to acknowledge.
Use up/down arrows to select alarm (e.g. Missing = Alarm not active;
mains) then Enter key to display it. Use up/down keys = Alarm active (acknowledged if steady,
to change latching status Network N AlmAck unacknowledged if flashing).
= Alarm not latching; = Alarm latching). AlmStop Miss Mains Once one alarm is displayed, the Enter key
can be used to scroll through the others.
Use Enter key to scroll through other alarms.

Figure 6.20.3 Network alarm menu

NETWORK ALMDIS SUBMENU

This menu allows individual network block alarms (listed below) to be enabled/disabled. Section 10 gives
more details of these alarms.
MissMains Missing Mains
Thyr SC Thyristor Short Circuit
Open Thyr Thyristor open Circuit
Fuse Blown Fuse Blown
Over Temp Over Temperature
Volt Dips Mains Voltage Dips
Freq Fault Frequency Fault
Power Board 24V
PB 24V
Failure
TLF Total Load Failure
Chop Off Chop Off
PLF Partial Load Failure
PLU Partial Load Unbalance
VoltFault Mains Voltage Fault
PreTemp Pre-Temperature
Over I Over Current

HA179769
Page 120 Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

6.20.3 NETWORK ALARMS (Cont.)

NETWORK ALMDET SUBMENU

As for ‘Alarm Disable’, above, but this Alarm detect submenu indicates whether any of the network alarms
has been detected and is currently active.

NETWORK ALMSIG SUBMENU

These displays show whether an alarm has occurred and also contains latching information. The relevant
AlarmSig parameter is used when wiring (to a relay for example). The alarm list is as given above.

NETWORK ALMLAT SUBMENU

As for ‘Alarm Disable’, above, but this Alarm Latch submenu allows each individual network block alarm to
be defined as latching or non-latching.

NETWORK ALMACK SUBMENU

As for ‘Alarm Disable’, above, but this Alarm Acknowledge submenu allows each individual network block
alarm to be acknowledged. Once acknowledged, the associated signalling parameter is cleared.
Acknowledge parameters automatically clear after being written.
Note: Alarms may not be acknowledged whilst the trigger source is still active.

NETWORK ALMSTOP SUBMENU

Allows each individual alarm type to be configured to stop the related power module from firing. Activated
by the related Signalling parameter. The alarm list is as given above.

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 121
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

6.21 PLM (STATION AND NETWORK LM PARAMETERS) MENU

This menu appears only if the Predictive Load Management option is fitted and enabled.
LoadMng provides an interface to the parameters of the station and of the load management network. A
‘station’ is defined as a Driver module and associated power modules. Figure 6.21 gives an overview of the
menu.

CONF
PLM
Figure 6.21.2 Figure 6.21.3 Figure 6.21.4
PLM PLM PLM PLM
Main Station Network AlmDis

Main Station Network PLM

Figure 6.21.1

Type Address Total St... AlmDet

Main Station Network PLM

Period Status Total Ch... AlmSig

Station Network PLM

Num Chans Pmax AlmLat

Station Network PLM

PLMOut1 Pt AlmAck

Station Network PLM

PLMOut2 Ps AlmStop

Station Network
PLMOut3 Pr

Station Network
PLMOut4 Efficien...

Network
Master A...

Figure 6.21 Predictive Load Management Menu overview

6.21.1 Main
This presents the main Load Management parameters.

CONF
PLM

PLM See figure 6.21.2 for ‘Station’, figure 6.21.3 for

Main ‘Network’ and figure 6.21.4 for Alarm parameters.

Main Type See text for available Types.

Type Sharing

Main Period The modulation period for the

Period 100 station in mains periods

Back to ‘Type’

Figure 6.21.1 Load Management ‘Main’ menu

HA179769
Page 122 Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

6.21.1 PREDICTIVE LOAD MANAGEMENT ‘MAIN’ MENU (Cont.)

Type Configures the type of Predictive Load Management as follows:
No: No Load Management. Load Management is disabled.
Sharing: Load Sharing. Used to control the total power demand over time by
distributing the conduction periods of the various units.
IncrT1: Incremental Type 1. Several loads receive a common setpoint. Only one
channel is modulated by the duty cycle, the others being at 0% or 100%
demand. Total power distributed = setpoint value.
IncrT2: Incremental Type 2. A number of loads receive a common setpoint. Only
the first channel is modulated, by the duty cycle, the others being at 0% or
100% demand. Total power distributed = setpoint value.
RotIncr: Rotating Incremental. Provides incremental control of between two and 64
channels, operating from a single input. Each channel modulates with an
identical mark-space ratio determined by the power demand signal, but
each channel is separated from adjacent outputs by the selected time
base.
Distrib: Distributed Control. This mode provides control of between two and 64
channels from an equal number of independent inputs. Each channel
modulates with a mark-space ratio proportional to its input signal, but with
the switching of adjacent inputs distributed over the selected time cycle.
DistIncr: Distributed and Incremental control. This provides control of between two
and eight groups of loads. A total of 64 channels is available, and these
may be freely distributed among the groups, as long as each group has at
least one channel. Each group has a single power demand input and
operates as in Incremental Type 2 mode, with the first channel modulating
to maintain the selected power level. Switching time within groups is
distributed over the selected time cycle.
RotDisInc: Rotating Distributed and Incremental control. This provides control of
between two and eight groups of loads. A total of 64 channels is available,
and these may be freely distributed among the groups, as long as each
group has at least one channel. Each group has a single power demand
input and operates in Rotating Incremental mode with all channels
modulating at an identical rate. The distributed nature of this mode
ensures that the instant of switch on in each group is distributed over the
cycle time.
Period This configures the modulation period for the station, in mains periods between 50 and
1000. The accuracy of control is related to the modulation period - to increase accuracy
the period must be increased.
The master unit imposes its modulation period on all slaves. It is recommended that all
slave units are configured to use the same period as the master, so that should the
master lose control, then the slave that replaces it as master will use the same value and
thus achieve the same accuracy of control. (The new master imposes its own value at the
next power cycle.)

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 123
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

6.21.2 Predictive Load management ‘Station’ menu

This menu contains all parameters related to Load Management Station configuration, where a ‘station’
consists of a Driver Module together wit hits associated Power modules.

CONF
PLM

PLM See figure 6.21.1 for ‘Main’, figure 6.21.3 for ‘Network
Station and figure 6.21.4 for Alarm parameters.

Address (0 to 63 inc.) of the station

Station Address within the Load Management network.
Address 0 0 = Load Management inhibited.

Station Status Shows the current Master/Slave status of this unit

Status Pending within the Load Management Network.

Station Num Chans Shows the number of channels participating in

Num Chans 0 Load Management for this station.

Station PLMOut1
PLMOut1 0

Station PLMOut2
PLMOut2 0 Load Management Slot 1 to Slot
4interface output. Must be wired to the rele-
vant load management channel function
block (LMin) to connect a channel of power
Station PLMOut3 control to the Load Management network
PLMOut3 0

Station PLMOut4
PLMOut4 0

Back to ‘Address’

Figure 6.21.2 Load Management ‘Station’ menu.

Address This is the address of the unit on the Load Management (PLM) network, between 0 and
63 inclusive. An address of 0 disables Load Management. The lowest address on the
network normally becomes the master.
Status Indicates the current master/slave status for thisunit, as follows:
Pending: The election of the master is not yet complete
IsMAster: The unit is athe PLM network master
IsSlave: This unit is a slave
Duplicate address: Two or more units have the same address. Units with identical
addresses are excluded from the load management process.
Num Chans This shows the number of channels participating in load management for this unit.
Automatically configured from the load management ‘wiring’ for this unit.
Maximum number of channels = 64
Maximum number of channels per station = 4
Maximum number of stations = 64
Maximum number of groups = 8.
Example1: There can be a maximum of 16, four-channel units (i.e 64 channels).
Example 2: There can be a maximum of 63 three-phase units, (i.e. 63 channels).
PLMOut 1 to 4 These outputs must be wired to the load management channel function block
PLMChan1 (to 4).PLMIn in order to connect a power control channel to the load
management network.

HA179769
Page 124 Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

6.21.3 Predictive Load Management ‘Network’ menu

This includes load management network parameters.
CONF
PLM

PLM See figure 6.21.1 for ‘Main’, figure 6.21.2 for ‘Station’
Network and figure 6.21.4 for Alarm parameters.

Network Total Stations Shows the total number of stations present

Total St... 1 within the Load Management network

Shows the total number of load managed

Network Total Channels power control channels currently participating
Total Ch... 1 in the Load Management strategy

Shows the total power installed within the Load

Network Pmax Management network, and which is currently
Pmax 0 participating in the Load Management strategy.

Network Pt Indicates the total amount of power that has

Pt 0 been demanded from the network.

Network Ps Indicates the total amount of power that

Ps 99990 is allowed from the network.

Network Pr Indicates the total amount of power to be

Pr 0 allowed from the network.

Network Efficiency Shows how efficiently the load management

Efficien... 0 systm is operating, in per cent.

Network Master Address The address of the Network master

Master A... 0

Back to ‘Total Stations’

Figure 6.21.3 Load management ‘Network’ menu

Total Stations Shows the number of units within the Load Management (PLM) network.
Total Channels Shows the number of load management power channels currently participating in
the Load Management strategy.
Pmax This indicates the total amount of power installed and participating in the Load
Management strategy, within the PLM network
Pt The sum of the power demanded by all channels taking part in the Load
Management strategy.
Ps Configured by the user to restrict the power demanded from the network, according
to the Load Shedding strategy (setting Ps> Pmax disables Load Shedding).
Example: If the total installed power is 2.5MW but the user wishes to restrict the
delivered power to be within a tariff band of 2MW, then Ps should be set to 2MW.
Load shedding will shed power across the network to keep the total demand to less
than 2MW.
Pr This shows the total amount of power that has been delivered through the network.
The value can be greater than Ps depending on the shedability factors of all
channels.
Efficiency Shows, in percent, how efficient the load management strategy is.
Calculated from: Efficiency % = {Pmax - (Ptmax - Ptmin)}/Pmax, where Ptmax and
Ptmin are the peak maximum and minimum values for total power during the
modulation period, respectively.
Master Address Displays the address of the elected master on the Load Management network. For
the master unit, this address is the same as the address set up in ‘Station’ described
above. For a slave unit, the two addresses are different.

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 125
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

6.21.4 Predictive Load Management ‘Alarm’ menus

CONF
PLM

PLM Figure 6.21.1

Main

PLM Figure 6.21.2

Station

PLM Figure 6.21.3

Network

Used to disable the ‘Pr/Ps’ alarm

PLM AlmDis Pr Over PS
AlmDis Pr Over ... Solid yellow = Alarm disabled

Indicates that the Pr/Ps alarm is active

PLM AlmDet Pr Over PS
AlmDet Pr Over ... Solid yellow = Alarm active

PLM AlmSig Pr Over PS Indicates that the Pr/Ps alarm is active

AlmSig Pr Over ... Solid yellow = Alarm active

Used to cause the ‘Pr/Ps’ alarm to become

PLM AlmLat Pr Over PS a latched alarm
AlmLat Pr Over ...
Solid yellow = Alarm latched

Allows the user to acknowledge the ‘Pr/Ps’

PLM AlmAck Pr Over PS alarm
AlmAck Pr Over ... Solid yellow = Alarm acknowledged

Indicates that the Pr/Ps alarm is set up to

PLM AlmStop Pr Over PS disable firing when in alarm
AlmStop Pr Over ...
Solid yellow = Firing disabled

Figure 6.21.4 Load Management ‘Alarm’ menus

AlmDis Allows the user to disable the Pr/Ps alarm.

AlmDet Indicates to the user that Actual power is greater than the requested maximum.
Caused by an incorrect calibration of one or more channels, or possibly as a result of
load shedding.
AlmSig Indicates whether or not Pr/Ps alarm has been detected. If action is to be taken as a
result of this alarm’s going active, then it is AlmSig that should be wired.
AlmLat Allows the user to set Pr/Ps alarm to be a latching type.
AlmAck Allows the user to acknowledge the Pr/Ps alarm.
AlmStop Allows the Pr/Ps alarm to be configured to disable firing whilst active.

HA179769
Page 126 Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

6.22 PLMCHAN (LOAD MANAGEMENT OPTION INTERFACE) MENU

This menu appears only if the Predictive Load Management option is fitted and enabled.
PLMChan provides an interface to the channel parameters needed for Load Management. See also section
6.21 and section 9.

CONF
PLMChan

PLMCha N Use up/down arrows to select PLMChan number, then Enter. Use return key [rtn
key] one or more times from within menu to return to this page
PZMax

PLMChan N PZMax Total Power installed on the channel

PZMax 23000

Assigns this channel to a Load Manage-

PLMChan N Group ment group, if a distributed incremental
Group 0 control option is enabled (section 6.19).

The threshold at which the reducing

PLMChan N Shed Factor factor is applied to the modulator for
Shed Fac... 0 load shedding.

PLMChan N PLMIn Load Management channel inter-

PLMIn 0 face input.

PLMChan N PLMOut Load Management channel interface

PLMOut 0 output.

Back to ‘PZMax’

Figure 6.22 Predictive Load Management option interface menu

PZMax Total power installed on the channel. Calculated using the rating of the unit.
Group The group (max. = 8) in which the channel operates. This item appears only if one of
the distributed incremental load management options has been selected (section
6.21).
ShedFactor The threshold at which the reducing factor is applied to the modulator for load
shedding. This item appears only if Load sharing is enabled (section 6.21)
LMIn The Load Management channel interface input. Must be wired to one of the LMOut
connections on the LoadMng function block in order to connect this channel to the
network.
LMOut The Load Management channel interface output. Typically wired to the LMin
parameter on the modulator block.

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 127
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

6.23 LOAD TAP CHANGER (LTC) OPTION

This option offers automatic load tap selection for primary or secondary windings, as configured.
Instruments with this option must also be fitted with the remote current/voltage feedback option.
Figure 6.23 shows the overall menu structure. Figure 6.23.2 shows the Alarm menu, and figures 6.23.3a to
6.23.3f show some typical application wiring.
CONF
PLMChan
= wired input

Input to the LTC block in %.

LTC MainPrm IP Usually wired to the control
MainPrm IP 0 block output

LTC MainPrm S1
AlmDis S1 25
Turns ratio of taps 1 to N, where N
is 1 to 4 as selected in TapNb
LTC value (below) (See text for details)
AlmDet
MainPrm SN
SN 100
See figure 6.23.2

LTC
AlmSig
MainPrm Type Select if this is primary or sec-
Type Primary ondary LTC
LTC
AlmLat
MainPrm TapNb
TapNb FourTaps
LTC
AlmAck
MainPrm Op1
Op1 0
LTC
Output values 1 to N, where N is
AlmStop 1 to 4 as selected in TapNb value
(above) (See text for details)

MainPrm OpN
OpN 0

External fuse fail alarm. Normally wired

MainPrm A1FuseIn from a digital input block the input to
A1FuseIn 0 which is an external ‘Fuse Blown’ signal.

External over-temperature alarm. Normally

MainPrm A1TempIn wired from a digital input block the input of
A1TempIn 0 which is an external temperature sensor

MainPrm PAOP Appears for Burst Firing only. Phase angle

PAOP 100 reduction factor in %.

Back to ‘IP’

Figure 6.23 Load Tap Changer (LTC) menu overview

HA179769
Page 128 Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

6.23.1 MainPrm parameters

IP The % demand normally wired from a control block output
S1 Turns ratio of transformer tap 1 in percent. If Type = Primary, S1= NN x 100
T1T2
where
Tot

NT1T2 is the number of turns between Tap1 and Tap 2, and NTot is the total number of
NT1
turns. For the primary, T1 is the highest tap. If Type = Secondary, S1= N x 100 where NT1
Tot

is the number of turns in Tap 1 (lowest tap) and NTot is the total number of turns.
S2 Turns ratio of transformer tap 2 in percent. If Type = Primary, S1= NN x 100 where NT1T3 is
T1T3
Tot

the number of turns between Tap1 and Tap 3, and NTot is the total number of turns.
For the primary, T1 is the highest tap. If Type = Secondary, S1= NN x 100 where NT2 is the
T2
Tot

number of turns in Tap 2 and NTot is the total number of turns.

If the number of taps is 2, S2 =100%
S3 N
Turns ratio of transformer tap 3 in percent. If Type = Primary, S1= N x 100 where NT1T4 is
T1T4
Tot

the number of turns between Tap1 and Tap 4, and NTot is the total number of turns.
NT3
For the primary, T1 is the highest tap. If Type = Secondary, S1= N x 100 where NT3 is the
Tot

number of turns in Tap 3 and NTot is the total number of turns.

If the number of taps is 3, S3 =100%
S4 Turns ratio of transformer tap 4 in percent. Value always 100%
Type Select Load tap Changer type as ‘Primary’ or ‘Secondary’.
TapNb The number of transformer taps from two to four.
OpN The value of outputs 1 to N of the block, where N is the number of transformer taps
as selected in ‘TapNb’ above. This output is normally wired to the input of a Firing
output block (for phase-angle firing) or to a Modulator block (Modulation mode
firing).
A1FuseIn External Fuse Fail Alarm input. Wired to the output of a digital input, the input of
which is wired to an external Fuse Blown transducer.
A1TempIn External over Temperature Alarm input. Wired to the output of a digital input, the
input of which is wired to an external Over Temperature transducer.
PAOP Phase Angle Reduction (This display appears only for Burst Firing applications.). If
the value of this parameter is less than 100% a burst of phase angle is delivered.
Used, for example, to perform threshold current limiting,

6.23.2 LTC Alarm

Displays the alarm configuration for the Load Tap Changer external Fuse Blown and over Temperature
alarms. Figure 6.23.2 shows the menu.
The parameters listed below apply to both alarms individually.

PARAMETERS
AlmDis Allows the user to disable the alarm.
AlmDet Indicates to the user whether or not the alarm is active.
AlmSig Indicates to the user whether or not the alarm is active. If action is to be taken as a
result of this alarm’s going active, then it is AlmSig that should be wired.
AlmLat Allows the user to set the alarm to be a latching type.
AlmAck Allows the user to acknowledge the alarm.
AlmStop Not configurable (see note).

Note: These two alarms are considered to be system alarms and automatically inhibit thyristor
operation (firing) whilst active. ‘AlmStop’ cannot be set to ‘No’.

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 129
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

6.23.2 LTC ALARM (Cont.)

CONF
LTC

LTC See figure 6.23 for

MainPrm MainPrm menu

Used to disable the external Fuse -

LTC AlmDis Fuse blown alarm
AlmDis Fuse
Solid yellow = Alarm disabled

AlmDis Used to disable the external over tempera-

LTC Temp ture alarm
AlmDet Temp Solid yellow = Alarm disabled

LTC Back to ‘Fuse’

AlmSig

LTC Structure as for AlmDis.

AlmLat See text for details

LTC
AlmAck

LTC
AlmStop

Figure 6.23.2 Load tap changer alarm menu

6.23.3 LTC Application wiring

The following illustrations, give typical wiring information for a number of different Load Tap Change
applications. The diagrams are meant for guidance only and are not definitive.

1/L1 3/L2
EPower 1
EPower 2

2/T1 4/T2

Neutral reference
Tap 1
Current feedback
Voltage feedback
Tap 2
Load

Fuse rating must be lower N

than cable current rating Current
transformer

Figure 6.23.3a Two-tap primary

HA179769
Page 130 Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

6.23.3 LTC APPLICATION WIRING (Cont.)

1/L1 3/L2 5/L2

EPower 1

EPower 2

EPower 3
2/T1 4/T2 6/T2

Neutral reference
Tap 1
Current feedback
Voltage feedback Tap 2

Load
Tap 3

N
Current
transformer

Figure 6.23.3b Three-tap primary

L
Fuse rating must be lower
1/L1 3/L2 5/L2 7/L2 than cable current rating
EPower 1

EPower 2

EPower 3

EPower 4

2/T1 4/T2 6/T2 8/T2

Neutral reference
Tap 1
Current feedback Tap 2
Voltage feedback
Load

Tap 3
Tap 4
N
Current
transformer
Figure 6.23.3c Four-tap primary

L Tap 2 Fuse blown alarm Over temp alarm

FS1 FS2
Tap 1 Thyristor
L Tap 2 Fuse
FS2
N Tap 0 Tap 1 Fuse Current
1/L1 3/L2
FS1 transformer
EPower 1

EPower 2

Thyristor
N Tap 0
Phase reference Load
2/T1 4/T2
1/L1 3/L2
EPower 1

EPower 2

Tap 1 control Tap 2 control

Load

Voltage feedback

Current feedback 2/T1 4/T2

Phase
reference Voltage feedback
Current
transformer Current feedback

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 131
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

Figure 6.23.3d Two-tap secondary (alternative layouts)

6.23.3 LTC APPLICATION WIRING (Cont.)

L Tap 3

Tap 2

Tap 1

N
Tap 0
1/L1 3/L2 5/L2

EPower 1

EPower 2

EPower 3
Phase reference
2/T1 4/T2 6/T2

Load
Voltage feedback

Current feedback

Fuse rating must be lower

Current
than cable current rating
transformer
Figure 6.23.3e Three-tap secondary

L Tap 4
Tap 3
Tap 2
Tap 1
N
Tap 0
1/L1 3/L2 5/L2 7/L2
EPower 1

EPower 2

EPower 3

EPower 4

Phase reference
2/T1 4/T2 6/T2 8/T2

Voltage feedback
Load

Current feedback

Current
transformer
Figure 6.23.3f Four-tap secondary

HA179769
Page 132 Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

6.24 RELAY MENU

CONF
Relay

Use up/down arrows to select relay number, then Enter. Use return key
Relay N one or more times from within menu to return to this page.
PV Relay 1 fitted as standard.

Relay N Shows the status of the Relay driver signal

PV Off as ‘Off’ or ‘On’.

Relay N The current status of the relay

(1 = coil energised; 0 = coil not energised)
Meas Val 0

Figure 6.24 Relay menu

6.24.1 Relay parameters

PV This shows the status of the input to the relay as either ‘On’ (True) or ‘Off’ (False).
Meas Val Shows the current state of the relay coil. 1 = energised; 0 = de-energised, where
‘energised’ is ‘off’ and ‘de-energised’ is ‘on’.
See figures 2.2.1a and 2.2.1b for relay pinout details.

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 133
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

6.25 SETPROV MENU

This feature supplies 1 local and two remote setpoints.
CONF
SetProv
= wired

SetProv N Use up/down arrows to select Setpoint Provider number, then Enter. Use return key [rtn
SP Select one or more times from within menu to return to this page

Use Up/Down arrows to select ‘Local’ or

SetProv N SP Select ‘Remote’ as the current setpoint. If ‘Local’ is
SP Select Remote selected the ‘LOC’ LED illuminates.

SetProv N Remote select Rem1 or Rem2 to be used as remote set-

Remote S... Rem1 point when ‘Remote’ selected

SetProv N Local SP Use up/down arrows to enter setpoint

Local SP 0.0 value for use when ‘Local’ is selected.

SetProv N Remote1 Shows the value of Remote

Remote1 0.0 Setpoint 1

SetProv N Remote2 Shows the value of Remote

Remote2 0.0 Setpoint 2

SetProv N Limit Applies a limit to the target set-

Limit 0 point = (Setpoint x Limit)/100

SetProv N WorkingSP The active value being provided as a

WorkingSP 0.0 setpoint output

SetProv N RampRate Maximum ramp rate for working SP. Disa-

RampRate Off bled if ‘Off’

SetProv N DisRamp Allows the user to enable/disable Ramp

DisRamp No Rate limiting

SetProv N RateDone Yes = Rate limit is active

RateDone Yes No = Rate limiting complete or disabled.

SetProv N SPTrack Yes = Enable setpoint tracking

SPTrack No No = Disable setpoint tracking

Select ‘%’ (per cent) or ‘ENG’ (Engineering units).

SetProv N SPUnits If ‘Eng’ is selected, ‘HiRange’ and ‘EngWorkingSP’
SPUnits No parameters appear in the menu

SetProv N Appears only if SPUnits set to ‘Eng’.

HiRange Allows a value to be entered to be used
HiRange 100 for scaling SP to %

Eng Working SP Appears only if SPUnits set to ‘Eng’.

SetProv N Displays working setpoint in Engineering
Eng Work... 0 units. NOT to be used for control.

Back to SPSelect

Figure 6.25 SetProv menu

HA179769
Page 134 Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

6.25.1 Setpoint provider parameters

SPSelect Allows the user to select between Remote or Local as the setpoint source. If ‘Local’ is
selected, the ‘LOC’ LED illuminates.
Remote Select Allows the user to select which of two Remote setpoints to use when SPSelect
(above) is set to ‘Remote’.
LocalSP Allows entry of a setpoint value to be used when SPSelect (above) is set to ‘Local’.
Remote1 (2) The alternative Remote setpoints which may be chosen in ‘Remote Select’ (above).
Limit Allows the target setpoint to be scaled such that ‘scaled target SP’ = (target SP x
limit)/100. Thus, when limit = 100, the setpoint is unscaled.
WorkingSP The active value being provided as a setpoint output. This might be the current
target setpoint or the rate-limited target setpoint.
RampRate This applies a rate limit to the working setpoint, until the target setpoint has been
achieved. The ‘RateDone’ parameter (below) is set to ‘No’ for the duration of the rate
limiting, then set to ‘yes’ when rate limiting is complete.
DisRamp This is an external control used to enable/disable ramp rate limiting and to write the
target setpoint directly to the working setpoint. The ‘RateDone’ parameter (below) is
set to ‘Yes’ when DisRamp is ‘Yes’.
RateDone Set to ‘No’ if ramp rate limiting (above) is in operation. Otherwise set to ‘Yes’.
SPTrack If enabled (‘Yes’) the local setpoint tracks the remote setpoints, so that if the setpoint
is subsequently set to ‘Local’, the local setpoint will be the same as the last known
value of the remote setpoint, thus ensuring a bumpless transfer.
SPUnits Allows the user to select % or ‘Eng’ (Engineering units) as Setpoint units. If ‘Eng’ is
selected, ‘HiRange’ and ‘Eng workingSP’ appear at the user interface.
HiRange Appears only if SP units set to ‘Eng’. This value is the high range of the setpoint used
to scale the setpoint into % of High Range.
EngWorkingSP Appears only if SP units set to ‘Eng’. This value is an indication of the working setpoint
in Engineering units. The parameter must not be used for control because control
loops accept setpoints only as % values.

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 135
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

6.26 TIMER MENU

6.26.1 Timer configuration

CONF
Timer

Timer N Use Up/Down arrows to select Timer number, then Enter. Use return key [rtn
Type one or more times from within menu to return to this page

Timer N Type Use Up/Down arrows to select ‘On Pulse’, ‘On

Type On Pulse Delay’, ‘One shot’, Min-On’ or ‘Off’

Timer N Time Duration of timer period (max. 500 hours).

Time 10:00.0

Timer N Elapsed Time The elapsed time for this timer cycle.
Elapsed... 01:03.2

Timer N In The trigger input for the timer.

In On 0 = Off; 1 = On.

Timer N Out Shows the output status of the timer

Out On

Timer N Triggered On/Off status depends on the timer type -

Triggered Off see text for more details

Back to ‘Type’

Figure 6.26.1 Timer Menu

Type Allows the user to select the required timer type as follows:
Off Timer is off
On Pulse The timer output switches on when ‘In’ changes from Off to On, and it
remains on until the time period (‘Time’ - see below) has elapsed. If the
input is re-triggered before ‘Time’ has elapsed, the timer re-starts.
‘Triggered’ (below) follows the state of the output.
On delay After the input changes from Off to On, the timer output remains off until
the time period defined in ‘Time’ (below) has elapsed. Once this period
has elapsed, if the input is still on, the output switches on and remains on
until the input goes Off.
Elapsed time is set to zero when the input goes off.
‘Triggered’ follows the state of the input.

HA179769
Page 136 Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

6.26.1 TIMER CONFIGURATION (Cont.)

Type (Cont.)
One Shot If the input is On, then as soon as a value is entered into the ‘Time’
parameter (below) the output goes on, and remains on until the Time
period has elapsed, or the input goes off.
If the input is off, the output is set off and the time count-down is inhibited
until input goes on again.
‘Triggered’ goes On as soon as the time value is edited, and remains on
until the output goes Off.
The Time value may be edited whilst active.
Once the time period has elapsed, the Time value must be re-edited in
order to re-start the timer.
Min On The output remains ‘On’ as long as the Input is on, plus the ‘Time’ period
(below). If the input returns to the on state before the time period has
elapsed, the elapsed time is reset to zero, so that the full time period is
added to the On period when the input switches off again. ‘Triggered’ is
On whilst the elapsed time is greater than zero.
Time Allows the user to set a time period for use as described in ‘Type’ above. Initially, the
display is in the form Minutes:seconds.10ths of seconds, but as the input value
increases the format changes first to Hours:Mins:Secs, then to Hrs:Mins. (Holding the up
arrow key continuously operated causes the speed at which the value increments to
increase. Minimum entry is 0.1 seconds; maximum is 500 hours.
Elapsed Time Shows how much of the time period has passed so far.
In The timer trigger input. The function of this input varies according to timer type, as
described above.
Out Shows the timer on/off status.
Trigger Function depends on timer type, as described above.

6.26.2 Timer examples

Figure 6.26.2 shows some timing examples for the different types of timer available.

On Pulse timer One-Shot timer

Input Input Time edited
(input high) Time edited (input low)
Output
Time Time Output A B
Time
A+B = Time
Elapsed Time

Trigger Elapsed

Trigger
Input
Input re-triggers Input gates output
Output
Time
before Time expires Input
Elapsed Time edited
Output A B C D A+B+C+D = Time
Trigger

On-delay timer Minimum on timer

Input
Input
Delay Time Time
Output Delay Output
Input off before
Elapsed Delay time expires Elapsed

Trigger
Trigger

Figure 6.26.2 Timer examples

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 137
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

6.27 TOTALISER MENU

The totaliser is an instrument function used to calculate a total quantity by integrating a flow rate input over
time. The maximum value of the totaliser is +/- 99999. The outputs from a totaliser are its integrated value,
and an alarm state.
CONF
Total

Total N Use up/down arrows to select required totaliser, then Enter. Use return key [rtn key]
Total Out one or more times from within menu to return to this page

Total N Total Out Shows current value of

Total Out 0 selected totaliser.

Total N In The source to be totalised.

In 0.0

Total N Units Select required units for totaliser.

Units None

Total N Resolution Use up/down arrows to set number

Resoluti... XXXXX of decimal places

Total N Alarm SP Use up/down arrows to enter alarm

Alarm SP 0 threshold value.

Total N Alarm Out On/Off status of the totaliser alarm.

Alarm Out Off

Total N Run ‘Yes’ initiates integration;

Run No ‘No’ inhibits integration.

Total N Hold ‘Yes’ suspends integration;

Hold No ‘No’ restarts integration.

Total N Reset ‘Yes’ resets the totaliser value to zero and resets
Reset No the totaliser alarm.

Back to ‘Total Out’

Figure 6.27 Totaliser menu

Total Out The integrated total between -1010 and +1010 (i.e. ± 10,000,000,000)
In The parameter to be totalised.
Units Units of the totalised measurement.
Resolution Set the number of decimal places for the totaliser value.
AlarmSP Totaliser alarm setpoint. This threshold is applied to the totalised measurement.
When totalising positive values, a positive AlarmSP value must be entered; the
totaliser alarm being triggered when the totaliser value reaches or exceeds AlarmSP.
When totalising negative values, a negative value must be entered; the totaliser
alarm being triggered when the totaliser value reaches or goes more negative than
AlarmSP. If set to zero, the alarm is disabled.
AlarmOut The on/off status of the totaliser alarm.
Run Yes initiates integration; No inhibits integration.
Hold Yes suspends integration; No restarts integration.
Reset Yes resets the totaliser value to zero and resets the totaliser alarm.

HA179769
Page 138 Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

6.28 USER VALUE MENU

This provides storage for a user-defined constant. Typical uses are as a source for a maths function, or as
storage for values written over the communications link.

CONF
UsrVal

UsrVal N Use up/down arrows to select required user value, then Enter. Use return key [rtn
Units one or more times from within menu to return to this page

UsrVal N Units Allows the user to select units for the

Units None selected user value

UsrVal N Resolution Use the up/down keys to set

Resoluti... XXXXXX the decimal point position

UsrVal N High Limit

High Lim... 9999
Enter maximum/minimum values to
ensure that the user value cannot be
set out of range
UsrVal N Low Limit
Low Limit -9999

The up/down arrows can be used to enter

UsrVal N Value a value, or the parameter can be wired to
Value 0 another parameter

Shows the status of the input parameter, or for

UsrVal N Status test purposes, status can be forced to ‘Good’ or
Status Good ‘Bad’ by using the up/down arrows.

Back to ‘Units’

Figure 6.28 User Value menu

Units Allows the selection of User value units.

Resolution Set the number of decimal places for the User Value value.
High/Low Limit Allows the user to set limits to prevent the user value from being set out-of-bounds.
Value Allows the user to enter a value, or the parameter is wired to a suitable parameter.
Status If this parameter is wired, it can be used to force a Good or Bad status onto the User
Value for test purposes (e.g. fallback strategy).
If not wired, it reflects the status of the Value input if this input is wired.

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 139
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

7 USING ITOOLS
iTools software running on a pc allows quick and easy access to the configuration of the unit. The parameters
used are the same as those described in section 6 above, with the addition of various diagnostic parameters.
iTools also gives the user the ability to create software wiring between function blocks, something that is not
possible from the operator interface. Such wiring is carried out using the Graphical wiring Editor feature.
In addition to the guidance given here, there are two on-line Help systems available within iTools: Parameter
help and iTools help. Parameter help is accessed by clicking on ‘Help’ in the toolbar (opens the complete
parameter help system), by right-clicking on a parameter and selecting ‘Parameter Help’ from the resulting
context menu, or by clicking on the Help menu and selecting ‘Device Help’. iTools help is accessed by
clicking on the Help menu, and selecting ‘Contents’. iTools help is also available in manual format under part
number HA028838, either as a physical manual or as a pdf file.

Tool bar icon for

parameter help

Help menu

Figure 7 Help access

7.1 iTools CONNECTION

The following descriptions assume that iTools software has been correctly installed on the pc.

7.1.1 Serial communications

Once the serial link has been correctly wired, start iTools and click on the Scan toolbar icon. The iTools
scanning feature initiates a search for compatible instruments, and a ‘thumbnail’ of each one found
appears in the ‘Panel Views’ pane, normally located at the bottom of the screen. The scan can be
stopped at any time by clicking on the Scan toolbar icon a second time.
Note: Section 7.2 contains more details of the scan process.

HA179769
Page 140 Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

7.1.2 Ethernet (Modbus TCP) communications

Notes:
1. This section is only applicable for Modbus/TCP single port communication module. Modbus/TCP
dual port communication module does not support iTools connection.
2. The following description is based on windows XP. Windows ‘Vista’ is similar.

It is first necessary to determine the IP address of the unit, as described under ‘Comms menu’ in section 6.6.
This can be done from either the Engineer menu or the Config menu.
Once the Ethernet link has been correctly installed, carry out the following actions at the pc:
1. Click on ‘Start’
2. Click on ‘Control Panel’. (If Control Panel opens in ‘Category View’ select ‘Classic View’ instead.)
3. Double-click on ‘iTools’.
4. Click on the TCP/IP tab in the Registry settings configuration.
5. Click on Add... The ‘New TCP/IP Port’ dialogue box opens.
6. Type-in a name for the port, then click Add...
7. Type the IP address of the unit in the ‘Edit Host’ box which appears. Click OK.
8. Check the details in the ‘New TCP/IP Port’ box, then click on ‘OK’.
9. Click on ‘OK’ in the ‘Registry settings’ box to confirm the new port.
(Continued)

Figure 7.1.2a Adding a new Ethernet port

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 141
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

7.1.2 Ethernet (Modbus TCP) communications (cont.)

To check that the pc can now communicate with the instrument, Click ‘Start’. ‘All Programs’, ‘Accessories’,
‘Command Prompt’.
When the Command Prompt box appears, type in: Ping<Space>IP1.IP2.IP3.IP4<Enter> (where IP1 to IP4 are
the IP address of the instrument).
If the Ethernet link to the instrument is operating correctly, the ‘successful’ reply arrives. Otherwise, the
‘failed’ reply arrives, in which case, the Ethernet link, IP address, and pc port details should be verified.

Figure 7.1.2a Command prompt ‘Ping’ screens (typical)

Once the Ethernet link to the instrument has been verified, iTools can be started (or shut down and
restarted), and the Scan toolbar icon used, to ‘find’ the instrument. The scan can be stopped at any
time by clicking on the Scan icon a second time.
See section 7.2 for more details of the scan procedure.

HA179769
Page 142 Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

7.1.3 Direct Connection

This section describes how to connect a pc directly to a Driver Module which, for this purpose, must be fitted
with the Ethernet communications option.
Note: This section is only applicable for Modbus/TCP single port communication modules.
Modbus/TCP dual port communication module does not support an iTools connection.

WIRING
Connection is made from the Ethernet connector on the front of the Driver Module to an Ethernet
RJ45 connector, usually located at the rear of the pc. The cable should be a ‘cross-over’ cable
type. PC Ethernet
connector.
Once wired correctly, and powered up, it is necessary to enter a suitable IP address and subnet mask into
the Comms configuration of the Driver Module. This information can be found as follows:
1. At the pc, click ‘Start’. ‘All Programs’, ‘Accessories’, ‘Command Prompt’
2. When the Command Prompt box appears, type in: IPConfig<Enter>
The response is a display, such as that shown below, giving the IP address and Subnet mask of the pc.
Choose an address in the range covered by these two values.
A subnet mask element of 255 means that the equivalent element of the IP address must be used
unchanged. A subnet mask element of 0 means that the equivalent element of the IP address may take
any value between 1 and 255 (0 is not allowed). In the example below, the range of IP addresses which
may be chosen for the Driver Module is 123.456.789.2 to 123.456.789.255. (123.456.789.0 is not
allowed and 123.456.789.1 is the same as the pc’s address, and may therefore not be used.)

Figure 7.1.3a IP Config command

3. In Comms configuration (section 6.6) enter the selected IP address and the subnet mask (as it appears
in the command prompt window) in the relevant parts of the configuration menu.
4. Check communications by ‘pinging’ as described in section 7.1.2 above.
Once the link to the instrument has been verified, iTools can be started (or shut down and re-started), and
the Scan toolbar icon used, to ‘find’ the instrument. The scan can be stopped at any time by clicking on the
Scan icon a second time. See section 7.2 for more details of the scan procedure.

Subnet Masks and IP addresses.

Subnet Masks are most readily understood when looked at in binary format.
For example, a mask of 255.255.240.10 can be re-written as:
11111111.11111111.11110000.00001010. In such a case, IP addresses
11111111.11111111.1111xxxx.xxxx1x1x would be recognised (where x can be either a 0 or a 1).

Subnet mask 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0
IP addresses
(Binary) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 x x x x x x x x 1 x 1 x
IP addresses 255 255 240 to 255 10, 11, 14, 15,
(decimal)
26, 27, 30, 31,
42, 43, 46, 47 etc.

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 143
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

7.2 SCANNING FOR INSTRUMENTS

Clicking on the ‘Scan’ toolbar icon causes a dialogue box (shown below) to appear. This allows the user to
define a search range of addresses.
Notes:
1. The relevant instrument address is that entered in the Comms User menu ‘Address’ item, and it
can take any value between 1 and 254 inclusive, as long as it is unique to the comms link.
2. The default selection (Scan all device addresses...) will detect any instrument on the serial link,
which has a valid address.

As the search progresses, any instruments detected by the scan appear as thumbnails (faceplates) in the
‘Panel Views’ area, normally located at the bottom of the iTools screen. (options/Panel Views position allows
this area to be moved to the top of the window, or the Close icon can be used to close it. Once closed it
can be re-opened by clicking on ‘Panel Views’ in the ‘View’ menu.)

Figure 7.2a Scan range enable

Figure 7.2b iTools initial window with one instrument detected

HA179769
Page 144 Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

7.3 GRAPHICAL WIRING EDITOR

Clicking on the Graphical wiring Editor toolbar icon causes the Graphical wiring window for
the current instrument configuration to open. Initially, this reflects the function block wiring
as set in the Quick Start menu.

Figure 7.3 Graphical wiring Editor

The graphical wiring editor allows:
1. Function blocks, notes, comments etc. to be ‘drag and dropped’ into the wiring diagram from the tree
list (left pane).
2. Parameters to be wired to one another by clicking on the output, the clicking on the required input.
3. Viewing and/or editing of parameter values by right-clicking on a function block and selecting
‘Function Block View’.
4. The user to select parameter lists and to switch between parameter and wiring editors.
5. Completed wiring to be downloaded to the instrument (function blocks and wiring items with dashed
outlines are new, or have been edited since the last download).

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 145
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

7.3.1 Toolbar

Download wiring to Instrument.

Mouse Select. Select nor mal mouse operation. Mutually exclusive with ‘Pan’, below.
Mouse Pan. When active, this causes the mouse cursor to become a hand-shaped icon. Allows
the graphical wiring diagram to be click-dragged within the GWE window aperture.
Zoom. Allows the magnification of the wiring diagram to be edited.
Pan tool. Whilst left-clicked, the cursor appears as a rectangle, representing the position of GWE
window aperture over the whole wiring diagram. Click dragging allows this aperture to be moved
freely about the diagram. Rectangle size depends on Zoom (magnification) factor.
Show/Hide grid. This icon toggles a background alignment grid on and off.
Undo, Redo. Allows the user to undo the last action, or once an undo action has taken place, to
undo the undo. Short cuts are <Ctrl>+<Z> for undo; <Ctrl>+<R> for re-do.
Cut, Copy, Paste. Normal Cut (copy and delete), Copy (copy without delete) and Paste (insert into)
functions. Short cuts are <Ctrl>+<X> for cut; <Ctrl>+<C> for copy and <Ctrl>+<V> for Paste.
Copy diagram fragment; Paste diagram fragment. Allows a part of the wiring diagram to be
selected, named and saved to file. The fragment may then be pasted into any wiring diagram,
including the source diagram.
Create compound; Flatten compound. These two icons allow compounds to be created and
‘uncreated’ respectively.

7.3.2 Wiring editor operating details

COMPONENT SELECTION
Single wires are shown with boxes at ‘corners’ when selected. When more than one wire is selected, as part
of a group, the wire colour changes to magenta. All other items have a dashed line drawn round them when
selected.
Clicking on a single item selects it. An Item can be added to the selection by holding down the control key
(ctrl) whilst clicking on the item. (A selected item can be deselected in the same way.) If a block is selected,
then all its associated wires are also selected.
Alternatively, the mouse can be click-dragged on the background to create a ‘rubber band’ round the
relevant area; anything within this area being selected when the mouse is released.
<Ctrl>+<A> selects all items on the active diagram.

BLOCK EXECUTION ORDER

The order in which the blocks are executed by the instrument depends on the way in which they are wired.
The order is automatically worked out, for each ‘Task’ (or network block) so that the blocks use the most
recent data. Each block displays its place in its sequence in a coloured block in the bottom left-hand corner
(figure 7.3.2a). The colour of the block represents the Task within which the block is running: red = task one,
green = task two, black = task 3 and blue = task 4.

HA179769
Page 146 Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

7.3.2 WIRING EDITOR OPERATING DETAILS (Cont.)

FUNCTION BLOCKS
A Function Block is an algorithm which may be wired to and from other function blocks to make a control
strategy. Each function block has inputs and outputs. Any parameter may be wired from, but only
parameters that are alterable in Operator Mode may we wired to. A function block includes any parameters
that are needed to configure or operate the algorithm. The inputs and outputs which are considered to be
of most use are always shown. In most cases all of these need to be wired before the block can perform a
useful task.
If a function block is not faded in the tree (left hand pane) it can be dragged onto the diagram. The block
can be dragged around the diagram using the mouse.
A Maths block is shown below as an example. When block type information is alterable (as in this case) click
on the box with the down arrow in it to display a dialogue box allowing the value to be edited.
If it is required to wire from a parameter, which is not shown as a recommended output, click on the
‘Click to Select Output’ icon in the bottom right hand corner to display a full list of parameters in the
block (figure 7.3.2c, below). Click on one of these to start a wire.
Down arrow

Position in
execution order

Figure 7.3.2a Function block example

Function Block context menu

Right click in the function block to display the context menu.

Function block View Displays a list of parameters associated with the function
block. ‘Hidden’ parameters can be displayed by de-
selecting ‘Hide Parameters and Lists when not Relevant’
in the Options menu ‘Parameter availability Settings...’
item.
Re-Route wires Redraws all wiring associated with the function block.
Re-Route Input Redraws all Input wiring associated with the function
wires block.
Re-Route Output wires
Redraws all Output wiring associated with the function
block.
Show Wires Using Tags
Wires are not drawn, but their Start and End destinations
are indicated by tags instead. Reduces wire ‘clutter’ in
diagrams, where source and destination are widely
separated.

Figure 7.3.2b Function

block context menu

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 147
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

7.3.2 WIRING EDITOR OPERATING DETAILS (Cont.)

FUNCTION BLOCK CONTEXT MENU (Cont.)
Hide Unwired Connections
Displays only those parameters which are wired.
Cut Allows one or more selected items to be moved to the Clipboard ready for pasting into
another diagram or compound, or for use in a Watch window, or OPC scope. The
original items are greyed out, and function blocks and wires are shown dashed until next
download, after which they are removed from the diagram. Short cut = <ctrl>+<X>. Cut
operations carried out since the last download can be ‘undone’ by using the ‘Undo’
toolbar icon, by selecting ‘Undelete’ or by using the short cut <ctrl>+<Z>.
Copy Allows one or more selected items to be copied to the Clipboard ready for pasting into
another diagram or compound, or for use in a Watch window, or OPC scope. The
original items remain in the current wiring diagram. Short cut = <ctrl>+<C>. If items are
pasted to the same diagram from which they were copied, the items will be replicated
with different block instances. Should this result in more instances of a block than are
available, an error display appears showing details of which items couldn’t be copied.
Paste Copies items from the Clipboard to the current wiring diagram. <Ctrl>+<V>. If items are
pasted to the same diagram from which they were copied, the items will be replicated
with different block instances. Should this result in more instances of a block than are
available, a Paste error display appears showing details of which items couldn’t be
copied.

Delete Marks all selected items for deletion. Such items are shown dashed until next download,
after which they are removed from the diagram. Short cut = <Del>.
Undelete Reverses ‘Delete’ and ‘Cut’ operations carried out on selected item(s) since the last
download.
Bring To Front Brings selected items to the front of the diagram.
Push To back Sends the selected items to the back of the diagram.
Edit Parameter Value...
This menu item is active if the cursor is hovering over an editable parameter. Selecting
this menu item causes a pop-up window to appear, which allows the user to edit the
parameter value.
Parameter Properties...
This menu item is active if the cursor is hovering over an editable parameter. Selecting
this menu item causes a pop-up window to appear, which allows the user to view the
parameter properties, and also, to view the parameter Help (by clicking on the ‘Help’ tab.
Parameter Produces Parameter Properties and Help information for the selected function block or
Help... parameter, depending on the hover position of the cursor, when the right-click occurs.

HA179769
Page 148 Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

7.3.2 WIRING EDITOR OPERATING DETAILS (Cont.)

WIRES
To make a wire
1. Drag two (or more) blocks onto the diagram from the
function block tree.
2. Start a wire by either clicking on a recommended output
or clicking on the ‘Click to Select output’ icon at the
bottom right corner of the block to bring up the
connection dialogue, and clicking on the required
parameter. Recommended connections are shown with a
green plug symbol; other parameters which are available
being shown in yellow. Clicking on the red button causes
all parameters to be shown. To dismiss the connection
dialogue either press the escape key on the keyboard, or
click the cross at the bottom left of the dialogue box.
3. Once the wire has started a dashed wire is drawn from the
output to the current mouse position. To complete the
wire click on the required destination parameter.
4. Wires remain dashed until they are downloaded
Figure 7.3.2c Output selection dialogue box
Routing wires
When a wire is placed it is auto-routed. The auto routing algorithm searches for a clear path between the
two blocks. A wire can be auto-routed again using the context menus or by double clicking the wire. A wire
segment can be edited manually by click-dragging. If the block to which it is connected is moved, the end
of the wire moves with it, retaining as much of the path as possible.
If a wire is selected by clicking on it, it is drawn with small boxes on its corners.

Wire Context Menu

Right click on a wire to display the wire block context menu:

Force Exec Break When wires form a loop, a break point must be introduced,
where the value written to the block comes from a source
which was last executed during the previous cycle. A break is
automatically placed by iTools, and appears in red. Force
Exec Break allows the user to define where a break must be
placed. Surplus breaks appear in black.
Task Break Each Network block, and associated I/O blocks, wiring etc.
represents a ‘task’, which is normally associated with a
particular power phase (Network Block one is associated with
phase one, Network Block two with phase two and so on).
Different tasks are thus often synchronised with different
phases. A task break ensures that for any wiring between
tasks, the timing is delayed as necessary to avoid phasing
problems. Task breaks appear in blue.
Re-Route wire Replaces the current wire route with a new route generated
from scratch. Figure 7.3.2d Wire
Use Tags Toggles between wire and tag mode between parameters. Context Menu
Tag mode is useful for sources and destinations which are
widely separated.
Find Start Goes to the source of the wire.
Find End Goes to the destination of the wire.
Cut, Copy, Paste Not used in this context.

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 149
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

7.3.2 WIRING EDITOR OPERATING DETAILS (Cont.)

WIRE CONTEXT MENU (Cont.)

Delete Marks the wire for deletion. The wire is redrawn as a dashed line (or dashed tags) until
next download. Operation can be reversed until after next download.
Undelete Reverses the effect of the Delete operation up until the next download, after which,
Undelete is disabled.
Bring to Front Brings the wire to the front of the diagram.
Push to Back Sends the wire to the back of the diagram.
Wire Colours
Black Normal functioning wire
Red The wire is connected to a non-changeable parameter. Values are rejected by the
destination block.
Magenta A normal functioning wire is being hovered-over by the mouse cursor.
Purple A red wire is being hovered-over by the mouse cursor.
Green New Wire (dashed green wire changes to solid black after being downloaded.)

THICK WIRES
When attempting to wire between blocks which are located in different tasks, if no task break is inserted,
then all the affected wires are highlighted by being drawn with a much thicker line than usual. Thick wires
still execute, but the results are unpredictable, as the unit cannot resolve the strategy.

COMMENTS
Comments are added to a wiring diagram by click-dragging them from the Function Block tree onto the
diagram. As soon as the mouse is released, a dialogue box opens to allow the comment text to be entered.
Carriage returns are used to control the width of the comment. Once text entry is complete, ‘OK’ causes the
comment to appear on the diagram. There are no restrictions on the size of a comment. Comments are
saved to the instrument along with the diagram layout information.
Comments can be linked to function blocks and wires by clicking on the chain icon at the bottom right-hand
corner of the comment box and then clicking again on the required block or wire. A dashed line is drawn to
the top of the block or to the selected wire segment (figure 7.3.2f).
Note: once the comment has been linked, the Chain icon disappears. It re-appears when the mouse
cursor is hovered over the bottom right-hand corner of the comment box, as shown in figure 7.3.2f,
below.

Comment Context Menu

Edit Opens the Comment dialogue box to allow the comment text to
be edited.
Unlink Deletes the current link from the comment.
Cut Moves the comment to the Clipboard, ready to be pasted
elsewhere. Short cut = <ctrl>+<X>.
Copy Copies the comment from the wiring diagram to the Clipboard,
ready to be pasted elsewhere. Short cut = <ctrl>+<C>.
Paste Copies a comment from the Clipboard to the wiring diagram.
Short cut = <ctrl>+<V>.
Delete Marks the comment for deletion at next download. Figure 7.3.2e
Comment context
Undelete Undoes the Delete command if download has not taken place
menu
since.

HA179769
Page 150 Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

7.3.2 WIRING EDITOR OPERATING DETAILS (Cont.)

MONITORS
Monitor points are added to a wiring diagram by click-dragging them from the Function Block tree onto the
diagram. A monitor shows the current value (updated at the iTools parameter list update rate) of the
parameter to which it is linked. By default the name of the parameter is shown. To hide the parameter name
either double click on the monitor box or ‘Show Names’ in the context (right-click) menu can be used to
toggle the parameter name on and off.
Monitors are linked to function blocks and wires by clicking on the chain icon at the bottom right-hand
corner of the box and then clicking again on the required parameter. A dashed line is drawn to the top of
the block or the selected wire segment.
Note: once the monitor has been linked, the Chain icon disappears. It re-appears when the mouse
cursor is hovered over the bottom right-hand corner of the monitor box.

Comment

Monitor
Figure 7.3.2f Comment and Monitor appearance

Monitor Context Menu

Show names Toggles parameter names on and off in the monitor box.
Unlink Deletes the current link from the monitor.
Cut Moves the monitor to the Clipboard, ready to be pasted
elsewhere. Short cut = <ctrl>+<X>.
Copy Copies the monitor from the wiring diagram to the
Clipboard, ready to be pasted elsewhere. Short cut =
<ctrl>+<C>.
Paste Copies a monitor from the Clipboard to the wiring
diagram. Short cut = <ctrl>+<V>.
Delete Marks the monitor for deletion at next download.
Undelete Undoes the Delete command if download has not taken
place since.
Bring to Front Moves the item to the ‘top’ layer of the diagram.
Push to Back Moves the item to the ‘bottom’ layer of the diagram.
Parameter Help Shows parameter help for the item. Figure 7.3.2g
Monitor context menu

DOWNLOADING
When the wiring editor is opened the current wiring and diagram layout is read from the instrument. No
changes are made to the instrument function block execution or wiring until the download button is pressed.
Any changes made using the operator interface after the editor is opened are lost on download.
When a block is dropped onto the diagram, instrument parameters are changed to make the parameters for
that block available. If changes are made and the editor is closed without saving them there is a delay while
the editor clears these parameters.
During download, the wiring is written to the instrument which then calculates the block execution order and
starts executing the blocks. The diagram layout including comments and monitors is then written into
instrument flash memory along with the current editor settings. When the editor is reopened, the diagram
is shown positioned as it was when it was last downloaded.

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 151
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

7.3.2 WIRING EDITOR OPERATING DETAILS (Cont.)

COLOURS
Items on the diagram are coloured as follows:
Red Items which totally or partially obscure other items and items which are totally or
partially obscured by other items. Wires that are connected to unalterable or non-
available parameters. Execution breaks. Block execution orders for Task 1.
Blue Non-available parameters in function blocks. Block execution orders for Task 4. Task
breaks.
Green Items added to the diagram since last download are shown as green dashed lines.
Block execution orders for Task 2.
Magenta All selected items, or any item over which the cursor is hovering.
Purple Red wires when being hovered over by the mouse cursor.
Black All items added to the diagram before the last download. Block execution orders for
Task 3. Redundant execution breaks. Monitor and comment text.

DIAGRAM CONTEXT MENU

Cut Active only when the right click occurs within the
bounding rectangle which appears when more than one
item is selected. Moves the selection off the diagram to
the Clipboard. Short cut = <ctrl>+<X>.
Copy As for ‘Cut’, but the selection is copied, leaving the
original on the diagram. Short cut = <ctrl>+<C>.
Paste Copies the contents of the Clipboard to the diagram.
Short cut = <ctrl>+<V>.
Re-Route wires Reroutes all selected wires. If no wires are selected, all
wires are re-routed.
Align Tops Aligns the tops of all blocks in the selected area.
Align Lefts Aligns the left edges of all blocks in the selected area.
Space Evenly Spaces selected items such that their top left corners are
spaced evenly across the width of the diagram. Click on
the item which is to be the left-most item, then
<ctrl>+<left click> the remaining items in the order in
which they are to appear.
Delete Marks the item for deletion at next download time.
Can be ‘Undeleted’ up until download occurs.
Undelete Reverses the action of ‘Delete’ on the selected item.
Select All Selects all items on the current diagram.
Create Active only when the right click occurs, in the top level Figure 7.3.2h
Compound diagram, within the bounding rectangle which appears Diagram context menu
when more than one item is selected. Creates a new
wiring diagram as described in ‘Compound’, below.
Rename Allows a new name to entered for the current wiring diagram. This name appears in the
relevant tab.
Copy Graphic Copies the selected items (or the whole diagram if no items are selected) to the clipboard
as a Windows metafile, suitable for pasting into a documentation application. Wiring
entering/leaving the selection (if any) are drawn in tag mode.
Save Graphic... As for ‘Copy Graphic’ above, but saves to a user-specified file location instead of the
clipboard.
Copy Fragment To File...
Copies selected items to a user-named file in folder ‘My iTools Wiring Fragments’ located
in ‘My Documents’.
Paste Fragment From File
Allows the user to select a stored fragment for inclusion in the wiring diagram.
Centre Places the display window at the centre of the selected items. If ‘Select All’ has previously
been clicked-on, then the display widow is placed over the centre of the diagram.

HA179769
Page 152 Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

7.3.2 WIRING EDITOR OPERATING DETAILS (Cont.)

COMPOUNDS
Compounds are used to simplify the top level wiring diagram, by allowing the placing of any number of
function blocks within one ‘box’, the inputs and outputs of which operate in the same way as those of a
normal function block.
Each time a compound is created, a new tab appears at the top of the wiring diagram. Initially compounds
and their tabs are named ‘Compound 1’, ‘Compound 2’, etc. but they can be renamed by right clicking either
on the compound in the top level diagram, or anywhere within an open Compound, selecting ‘Rename’ and
typing in the required text string (16 characters max.).
Compounds cannot contain other compounds (i.e. they can be created only in the top level diagram).
Compound creation
1. Empty compounds are created within the top level diagram by clicking on the ‘Create Compound’
toolbar icon.
2. Compounds can also be created by highlighting one or more function blocks
in the top level diagram and then clicking on the ‘Create Compound’ toolbar
Create Flatten
icon. The highlighted items are moved from the top level diagram into a new compound compound
compound.
3. Compounds are ‘uncreated’ (flattened), by highlighting the relevant item in the top level menu and
then clicking on the ‘Flatten Compound’ toolbar icon. All the items previously contained within the
compound appear on the top level diagram.
4. Wiring between top level and compound parameters is carried out by clicking on the source
parameter, then clicking on the compound (or the compound tab) and then clicking on the destination
parameter. Wiring from a compound parameter to a top level parameter or from compound to
compound is carried out in similar manner.
5. Unused function blocks can be moved into compounds by dragging from the tree view. Existing blocks
can be dragged from the top level diagram, or from another compound, onto the tab associated with
the destination compound. Blocks are moved out of compounds to the top level diagram or to another
compound in a similar way. Function blocks can also be ‘cut and pasted’.
6. Default compound names (e.g. ‘Compound 2’) are used only once, so that if, for example, Compounds
1 and 2 have been created, and Compound 2 is subsequently deleted, then the next compound to be
created will be named ‘Compound 3’.
7. Top level elements can be click-dragged into compounds.

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 153
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

7.3.2 WIRING EDITOR OPERATING DETAILS (Cont.)

TOOL TIPS
Hovering the cursor over the block displays ‘tooltips’ describing that part of the block beneath the cursor.
For function block parameters the tooltip shows the parameter description, its OPC name, and, if
downloaded, its value. Similar tooltips are shown when hovering over inputs, outputs and over many other
items on the iTools screen.
A Function Block is enabled by dragging the block onto the diagram, wiring it, and finally downloading it to
the instrument. Initially blocks and associated wires are drawn with dashed lines, and when in this state the
parameter list for the block is enabled but the block is not executed by the instrument.
The block is added to the instrument function block execution list when the ‘Download’ icon is operated and
the items are redrawn using solid lines.
If a block which has been downloaded is deleted, it is shown on the diagram in a ghosted form until the
download button is pressed. (This is because it and any wires to/from it are still being executed in the
instrument. On download it will be removed from the instrument execution list and the diagram.) A ghosted
block can be ‘undeleted’ as described in ‘Context menu’, above.
When a dashed block is deleted it is removed immediately.

HA179769
Page 154 Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

7.4 PARAMETER EXPLORER

This view is displayed:
1. by clicking on the ‘Parameter Explorer’ toolbar icon,
2. by double clicking on the relevant block in the tree pane or in the graphical wiring editor
3. by selecting ‘Function Block View’ from the Function block context menu in the Graphical wiring Editor.

4. by selecting ‘parameter Explorer from the ‘View’ menu

5. by using the short cut <Alt>+<Enter>
In each case the function block parameters appear in the iTools window in tabular form, such as the example
in figure 7.4a, below.

Figure 7.4a Parameter table example

The figure above shows the default table layout. Columns can be added/deleted from the view using the
‘Columns’ item of the Explorer or context menus (figure 7.4b).

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 155
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

7.4 PARAMETER EXPLORER (Cont.)

Context Menu
Explorer Menu

Figure 7.4b Column enable/disable

7.4.1 Parameter explorer detail

Figure 7.4.1a shows a typical parameter table. This particular parameter has a number of subfolders
associated with it, and each of these is represented by a ‘tab’ across the top of the table.

Figure 7.4.1a Typical parameter table

Notes:
1. Parameters in blue are non-editable (Read only). In the example above all the parameters are
read only. Read/write parameters are in black and have a ‘pencil’ symbol in the ‘read/Write
access column at the left edge of the table. A number of such items are shown in figure 7.4a,
above.
2. Columns. The default explorer window (figure 7.4a) contains the columns ‘Name’, ‘Description’,
‘Address’, ‘Value’, and ‘Wired From’. As can be seen from figure 7.4b, the columns to be
displayed can be selected, to a certain extent, using either the ‘Explorer’ menu or the context
menu. ‘Limits’ have been enabled for the example above.
3. Hidden Parameters. By default, iTools hides parameters which are considered irrelevant in the
current context. Such hidden parameters can be shown in the table using the ‘Parameter
availability’ settings item of the options menu (figure 7.4b). Such items are displayed with a
shaded background.
4. The full pathname for the displayed parameter list is shown at the bottom left hand corner of the
window.

HA179769
Page 156 Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

7.4.1 PARAMETER EXPLORER DETAIL (Cont.)

Figure 7.4.1b Show/Hide parameters

Back to: and Forward to:. The parameter explorer contains a history buffer of up to 10 lists that have
been browsed in the current instance of the window. The ‘Back to: (list name)’ and ‘Forward to: (list
name)’ icons allow easy retracing or repeating of the parameter list view sequence.
If the mouse cursor is hovered over the tool icon, the name of the parameter list which will appear if the
icon is clicked-on appears. Clicking on the arrow head displays a pick list of up to 10 previously visited
lists which the user can select. Short cut = <ctrl>+<B> for ‘Back to’ or <ctrl>+<F> for ‘Forward to’.
Go Up a Level, Go Down a Level. For nested parameters, these buttons allow the user to navigate
‘vertically’ between levels. Short cut = <ctrl>+<U> for ‘Go Up a Level’ or <ctrl>+<D> for ‘Go Down a
Level’.
Push pin to give the window global scope. Clicking on this icon causes the current parameter list to be
permanently displayed, even if another instrument becomes the ‘current device’.

7.4.2 Explorer tools

A number of tool icons appear above the parameter list: Context Menu

Copy Parameter Copies the clicked-on parameter to the clipboard

Parameter properties Displays parameter properties for the clicked-on parameter
Parameter Help... Displays help information for the clicked-on parameter
Edit/Paste/Delete/Follow Wire Not used in this application
Columns Allows the user to enable/disable a number of parameter table
columns (figure 7.4b).

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 157
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

7.5 FIELDBUS GATEWAY

Figure 7.5a Typical Fieldbus Gateway Parameter list

A Profibus master may be required to work with slaves from different manufacturers and with different
functions. Also, there are many parameters which are not required by the network master. Fieldbus Gateway
allows the user to define which Input and output parameters are to be available over the Profibus link. The
master may then map the selected device parameters into, for example, PLC input/output registers, or, in
the case of a supervisory (SCADA) package, to a personal computer.
Values from each slave, (the ‘Input Data’), are read by the master, which then runs a control program such as
a ladder logic program. The program generates a set of values, (the ‘Output Data’) and loads them into a
pre-defined set of registers for transmission to the slaves. This process is called an ‘I/O data exchange’ and
is repeated continuously, to give a cyclical I/O data exchange.
As shown in figure 7.5a, above, there are two tabs within the editor, called ‘Input definition’ and ‘Output
definition’. ‘Inputs’ are values sent from the controller to the Profibus master. ‘Outputs’ are values received
from the master and used by the controller, (e.g. set points written from the master).
Note: Values from Profibus over write changes made at the operator interface.

The procedure for selecting variables is the same for both input and
output definition tabs:
1. Double click the next available position, in the ‘Wired From’
column, in the input or output data table and select the variable
to assign to it. A pop-up (figure 7.5b) provides a browser from
which a list of parameters can be opened.
2. Double click the parameter to assign it to the input definition.
3. Alternatively, drag and drop the parameter from the browser list.

Figure 7.5b Browser window

Note: Gaps may be left in the table if so desired.

To delete a wire, double click in the ‘Wired From’ column of the Input/Output Definition window to open the
pop up browser window, Figure 7.5b. Tick the ‘Delete Wire’ box.

HA179769
Page 158 Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

7.5 FIELDBUS GATEWAY(Cont.)

When all the required parameters have been added to the lists, notes of how many ‘wired’ entries are
included in the input and output areas should be made as this information is needed when setting up the
Profibus Master.
Notes:
1. A maximum of 32 input and 16 output parameters may be set using the Gateway Editor.
2. No checks are made that output variables are writeable, and if a read only variable is included in
the output list any values sent to it will be ignored with no error indication.
3. For Modbus only:
As shown in figure 7.5b, ‘Block Read’ and ‘Block Write’ requests both access the same memory
location (0C06), which ‘points’ to the relevant input definition table or output definition table
according to whether the instruction is a read or a write. If a value is written to a parameter at a
particular location in the output definition table, and the value of the parameter in the same
location in the input definition table is then read, the read value is normally different from the
write value because the parameter at a location in the input table is not usually the same as the
parameter at that location in the output table (unless the same parameter is placed at the same
location in both tables).
Once the changes have been made to the Input and Output definition lists, they must be downloaded
to the controller unit. This is done (for both tables simultaneously) by clicking on the ‘Update device
Flash Memory’ button on the top left of the Fieldbus Gateway Editor window. The controller performs
a restart after this operation.
Input Definition table Output Definition table

BLK READ 0C06 Parameter A address Parameter E address

Parameter B address Parameter F address
Parameter C address Parameter C address
Parameter D address Parameter G address
Further addresses Further addresses

Output Definition table Input Definition table

BLK WRITE 0C06 Parameter E address Parameter A address

Parameter F address Parameter B address
Parameter C address Parameter C address
Parameter G address Parameter D address
Further addresses Further addresses

Figure 7.5b Block read and block write (note 3)

EE CHECKSUM FAIL ERROR

NOTICE
For software versions prior to version 3 only.
The EEPROM, used to retain configuration parameters whilst power is off, has a lifetime of at least
100,000 writes. If the Fieldbus Gateway is configured to include such configuration parameters (see
list below), then the lifetime of the EEPROM may be reduced. In this case an ‘EE Checksum Fail Error’
message appears at power up, and the Driver Module will fail to start, and will have to be replaced.

It is therefore recommended that an alternative method is used when communicating with these
parameters. For example, rather than writing directly to the parameter Control.MainSP (saved in EEPROM)
it is possible to use a SetProv block and write into SetProv.Remote 1 (not saved in EEPROM) instead.
For software version 3.0 onwards, no parameters modified via the I/O Gateway will be saved in EEPROM.
Saving to EEPROM will be achieved by other wiring methods.

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 159
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

7.5 FIELDBUS GATEWAY (Cont.)

EE CHECKSUM FAIL ERROR (Cont.)
The following is a list of parameters which are stored in EEPROM, and which could therefore BE included in
the IO Gateway.
AlmStop.Network.TLF
Access.ClearMemory
AnSwitch.Fallback
Access.ConfigurationPasscode
AnSwitch.FallbackVal
Access.EngineerPasscode
AnSwitch.HighLimit
Access.IM
AnSwitch.In1
Access.Keylock
AnSwitch.In2
Access.QuickStartPasscode
AnSwitch.In3
AlmDis.Alarm.ExternIn
AnSwitch.In4
AlmDis.AnalogOP.OutputFault
AnSwitch.In5
AlmDis.Control.ClosedLoop
AnSwitch.In6
AlmDis.Control.Limitation
AnSwitch.In7
AlmDis.Control.PVTransfer
AnSwitch.In8
AlmDis.LTC.Fuse
AnSwitch.LowLimit
AlmDis.LTC.Temp
AnSwitch.Select
AlmDis.Network.ChopOff
Counter.Clock
AlmDis.Network.FreqFault
Counter.Direction
AlmDis.Network.FuseBlown
Counter.Enable
AlmDis.Network.MainsVoltFault
Counter.Target
AlmDis.Network.MissMains
Digital.Invert
AlmDis.Network.NetworkDips
Digital.Type
AlmDis.Network.OpenThyr
Energy.AutoScaleUnits
AlmDis.Network.OverCurrent
Energy.PulseLen
AlmDis.Network.OverTemp
Energy.PulseScale
AlmDis.Network.PB24VFail
Energy.TotEnergyUnit
AlmDis.Network.PLF
Energy.Type
AlmDis.Network.PLU
Energy.UsrEnergyUnit
AlmDis.Network.PreTemp
Faultdet.GlobalDis
AlmDis.Network.ThyrSC
FiringOP.DelayedTrigger
AlmDis.Network.TLF
FiringOP.LoadType
AlmDis.PLM.PrOverPs
FiringOP.SafetyRamp
AlmLat.Alarm.ExternIn
FiringOP.SoftStart
AlmLat.AnalogOP.OutputFault
FiringOP.SoftStop
AlmLat.Control.ClosedLoop
IPMonitor.AlarmDays
AlmLat.Control.Limitation
IPMonitor.AlarmTime
AlmLat.Control.PVTransfer
IPMonitor.In
AlmLat.LTC.Fuse
IPMonitor.Reset
AlmLat.LTC.Temp
IPMonitor.Threshold
AlmLat.Network.FreqFault
Lgc2.FallbackType
AlmLat.Network.FuseBlown
Lgc2.Hysteresis
AlmLat.Network.MainsVoltFault
Lgc2.In1
AlmLat.Network.MissMains
Lgc2.In2
AlmLat.Network.NetworkDips
Lgc2.Invert
AlmLat.Network.OverCurrent
Lgc2.Oper
AlmLat.Network.OverTemp
Lgc8.In1
AlmLat.Network.PB24VFail
Lgc8.In2
AlmLat.Network.PLF
Lgc8.In3
AlmLat.Network.PLU
Lgc8.In4
AlmLat.Network.PreTemp
Lgc8.In5
AlmLat.Network.ThyrSC
Lgc8.In6
AlmLat.Network.TLF
Lgc8.In7
AlmLat.PLM.PrOverPs
Lgc8.In8
AlmStop.Alarm.ExternIn
Lgc8.InInvert
AlmStop.AnalogOP.OutputFault
Lgc8.NumIn
AlmStop.Control.ClosedLoop
Lgc8.Oper
AlmStop.Network.MainsVoltFault
Lgc8.OutInvert
AlmStop.Network.PLF
Limit.Control.SP1
AlmStop.Network.PLU
Limit.Control.SP2
AlmStop.Network.PreTemp
Limit.Control.SP3

HA179769
Page 160 Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

7.5 FIELDBUS GATEWAY (Cont.)

EE CHECKSUM FAIL ERROR (Cont.)

Limit.Control.TI Setup.Network.HeaterType
Main.AnalogIP.RangeHigh Setup.Network.HeatsinkPreTemp
Main.AnalogIP.RangeLow Setup.Network.IextScale
Main.AnalogIP.Type Setup.Network.IMaximum
Main.AnalogOP.RangeHigh Setup.Network.INominal
Main.AnalogOP.RangeLow Setup.Network.OverIThreshold
Main.AnalogOP.Type Setup.Network.OverVoltThreshold
Main.Control.SP Setup.Network.PLFSensitivity
Main.Control.TI Setup.Network.PLUthreshold
Main.Control.TransferSpan Setup.Network.UnderVoltThreshold
Main.PLM.Period Setup.Network.VdipsThreshold
Main.PLM.Type Setup.Network.VextScale
MainPrm.LTC.S1 Setup.Network.VlineNominal
MainPrm.LTC.S2 Setup.Network.VloadNominal
MainPrm.LTC.S3 Setup.Network.VMaximum
MainPrm.LTC.TapNb Station.PLM.Address
MainPrm.LTC.Type Timer.In
Math2.Fallback Timer.Time
Math2.FallbackVal Timer.Type
Math2.HighLimit Total.AlarmSP
Math2.In1 Total.Hold
Math2.In1Mul Total.In
Math2.In2 Total.Reset
Math2.In2Mul Total.Resolution
Math2.LowLimit Total.Run
Math2.Oper Total.Units
Math2.Resolution User.Comms.Address
Math2.Select User.Comms.Baud
Math2.Units User.Comms.DCHP_enable
Modultr.CycleTime User.Comms.Default_Gateway_1
Modultr.LgcMode User.Comms.Default_Gateway_2
Modultr.MinOnTime User.Comms.Default_Gateway_3
Modultr.Mode User.Comms.Default_Gateway_4
Modultr.SwitchPA User.Comms.Delay
Network.PLM.Ps User.Comms.Extension_Cycles
PLMChan User.Comms.IP_address_1
PLMChan.Group User.Comms.IP_address_2
PLMChan.ShedFactor User.Comms.IP_address_3
RmtPanel.Comms.Address User.Comms.IP_address_4
RmtPanel.Comms.Baud User.Comms.Network_Version
SetProv.DisRamp User.Comms.Parity
SetProv.HiRange User.Comms.Pref_Mstr_IP_1
SetProv.Limit User.Comms.Pref_Mstr_IP_2
SetProv.LocalSP User.Comms.Pref_Mstr_IP_3
SetProv.RampRate User.Comms.Pref_Mstr_IP_4
SetProv.RemSelect User.Comms.Protocol
SetProv.SPSelect User.Comms.ShowMac
SetProv.SPTrack User.Comms.Subnet_Mask_1
SetProv.SPUnits User.Comms.Subnet_Mask_2
Setup.Control.BleedScale User.Comms.Subnet_Mask_3
Setup.Control.EnLimit User.Comms.Subnet_Mask_4
Setup.Control.FFGain User.Comms.UnitIdent
Setup.Control.FFOffset UsrVal.HighLimit
Setup.Control.FFType UsrVal.LowLimit
Setup.Control.NominalPV UsrVal.Resolution
Setup.Control.TransferEn UsrVal.Status
Setup.Network.ChopOffNb UsrVal.Units
Setup.Network.ChopOffThreshold1 UsrVal.Val
Setup.Network.ChopOffThreshold2 Wire.Dest
Setup.Network.ChopOffwindow Wire.Src
Setup.Network.FreqDriftThreshold

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 161
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

7.6 DEVICE PANEL

When this toolbar icon is clicked on, a representation of the connected instrument (either on-line, or a clone)
appears in the iTools window. The operator interface acts as in the real instrument (note 1), but instead of
operating the push-buttons by hand, the relevant items are clicked on, using the mouse. Changes made at
the operator interface are reflected at the iTools screen and vice-versa.
The display can be scaled as required by click/dragging on the sides/bottom or corners.
Notes:
1. An up/down arrow key appears above the display for operations (e.g. acknowledging
system alarms) which require simultaneous operation of the up and down arrow keys.
2. Real instruments can be recognised by the fact that the representation of the display is in green,
whereas for cloned instruments, the display is shown in white (see figure 7.6 below).

Figure 7.6 Device panel display on-line (left) and clone (right).

HA179769
Page 162 Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

7.7 WATCH/RECIPE EDITOR

The watch/recipe editor is opened by clicking on the Watch/Recipe tool icon, by selecting ‘Watch/Recipe’
in the ‘Views’ menu or by using the short cut <ctrl>+<A>. The window is in two parts: the left part containing
the watch list; the right-hand part containing one or more data sets, initially empty and unnamed.
The Watch/Recipe window is used:
1. To monitor a list of parameters. This list can contain parameters from many different, and otherwise
unrelated parameter lists within the same device. It cannot contain parameters from different devices.
2. To create ‘data sets’ of parameter values which can be selected and downloaded to the device in the
sequence defined in the recipe. The same parameter may be used more than once in a recipe.

Figure 7.7 Watch/Recipe Editor window (with context menu)

7.7.1 Creating a Watch List

After opening the window, parameters can be added to it as described below. The values of the parameters
update in real-time, allowing the user to monitor a number of values simultaneously.

ADDING PARAMETERS TO THE WATCH LIST

1. Parameters can be click-dragged into the watch list from another area of the iTools window (for
example, the parameter explorer window, the graphical wiring editor, the browse tree). The parameter
is placed either in an empty row at the bottom of the list, or if it is dragged on top of an already existing
parameter, it is inserted above this parameter, with the remaining parameters being moved down one
place.
2. Parameters can be dragged from one position in the list to another. In such a case, a copy of the
parameter is produced, the source parameter remaining in its original position.
3. Parameters can be copied <ctrl>+<C> and pasted <ctrl>+<V> either within the list, or from a source
external to it, for example the parameter browse window or the graphical wiring editor.
4. The ‘Insert item...’ tool button the ‘Insert Parameter’ item in the Recipe or context menu or the short
cut <Insert> can be used to open a browse window from which a parameter is selected for insertion
above the currently selected parameter.

DATA SET CREATION

Once all the required parameters have been added to the list, select the empty data set by clicking on the
column header. Fill the data set with current values using one of the following methods:
1. Clicking on the ‘Capture current values into a data set’ tool icon (also known as the ‘Snapshot
Values’ tool).
2. Selecting ‘Snapshot Values’ from the Recipe or Context (right-click) menu.
3. Using the short cut <ctrl>+<A>.

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 163
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

7.7.1 CREATING A WATCH LIST (Cont.)

DATA SET CREATION (Cont.)

Individual data values can now be edited by typing directly into the grid cells. Data values can be left blank
or cleared, in which case, no values will be written for those parameters at download. Data values are cleared
by deleting all the characters in the cell then either moving to a different cell or typing <Enter>.
The set is called ‘Set 1’ by default, but it can be renamed by either by using the ‘Rename data set...’ item in
the Recipe or context menus, or by using the short cut <ctrl>+<R>.
New, empty data sets can be added using one of the following:
1. Clicking on the ‘Create a new empty data set’ toolbar icon.
2. Selecting ‘New Data Set’ in the Recipe or context menus
3. Using the short cut <ctrl>+<W>
Once created, the data sets are edited as described above.
Finally, once all the required data sets have been created, edited and saved, they can be downloaded
the instrument, one at a time, using the Download tool, the ‘Download Values’ item in the Recipe or
context menus, or the short cut <ctrl>+<D>.

7.7.2 Watch Recipe toolbar icons

Create a new watch/recipe list. Creates a new list by clearing out all parameters and data sets from an open
window. If the current list has not been saved, confirmation is requested. Short cut <ctrl>+<N>
Open an existing watch/recipe file. If the current list or data set has not been saved, confirmation is
requested. A file dialogue box then opens allowing the user to select a file to be opened. Short cut
<ctrl>+<O>
Save the current watch/recipe list. Allows the current set to be saved to a user specified location. Short cut
<ctrl>+<S>.
Download the selected data set to the device. Short cut <ctrl>+<D>
Insert item ahead of selected item. Short cut <Insert>.
Remove recipe parameter. Short cut <ctrl>+<Delete>.
Move selected item. Up arrow moves selected parameter up the list; down arrow move the selected
parameter down the list.
Create a new empty data set. Short cut <ctrl>+<w>.
Delete an empty data set. Short cut <ctrl>+<Delete>
Capture current values into a data set. Fills the selected data set with values. Short cut <ctrl>+<A>.
Clear the selected data set. Removes values from the selected data set. Short cut <Shift>+<Delete>.
Open OPC Scope. Opens a separate utility that allows trending, data logging and Dynamic Data Exchange
(DDE). OPC Scope is an OPC explorer program that can connect to any OPC server that is in the windows
registry.
(OPC is an acronym for ‘OLE for Process Control, where OLE stands for ‘Object Linking and Embedding’.)

7.7.3 Watch/Recipe Context Menu

The Watch/Recipe Context menu items have the same functions as described above for toolbar items.

HA179769
Page 164 Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

7.8 USER PAGES

Up to four user pages, each with four lines can be created and downloaded to the unit. These allow the
operator interface to display particular sets of values, in various formats. Figure 7.8 below, shows the initial
display when ‘User Pages’ is first clicked-on.

Figure 7.8 Blank User Page

7.8.1 User Page creation

1. Click on the up/down arrow to select the required Page number for configuration.
2. Double-click one of the cells in the ‘Promote Parameter List’ to display the ‘Select Item Style’ window
(figure 7.8.1a).
3. Click on the required style then on ‘OK’.
4. A parameter Browse window appears (figure 7.8.1b) for the selected row (1 in the figure), allowing the
user to select a parameter.
5. Click ‘OK’ to insert the parameter into the list.
6. If required, click on white square on the relevant ‘Graph Low’ or ‘Graph High’ title bar, and set the low
and high values to appear with an associated bargraph (figure 7.8.1c).

Figure 7.8.1a Style selection Figure 7.8.1b Parameter browse Figure 7.8.1c Graph limit setting.

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 165
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

7.8.2 Style examples

Figure 7.8.2a Figure 7.8.2b

Text, Value only, single Row and Left origin Bar styles Bar Graph Title 1, Left origin bar and Bar Graph Title 2 styles

Text If ‘Text’ is selected, a text entry window appears allowing the user to enter the text to
appear on the selected line of the display. The display can accommodate 10
characters - any further characters are hidden. This style is shown as line one in figure
7.8.2a.
Value only Displays the value of the selected parameter, right justified. No User text may be
entered for this style. This style is shown as line two in figure 7.8.2a.
Single Row Displays the parameter mnemonic (left justified) and the parameter value (right
justified). User text may be entered, but this will over-write the parameter mnemonic.
This style is shown as line three in figure 7.8.2a.
Left origin Bar Displays the parameter value as a left-hand zero bargraph. This style is shown as line
four in figure 7.8.2a, and line two in figure 7.8.2b.
Bar Graph Title 1 Supplies low limit (left justified), parameter mnemonic (centred) and high limit (right
justified) displays, normally associated with a Left origin Bar on the line below or
above. User text may be entered. As the number of entered characters increases, this
overwrites firstly the mnemonic, then the range values. This style is shown as line one
in figure 7.8.2b.
Bar Graph Title 2 Similar to Bar Graph Title 1, but includes a numeric value for the parameter as well as
its mnemonic. User text may be entered. As the number of entered characters
increases, this over-writes firstly the mnemonic, then the range values. If the number of
entered characters plus the number of value characters exceeds 10, then the user text
is hidden, leaving just the parameter value. This style is shown as line three in figure
7.8.2b.

HA179769
Page 166 Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

8.4 PARAMETER TABLE (Cont.)

Parameter path Description Type Hex Dec
7.8.3 User Pages Tools

Select Page. Use the up/down arrows to select page 1 to page 4 for configuration.

Insert item ahead of selected item. Opens a browser to allow the user to select a parameter for insertion in
the table. The insertion point is above the currently selected item. If the Parameter list is full, the toolbar
icon is disabled (‘greyed out’). Short cut <Insert>

Remove selected item. Removes the selected item on the list (without confirmation). Short cut
<ctrl>+<Delete>

Move selected item. Click on the arrows to change the parameter order, and thus the order in which the
parameters appear at the operator interface.

Edit parameter for selected item. Opens a browser to allow the user to select a parameter to replace the
highlighted parameter in the table. Short cut <ctrl>+<E>.

Edit user text for selected item. Allows the user to edit the user text which appears at the operator
interface. Only the first 10 characters are displayed. For parameters that do not support user text ‘(no user
text)’ appears in the ‘User Text’ column. Short cut <ctrl>+<T>.

Edit style for selected item. Clicking on this toolbar icon calls the Style Selection page allowing the user to
edit the current style for the selected parameter. Short cut <ctrl>+<S>.

Remove all items from this page. After confirmation, this removes ALL items from the parameter list, not
just the highlighted ones. Short cut <ctrl>+<X>.

Note: Most if the above functions are also to be found in the ‘Pages’ menu, in the context menu,
along with ‘Parameter Help’ and ‘Parameter properties...’ items.

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 167
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

8.4 PARAMETER TABLE (Cont.)

Parameter path Description Type Hex Dec
8 PARAMETER ADDRESSES (MODBUS)

8.1 INTRODUCTION
The iTools address fields display each parameter’s Modbus address to be used when addressing integer
values over the serial communications link. In order to access these values as IEEE floating point values, the
calculation: IEEE address = {(Modbus address x 2) + hex 8000} should be used. The Communications
manual HA179770 gives details of how to establish a suitable communications link.
Notes:
1. Certain parameters may have values which exceed the maximum value that can be read from or
written to using a 16-bit integer communications. Such parameters have a scaling factor applied
to them as described in section 8.3.
2. When using 16-bit scaled integer modbus addressing, time parameters can be read from or
written to in 10ths of minutes, or in 10ths of seconds as defined in the parameter
Instrument.config. TimerRes.

8.2 PARAMETER TYPES

The following parameter types are used:
bool Boolean
uint8 Unsigned 8-bit integer
int16 Signed 16-bit integer
uint16 Unsigned 16-bit integer
int32 Signed 32-bit integer
uint32 Unsigned 32-bit integer
time32 Unsigned 32-bit integer (time in milliseconds)
float32 IEEE 32-bit floating point
string String - an array of unsigned 8-bit integers.

HA179769
Page 168 Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

8.4 PARAMETER TABLE (Cont.)

Parameter path Description Type Hex Dec
8.3 PARAMETER SCALING
Some parameters might have values which exceed the maximum value (32767) that can be read/written via
16-bit scaled integer comms. For this reason, the following parameters are read/written with a scaling factor
applied to them when using scaled integer comms:
Parameter Name Scaling Factor
Network.1-4.Meas.PBurst Kilo with 1 decimal place
Network.1-4.Meas.P Kilo with 1decimal place
Network.1-4.Meas.S Kilo with 1decimal place
Network.1-4.Meas.Q Kilo with 1decimal place
Network.1-4.Meas.IsqBurst Kilo with 1decimal place
Network.1-4.Meas.Isq Kilo with 1decimal place
Network.1-4.Meas.IsqMax Kilo with 1decimal place
Network.1-4.Meas.VsqBurst Kilo with 1decimal place
Network.1-4.Meas.Vsq Kilo with 1decimal place
Network.1-4.Meas.VsqMax Kilo with 1decimal place
PLM.Network.Pmax Mega with 2 decimal places
PLM.Network.Pt Mega with 2 decimal places
PLM.Network.Ps Mega with 2 decimal places
PLM.Network.Pr Mega with 2 decimal places
PLMChan.1-4.PZmax Kilo with 1 decimal place

8.3.1 Conditional scaling

The parameters listed below are conditionally re-scaled as kilo values with 1 decimal place:
Parameter Name Condition
Control.n.Setup.NominalPV When Control.n.Main.PV is wired from Network.n.Meas.P, Vsq or Isq
Control.n.Main.PV When wired from Network.n.Meas.P, Vsq or Isq
Control.n.Main.TransferPV When wired from Network.n.Meas.P, Vsq or Isq
Control.n.Main.TransferSpan When Control.n.Main.PV is wired from Network.n.Meas.P, Vsq or Isq
Control.n.Limit.PV1 When wired from Network.n.Meas.P, Vsq or Isq
Control.n.Limit.PV2 When wired from Network.n.Meas.P, Vsq or Isq
Control.n.Limit.PV3 When wired from Network.n.Meas.P, Vsq or Isq
Control.n.Limit.SP1 When Control.n.Limit.PV1 is wired from Network.n.Meas.P, Vsq or Isq
Control.n.Limit.SP2 When Control.n.Limit.PV2 is wired from Network.n.Meas.P, Vsq or Isq
Control.n.Limit.SP3 When Control.n.Limit.PV3 is wired from Network.n.Meas.P, Vsq or Isq
SetpProv.n.Remote1 When in Engineering units AND Control.m.Main.PV is wired from
Network.m.Meas.P, Vsq or Isq (where m = the instance of the Control
block to which SetpProv.n is wired)
SetpProv.n.Remote2 When in Engineering units AND Control.m.Main.PV is wired from
Network.m.Meas.P, Vsq or Isq (where m =the instance of the Control block
to which SetpProv.n is wired)
SetpProv.n.LocalSP When in Engineering units AND Control.m.Main.PV is wired from
Network.m.Meas.P, Vsq or Isq (where m = the instance of the Control
block to which SetpProv.n is wired)

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 169
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

8.4 PARAMETER TABLE (Cont.)

Parameter path Description Type Hex Dec
8.4 PARAMETER TABLE
The following table is arranged in alphabetical function block order:
Access Firing O/P 4 IP Monitor 2 Predictive Load Manager
Comms Instrument IP Monitor 3 PLM Chan 1
Control 1 Analogue I/P 1 IP Monitor 4 PLM Chan 2
Control 2 Analogue I/P 2 LGC2 1 PLM Chan 3
Control 3 Analogue I/P 3 LGC2 2 PLM Chan 4
Control 4 Analogue I/P 4 LGC2 3 QuickStart
Counter 1 Analogue I/P 5 LGC2 4 Set Prov 1
Counter 2 Analogue O/P 1 Lgc8 1 Set Prov 2
Counter 3 Analogue O/P 2 Lgc8 2 Set Prov 3
Counter 4 Analogue O/P 3 Lgc8 3 Set Prov 4
Customer Page 1 Analogue O/P 4 Lgc8 4 Timer 1
Customer Page 2 I/O Digital 1 LTC Timer 2
Customer Page 3 I/O Digital 2 Maths2 1 Timer 3
Customer Page 4 I/O Digital 3 Maths2 2 Timer 4
Energy 1 I/O Digital 4 Maths2 3 Totaliser 1
Energy 2 I/O Digital 5 Maths2 4 Totaliser 2
Energy 3 I/O Digital 6 Modulator 1 Totaliser 3
Energy 4 I/O Digital 7 Modulator 2 Totaliser 4
Energy 5 I/O Digital 8 Modulator 3 User Value 1
Event Log I/O Relay 1 Modulator 4 User Value 2
Fault detection I/O Relay 2 Network 1 User Value 3
Firing O/P 1 I/O Relay 3 Network 2 User Value 4
Firing O/P 2 I/O Relay 4 Network 3
Firing O/P 3 IP Monitor 1 Network 4

HA179769
Page 170 Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

8.4 PARAMETER TABLE (Cont.)

Parameter path Description Type Hex Dec
Access.ClearMemory Cold Start the Instrument uint8 07EA 2026
Access.ConfigurationPasscode Configuration Code (Default = 3) int16 07E5 2021
Access.EngineerPasscode Engineer Code (Default = 2) int16 07E4 2020
Access.Goto Goto uint8 07E2 2018
Access.IM Instrument Mode uint8 00C7 199
(0= Operating, 1 = Standby, 2 = Configuration)
Access.Keylock Lock Instrument (0 = none, 1 = All, 2 = Edit) uint8 07E9 2025
Access.Passcode Passcode Request int16 07E3 2019
Access.QuickStartPasscode Quick Start Code (Default = 4) int16 07E6 2022
Comms.RmtPanel.Address Address (1 to 254) uint8 0796 1942
Comms.RmtPanel.Baud Baud Rate (0 = 9600, 1 = 19,200) uint8 0797 1943
Comms.User.Address Comms Address (Range depends on protocol) uint8 076C 1900
Comms.User.Baud Baud Rate uint8 076D 1901
(0 = 9600, 1 = 19,200, 2 = 4800, 3 = 2400, 4 = 1200
10 = 125kb, 250kb, 500kb, 13 = 1Mb)
Comms.User.DCHP_enable DHCP Type (0 = fixed, 1 = dynamic) bool 0780 1920
Comms.User.Default_Gateway_1 1st byte of Default Gateway uint8 0778 1912
Comms.User.Default_Gateway_2 2nd byte of Default Gateway uint8 0779 1913
Comms.User.Default_Gateway_3 3rd byte of Default Gateway uint8 077A 1914
Comms.User.Default_Gateway_4 4th byte of Default Gateway uint8 077B 1915
Comms.User.Delay TX Delay time (0 = off, 1 = on) uint8 076F 1903
Comms.User.Extension_Cycles Number of CC Link Extension Cycles uint8 0799 1945
Comms.User.Id Comms Identity uint8 076A 1898
(0 = none, 1 = EIA485, 5 = Ethernet, 10 = Network)
Comms.User.IP_address_1 1st byte of IP address. uint8 0770 1904
Comms.User.IP_address_2 2nd byte of IP address. uint8 0771 1905
Comms.User.IP_address_3 3rd byte of IP address. uint8 0772 1906
Comms.User.IP_address_4 4th byte of IP address. uint8 0773 1907
Comms.User.MAC1 MAC address 1 uint8 0789 1929
Comms.User.MAC2 MAC address 2 uint8 078A 1930
Comms.User.MAC3 MAC address 3 uint8 078B 1931
Comms.User.MAC4 MAC address 4 uint8 078C 1932
Comms.User.MAC5 MAC address 5 uint8 078D 1933
Comms.User.MAC6 MAC address 6 uint8 078E 1934
Comms.User.NetStatus Fieldbus Status uint8 0795 1941
Comms.User.Network Ethernet Network status int16 0781 1921
Comms.User.Network_Version CC Link Network Version uint8 0798 1944
Comms.User.Occupied_Stations Occupied Stations uint8 079A 1946
Comms.User.Parity Parity setting (0 = none, 1 = even, 2 = odd) uint8 076E 1902
Comms.User.PNDevNum Profibus staftion number uint8 0C01 3073
Comms.User.PNinitMode Profibus initialise mode uint8 0C00 3072
Comms.User.Pref_Mstr_IP_1 1st byte of Preferred Master IP address uint8 077C 1916
Comms.User.Pref_Mstr_IP_2 2nd byte of Preferred Master IP address uint8 077D 1917
Comms.User.Pref_Mstr_IP_3 3rd byte of Preferred Master IP address uint8 077E 1918
Comms.User.Pref_Mstr_IP_4 4th byte of Preferred Master IP address uint8 077F 1919
Comms.User.Protocol Comms Protocol uint8 076B 1899
(0 = Modbus, 5 = Ethernet, 10 = Network,11 = Profibus,
12 = DeviceNet, 13 = CanOpen, 14 = CCLink,
16 = Ethernet IP, 17 = Modbus TCP)
Comms.User.ShowMac Show MAC address bool 0788 1928
Comms.User.Subnet_Mask_1 1st byte of Subnet mask uint8 0774 1908
Comms.User.Subnet_Mask_2 2nd byte of Subnet mask uint8 0775 1909
Comms.User.Subnet_Mask_3 3rd byte of Subnet mask uint8 0776 1910
Comms.User.Subnet_Mask_4 4th byte of Subnet mask uint8 0777 1911
Comms.User.UnitIdent Unit Identity Enable (0 = Strict, 1 = Loose, 2 = Instr.) uint8 0787 1927
Control.1.AlmAck.ClosedLoop Process alarm ack: Closed loop break uint8 03B7 951
(0 = No Ack, 1 = Ack)
Control.1.AlmAck.Limitation Indication alarm ack: Limitation uint8 03B9 953
(0 = No Ack, 1 = Ack)

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 171
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

8.4 PARAMETER TABLE (Cont.)

Parameter path Description Type Hex Dec
Control.1.AlmAck.PVTransfer Indication alarm ack: PV transfer uint8 03B8 952
(0 = No Ack, 1 = Ack)
Control.1.AlmDet.ClosedLoop Process alarm detection status: Closed loop break uint8 03AE 942
(0 = Inactive, 1 = Active)
Control.1.AlmDet.Limitation Indication alarm detection status: Limitation uint8 03B0 944
(0 = Inactive, 1 = Active)
Control.1.AlmDet.PVTransfer Indication alarm detection status: PV transfer uint8 03AF 943
(0 = Inactive, 1 = Active)
Control.1.AlmDis.ClosedLoop Process alarm: Closed loop break uint8 03AB 939
(0 = Enable, 1 = Disable)
Control.1.AlmDis.Limitation Indication alarm: Limitation (0 = Enable, 1 = Disable) uint8 03AD 941
Control.1.AlmDis.PVTransfer Indication alarm: PV transfer (0 = Enable, 1 = Disable) uint8 03AC 940
Control.1.AlmLat.ClosedLoop Process alarm latch: Closed loop break uint8 03B4 948
(0 = No Latch, 1 = Latch)
Control.1.AlmLat.Limitation Indication alarm latch: Limitation uint8 03B6 950
(0 = No Latch, 1 = Latch)
Control.1.AlmLat.PVTransfer Indication alarm latch: PV transfer uint8 03B5 949
(0 = No Latch, 1 = Latch)
Control.1.AlmSig.ClosedLoop Process alarm signalling status: Closed loop break uint8 03B1 945
(0 = Not latched, 1 = Latched)
Control.1.AlmSig.Limitation Indication alarm signalling status: Limitation uint8 03B3 947
(0 = Not latched, 1 = Latched)
Control.1.AlmSig.PVTransfer Indication alarm signalling status: PV transfer uint8 03B2 946
(0 = Not latched, 1 = Latched)
Control.1.AlmStop.ClosedLoop Process alarm stop: Closed loop break uint8 03BA 954
(0 = No Stop, 1 = Stop)
Control.1.AlmStop.Limitation Indication alarm stop: Limitation uint8 03BC 956
Control.1.AlmStop.PVTransfer Indication alarm stop: PV transfer uint8 03BB 955
Control.1.Diag.Output Output of the controller float32 03A9 937
Control.1.Diag.PAOP Phase angle output for PA reduction in burst firing float32 03AA 938
Control.1.Diag.Status Status of the controller (0 = Main PV, 1 = Transfr, uint8 03A8 936
4 = Limit 1, 5 = Limit 2, 6 = Limit 3)
Control.1.Limit.PV1 Threshold Limit PV1 float32 03A1 929
Control.1.Limit.PV2 Threshold Limit PV2 float32 03A2 930
Control.1.Limit.PV3 Threshold Limit PV3 float32 03A3 931
Control.1.Limit.SP1 Threshold limit setpoint 1 float32 03A4 932
Control.1.Limit.SP2 Threshold limit setpoint 2 float32 03A5 933
Control.1.Limit.SP3 Threshold limit setpoint 3 float32 03A6 934
Control.1.Limit.TI Integral time of the limit loop float32 03A7 935
Control.1.Main.PV The main PV of the controller float32 039C 924
Control.1.Main.SP Main SP to control at float32 039D 925
Control.1.Main.TI Integral time of the main loop float32 03A0 928
Control.1.Main.TransferPV The transfer (proportional limit) PV float32 039E 926
Control.1.Main.TransferSpan The transfer (proportional limit) span float32 039F 927
Control.1.Setup.EnLimit Enable Threshold Limit (0 = No, 1 = Yes) uint8 0396 918
Control.1.Setup.FFGain Feedforward gain float32 0399 921
Control.1.Setup.FFOffset Feedforward offset float32 039A 922
Control.1.Setup.FFType Defines the type of Feed Forward to be used uint8 0398 920
(0 = Off, 1 = Trim, 2 = FFOnly)
Control.1.Setup.NominalPV Nominal PV of this phase of power control float32 0395 917
Control.1.Setup.Standby Put controller into standby (0 = No, 1 = Yes) uint8 0394 916
Control.1.Setup.TransferEn Enable Transfer (Proportional limit) (0 = N0, 1 = Yes) uint8 0397 919
Control 2. See Control 1 for enumeration values
Control.2.AlmAck.ClosedLoop Process alarm ack: Closed loop break uint8 03E9 1001
Control.2.AlmAck.Limitation Indication alarm ack: Limitation uint8 03EB 1003
Control.2.AlmAck.PVTransfer Indication alarm ack: PV transfer uint8 03EA 1002
Control.2.AlmDet.ClosedLoop Process alarm detection status: Closed loop break uint8 03E0 992
Control.2.AlmDet.Limitation Indication alarm detection status: Limitation uint8 03E2 994
Control.2.AlmDet.PVTransfer Indication alarm detection status: PV transfer uint8 03E1 993

HA179769
Page 172 Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

8.4 PARAMETER TABLE (Cont.)

Parameter path Description Type Hex Dec
Control.2.AlmDis.ClosedLoop Process alarm: Closed loop break uint8 03DD 989
Control.2.AlmDis.Limitation Indication alarm: Limitation uint8 03DF 991
Control.2.AlmDis.PVTransfer Indication alarm: PV transfer uint8 03DE 990
Control.2.AlmLat.ClosedLoop Process alarm latch: Closed loop break uint8 03E6 998
Control.2.AlmLat.Limitation Indication alarm latch: Limitation uint8 03E8 1000
Control.2.AlmLat.PVTransfer Indication alarm latch: PV transfer uint8 03E7 999
Control.2.AlmSig.ClosedLoop Process alarm signalling status: Closed loop break uint8 03E3 995
Control.2.AlmSig.Limitation Indication alarm signalling status: Limitation uint8 03E5 997
Control.2.AlmSig.PVTransfer Indication alarm signalling status: PV transfer uint8 03E4 996
Control.2.AlmStop.ClosedLoop Process alarm stop: Closed loop break uint8 03EC 1004
Control.2.AlmStop.Limitation Indication alarm stop: Limitation uint8 03EE 1006
Control.2.AlmStop.PVTransfer Indication alarm stop: PV transfer uint8 03ED 1005
Control.2.Diag.Output Output of the controller float32 03DB 987
Control.2.Diag.PAOP Phase angle output for PA reduction in burst firing float32 03DC 988
Control.2.Diag.Status Status of the controller uint8 03DA 986
Control.2.Limit.PV1 Threshold Limit PV1 float32 03D3 979
Control.2.Limit.PV2 Threshold Limit PV2 float32 03D4 980
Control.2.Limit.PV3 Threshold Limit PV3 float32 03D5 981
Control.2.Limit.SP1 Threshold limit setpoint 1 float32 03D6 982
Control.2.Limit.SP2 Threshold limit setpoint 2 float32 03D7 983
Control.2.Limit.SP3 Threshold limit setpoint 3 float32 03D8 984
Control.2.Limit.TI Integral time of the limit loop float32 03D9 985
Control.2.Main.PV The main PV of the controller float32 03CE 974
Control.2.Main.SP Main SP to control at float32 03CF 975
Control.2.Main.TI Integral time of the main loop float32 03D2 978
Control.2.Main.TransferPV The transfer (proportional limit) PV float32 03D0 976
Control.2.Main.TransferSpan The transfer (proportional limit) span float32 03D1 977
Control.2.Setup.EnLimit Enable Threshold Limit uint8 03C8 968
Control.2.Setup.FFGain Feedforward gain float32 03CB 971
Control.2.Setup.FFOffset Feedforward offset float32 03CC 972
Control.2.Setup.FFType Defines the type of Feed Forward to be used uint8 03CA 970
Control.2.Setup.NominalPV Nominal PV of this phase of power control float32 03C7 967
Control.2.Setup.Standby Put controller into standby uint8 03C6 966
Control.2.Setup.TransferEn Enable Transfer (Proportional limit) uint8 03C9 969
Control 3. See Control 1 for enumeration values
Control.3.AlmAck.ClosedLoop Process alarm ack: Closed loop break uint8 041B 1051
Control.3.AlmAck.Limitation Indication alarm ack: Limitation uint8 041D 1053
Control.3.AlmAck.PVTransfer Indication alarm ack: PV transfer uint8 041C 1052
Control.3.AlmDet.ClosedLoop Process alarm detection status: Closed loop break uint8 0412 1042
Control.3.AlmDet.Limitation Indication alarm detection status: Limitation uint8 0414 1044
Control.3.AlmDet.PVTransfer Indication alarm detection status: PV transfer uint8 0413 1043
Control.3.AlmDis.ClosedLoop Process alarm: Closed loop break uint8 040F 1039
Control.3.AlmDis.Limitation Indication alarm: Limitation uint8 0411 1041
Control.3.AlmDis.PVTransfer Indication alarm: PV transfer uint8 0410 1040
Control.3.AlmLat.ClosedLoop Process alarm latch: Closed loop break uint8 0418 1048
Control.3.AlmLat.Limitation Indication alarm latch: Limitation uint8 041A 1050
Control.3.AlmLat.PVTransfer Indication alarm latch: PV transfer uint8 0419 1049
Control.3.AlmSig.ClosedLoop Process alarm signalling status: Closed loop break uint8 0415 1045
Control.3.AlmSig.Limitation Indication alarm signalling status: Limitation uint8 0417 1047
Control.3.AlmSig.PVTransfer Indication alarm signalling status: PV transfer uint8 0416 1046
Control.3.AlmStop.ClosedLoop Process alarm stop: Closed loop break uint8 041E 1054
Control.3.AlmStop.Limitation Indication alarm stop: Limitation uint8 0420 1056
Control.3.AlmStop.PVTransfer Indication alarm stop: PV transfer uint8 041F 1055
Control.3.Diag.Output Output of the controller float32 040D 1037
Control.3.Diag.PAOP Phase angle output for PA reduction in burst firing float32 040E 1038
Control.3.Diag.Status Status of the controller uint8 040C 1036
Control.3.Limit.PV1 Threshold Limit PV1 float32 0405 1029
Control.3.Limit.PV2 Threshold Limit PV2 float32 0406 1030
Control.3.Limit.PV3 Threshold Limit PV3 float32 0407 1031

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 173
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

8.4 PARAMETER TABLE (Cont.)

Parameter path Description Type Hex Dec
Control.3.Limit.SP1 Threshold limit setpoint 1 float32 0408 1032
Control.3.Limit.SP2 Threshold limit setpoint 2 float32 0409 1033
Control.3.Limit.SP3 Threshold limit setpoint 3 float32 040A 1034
Control.3.Limit.TI Integral time of the limit loop float32 040B 1035
Control.3.Main.PV The main PV of the controller float32 0400 1024
Control.3.Main.SP Main SP to control at float32 0401 1025
Control.3.Main.TI Integral time of the main loop float32 0404 1028
Control.3.Main.TransferPV The transfer (proportional limit) PV float32 0402 1026
Control.3.Main.TransferSpan The transfer (proportional limit) span float32 0403 1027
Control.3.Setup.EnLimit Enable Threshold Limit uint8 03FA 1018
Control.3.Setup.FFGain Feedforward gain float32 03FD 1021
Control.3.Setup.FFOffset Feedforward offset float32 03FE 1022
Control.3.Setup.FFType Defines the type of Feed Forward to be used uint8 03FC 1020
Control.3.Setup.NominalPV Nominal PV of this phase of power control float32 03F9 1017
Control.3.Setup.Standby Put controller into standby uint8 03F8 1016
Control.3.Setup.TransferEn Enable Transfer (Proportional limit) uint8 03FB 1019
Control 4. See Control 1 for enumeration values
Control.4.AlmAck.ClosedLoop Process alarm ack: Closed loop break uint8 044D 1101
Control.4.AlmAck.Limitation Indication alarm ack: Limitation uint8 044F 1103
Control.4.AlmAck.PVTransfer Indication alarm ack: PV transfer uint8 044E 1102
Control.4.AlmDet.ClosedLoop Process alarm detection status: Closed loop break uint8 0444 1092
Control.4.AlmDet.Limitation Indication alarm detection status: Limitation uint8 0446 1094
Control.4.AlmDet.PVTransfer Indication alarm detection status: PV transfer uint8 0445 1093
Control.4.AlmDis.ClosedLoop Process alarm: Closed loop break uint8 0441 1089
Control.4.AlmDis.Limitation Indication alarm: Limitation uint8 0443 1091
Control.4.AlmDis.PVTransfer Indication alarm: PV transfer uint8 0442 1090
Control.4.AlmLat.ClosedLoop Process alarm latch: Closed loop break uint8 044A 1098
Control.4.AlmLat.Limitation Indication alarm latch: Limitation uint8 044C 1100
Control.4.AlmLat.PVTransfer Indication alarm latch: PV transfer uint8 044B 1099
Control.4.AlmSig.ClosedLoop Process alarm signalling status: Closed loop break uint8 0447 1095
Control.4.AlmSig.Limitation Indication alarm signalling status: Limitation uint8 0449 1097
Control.4.AlmSig.PVTransfer Indication alarm signalling status: PV transfer uint8 0448 1096
Control.4.AlmStop.ClosedLoop Process alarm stop: Closed loop break uint8 0450 1104
Control.4.AlmStop.Limitation Indication alarm stop: Limitation uint8 0452 1106
Control.4.AlmStop.PVTransfer Indication alarm stop: PV transfer uint8 0451 1105
Control.4.Diag.Output Output of the controller float32 043F 1087
Control.4.Diag.PAOP Phase angle output for PA reduction in burst firing float32 0440 1088
Control.4.Diag.Status Status of the controller uint8 043E 1086
Control.4.Limit.PV1 Threshold Limit PV1 float32 0437 1079
Control.4.Limit.PV2 Threshold Limit PV2 float32 0438 1080
Control.4.Limit.PV3 Threshold Limit PV3 float32 0439 1081
Control.4.Limit.SP1 Threshold limit setpoint 1 float32 043A 1082
Control.4.Limit.SP2 Threshold limit setpoint 2 float32 043B 1083
Control.4.Limit.SP3 Threshold limit setpoint 3 float32 043C 1084
Control.4.Limit.TI Integral time of the limit loop float32 043D 1085
Control.4.Main.PV The main PV of the controller float32 0432 1074
Control.4.Main.SP Main SP to control at float32 0433 1075
Control.4.Main.TI Integral time of the main loop float32 0436 1078
Control.4.Main.TransferPV The transfer (proportional limit) PV float32 0434 1076
Control.4.Main.TransferSpan The transfer (proportional limit) span float32 0435 1077
Control.4.Setup.EnLimit Enable Threshold Limit uint8 042C 1068
Control.4.Setup.FFGain Feedforward gain float32 042F 1071
Control.4.Setup.FFOffset Feedforward offset float32 0430 1072
Control.4.Setup.FFType Defines the type of Feed Forward to be used uint8 042E 1070
Control.4.Setup.NominalPV Nominal PV of this phase of power control float32 042B 1067
Control.4.Setup.Standby Put controller into standby uint8 042A 1066
Control.4.Setup.TransferEn Enable Transfer (Proportional limit) uint8 042D 1069
Counter.1.ClearOverflow Clear OverFlow Flag (0 = No, 1 = Yes) bool 0A12 2578
Counter.1.Clock Clock Input bool 0A0E 2574

HA179769
Page 174 Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

8.4 PARAMETER TABLE (Cont.)

Parameter path Description Type Hex Dec
Counter.1.Count Count Value int32 0A10 2576
Counter.1.Direction Direction of Count (0 = Up, 1 = Down) bool 0A0B 2571
Counter.1.Enable Enable the Counter (0 = N0, 1 = Yes) bool 0A0A 2570
Counter.1.OverFlow Overflow Flag (0 = No, 1 = Yes) bool 0A0D 2573
Counter.1.Reset Counter Reset (0 = No, 1 = Yes) bool 0A11 2577
Counter.1.RippleCarry Ripple Carry Enable Output (0 = Off, 1 = On) bool 0A0C 2572
Counter.1.Target Counter Target int32 0A0F 2575
Counter.2.ClearOverflow Clear OverFlow Flag (0 = No, 1 = Yes) bool 0A25 2597
Counter.2.Clock Clock Input bool 0A21 2593
Counter.2.Count Count Value int32 0A23 2595
Counter.2.Direction Direction of Count (0 = Up, 1 = Down) bool 0A1E 2590
Counter.2.Enable Enable the Counter (0 = No, 1 = Yes) bool 0A1D 2589
Counter.2.OverFlow Overflow Flag (0 = No, 1 = Yes) bool 0A20 2592
Counter.2.Reset Counter Reset (0 = No, 1 = Yes) bool 0A24 2596
Counter.2.RippleCarry Ripple Carry Enable Output (0 = Off, 1 = On) bool 0A1F 2591
Counter.2.Target Counter Target int32 0A22 2594
Counter.3.ClearOverflow Clear OverFlow Flag (0 = No, 1 = Yes) bool 0A38 2616
Counter.3.Clock Clock Input bool 0A34 2612
Counter.3.Count Count Value int32 0A36 2614
Counter.3.Direction Direction of Count (0 = Up, 1 = Down) bool 0A31 2609
Counter.3.Enable Enable the Counter (0 = No, 1 = Yes) bool 0A30 2608
Counter.3.OverFlow Overflow Flag (0 = No, 1 = Yes) bool 0A33 2611
Counter.3.Reset Counter Reset (0 = No, 1 = Yes) bool 0A37 2615
Counter.3.RippleCarry Ripple Carry Enable Output (0 = Off, 1 = On) bool 0A32 2610
Counter.3.Target Counter Target int32 0A35 2613
Counter.4.ClearOverflow Clear OverFlow Flag (0 = No, 1 = Yes) bool 0A4B 2635
Counter.4.Clock Clock Input bool 0A47 2631
Counter.4.Count Count Value int32 0A49 2633
Counter.4.Direction Direction of Count (0 = Up, 1 = Down) bool 0A44 2628
Counter.4.Enable Enable the Counter (0 = No, 1 = Yes) bool 0A43 2627
Counter.4.OverFlow Overflow Flag (0 = No, 1 = Yes) bool 0A46 2630
Counter.4.Reset Counter Reset (0 = No, 1 = Yes) bool 0A4A 2634
Counter.4.RippleCarry Ripple Carry Enable Output (0 = Off, 1 = On) bool 0A45 2629
Counter.4.Target Counter Target int32 0A48 2632
CustPage.1.CISP1 Parameter 1 uint32 07F8 2040
CustPage.1.CISP2 Parameter 2 uint32 07F9 2041
CustPage.1.CISP3 Parameter 3 uint32 07FA 2042
CustPage.1.CISP4 Parameter 4 uint32 07FB 2043
CustPage.1.Style1 Custom Line 1 Style uint8 07FC 2044
CustPage.1.Style2 Custom Line 2 Style uint8 07FD 2045
CustPage.1.Style3 Custom Line 3 Style uint8 07FE 2046
CustPage.1.Style4 Custom Line 4 Style uint8 07FF 2047
CustPage.1.UserText1 Custom Text 1 string 4000 16384
CustPage.1.UserText2 Custom Text 2 string 4005 16389
CustPage.1.UserText3 Custom Text 3 string 400A 16394
CustPage.1.UserText4 Custom Text 4 string 400F 16399
CustPage.2.CISP1 Parameter 1 uint32 080C 2060
CustPage.2.CISP2 Parameter 2 uint32 080D 2061
CustPage.2.CISP3 Parameter 3 uint32 080E 2062
CustPage.2.CISP4 Parameter 4 uint32 080F 2063
CustPage.2.Style1 Custom Line 1 Style uint8 0810 2064
CustPage.2.Style2 Custom Line 2 Style uint8 0811 2065
CustPage.2.Style3 Custom Line 3 Style uint8 0812 2066
CustPage.2.Style4 Custom Line 4 Style uint8 0813 2067
CustPage.2.UserText1 Custom Text 1 string 4014 16404
CustPage.2.UserText2 Custom Text 2 string 4019 16409
CustPage.2.UserText3 Custom Text 3 string 401E 16414

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 175
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

8.4 PARAMETER TABLE (Cont.)

Parameter path Description Type Hex Dec
CustPage.2.UserText4 Custom Text 4 string 4023 16419
CustPage.3.CISP1 Parameter 1 uint32 0820 2080
CustPage.3.CISP2 Parameter 2 uint32 0821 2081
CustPage.3.CISP3 Parameter 3 uint32 0822 2082
CustPage.3.CISP4 Parameter 4 uint32 0823 2083
CustPage.3.Style1 Custom Line 1 Style uint8 0824 2084
CustPage.3.Style2 Custom Line 2 Style uint8 0825 2085
CustPage.3.Style3 Custom Line 3 Style uint8 0826 2086
CustPage.3.Style4 Custom Line 4 Style uint8 0827 2087
CustPage.3.UserText1 Custom Text 1 string 4028 16424
CustPage.3.UserText2 Custom Text 2 string 402D 16429
CustPage.3.UserText3 Custom Text 3 string 4032 16434
CustPage.3.UserText4 Custom Text 4 string 4037 16439
CustPage.4.CISP1 Parameter 1 uint32 0834 2100
CustPage.4.CISP2 Parameter 2 uint32 0835 2101
CustPage.4.CISP3 Parameter 3 uint32 0836 2102
CustPage.4.CISP4 Parameter 4 uint32 0837 2103
CustPage.4.Style1 Custom Line 1 Style uint8 0838 2104
CustPage.4.Style2 Custom Line 2 Style uint8 0839 2105
CustPage.4.Style3 Custom Line 3 Style uint8 083A 2106
CustPage.4.Style4 Custom Line 4 Style uint8 083B 2107
CustPage.4.UserText1 Custom Text 1 string 403C 16444
CustPage.4.UserText2 Custom Text 2 string 4041 16449
CustPage.4.UserText3 Custom Text 3 string 4046 16454
CustPage.4.UserText4 Custom Text 4 string 404B 16459
Energy.1.AutoScaleUnits Autoscale energy units (0 = No, 1 = Yes) bool 0B0F 2831
Energy.1.Hold Hold the output of the counter bool 0B05 2821
Energy.1.Input Input to totalise float32 0B06 2822
Energy.1.prvTotEnergy Internal value of the Energy in Watt-hours float32 0B10 2832
Energy.1.prvUsrEnergy Internal value of the Energy in Watt-hours float32 0B11 2833
Energy.1.Pulse Pulsed output bool 0B09 2825
Energy.1.PulseLen Length of the pulse in ms uint16 0B0A 2826
Energy.1.PulseScale Amount of energy per pulse uint8 0B0C 2828
(0 = Disabled, 1 = 1, 2 = 10, 3 = 100, 4 = 1k
5 = 10k, 6 = 100k, 7 = 1M)
Energy.1.Reset Set the user counter back to zero bool 0B07 2823
Energy.1.TotEnergy The global energy float32 0B08 2824
Energy.1.TotEnergyUnit Total energy counter units multiplier. uint8 0B0D 2829
(0 = 1; 1 = 10, 2 = 100, 3 = 1k, 4 = 10k, 5 = 100k
6 = 1M. 7 = 10M, 8 = 100M, 9 = 1G)
Energy.1.Type Type of energy counter (0 = Normal, 1 = Global) bool 0B0E 2830
Energy.1.UsrEnergy User resetable energy float32 0B04 2820
Energy.1.UsrEnergyUnit User energy units multiplier. uint8 0B0B 2827
(0 = 1; 1 = 10, 2 = 100, 3 = 1k, 4 = 10k, 5 = 100k
6 = 1M. 7 = 10M, 8 = 100M, 9 = 1G)
Energy.2.AutoScaleUnits Autoscale the unit of the energy (0 = No, 1 = Yes) bool 0B23 2851
Energy.2.Hold Hold the output of the counter bool 0B19 2841
Energy.2.Input Input to totalise float32 0B1A 2842
Energy.2.prvTotEnergy Internal value of the Energy in Watt-hours float32 0B24 2852
Energy.2.prvUsrEnergy Internal value of the Energy in Watt-hours float32 0B25 2853
Energy.2.Pulse Pulsed output bool 0B1D 2845
Energy.2.PulseLen Length of the pulse in ms uint16 0B1E 2846
Energy.2.PulseScale Amount of energy per pulse (as ‘Energy 1’) uint8 0B20 2848
Energy.2.Reset Set the user counter back to zero bool 0B1B 2843
Energy.2.TotEnergy The global energy float32 0B1C 2844
Energy.2.TotEnergyUnit Total energy counter units (as ‘Energy 1’) uint8 0B21 2849
Energy.2.Type Type of energy counter (0 = Normal, 1 = Global) bool 0B22 2850
Energy.2.UsrEnergy User resetable energy float32 0B18 2840

HA179769
Page 176 Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

8.4 PARAMETER TABLE (Cont.)

Parameter path Description Type Hex Dec
Energy.2.UsrEnergyUnit User energy units multiplier (as ‘Energy 1’) uint8 0B1F 2847
Energy.3.AutoScaleUnits Autoscale the unit of the energy (0 = No, 1 = Yes) bool 0B37 2871
Energy.3.Hold Hold the output of the counter bool 0B2D 2861
Energy.3.Input Input to totalize float32 0B2E 2862
Energy.3.prvTotEnergy Internal value of the Energy in Watt-hours float32 0B38 2872
Energy.3.prvUsrEnergy Internal value of the Energy in Watt-hours float32 0B39 2873
Energy.3.Pulse Pulsed output bool 0B31 2865
Energy.3.PulseLen Length of the pulse in ms uint16 0B32 2866
Energy.3.PulseScale Amount of energy per pulse (as ‘Energy 1’) uint8 0B34 2868
Energy.3.Reset Set the user counter back to zero bool 0B2F 2863
Energy.3.TotEnergy The global energy float32 0B30 2864
Energy.3.TotEnergyUnit Total energy counter units (as ‘Energy 1’) uint8 0B35 2869
Energy.3.Type Type of energy counter (0 = Normal, 1 = Global) bool 0B36 2870
Energy.3.UsrEnergy User resetable energy float32 0B2C 2860
Energy.3.UsrEnergyUnit User energy units multiplier (as ‘Energy 1’) uint8 0B33 2867
Energy.4.AutoScaleUnits Autoscale the unit of the energy (0 = No, 1 = Yes) bool 0B4B 2891
Energy.4.Hold Hold the output of the counter bool 0B41 2881
Energy.4.Input Input to totalize float32 0B42 2882
Energy.4.prvTotEnergy Internal value of the Energy in Watt-hours float32 0B4C 2892
Energy.4.prvUsrEnergy Internal value of the Energy in Watt-hours float32 0B4D 2893
Energy.4.Pulse Pulsed output bool 0B45 2885
Energy.4.PulseLen Length of the pulse in ms uint16 0B46 2886
Energy.4.PulseScale Amount of energy per pulse (as ‘Energy 1’) uint8 0B48 2888
Energy.4.Reset Set the user counter back to zero bool 0B43 2883
Energy.4.TotEnergy The global energy float32 0B44 2884
Energy.4.TotEnergyUnit Total energy counter units (as ‘Energy 1’) uint8 0B49 2889
Energy.4.Type Type of energy counter (0 = Normal, 1 = Global) bool 0B4A 2890
Energy.4.UsrEnergy User resetable energy float32 0B40 2880
Energy.4.UsrEnergyUnit User energy units multiplier (as ‘Energy 1’) uint8 0B47 2887
Energy.5.AutoScaleUnits Autoscale the unit of the energy (0 = No, 1 = Yes) bool 0B5F 2911
Energy.5.Hold Hold the output of the counter bool 0B55 2901
Energy.5.Input Input to totalize float32 0B56 2902
Energy.5.prvTotEnergy Internal value of the Energy in Watt-hours float32 0B60 2912
Energy.5.prvUsrEnergy Internal value of the Energy in Watt-hours float32 0B61 2913
Energy.5.Pulse Pulsed output bool 0B59 2905
Energy.5.PulseLen Length of the pulse in ms uint16 0B5A 2906
Energy.5.PulseScale Amount of energy per pulse (as ‘Energy 1’) uint8 0B5C 2908
Energy.5.Reset Set the user counter back to zero bool 0B57 2903
Energy.5.TotEnergy The global energy float32 0B58 2904
Energy.5.TotEnergyUnit Total energy counter units (as ‘Energy 1’) uint8 0B5D 2909
Energy.5.Type Type of energy counter (0 = Normal, 1 = Global) bool 0B5E 2910
Energy.5.UsrEnergy User resetable energy float32 0B54 2900
Energy.5.UsrEnergyUnit User energy units multiplier (as ‘Energy 1’) uint8 0B5B 2907
EventLog.Event01ID Event 1 identification uint8 070F 1807
EventLog.Event01Type Event 1 type uint8 070E 1806
EventLog.Event02ID Event 2 Identification uint8 0711 1809
EventLog.Event02Type Event 2 type uint8 0710 1808
EventLog.Event03ID Event 3 Identification uint8 0713 1811
EventLog.Event03Type Event 3 type uint8 0712 1810
EventLog.Event04ID Event 4 Identification uint8 0715 1813
EventLog.Event04Type Event 4 type uint8 0714 1812
EventLog.Event05ID Event 5 Identification uint8 0717 1815
EventLog.Event05Type Event 5 type uint8 0716 1814
EventLog.Event06ID Event 6 Identification uint8 0719 1817
EventLog.Event06Type Event 6 type uint8 0718 1816
EventLog.Event07ID Event 7 Identification uint8 071B 1819
EventLog.Event07Type Event 7 type uint8 071A 1818
EventLog.Event08ID Event 8 Identification uint8 071D 1821

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 177
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

8.4 PARAMETER TABLE (Cont.)

Parameter path Description Type Hex Dec
EventLog.Event08Type Event 8 type uint8 071C 1820
EventLog.Event09ID Event 9 Identification uint8 071F 1823
Event ID
EventLog.Event09Type Event 9 type 0 = No entry 161 = InvPwrModRev
uint8 071E 1822
EventLog.Event10ID Event 10 Identification 1 = Conf Exit 162 = HW Mismatch uint8 0721 1825
2 = Conf Entry 163 = Pwr1 Ribbon
EventLog.Event10Type Event 10 type 3 = Power down 164 = Pwr2 Ribbon
uint8 0720 1824
EventLog.Event11ID Event 11 Identification 4 = Coldstart 165 = Pwr3 Ribbon uint8 0723 1827
5 = QuickStart Exit 166 = Pwr4 Ribbon
EventLog.Event11Type Event 11 type 6 = QuickStart Entry 167 = Pwr1EEprom
uint8 0722 1826
EventLog.Event12ID Event 12 Identification 7 = Global Avk 168 = Pwr2EEprom uint8 0725 1829
21 = Missing Mains 169 = Pwr3EEprom
EventLog.Event12Type Event 12 type 22 = Thy Short cct. 170 = Pwr4EEprom uint8 0724 1828
EventLog.Event13ID Event 13 Identification 23 = Thy open cct. 171 = Log Fault uint8 0727 1831
24 = Fuse Blown 172 = PWR1cal
EventLog.Event13Type Event 13 type 25 = Over Temp 173 = PWR2cal uint8 0726 1830
EventLog.Event14ID Event 14 Identification 26 = Netw Dip 174 = PWR3cal uint8 0729 1833
27 = Mains Freq 175 = PWR4cal
EventLog.Event14Type Event 14 type 28 = PMod 24 176 = Watchdog uint8 0728 1832
EventLog.Event15ID Event 15 Identification 51 = TLF 177 = StdIOCal uint8 072B 1835
52 = Chop Off 178 = Opt1IOCal
EventLog.Event15Type Event 15 type 53 = PLF 179 = Opt2IOCal uint8 072A 1834
EventLog.Event16ID 54 = PLU
Event 16 Identification 55 = Main V Fault 180 = Opt3IOCal uint8 072D 1837
191 = Ph1Wdog
EventLog.Event16Type Event 16 type 56 = Temp Pre-Alarm 192 = Ph1ComErr uint8 072C 1836
57 = Input Brk 193 = Ph1ComTout
EventLog.Event17ID Event 17 Identification 58 = Out Fault 194 = Ph2Wdog
uint8 072F 1839
EventLog.Event17Type Event 17 type 59 = ClosedLp 195 = Ph2ComErr uint8 072E 1838
EventLog.Event18ID Event 18 Identification 81 = PrcValTh
82 = Limit Act
196 = Ph2ComTout
197 = Ph3Wdog uint8 0731 1841
EventLog.Event18Type Event 18 type 83 = Load Overl 198 = Ph3ComErr uint8 0730 1840
84 = LMoverSch 199 = Ph3ComTout
EventLog.Event19ID Event 19 Identification 111 = High 211 = Fuse Blown uint8 0733 1843
EventLog.Event19Type Event 19 type 112 = Low 212 = WdogFault uint8 0732 1842
113 = Dev Band 213 = PwrRailFail
EventLog.Event20ID Event 20 Identification 114 = Dev Low 214 = CommsTout uint8 0735 1845
EventLog.Event20Type Event 20 type 115 = Dev High 215 = Comms Err uint8 0734 1844
131 = Fuse Config 241 = InvRamCsum
EventLog.Event21ID Event 21 Identification 132 = Restart Fail 242 = DSPnoRSP uint8 0737 1847
EventLog.Event21Type Event 21 type 151 = InvPAdata 242 = DSPWdog uint8 0736 1846
152 = Inv wires
EventLog.Event22ID Event 22 Identification uint8 0739 1849
EventLog.Event22Type Event 22 type uint8 0738 1848
EventLog.Event23ID Event 23 Identification Event types uint8 073B 1851
1 = Instrument 33 = Ind Alm N3 InAct
EventLog.Event23Type Event 23 type 2 = Sys Alm N1 Act 34 = Ind Alm N3 Ackd
uint8 073A 1850
EventLog.Event24ID Event 24 Identification 3 = Sys Alm N1 InAct 35 = Ind Alm N4 Act uint8 073D 1853
4 = Sys Alm N1 Ackd 36 = Ind Alm N4 InAct
EventLog.Event24Type Event 24 type 5 = Sys Alm N2 Act 37 = Ind Alm N4 Ackd
uint8 073C 1852
EventLog.Event25ID Event 25 Identification 6 = Sys Alm N2 InAct 38 = Prc Alm Ex1Act uint8 073F 1855
7 = Sys Alm N2 Ackd 39 = Prc Alm Ex1InAct
EventLog.Event25Type Event 25 type 8 = Sys Alm N3 Act 40 = Prc Alm Ex1Ackd uint8 073E 1854
EventLog.Event26ID Event 26 Identification 9 = Sys Alm N3 InAct 41 = Prc Alm Ex2Act uint8 0741 1857
10 = Sys Alm N3 Ackd 42 = Prc Alm Ex2InAct
EventLog.Event26Type Event 26 type 11 = Sys Alm N4 Act 43 = Prc Alm Ex2Ackd uint8 0740 1856
EventLog.Event27ID Event 27 Identification 12 = Sys Alm N4 InAct 44 = Prc Alm Ex3Act uint8 0743 1859
13 = Sys Alm N4 Ackd 45 = Prc Alm Ex3InAct
EventLog.Event27Type Event 27 type 14 = Prc Alm N1 Act 46 = Prc Alm Ex3Ackd uint8 0742 1858
EventLog.Event28ID Event 28 Identification 15 = Prc Alm N1 InAct 47 = Prc Alm Ex4Act uint8 0745 1861
16 = Prc Alm N1 Ackd 48 = Prc Alm Ex4InAct
EventLog.Event28Type Event 28 type 17 = Prc Alm N2 Act 49 = Prc Alm Ex4Ackd uint8 0744 1860
EventLog.Event29ID Event 29 Identification 19 = Prc Alm N2 Ackd 50
18 = Prc Alm N2 InAct = Err Fatal
51 = Err Config
uint8 0747 1863
EventLog.Event29Type Event 29 type 20 = Prc Alm N3 Act 52 = Err General uint8 0746 1862
EventLog.Event30ID Event 30 Identification 21 = Prc Alm N3 InAct
22 = Prc Alm N3 Ackd
53 = Err Netw1
54 = Err Netw2
uint8 0749 1865
EventLog.Event30Type Event 30 type 23 = Prc Alm N4 Act 55 = Err Netw3 uint8 0748 1864
EventLog.Event31ID Event 31 Identification 24 = Prc Alm N4 InAct
25 = Prc Alm N4 Ackd
56 = Err Netw4
57 = Err Pwr1 uint8 074B 1867
EventLog.Event31Type Event 31 type 26 = Ind Alm N1 Act 58 = Err Pwr2 uint8 074A 1866
27 = Ind Alm N1 InAct 59 = Err Pwr3
EventLog.Event32ID Event 32 Identification 28 = Ind Alm N1 Ackd 60 = Err Pwr4 uint8 074D 1869
EventLog.Event32Type Event 32 type 29 = Ind Alm N2 Act 61 = Err DSP uint8 074C 1868
30 = Ind Alm N2 InAct 62 = Err Restart
EventLog.Event33ID Event 33 Identification 32 = Ind Alm N3 Act 63 = Err Standby uint8 074F 1871
EventLog.Event33Type Event 33 type uint8 074E 1870
EventLog.Event34ID Event 34 Identification uint8 0751 1873
EventLog.Event34Type Event 34 type uint8 0750 1872
EventLog.Event35ID Event 35 Identification uint8 0753 1875
EventLog.Event35Type Event 35 type uint8 0752 1874
EventLog.Event36ID Event 36 Identification uint8 0755 1877
EventLog.Event36Type Event 36 type uint8 0754 1876
EventLog.Event37ID Event 37 Identification uint8 0757 1879
EventLog.Event37Type Event 37 type uint8 0756 1878
EventLog.Event38ID Event 38 Identification uint8 0759 1881
EventLog.Event38Type Event 38 type uint8 0758 1880

HA179769
Page 178 Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

8.4 PARAMETER TABLE (Cont.)

Parameter path Description Type Hex Dec
EventLog.Event39ID Event 39 Identification uint8 075B 1883
EventLog.Event39Type Event 39 type uint8 075A 1882
EventLog.Event40ID Event 40 Identification uint8 075D 1885
EventLog.Event40Type Event 40 type uint8 075C 1884
EventLog.Status Status word to indicate instrument errors via comms uint8 075F 1887
Faultdet.AlarmStatus1 Alarm Status Word 1 uint16 06A8 1704
Faultdet.AlarmStatus2 Alarm Status Word 2 uint16 06A9 1705
Faultdet.AnyFuseAl Any Fuse Blown alarm uint8 06A3 1699
Faultdet.AnyNetwAl Any Network Process Alarm uint8 06A2 1698
Faultdet.GeneralAck Global Acknowledge uint8 069F 1695
Faultdet.GlobalDis Global Disable all alarms uint8 06A4 1700
Faultdet.StratStatus Strategy Status Word uint16 06A6 1702
Bit 0 = Network 1 not firing
Bit 1 = Network 1 not synchronised
Bit 2 = Network 2 not firing
Bit 3 = Network 2 not synchronised
Bit 4 = Network 3 not firing
Bit 5 = Network 3 not synchronised
Bit 6 = Network 4 not firing
Bit 7 = Network 4 not synchronised
Bit 8= Strategy in Standby Mode
Bit 9 = Strategy in Telemetry Mode
Bits 10 to 15 Reserved.
Faultdet.Watchdog Indicates Watchdog Relay Status (1 = Active) uint8 06A7 1703
FiringOP.1.DelayedTrigger Delayed Triggering for transformer loads uint8 04BA 1210
FiringOP.1.Enable Enable of the firing output block uint8 04BE 1214
FiringOP.1.In Input of the firing output block float32 04BB 1211
FiringOP.1.LoadCoupling Load coupling configuration uint8 04B4 1204
(0 = 3S, 1 = 3D, 2 = 4S, 3 = 6D)
FiringOP.1.LoadType Load type configuration (0 = Resistive, 1 = XFMR) uint8 04B5 1205
FiringOP.1.Mode Firing Mode indication uint8 04B6 1206
(0 = IHC, 1 = Burst, 2 = PA, 3 = None)
FiringOP.1.PaLimitIn Phase angle input for PA reduction in burst firing float32 04BC 1212
FiringOP.1.SafetyRamp Safety ramp duration float32 04B7 1207
FiringOP.1.SafetyRampStatus Status of the safety ramp (0 = Ramping, 1 = Finished) uint8 04BD 1213
FiringOP.1.SoftStart Soft start duration float32 04B8 1208
FiringOP.1.SoftStop Soft stop duration (0 = Off, 1 = On) float32 04B9 1209
FiringOP.2.DelayedTrigger Delayed Triggering for transformer loads uint8 04CF 1231
FiringOP.2.Enable Enable of the firing output block uint8 04D3 1235
FiringOP.2.In Input of the firing output block float32 04D0 1232
FiringOP.2.LoadCoupling Load coupling configuration uint8 04C9 1225
(0 = 3S, 1 = 3D, 2 = 4S, 3 = 6D)
FiringOP.2.LoadType Load type configuration (0 = Resistive, 1 = XFMR) uint8 04CA 1226
FiringOP.2.Mode Firing Mode indication uint8 04CB 1227
(0 = IHC, 1 = Burst, 2 = PA, 3 = None)
FiringOP.2.PaLimitIn Phase angle input for PA reduction in burst firing float32 04D1 1233
FiringOP.2.SafetyRamp Safety ramp duration float32 04CC 1228
FiringOP.2.SafetyRampStatus Status of the safety ramp (0 = Ramping, 1 = Finished) uint8 04D2 1234
FiringOP.2.SoftStart Soft start duration float32 04CD 1229
FiringOP.2.SoftStop Soft stop duration (0 = Off, 1 = On) float32 04CE 1230
FiringOP.3.DelayedTrigger Delayed Triggering for transformer loads uint8 04E4 1252
FiringOP.3.Enable Enable of the firing output block uint8 04E8 1256
FiringOP.3.In Input of the firing output block float32 04E5 1253
FiringOP.3.LoadCoupling Load coupling configuration uint8 04DE 1246
(0 = 3S, 1 = 3D, 2 = 4S, 3 = 6D)
FiringOP.3.LoadType Load type configuration (0 = Resistive, 1 = XFMR) uint8 04DF 1247
FiringOP.3.Mode Firing Mode indication uint8 04E0 1248
(0 = IHC, 1 = Burst, 2 = PA, 3 = None)

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 179
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

8.4 PARAMETER TABLE (Cont.)

Parameter path Description Type Hex Dec
FiringOP.3.PaLimitIn Phase angle input for PA reduction in burst firing float32 04E6 1254
FiringOP.3.SafetyRamp Safety ramp duration float32 04E1 1249
FiringOP.3.SafetyRampStatus Status of the safety ramp (0 = Ramping, 1 = Finished) uint8 04E7 1255
FiringOP.3.SoftStart Soft start duration float32 04E2 1250
FiringOP.3.SoftStop Soft stop duration (0 = Off, 1 = On) float32 04E3 1251
FiringOP.4.DelayedTrigger Delayed Triggering for transformer loads uint8 04F9 1273
FiringOP.4.Enable Enable of the firing output block uint8 04FD 1277
FiringOP.4.In Input of the firing output block float32 04FA 1274
FiringOP.4.LoadCoupling Load coupling configuration uint8 04F3 1267
(0 = 3S, 1 = 3D, 2 = 4S, 3 = 6D)
FiringOP.4.LoadType Load type configuration (0 = Resistive, 1 = XFMR) uint8 04F4 1268
FiringOP.4.Mode Firing Mode indication. uint8 04F5 1269
(0 = IHC, 1 = Burst, 2 = PA, 3 = None)
FiringOP.4.PaLimitIn Phase angle input for PA reduction in burst firing float32 04FB 1275
FiringOP.4.SafetyRamp Safety ramp duration float32 04F6 1270
FiringOP.4.SafetyRampStatus Status of the safety ramp (0 = Ramping, 1 = Finished) uint8 04FC 1276
FiringOP.4.SoftStart Soft start duration float32 04F7 1271
FiringOP.4.SoftStop Soft stop duration (0 = Off, 1 = On) float32 04F8 1272
Instrument.Configuration.IOModules Number of Option IO Modules fitted uint8 08A1 2209
Instrument.Configuration.PwrModType Type of module. (0 = None, 1 = External. 2 = Internal uint8 08B4 2228
3 = MC Air cooled; 4 = MC Water cooled)
Instrument.Configuration.LoadCoupling Load coupling configuration uint8 089A 2202
(0 = 3S, 1 = 3D, 2 = 4S, 3 = 6D)
Instrument.Configuration.
LoadCoupling2ndNetwork Load 2 coupling configuration (as Load Coupling) uint8 08A2 2210
Instrument.Configuration.LoadMFitted Load Management Card Fitted (0 = No, 1 = Yes) bool 08A4 2212
Instrument.Configuration.NetType The type of network (0 = 3Ph, 1 = 1Ph, 2 = 2Ph) uint8 0897 2199
Instrument.Configuration.PowerModules Number of power modules fitted uint8 0896 2198
Instrument.Configuration.PwrMod1Rev Power Module 1 Revision (0 = invalid) uint8 089C 2204
Instrument.Configuration.PwrMod2Rev Power Module 2 Revision (0 = invalid) uint8 089D 2205
Instrument.Configuration.PwrMod3Rev Power Module 3 Revision (0 = invalid) uint8 089E 2206
Instrument.Configuration.PwrMod4Rev Power Module 4 Revision (0 = invalid) uint8 089F 2207
Instrument.Configuration.RemotePV Remote PV float32 08A3 2211
Instrument.Configuration.TimerRes Sets resolution of time parameters uint8 08A0 2208
(0 = 0.1sec, 1 = 0.1 min)
Instrument.Display.Language Selected Language uint8 0879 2169
(1 = Eng, 2 = Fra, 4 = Ger, 8 = Ita, 16 = Spa)
Instrument.Display.SerialNo Serial Number int32 087A 2170
Instrument.ID Instrument Identifier (E190h) int16 007A 122
Instrument.Mode Instrument Mode uint8 00C7 199
(0 = Operator mode, 1 = Standby, 2 = Config)
IO.AnalogIP.1.Main.MeasVal Measured value float32 05D3 1491
IO.AnalogIP.1.Main.PV Process variable float32 05D4 1492
IO.AnalogIP.1.Main.RangeHigh High input range for scaling to process units float32 05D1 1489
IO.AnalogIP.1.Main.RangeLow Low input range for scaling to process units float32 05D2 1490
IO.AnalogIP.1.Main.Type Specify the input type uint8 05D0 1488
0 = 0 to 10V 1 = 1 to 5V 2 = 2 to 10V
3 = 0 to 5V 4 = 0 to 20mA 5 = 4 to 20mA.

IO.AnalogIP.2.Main.MeasVal Measured value float32 05E2 1506

IO.AnalogIP.2.Main.PV Process variable float32 05E3 1507
IO.AnalogIP.2.Main.RangeHigh High input range for scaling to process units float32 05E0 1504
IO.AnalogIP.2.Main.RangeLow Low input range for scaling to process units float32 05E1 1505
IO.AnalogIP.2.Main.Type Specify the input type (as IP1 above) uint8 05DF 1503
IO.AnalogIP.3.Main.MeasVal Measured value float32 05F1 1521
IO.AnalogIP.3.Main.PV Process variable float32 05F2 1522
IO.AnalogIP.3.Main.RangeHigh High input range for scaling to process units float32 05EF 1519
IO.AnalogIP.3.Main.RangeLow Low input range for scaling to process units float32 05F0 1520

HA179769
Page 180 Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

8.4 PARAMETER TABLE (Cont.)

Parameter path Description Type Hex Dec
IO.AnalogIP.3.Main.Type Specify the input type (as IP1 above) uint8 05EE 1518
IO.AnalogIP.4.Main.MeasVal Measured value float32 0600 1536
IO.AnalogIP.4.Main.PV Process variable float32 0601 1537
IO.AnalogIP.4.Main.RangeHigh High input range for scaling to process units float32 05FE 1534
IO.AnalogIP.4.Main.RangeLow Low input range for scaling to process units float32 05FF 1535
IO.AnalogIP.4.Main.Type Specify the input type (as IP1 above) uint8 05FD 1533
IO.AnalogIP.5.Main.MeasVal Measured value float32 060F 1551
IO.AnalogIP.5.Main.PV Process variable float32 0610 1552
IO.AnalogIP.5.Main.RangeHigh High input range for scaling to process units float32 060D 1549
IO.AnalogIP.5.Main.RangeLow Low input range for scaling to process units float32 060E 1550
IO.AnalogIP.5.Main.Type Specify the input type (as IP1 above) uint8 060C 1548
IO.AnalogOP.1.AlmAck.OutputFault Process alarm acknowledge: Output Fault uint8 0624 1572
(0 = NoAck, 1 = Ack)
IO.AnalogOP.1.AlmDet.OutputFault Process alarm detection status: Output Fault uint8 0621 1569|
(0 = Inactive; 1 = Active)
IO.AnalogOP.1.AlmDis.OutputFault Process alarm: Output Fault uint8 0620 1568
(0 = Enable, 1 = Disable)
IO.AnalogOP.1.AlmLat.OutputFault Process alarm latch request: Output Fault uint8 0623 1571
(0 = NoLatch, 1 = Latch)
IO.AnalogOP.1.AlmSig.OutputFault Process alarm signalling status: Output Fault uint8 0622 1570
(0 = Not Latched, 1 = Latched)
IO.AnalogOP.1.AlmStop.OutputFault Process alarm stop request: Output Fault uint8 0625 1573
(0 = No stop, 1 = Stop)
IO.AnalogOP.1.Main.MeasVal Measured value float32 061F 1567
IO.AnalogOP.1.Main.PV Process variable float32 061E 1566
IO.AnalogOP.1.Main.RangeHigh High input range for scaling from process units float32 061C 1564
IO.AnalogOP.1.Main.RangeLow Low input range for scaling from process units float32 061D 1565
IO.AnalogOP.1.Main.Type Specify the output type uint8 061B 1563
0 = 0 to 10V 1 = 1 to 5 V 2 = 2 to 10V,
3 = 0 to 5V 4 = 0 to 20mA 5 = 4 to 20mA

IO.AnalogOP.2.AlmAck.OutputFault Process alarm acknowledge: Output Fault (as OP.1) uint8 0639 1593
IO.AnalogOP.2.AlmDet.OutputFault Process alarm detection status: Output Fault (as OP.1) uint8 0636 1590
IO.AnalogOP.2.AlmDis.OutputFault Process alarm: Output Fault (as OP.1) uint8 0635 1589
IO.AnalogOP.2.AlmLat.OutputFault Process alarm latch request: Output Fault (as OP.1) uint8 0638 1592
IO.AnalogOP.2.AlmSig.OutputFault Process alarm signalling status: Output Fault (as OP.1) uint8 0637 1591
IO.AnalogOP.2.AlmStop.OutputFault Process alarm stop request: Output Fault (as OP.1) uint8 063A 1594
IO.AnalogOP.2.Main.MeasVal Measured value float32 0634 1588
IO.AnalogOP.2.Main.PV Process variable float32 0633 1587
IO.AnalogOP.2.Main.RangeHigh High input range for scaling from process units float32 0631 1585
IO.AnalogOP.2.Main.RangeLow Low input range for scaling from process units float32 0632 1586
IO.AnalogOP.2.Main.Type Specify the output type (as OP.1) uint8 0630 1584
IO.AnalogOP.3.AlmAck.OutputFault Process alarm acknowledge: Output Fault (as OP.1) uint8 064E 1614
IO.AnalogOP.3.AlmDet.OutputFault Process alarm detection status: Output Fault (as OP.1) uint8 064B 1611
IO.AnalogOP.3.AlmDis.OutputFault Process alarm: Output Fault (as OP.1) uint8 064A 1610
IO.AnalogOP.3.AlmLat.OutputFault Process alarm latch request: Output Fault (as OP.1) uint8 064D 1613
IO.AnalogOP.3.AlmSig.OutputFault Process alarm signalling status: Output Fault (as OP.1) uint8 064C 1612
IO.AnalogOP.3.AlmStop.OutputFault Process alarm stop request: Output Fault (as OP.1) uint8 064F 1615
IO.AnalogOP.3.Main.MeasVal Measured value float32 0649 1609
IO.AnalogOP.3.Main.PV Process variable float32 0648 1608
IO.AnalogOP.3.Main.RangeHigh High input range for scaling from process units float32 0646 1606
IO.AnalogOP.3.Main.RangeLow Low input range for scaling from process units float32 0647 1607
IO.AnalogOP.3.Main.Type Specify the output type (as OP.1) uint8 0645 1605
IO.AnalogOP.4.AlmAck.OutputFault Process alarm acknowledge: Output Fault (as OP.1) uint8 0663 1635
IO.AnalogOP.4.AlmDet.OutputFault Process alarm detection status: Output Fault (as OP.1) uint8 0660 1632
IO.AnalogOP.4.AlmDis.OutputFault Process alarm: Output Fault (as OP.1) uint8 065F 1631
IO.AnalogOP.4.AlmLat.OutputFault Process alarm latch request: Output Fault (as OP.1) uint8 0662 1634
IO.AnalogOP.4.AlmSig.OutputFault Process alarm signalling status: Output Fault (as OP.1) uint8 0661 1633

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 181
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

8.4 PARAMETER TABLE (Cont.)

Parameter path Description Type Hex Dec
IO.AnalogOP.4.AlmStop.OutputFault Process alarm stop request: Output Fault (as OP.1) uint8 0664 1636
IO.AnalogOP.4.Main.MeasVal Measured value float32 065E 1630
IO.AnalogOP.4.Main.PV Process variable float32 065D 1629
IO.AnalogOP.4.Main.RangeHigh High input range for scaling from process units float32 065B 1627
IO.AnalogOP.4.Main.RangeLow Low input range for scaling from process units float32 065C 1628
IO.AnalogOP.4.Main.Type Specify the output type (as OP.1) uint8 065A 1626
IO.Digital.1.Invert Invert the sense of the digital IO (0 = No; 1 = Invert) bool 0559 1369
IO.Digital.1.MeasVal Measured value (for outputs, 1 = output high) bool 055A 1370
IO.Digital.1.PV Process variable bool 055B 1371
IO.Digital.1.Type Specify the digital IO type uint8 0558 1368
0 = Logic input; 1 = Contact input; 2 = Logic output.
IO.Digital.2.Invert Invert the sense of the digital IO (0 = No; 1 = Invert) bool 0568 1384
IO.Digital.2.MeasVal Measured value (for outputs, 1 = output high) bool 0569 1385
IO.Digital.2.PV Process variable bool 056A 1386
IO.Digital.2.Type As IO.Digital.1.Type uint8 0567 1383
IO.Digital.3.Invert Invert the sense of the digital IO (0 = No; 1 = Invert) bool 0577 1399
IO.Digital.3.MeasVal Measured value (for outputs, 1 = output high) bool 0578 1400
IO.Digital.3.PV Process variable bool 0579 1401
IO.Digital.3.Type As IO.Digital.1.Type uint8 0576 1398
IO.Digital.4.Invert Invert the sense of the digital IO (0 = No; 1 = Invert) bool 0586 1414
IO.Digital.4.MeasVal Measured value (for outputs, 1 = output high) bool 0587 1415
IO.Digital.4.PV Process variable bool 0588 1416
IO.Digital.4.Type As IO.Digital.1.Type uint8 0585 1413
IO.Digital.5.Invert Invert the sense of the digital IO (0 = No; 1 = Invert) bool 0595 1429
IO.Digital.5.MeasVal Measured value (for outputs, 1 = output high) bool 0596 1430
IO.Digital.5.PV Process variable bool 0597 1431
IO.Digital.5.Type As IO.Digital.1.Type uint8 0594 1428
IO.Digital.6.Invert Invert the sense of the digital IO (0 = No; 1 = Invert) bool 05A4 1444
IO.Digital.6.MeasVal Measured value (for outputs, 1 = output high) bool 05A5 1445
IO.Digital.6.PV Process variable bool 05A6 1446
IO.Digital.6.Type As IO.Digital.1.Type uint8 05A3 1443
IO.Digital.7.Invert Invert the sense of the digital IO (0 = No; 1 = Invert) bool 05B3 1459
IO.Digital.7.MeasVal Measured value (for outputs, 1 = output high) bool 05B4 1460
IO.Digital.7.PV Process variable bool 05B5 1461
IO.Digital.7.Type As IO.Digital.1.Type uint8 05B2 1458
IO.Digital.8.Invert Invert the sense of the digital IO (0 = No; 1 = Invert) bool 05C2 1474
IO.Digital.8.MeasVal Measured value bool 05C3 1475
IO.Digital.8.PV Process variable bool 05C4 1476
IO.Digital.8.Type As IO.Digital.1.Type uint8 05C1 1473
IO.Relay.1.MeasVal Measured value bool 0670 1648
IO.Relay.1.PV Process Variable bool 066F 1647
IO.Relay.2.MeasVal Measured value bool 067C 1660
IO.Relay.2.PV Process Variable bool 067B 1659
IO.Relay.3.MeasVal Measured value bool 0688 1672
IO.Relay.3.PV Process Variable bool 0687 1671
IO.Relay.4.MeasVal Measured value bool 0694 1684
IO.Relay.4.PV Process Variable bool 0693 1683
IPMonitor.1.AlarmDays Alarm time (in days) above threshold uint8 0A5F 2655
IPMonitor.1.AlarmTime Alarm time above threshold time32 0A5D 2653
IPMonitor.1.DaysAbove Days Above Threshold uint8 0A5E 2654
IPMonitor.1.In Input float32 0A57 2647
IPMonitor.1.InStatus Input Status (0 = Good, 1 = Bad) bool 0A60 2656

HA179769
Page 182 Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

8.4 PARAMETER TABLE (Cont.)

Parameter path Description Type Hex Dec
IPMonitor.1.Max Maximum value float32 0A59 2649
IPMonitor.1.Min Minimum value float32 0A5A 2650
IPMonitor.1.Out Timer Alarm Output (0 = Off, 1 = On) bool 0A5C 2652
IPMonitor.1.Reset Reset All Monitor Functions (0 = No, 1 = Yes) bool 0A58 2648
IPMonitor.1.Threshold Timer Threshold Value float32 0A56 2646
IPMonitor.1.TimeAbove Time in Hours Above Threshold time32 0A5B 2651
IPMonitor.2.AlarmDays Alarm time (in days) above threshold uint8 0A75 2677
IPMonitor.2.AlarmTime Alarm time above threshold time32 0A73 2675
IPMonitor.2.DaysAbove Days Above Threshold uint8 0A74 2676
IPMonitor.2.In Input float32 0A6D 2669
IPMonitor.2.InStatus Input Status (0 = Good, 1 = Bad) bool 0A76 2678
IPMonitor.2.Max Maximum value float32 0A6F 2671
IPMonitor.2.Min Minimum value float32 0A70 2672
IPMonitor.2.Out Timer Alarm Output (0 = Off, 1 = On) bool 0A72 2674
IPMonitor.2.Reset Reset All Monitor Functions (0 = No, 1 = Yes) bool 0A6E 2670
IPMonitor.2.Threshold Timer Threshold Value float32 0A6C 2668
IPMonitor.2.TimeAbove Time in Hours Above Threshold time32 0A71 2673
IPMonitor.3.AlarmDays Alarm time (in days) above threshold uint8 0A8B 2699
IPMonitor.3.AlarmTime Alarm time above threshold time32 0A89 2697
IPMonitor.3.DaysAbove Days Above Threshold uint8 0A8A 2698
IPMonitor.3.In Input float32 0A83 2691
IPMonitor.3.InStatus Input Status (0 = Good, 1 = Bad) bool 0A8C 2700
IPMonitor.3.Max Maximum value float32 0A85 2693
IPMonitor.3.Min Minimum value float32 0A86 2694
IPMonitor.3.Out Timer Alarm Output (0 = Off, 1 = On) bool 0A88 2696
IPMonitor.3.Reset Reset All Monitor Functions (0 = No, 1 = Yes) bool 0A84 2692
IPMonitor.3.Threshold Timer Threshold Value float32 0A82 2690
IPMonitor.3.TimeAbove Time in Hours Above Threshold time32 0A87 2695
IPMonitor.4.AlarmDays Alarm time (in days) above threshold uint8 0AA1 2721
IPMonitor.4.AlarmTime Alarm time above threshold time32 0A9F 2719
IPMonitor.4.DaysAbove Days Above Threshold uint8 0AA0 2720
IPMonitor.4.In Input float32 0A99 2713
IPMonitor.4.InStatus Input Status (0 = Good, 1 = Bad) bool 0AA2 2722
IPMonitor.4.Max Maximum value float32 0A9B 2715
IPMonitor.4.Min Minimum value float32 0A9C 2716
IPMonitor.4.Out Timer Alarm Output (0 = No, 1 = Yes) bool 0A9E 2718
IPMonitor.4.Reset Reset All Monitor Functions (0 = No, 1 = Yes) bool 0A9A 2714
IPMonitor.4.Threshold Timer Threshold Value float32 0A98 2712
IPMonitor.4.TimeAbove Time in Hours Above Threshold time32 0A9D 2717
Lgc2.1.FallbackType Fallback Condition uint8 0AB7 2743
(False good, False bad, True Good, True Bad)
Lgc2.1.Hysteresis Hysteresis float32 0ABB 2747
Lgc2.1.In1 Input Value 1 float32 0AB5 2741
Lgc2.1.In2 Input Value 2 float32 0AB6 2742
Lgc2.1.Invert Sense of Input Value uint8 0AB8 2744
Lgc2.1.Oper Logic Operation (If True; Output = 1 (on)) uint8 0AB4 2740
0 = Off 1 = AND 2 = OR 3 = XOR 4 = LATCH
5 = (Ip1 = Ip2?) 6 = (Ip1≠Ip2?) 7 = (Ip1 > Ip2?),
8 = (Ip1 <Ip2?) 9 = (Ip1 ≥ Ip2?) 10 = (Ip1≤Ip2)?
Lgc2.1.Out The Result (0 = Off, 1 = On) bool 0AB9 2745
Lgc2.1.Status Output Status (0 = Good, 1 = Bad) bool 0ABA 2746
Lgc2.2.FallbackType Fallback Condition (as Lgc2.1) uint8 0AC1 2753
Lgc2.2.Hysteresis Hysteresis float32 0AC5 2757
Lgc2.2.In1 Input Value 1 float32 0ABF 2751
Lgc2.2.In2 Input Value 2 float32 0AC0 2752
Lgc2.2.Invert Sense of Input Value uint8 0AC2 2754
Lgc2.2.Oper Logic Operation (as Lgc2.1) uint8 0ABE 2750
Lgc2.2.Out The Result (0 = Off, 1 = On) bool 0AC3 2755

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 183
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

8.4 PARAMETER TABLE (Cont.)

Parameter path Description Type Hex Dec
Lgc2.2.Status Output Status (0 = Good, 1 = Bad) bool 0AC4 2756
Lgc2.3.FallbackType Fallback Condition (as Lgc2.1) uint8 0ACB 2763
Lgc2.3.Hysteresis Hysteresis float32 0ACF 2767
Lgc2.3.In1 Input Value 1 float32 0AC9 2761
Lgc2.3.In2 Input Value 2 float32 0ACA 2762
Lgc2.3.Invert Sense of Input Value uint8 0ACC 2764
Lgc2.3.Oper Logic Operation (as Lgc2.1) uint8 0AC8 2760
Lgc2.3.Out The Result (0 = Off, 1 = On) bool 0ACD 2765
Lgc2.3.Status Output Status (0 = Good, 1 = Bad) bool 0ACE 2766
Lgc2.4.FallbackType Fallback Condition (as Lgc2.1) uint8 0AD5 2773
Lgc2.4.Hysteresis Hysteresis float32 0AD9 2777
Lgc2.4.In1 Input Value 1 float32 0AD3 2771
Lgc2.4.In2 Input Value 2 float32 0AD4 2772
Lgc2.4.Invert Sense of Input Value uint8 0AD6 2774
Lgc2.4.Oper Logic Operation (as Lgc2.1) uint8 0AD2 2770
Lgc2.4.Out The Result (0 = Off, 1 = On) bool 0AD7 2775
Lgc2.4.Status Output Status (0 = Good, 1 = Bad) bool 0AD8 2776
Lgc8.1.In1 Input 1 Value (0 = Off, 1 = On) bool 09B1 2481
Lgc8.1.In2 Input 2 Value (0 = Off, 1 = On) bool 09B2 2482
Lgc8.1.In3 Input 3 Value (0 = Off, 1 = On) bool 09B3 2483
Lgc8.1.In4 Input 4 Value (0 = Off, 1 = On) bool 09B4 2484
Lgc8.1.In5 Input 5 Value (0 = Off, 1 = On) bool 09B5 2485
Lgc8.1.In6 Input 6 Value (0 = Off, 1 = On) bool 09B6 2486
Lgc8.1.In7 Input 7 Value (0 = Off, 1 = On) bool 09B7 2487
Lgc8.1.In8 Input 8 Value (0 = Off, 1 = On) bool 09B8 2488
Lgc8.1.InInvert Invert Selected Inputs uint8 09AF 2479
Lgc8.1.NumIn Number of Inputs uint8 09B0 2480
Lgc8.1.Oper Operation (0 = Off, 1 = AND, 2 = OR, 3 = XOR) uint8 09AE 2478
Lgc8.1.Out Output Value bool 09B9 2489
Lgc8.1.OutInvert Invert the Output (0 = No, 1 = Yes) bool 09BA 2490
Lgc8.2.In1 Input 1 Value (0 = Off, 1 = On) bool 09C8 2504
Lgc8.2.In2 Input 2 Value (0 = Off, 1 = On) bool 09C9 2505
Lgc8.2.In3 Input 3 Value (0 = Off, 1 = On) bool 09CA 2506
Lgc8.2.In4 Input 4 Value (0 = Off, 1 = On) bool 09CB 2507
Lgc8.2.In5 Input 5 Value (0 = Off, 1 = On) bool 09CC 2508
Lgc8.2.In6 Input 6 Value (0 = Off, 1 = On) bool 09CD 2509
Lgc8.2.In7 Input 7 Value (0 = Off, 1 = On) bool 09CE 2510
Lgc8.2.In8 Input 8 Value bool 09CF 2511
Lgc8.2.InInvert Invert Selected Inputs uint8 09C6 2502
Lgc8.2.NumIn Number of Inputs uint8 09C7 2503
Lgc8.2.Oper Operation (0 = Off, 1 = AND, 2 = OR, 3 = XOR) uint8 09C5 2501
Lgc8.2.Out Output Value bool 09D0 2512
Lgc8.2.OutInvert Invert the Output (0 = No, 1 = Yes) bool 09D1 2513
Lgc8.3.In1 Input 1 Value (0 = Off, 1 = On) bool 09DF 2527
Lgc8.3.In2 Input 2 Value (0 = Off, 1 = On) bool 09E0 2528
Lgc8.3.In3 Input 3 Value (0 = Off, 1 = On) bool 09E1 2529
Lgc8.3.In4 Input 4 Value (0 = Off, 1 = On) bool 09E2 2530
Lgc8.3.In5 Input 5 Value (0 = Off, 1 = On) bool 09E3 2531
Lgc8.3.In6 Input 6 Value (0 = Off, 1 = On) bool 09E4 2532
Lgc8.3.In7 Input 7 Value (0 = Off, 1 = On) bool 09E5 2533
Lgc8.3.In8 Input 8 Value (0 = Off, 1 = On) bool 09E6 2534
Lgc8.3.InInvert Invert Selected Inputs uint8 09DD 2525
Lgc8.3.NumIn Number of Inputs uint8 09DE 2526
Lgc8.3.Oper Operation (0 = Off, 1 = AND, 2 = OR, 3 = XOR) uint8 09DC 2524
Lgc8.3.Out Output Value bool 09E7 2535
Lgc8.3.OutInvert Invert the Output (0 = No, 1 = Yes) bool 09E8 2536
Lgc8.4.In1 Input 1 Value (0 = Off, 1 = On) bool 09F6 2550

HA179769
Page 184 Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

8.4 PARAMETER TABLE (Cont.)

Parameter path Description Type Hex Dec
Lgc8.4.In2 Input 2 Value (0 = Off, 1 = On) bool 09F7 2551
Lgc8.4.In3 Input 3 Value (0 = Off, 1 = On) bool 09F8 2552
Lgc8.4.In4 Input 4 Value (0 = Off, 1 = On) bool 09F9 2553
Lgc8.4.In5 Input 5 Value (0 = Off, 1 = On) bool 09FA 2554
Lgc8.4.In6 Input 6 Value (0 = Off, 1 = On) bool 09FB 2555
Lgc8.4.In7 Input 7 Value (0 = Off, 1 = On) bool 09FC 2556
Lgc8.4.In8 Input 8 Value (0 = Off, 1 = On) bool 09FD 2557
Lgc8.4.InInvert Invert Selected Inputs uint8 09F4 2548
Lgc8.4.NumIn Number of Inputs uint8 09F5 2549
Lgc8.4.Oper Operation (0 = Off, 1 = AND, 2 = OR, 3 = XOR) uint8 09F3 2547
Lgc8.4.Out Output Value bool 09FE 2558
Lgc8.4.OutInvert Invert the Output (0 = No, 1 = Yes) bool 09FF 2559
LTC.AlmAck.Fuse System alarm ack: Fuse blown uint8 0AF2 2802
LTC.AlmAck.Temp System alarm ack: Over Temp uint8 0AF3 2803
LTC.AlmDet.Fuse System alarm detection status: Fuse Blown uint8 0AEC 2796
LTC.AlmDet.Temp System alarm detection status: Over Temp uint8 0AED 2797
LTC.AlmDis.Fuse System alarm Disable: External Fuse blown uint8 0AEA 2794
LTC.AlmDis.Temp System alarm Disable: External Over Temp uint8 0AEB 2795
LTC.AlmLat.Fuse System alarm latch: External Fuse Blown uint8 0AF0 2800
LTC.AlmLat.Temp System alarm latch: External Over Temp uint8 0AF1 2801
LTC.AlmSig.Fuse System alarm signalling status: external Fuse Blown uint8 0AEE 2798
LTC.AlmSig.Temp System alarm signalling status: external Over Temp uint8 0AEF 2799
LTC.AlmStop.Fuse System alarm stop: Fuse Blown uint8 0AF4 2804
LTC.AlmStop.Temp System alarm stop: Over Temp uint8 0AF5 2805
LTC.MainPrm.AlFuseIn External Fuse Fail Alarm Input (1 = Active) uint8 0AE8 2792
LTC.MainPrm.AlTempIn External Temperature Failure Alarm Input (1 = active) uint8 0AE9 2793
LTC.MainPrm.IP Input of LTC block. float32 0ADE 2782
LTC.MainPrm.OP1 Output1 of the block. float32 0AE4 2788
LTC.MainPrm.OP2 Output2 of the block. float32 0AE5 2789
LTC.MainPrm.OP3 Output3 of the block. float32 0AE6 2790
LTC.MainPrm.OP4 Output4 of the block. float32 0AE7 2791
LTC.MainPrm.PAOP Phase angle input for PA reduction in burst firing float32 0ADF 2783
LTC.MainPrm.S1 Turn ratio of tap1. float32 0AE0 2784
LTC.MainPrm.S2 Turn ratio of tap2. float32 0AE1 2785
LTC.MainPrm.S3 Turn ratio of tap3. float32 0AE2 2786
LTC.MainPrm.S4 Turn ratio of tap4. float32 0AE3 2787
LTC.MainPrm.TapNb Transformer tap number (2 = 2, 3 = 3, 4 = 4) uint8 0ADD 2781
LTC.MainPrm.Type LTC Type (0 = Primary, 1 = Secondary) uint8 0ADC 2780
Math2.1.Fallback Fallback strategy uint8 08C2 2242
0 = ClipBad 1 = ClipGood 2 = FallBad
3 = FallGood 4 = UpscaleBad 6 = DownscaleBad
Math2.1.FallbackVal Fallback Value float32 08BB 2235
Math2.1.HighLimit Output High Limit float32 08BC 2236
Math2.1.In1 Input 1 Value float32 08B7 2231
Math2.1.In1Mul Input 1 Scale float32 08B6 2230
Math2.1.In2 Input 2 Value float32 08B9 2233
Math2.1.In2Mul Input 2 Scale float32 08B8 2232
Math2.1.LowLimit Output Low Limit float32 08BD 2237
Math2.1.Oper Operator uint8 08BA 2234
0 = None 6 = SelMax 12 = Log
1 = Add 7 = SelMin 13 = Ln
2 = Sub 8 = HotSwap 14 = Exp
3 = Mul 9 = SmpHld 15 = 10 x
4 = Div 10 = Power 51 = Sel 1
5 = AbsDif 11 = Sqrt
Math2.1.Out Output Value float32 08BF 2239
Math2.1.Resolution Output Resolution uint8 08C0 2240
(0 = X, 1 = X.X, 2 = X.XX, 3 = X.XXX, 4 = X.XXXX)
Math2.1.Select Select Between Input 1 (0) and Input 2 (1) bool 08C3 2243

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 185
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

8.4 PARAMETER TABLE (Cont.)

Parameter path Description Type Hex Dec
Math2.1.Status Status (Good = 0; Bad = 1) bool 08BE 2238
Math2.1.Units Output Units (0 = None, 1 = Temp, 2 = V, 3 = mV uint8 08C1 2241
4 = A, 5 = mA, 6 = pH, 7 = mmHg)
Math2.2.Fallback Fallback strategy (as for Math2.1) uint8 08DA 2266
Math2.2.FallbackVal Fallback Value float32 08D3 2259
Math2.2.HighLimit Output High Limit float32 08D4 2260
Math2.2.In1 Input 1 Value float32 08CF 2255
Math2.2.In1Mul Input 1 Scale float32 08CE 2254
Math2.2.In2 Input 2 Value float32 08D1 2257
Math2.2.In2Mul Input 2 Scale float32 08D0 2256
Math2.2.LowLimit Output Low Limit float32 08D5 2261
Math2.2.Oper Operator (as for Math2.1) uint8 08D2
2258
Math2.2.Out Output Value float32 08D7 2263
Math2.2.Resolution Output Resolution (as for Math2.1) uint8 08D8 2264
Math2.2.Select Select Between Input 1 (0) and Input 2 (1) bool 08DB 2267
Math2.2.Status Status (Good = 0; Bad = 1) bool 08D6 2262
Math2.2.Units Output Units (as for Math2.1) uint8 08D9 2265
Math2.3.Fallback Fallback strategy (as for Math2.1) uint8 08F2 2290
Math2.3.FallbackVal Fallback Value float32 08EB 2283
Math2.3.HighLimit Output High Limit float32 08EC 2284
Math2.3.In1 Input 1 Value float32 08E7 2279
Math2.3.In1Mul Input 1 Scale float32 08E6 2278
Math2.3.In2 Input 2 Value float32 08E9 2281
Math2.3.In2Mul Input 2 Scale float32 08E8 2280
Math2.3.LowLimit Output Low Limit float32 08ED 2285
Math2.3.Oper Operator (as for Math2.1) uint8 08EA 2282
Math2.3.Out Output Value float32 08EF 2287
Math2.3.Resolution Output Resolution (as for Math2.1) uint8 08F0 2288
Math2.3.Select Select Between Input 1 (0) and Input 2 (1) bool 08F3 2291
Math2.3.Status Status (Good = 0; Bad = 1) bool 08EE 2286
Math2.3.Units Output Units (as for Math2.1) uint8 08F1 2289
Math2.4.Fallback Fallback strategy (as for Math2.1) uint8 090A 2314
Math2.4.FallbackVal Fallback Value float32 0903 2307
Math2.4.HighLimit Output High Limit float32 0904 2308
Math2.4.In1 Input 1 Value float32 08FF 2303
Math2.4.In1Mul Input 1 Scale float32 08FE 2302
Math2.4.In2 Input 2 Value float32 0901 2305
Math2.4.In2Mul Input 2 Scale float32 0900 2304
Math2.4.LowLimit Output Low Limit float32 0905 2309
Math2.4.Oper Operation (as for Math2.1) uint8 0902 2306
Math2.4.Out Output Value float32 0907 2311
Math2.4.Resolution Output Resolution (as for Math2.1) uint8 0908 2312
Math2.4.Select Select Between Input 1 (0) and Input 2 (1) bool 090B 2315
Math2.4.Status Status (0 = Good, 1 = Bad) bool 0906 2310
Math2.4.Units Output Units (as for Math2.1) uint8 0909 2313
Modultr.1.CycleTime Cycle time for fixed modulator uint16 045F 1119
Modultr.1.In Input of the modulator block float32 045D 1117
Modultr.1.LgcMode Logic mode cycle selection uint8 0460 1120
(0 = 1/2 cycle, 1 = Full cycle)
Modultr.1.MinOnTime Minimum on time for variable modulator uint16 045E 1118
Modultr.1.Mode Modulator mode uint8 0462 1122
(0 = IHC, 1 = BurstVar, 2 = BurstFix, 3 = Lgc, 4 = PA)
Modultr.1.Out Modulator logical output float32 045C 1116
Modultr.1.PLMin Load management interface input uint16 0461 1121
Modultr.1.SwitchPA Switch Burst PA (0 = Burst, 1 = PA) uint8 0466 1126

HA179769
Page 186 Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

8.4 PARAMETER TABLE (Cont.)

Parameter path Description Type Hex Dec
Modultr.2.CycleTime Cycle time for fixed modulator uint16 0475 1141
Modultr.2.In Input of the modulator block float32 0473 1139
Modultr.2.LgcMode Logic mode cycle selection (as Modultr1) uint8 0476 1142
Modultr.2.MinOnTime Minimum on time for variable modulator uint16 0474 1140
Modultr.2.Mode Modulator mode (as Modultr1) uint8 0478 1144
Modultr.2.Out Modulator logical output float32 0472 1138
Modultr.2.PLMin Load management interface input uint16 0477 1143
Modultr.2.SwitchPA Switch Burst PA (as Modultr1) uint8 047C 1148
Modultr.3.CycleTime Cycle time for fixed modulator uint16 048B 1163
Modultr.3.In Input of the modulator block float32 0489 1161
Modultr.3.LgcMode Logic mode cycle selection (as Modultr1) uint8 048C 1164
Modultr.3.MinOnTime Minimum on time for variable modulator uint16 048A 1162
Modultr.3.Mode Modulator mode (as Modultr1) uint8 048E 1166
Modultr.3.Out Modulator logical output float32 0488 1160
Modultr.3.PLMin Load management interface input uint16 048D 1165
Modultr.3.SwitchPA Switch Burst PA (as Modultr1) uint8 0492 1170
Modultr.4.CycleTime Cycle time for fixed modulator uint16 04A1 1185
Modultr.4.In Input of the modulator block float32 049F 1183
Modultr.4.LgcMode Logic mode cycle selection (as Modultr1) uint8 04A2 1186
Modultr.4.MinOnTime Minimum on time for variable modulator uint16 04A0 1184
Modultr.4.Mode Modulator mode (as Modultr1) uint8 04A4 1188
Modultr.4.Out Modulator logical output float32 049E 1182
Modultr.4.PLMin Load management interface input uint16 04A3 1187
Modultr.4.SwitchPA Switch Burst PA (as Modultr1) uint8 04A8 1192
Network.1.AlmAck.ChopOff Process alarm ack: Chop Off (0 = NoAck, 1 = Ack) uint8 0187 391
Network.1.AlmAck.FreqFault System alarm ack: Frequency Fault (as ChopOff) uint8 0184 388
Network.1.AlmAck.FuseBlown System alarm ack: Fuse Blown (as ChopOff) uint8 0181 385
Network.1.AlmAck.MainsVoltFault Process alarm ack: Mains Voltage Fault (as ChopOff) uint8 018A 394
Network.1.AlmAck.MissMains System alarm ack: Missing Mains (as ChopOff) uint8 017E 382
Network.1.AlmAck.NetworkDips System alarm ack: Mains Voltage Dips (as ChopOff) uint8 0183 387
Network.1.AlmAck.OpenThyr System alarm ack: Open Thyristor (as ChopOff) uint8 0180 384
Network.1.AlmAck.OverCurrent Indication alarm ack: Over Current (as ChopOff) uint8 018C 396
Network.1.AlmAck.OverTemp System alarm ack: Over Temperature (as ChopOff) uint8 0182 386
Network.1.AlmAck.PB24VFail System alarm ack: Power Board 24V Failure uint8 0185 389
(as ChopOff)
Network.1.AlmAck.PLF Process alarm ack: Partial Load Failure (as ChopOff) uint8 0188 392
Network.1.AlmAck.PLU Process alarm ack: Partial Load Unbalance uint8 0189 393
(as ChopOff)
Network.1.AlmAck.PreTemp Process alarm ack: Pre-Temperature (as ChopOff) uint8 018B 395
Network.1.AlmAck.ThyrSC System alarm ack: Thyristor Short Circuit uint8 017F 383
(as ChopOff)
Network.1.AlmAck.TLF Process alarm ack: Total Load Failure (as ChopOff) uint8 0186 390
Network.1.AlmDet.ChopOff Process alarm detection status: Chop Off uint8 015A 346
(0 = Inactive, 1 = Active)
Network.1.AlmDet.FreqFault System alarm detection status: Frequency Fault uint8 0157 343
(0 = Inactive, 1 = Active)
Network.1.AlmDet.FuseBlown System alarm detection status: Fuse Blown uint8 0154 340
(0 = Inactive, 1 = Active)
Network.1.AlmDet.MainsVoltFault Process alarm detection Status: Mains Voltage Fault uint8 015D 349
(0 = Inactive, 1 = Active)
Network.1.AlmDet.MissMains System alarm detection status: Missing Mains uint8 0151 337
(0 = Inactive, 1 = Active)
Network.1.AlmDet.NetworkDips System alarm detection status: Mains Voltage Dips uint8 0156 342
(0 = Inactive, 1 = Active)
Network.1.AlmDet.OpenThyr System alarm detection status: Open Thyristor uint8 0153 339
(0 = Inactive, 1 = Active)
Network.1.AlmDet.OverCurrent Indication alarm detection Status: Over Current uint8 015F 351
(0 = Inactive, 1 = Active)
Network.1.AlmDet.OverTemp System alarm detection status: Over Temperature uint8 0155 341

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 187
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

8.4 PARAMETER TABLE (Cont.)

Parameter path Description Type Hex Dec
(0 = Inactive, 1 = Active)
Network.1.AlmDet.PB24VFail System alarm detection status:
Power Board 24V Failure (0 = Inactive, 1 = Active) uint8 0158 344
(0 = Inactive, 1 = Active)
Network.1.AlmDet.PLF Process alarm detection status: Partial Load Failure uint8 015B 347
(0 = Inactive, 1 = Active)
Network.1.AlmDet.PLU Process alarm detection status:
Partial Load Unbalance (0 = Inactive, 1 = Active) uint8 015C 348
Network.1.AlmDet.PreTemp Process alarm detection Status: Pre-Temperature uint8 015E 350
(0 = Inactive, 1 = Active)
Network.1.AlmDet.ThyrSC System alarm detection status:
Thyristor Short Circuit (0 = Inactive, 1 = Active) uint8 0152 338
Network.1.AlmDet.TLF Process alarm detection status: Total Load Failure uint8 0159 345
(0 = Inactive, 1 = Active)
Network.1.AlmDis.ChopOff Process alarm: Chop Off (0 = Enable, 1 = Disable) uint8 014B 331
Network.1.AlmDis.FreqFault System alarm: Frequency Fault (as for ChopOff) uint8 0148 328
Network.1.AlmDis.FuseBlown System alarm: Fuse Blown (as for ChopOff) uint8 0145 325
Network.1.AlmDis.MainsVoltFault Process alarm: Mains Voltage Fault (as for ChopOff) uint8 014E 334
Network.1.AlmDis.MissMains System alarm: Missing Mains (as for ChopOff) uint8 0142 322
Network.1.AlmDis.NetworkDips System alarm: Mains Voltage Dips (as for ChopOff) uint8 0147 327
Network.1.AlmDis.OpenThyr System alarm: Open Thyristor (as for ChopOff) uint8 0144 324
Network.1.AlmDis.OverCurrent Indication alarm: Over Current (as for ChopOff) uint8 0150 336
Network.1.AlmDis.OverTemp System alarm: Over Temperature (as for ChopOff) uint8 0146 326
Network.1.AlmDis.PB24VFail System alarm: Power Board 24V Failure uint8 0149 329
(as for ChopOff)
Network.1.AlmDis.PLF Process alarm: Partial Load Failure (as for ChopOff) uint8 014C 332
Network.1.AlmDis.PLU Process alarm: Partial Load Unbalance uint8 014D 333
(as for ChopOff)
Network.1.AlmDis.PreTemp Process alarm: Pre-Temperature (as for ChopOff) uint8 014F 335
Network.1.AlmDis.ThyrSC System alarm: Thyristor Short Circuit uint8 0143 323
(as for ChopOff)
Network.1.AlmDis.TLF Process alarm: Total Load Failure (as for ChopOff) uint8 014A 330
Network.1.AlmLat.ChopOff Process alarm latch: Chop Off uint8 0178 376
(0 = NoLatch, 1 = Latch)
Network.1.AlmLat.FreqFault System alarm latch: Frequency Fault (as for ChopOff) uint8 0175 373
Network.1.AlmLat.FuseBlown System alarm latch: Fuse Blown (as for ChopOff) uint8 0172 370
Network.1.AlmLat.MainsVoltFault Process alarm latch: Mains Voltage Fault uint8 017B 379
(as for ChopOff)
Network.1.AlmLat.MissMains System alarm latch: Missing Mains (as for ChopOff) uint8 016F 367
Network.1.AlmLat.NetworkDips System alarm latch: Mains Voltage Dips uint8 0174 372
Network.1.AlmLat.OpenThyr System alarm latch: Open Thyristor (as for ChopOff) uint8 0171 369
Network.1.AlmLat.OverCurrent Indication alarm latch: Over Current uint8 017D 381
(as for ChopOff)
Network.1.AlmLat.OverTemp System alarm latch: Over Temperature uint8 0173 371
(as for ChopOff)
Network.1.AlmLat.PB24VFail System alarm latch: Power Board 24V Failure uint8 0176 374
(as for ChopOff)
Network.1.AlmLat.PLF Process alarm latch: Partial Load Failure uint8 0179 377
(as for ChopOff)
Network.1.AlmLat.PLU Process alarm latch: Partial Load Unbalance uint8 017A 378
(as for ChopOff)
Network.1.AlmLat.PreTemp Process alarm latch: Pre-Temperature uint8 017C 380
(as for ChopOff)
Network.1.AlmLat.ThyrSC System alarm latch: Thyristor Short Circuit uint8 0170 368
(as for ChopOff)
Network.1.AlmLat.TLF Process alarm latch: Total Load Failure uint8 0177 375
(as for ChopOff)
Network.1.AlmSig.ChopOff Process alarm signalling status: Chop Off uint8 0169 361
(0 = Not latched, 1 = Latched)

HA179769
Page 188 Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

8.4 PARAMETER TABLE (Cont.)

Parameter path Description Type Hex Dec
Network.1.AlmSig.FreqFault System alarm signalling status: Frequency Faultuint8 0166 358
0 = Not Latched 1 = Ph1 latched
2 = Ph2 latched 3 = Ph1&Ph2 latched
4 = Ph3 latched 5 = Ph1&Ph3 latched
6 = Ph2&Ph3 latched 7 = Ph1, Ph2 7 Ph3 latched
Network.1.AlmSig.FuseBlown System alarm signalling status: Fuse Blown uint8 0163 355
(As FreqFault)
Network.1.AlmSig.MainsVoltFault Process alarm signalling status: Mains Voltage Fault uint8 016C 364
(As FreqFault)
Network.1.AlmSig.MissMains System alarm signalling status: Missing Mains uint8 0160 352
(As FreqFault)
Network.1.AlmSig.NetworkDips System alarm signalling status: Mains Voltage Dips uint8 0165 357
(As FreqFault)
Network.1.AlmSig.OpenThyr System alarm signalling status: Open Thyristor uint8 0162 354
(As FreqFault)
Network.1.AlmSig.OverCurrent Indication alarm signalling status: Over Current uint8 016E 366
(As FreqFault)
Network.1.AlmSig.OverTemp System alarm signalling status: Over Temperature uint8 0164 356
(As FreqFault)
Network.1.AlmSig.PB24VFail System alarm signalling status:
Power Board 24V Failure (As FreqFault) uint8 0167 359
Network.1.AlmSig.PLF Process alarm signalling status: Partial Load Failure uint8 016A 362
(As FreqFault)
Network.1.AlmSig.PLU Process alarm signalling status:
Partial Load Unbalance (As ChopOff) uint8 016B 363
Network.1.AlmSig.PreTemp Process alarm signalling status: Pre-Temperature uint8 016D 365
(As FreqFault)
Network.1.AlmSig.ThyrSC System alarm signalling status:
Thyristor Short Circuit (As FreqFault) uint8 0161 353
Network.1.AlmSig.TLF Process alarm signalling status: Total Load Failure uint8 0168 360
(As FreqFault)
Network.1.AlmStop.ChopOff Process alarm stop: Chop Off For all Stop parameters:
0 = No stop
1 = Stop uint8 0196 406
Network.1.AlmStop.FreqFault System alarm stop: Frequency Fault uint8 0193 403
Network.1.AlmStop.FuseBlown System alarm stop: Fuse Blown uint8 0190 400
Network.1.AlmStop.MainsVoltFault Process alarm stop: Mains Voltage Fault uint8 0199 409
Network.1.AlmStop.MissMains System alarm stop: Missing Mains uint8 018D 397
Network.1.AlmStop.NetworkDips System alarm stop: Mains Voltage Dips uint8 0192 402
Network.1.AlmStop.OpenThyr System alarm stop: Open Thyristor uint8 018F 399
Network.1.AlmStop.OverCurrent Indication alarm stop: Over Current uint8 019B 411
Network.1.AlmStop.OverTemp System alarm stop: Over Temperature uint8 0191 401
Network.1.AlmStop.PB24VFail System alarm stop: Power Board 24V Failure uint8 0194 404
Network.1.AlmStop.PLF Process alarm stop: Partial Load Failure uint8 0197 407
Network.1.AlmStop.PLU Process alarm stop: Partial Load Unbalance uint8 0198 408
Network.1.AlmStop.PreTemp Process alarm stop: Pre-Temperature uint8 019A 410
Network.1.AlmStop.ThyrSC System alarm stop: Thyristor Short Circuit uint8 018E 398
Network.1.AlmStop.TLF Process alarm stop: Total Load Failure uint8 0195 405
Network.1.Meas.Frequency Frequency of the line float32 0118 280
Network.1.Meas.HtSinkTemp Heatsink 1 temperature float32 011A 282
Network.1.Meas.HtSinkTmp2 Heatsink 2 temperature float32 011B 283
Network.1.Meas.HtSinkTmp3 Heatsink 3 temperature float32 011C 284
Network.1.Meas.I Irms of the load float32 0103 259
Network.1.Meas.I2 Irms2 of the load float32 0104 260
Network.1.Meas.I3 Irms3 of the load float32 0105 261
Network.1.Meas.Iavg Average value of Irms float32 0106 262
Network.1.Meas.IrmsMax Maximum rms current in a 3 phase network. float32 0120 288
Network.1.Meas.Isq Square value of the load current float32 0108 264
Network.1.Meas.IsqBurst Average square value of load current in burst firing float32 0107 263
Network.1.Meas.IsqMax Maximum squared current in a 3 phase network. float32 0109 265
Network.1.Meas.P True power measurement. float32 0111 273

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 189
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

8.4 PARAMETER TABLE (Cont.)

Parameter path Description Type Hex Dec
Network.1.Meas.PBurst True Power measurement in burst firing float32 0110 272
Network.1.Meas.PF Power Factor float32 0113 275
Network.1.Meas.Q Reactive Power float32 0114 276
Network.1.Meas.S Apparent power measurement float32 0112 274
Network.1.Meas.V Vrms of the load float32 010A 266
Network.1.Meas.V2 Vrms2 of the load float32 010B 267
Network.1.Meas.V3 Vrms3 of the load float32 010C 268
Network.1.Meas.Vavg Average value of Vrms float32 010D 269
Network.1.Meas.Vline Line voltage measurement float32 0100 256
Network.1.Meas.Vline2 Line voltage measurement float32 0101 257
Network.1.Meas.Vline3 Line voltage measurement float32 0102 258
Network.1.Meas.VrmsMax Maximum rms voltages in the 3 phase network. float32 0121 289
Network.1.Meas.Vsq Square value of load voltage float32 010E 270
Network.1.Meas.VsqBurst Average square value of the load voltage in burst firing float32 0119 281
Network.1.Meas.VsqMax Maximum squared voltages in the 3 phase network. float32 010F 271
Network.1.Meas.Z Load impedance float32 0115 277
Network.1.Meas.Z2 Load impedance2 float32 0116 278
Network.1.Meas.Z3 Load impedance3 float32 0117 279
Network.1.Setup.ChopOffNb Chop Off Number uint8 0126 294
Network.1.Setup.ChopOffThreshold1 Chop Off Threshold1 uint8 0124 292
Network.1.Setup.ChopOffThreshold2 Chop Off Threshold2 uint16 0125 293
Network.1.Setup.ChopOffWindow Chop Off Window uint16 0127 295
Network.1.Setup.FreqDriftThreshold Frequency Drift Threshold. float32 013F 319
Network.1.Setup.HeaterType Heater type of the load uint8 012F 303
Network.1.Setup.HeatsinkPreTemp Heatsink pre alarm temperature threshold uint8 012A 298
Network.1.Setup.HeatsinkTmax Maximum temperature of the heatsink uint8 0122 290
Network.1.Setup.IextScale External current scale adjustment float32 0132 306
Network.1.Setup.IMaximum Maximum Current of the stack uint8 0136 310
0 = Ext100A 8 = 400A 16 = Ext1300A
1 = Ext160A 9 = 630A 17 = Ext1700A
2 = Ext250A 10 = 500A 18 = Ext2000A
3 = Ext400A 11 = Ext 500A 19 = Ext3000A
4 = Ext630A 12 = 50A 20 = Ext4000A
5 = 100A 13 = Ext50A 21 = Ext5000A
6 = 160A 14 = Ext800A
7 = 250A 15 = Ext1000A
Network.1.Setup.INominal Nominal current of the stack float32 0135 309
Network.1.Setup.NetType The type of network. Set in Instrument.Configuration. uint8 0133 307
(0 = 3Ph, 1 = 1Ph, 2 = 2Ph)
Network.1.Setup.OverIThreshold Over Current Threshold uint16 012E 302
Network.1.Setup.OverVoltThreshold Over voltage threshold uint8 0128 296
Network.1.Setup.PLFAdjusted Partial load failure adjusted acknowledge uint8 012B 299
(0 = Not adjusted, 1 = Adjusted)
Network.1.Setup.PLFAdjustReq Partial load failure adjustment request uint8 0131 305
(0 = No, 7 = Request)
Network.1.Setup.PLFSensitivity Partial load failure sensitivity uint8 012C 300
Network.1.Setup.PLUthreshold Partial load unbalance threshold uint8 012D 301
Network.1.Setup.UnderVoltThreshold Under voltage threshold uint8 0129 297
Network.1.Setup.VdipsThreshold Voltage Dips Threshold uint8 0123 291
Network.1.Setup.VextScale External voltage scale adjustment float32 0140 320
Network.1.Setup.VlineNominal Line nominal value float32 0130 304
Network.1.Setup.VloadNominal Load Nominal voltage float32 0134 308
Network.1.Setup.VMaximum Maximum Voltage of the stack (0 = 600V, 1 = 690V) uint8 0141 321
Network.1.Setup.Zref PLF reference load impedance phase 1 float32 0139 313
Network.1.Setup.Zref2 PLF reference load impedance phase 2 float32 013A 314
Network.1.Setup.Zref3 PLF reference load impedance phase 3 float32 013B 315
Network 2. See Network 1 for enumeration values
Network.2.AlmAck.ChopOff Process alarm ack: Chop Off uint8 022C 556
Network.2.AlmAck.FreqFault System alarm ack: Frequency Fault uint8 0229 553

HA179769
Page 190 Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

Network.2.AlmAck.FuseBlown System alarm ack: Fuse Blown uint8 0226 550

Network.2.AlmAck.MainsVoltFault Process alarm ack: Mains Voltage Fault uint8 022F 559
Network.2.AlmAck.MissMains System alarm ack: Missing Mains uint8 0223 547
Network.2.AlmAck.NetworkDips System alarm ack: Mains Voltage Dips uint8 0228 552
Network.2.AlmAck.OpenThyr System alarm ack: Open Thyristor uint8 0225 549
Network.2.AlmAck.OverCurrent Indication alarm ack: Over Current uint8 0231 561
Network.2.AlmAck.OverTemp System alarm ack: Over Temperature uint8 0227 551
Network.2.AlmAck.PB24VFail System alarm ack: Power Board 24V Failure uint8 022A 554
Network.2.AlmAck.PLF Process alarm ack: Partial Load Failure uint8 022D 557
Network.2.AlmAck.PLU Process alarm ack: Partial Load Unbalance uint8 022E 558
Network.2.AlmAck.PreTemp Process alarm ack: Pre-Temperature uint8 0230 560
Network.2.AlmAck.ThyrSC System alarm ack: Thyristor Short Circuit uint8 0224 548
Network.2.AlmAck.TLF Process alarm ack: Total Load Failure uint8 022B 555
Network.2.AlmDet.ChopOff Process alarm detection status: Chop Off uint8 01FF 511
Network.2.AlmDet.FreqFault System alarm detection status: Frequency Fault uint8 01FC 508
Network.2.AlmDet.FuseBlown System alarm detection status: Fuse Blown uint8 01F9 505
Network.2.AlmDet.MainsVoltFault Process alarm detection Status: Mains Voltage Fault uint8 0202 514
Network.2.AlmDet.MissMains System alarm detection status: Missing Mains uint8 01F6 502
Network.2.AlmDet.NetworkDips System alarm detection status: Mains Voltage Dips uint8 01FB 507
Network.2.AlmDet.OpenThyr System alarm detection status: Open Thyristor uint8 01F8 504
Network.2.AlmDet.OverCurrent Indication alarm detection Status: Over Current uint8 0204 516
Network.2.AlmDet.OverTemp System alarm detection status: Over Temperature uint8 01FA 506
Network.2.AlmDet.PB24VFail System alarm detection status:Power Board 24V Failure uint8 01FD 509
Network.2.AlmDet.PLF Process alarm detection status: Partial Load Failure uint8 0200 512
Network.2.AlmDet.PLU Process alarm detection status: Partial Load Unbalance uint8 0201 513
Network.2.AlmDet.PreTemp Process alarm detection Status: Pre-Temperature uint8 0203 515
Network.2.AlmDet.ThyrSC System alarm detection status: Thyristor Short Circuit uint8 01F7 503
Network.2.AlmDet.TLF Process alarm detection status: Total Load Failure uint8 01FE 510
Network.2.AlmDis.ChopOff Process alarm: Chop Off uint8 01F0 496
Network.2.AlmDis.FreqFault System alarm: Frequency Fault uint8 01ED 493
Network.2.AlmDis.FuseBlown System alarm: Fuse Blown uint8 01EA 490
Network.2.AlmDis.MainsVoltFault Process alarm: Mains Voltage Fault uint8 01F3 499
Network.2.AlmDis.MissMains System alarm: Missing Mains uint8 01E7 487
Network.2.AlmDis.NetworkDips System alarm: Mains Voltage Dips uint8 01EC 492
Network.2.AlmDis.OpenThyr System alarm: Open Thyristor uint8 01E9 489
Network.2.AlmDis.OverCurrent Indication alarm: Over Current uint8 01F5 501
Network.2.AlmDis.OverTemp System alarm: Over Temperature uint8 01EB 491
Network.2.AlmDis.PB24VFail System alarm: Power Board 24V Failure uint8 01EE 494
Network.2.AlmDis.PLF Process alarm: Partial Load Failure uint8 01F1 497
Network.2.AlmDis.PLU Process alarm: Partial Load Unbalance uint8 01F2 498
Network.2.AlmDis.PreTemp Process alarm: Pre-Temperature uint8 01F4 500
Network.2.AlmDis.ThyrSC System alarm: Thyristor Short Circuit uint8 01E8 488
Network.2.AlmDis.TLF Process alarm: Total Load Failure uint8 01EF 495
Network.2.AlmLat.ChopOff Process alarm latch: Chop Off uint8 021D 541
Network.2.AlmLat.FreqFault System alarm latch: Frequency Fault uint8 021A 538
Network.2.AlmLat.FuseBlown System alarm latch: Fuse Blown uint8 0217 535
Network.2.AlmLat.MainsVoltFault Process alarm latch: Mains Voltage Fault uint8 0220 544
Network.2.AlmLat.MissMains System alarm latch: Missing Mains uint8 0214 532
Network.2.AlmLat.NetworkDips System alarm latch: Mains Voltage Dips uint8 0219 537
Network.2.AlmLat.OpenThyr System alarm latch: Open Thyristor uint8 0216 534
Network.2.AlmLat.OverCurrent Indication alarm latch: Over Current uint8 0222 546
Network.2.AlmLat.OverTemp System alarm latch: Over Temperature uint8 0218 536
Network.2.AlmLat.PB24VFail System alarm latch: Power Board 24V Failure uint8 021B 539
Network.2.AlmLat.PLF Process alarm latch: Partial Load Failure uint8 021E 542
Network.2.AlmLat.PLU Process alarm latch: Partial Load Unbalance uint8 021F 543
Network.2.AlmLat.PreTemp Process alarm latch: Pre-Temperature uint8 0221 545
Network.2.AlmLat.ThyrSC System alarm latch: Thyristor Short Circuit uint8 0215 533
Network.2.AlmLat.TLF Process alarm latch: Total Load Failure uint8 021C 540
Network.2.AlmSig.ChopOff Process alarm signalling status: Chop Off uint8 020E 526
Network.2.AlmSig.FreqFault System alarm signalling status: Frequency Fault uint8 020B 523
Network.2.AlmSig.FuseBlown System alarm signalling status: Fuse Blown uint8 0208 520
Network.2.AlmSig.MainsVoltFault Process alarm signalling status: Mains Voltage Fault uint8 0211 529
Network.2.AlmSig.MissMains System alarm signalling status: Missing Mains uint8 0205 517

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 191
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

Network.2.AlmSig.NetworkDips System alarm signalling status: Mains Voltage Dips uint8 020A 522
Network.2.AlmSig.OpenThyr System alarm signalling status: Open Thyristor uint8 0207 519
Network.2.AlmSig.OverCurrent Indication alarm signalling status: Over Current uint8 0213 531
Network.2.AlmSig.OverTemp System alarm signalling status: Over Temperature uint8 0209 521
Network.2.AlmSig.PB24VFail System alarm signalling status: Power Board 24V Failure uint8 020C 524
Network.2.AlmSig.PLF Process alarm signalling status: Partial Load Failure uint8 020F 527
Network.2.AlmSig.PLU Process alarm signalling status: Partial Load Unbalance uint8 0210 528
Network.2.AlmSig.PreTemp Process alarm signalling status: Pre-Temperature uint8 0212 530
Network.2.AlmSig.ThyrSC System alarm signalling status: Thyristor Short Circuit uint8 0206 518
Network.2.AlmSig.TLF Process alarm signalling status: Total Load Failure uint8 020D 525
Network.2.AlmStop.ChopOff Process alarm stop: Chop Off uint8 023B 571
Network.2.AlmStop.FreqFault System alarm stop: Frequency Fault uint8 0238 568
Network.2.AlmStop.FuseBlown System alarm stop: Fuse Blown uint8 0235 565
Network.2.AlmStop.MainsVoltFault Process alarm stop: Mains Voltage Fault uint8 023E 574
Network.2.AlmStop.MissMains System alarm stop: Missing Mains uint8 0232 562
Network.2.AlmStop.NetworkDips System alarm stop: Mains Voltage Dips uint8 0237 567
Network.2.AlmStop.OpenThyr System alarm stop: Open Thyristor uint8 0234 564
Network.2.AlmStop.OverCurrent Indication alarm stop: Over Current uint8 0240 576
Network.2.AlmStop.OverTemp System alarm stop: Over Temperature uint8 0236 566
Network.2.AlmStop.PB24VFail System alarm stop: Power Board 24V Failure uint8 0239 569
Network.2.AlmStop.PLF Process alarm stop: Partial Load Failure uint8 023C 572
Network.2.AlmStop.PLU Process alarm stop: Partial Load Unbalance uint8 023D 573
Network.2.AlmStop.PreTemp Process alarm stop: Pre-Temperature uint8 023F 575
Network.2.AlmStop.ThyrSC System alarm stop: Thyristor Short Circuit uint8 0233 563
Network.2.AlmStop.TLF Process alarm stop: Total Load Failure uint8 023A 570
Network.2.Meas.Frequency Frequency of the line float32 01BD 445
Network.2.Meas.HtSinkTemp Heatsink 1 temperature float32 01BF 447
Network.2.Meas.HtSinkTmp2 Heatsink 2 temperature float32 01C0 448
Network.2.Meas.HtSinkTmp3 Heatsink 3 temperature float32 01C1 449
Network.2.Meas.I Irms of the load float32 01A8 424
Network.2.Meas.I2 Irms2 of the load float32 01A9 425
Network.2.Meas.I3 Irms3 of the load float32 01AA 426
Network.2.Meas.Iavg Average value of Irms float32 01AB 427
Network.2.Meas.IrmsMax Maximum rms current in a 3 phase network. float32 01C5 453
Network.2.Meas.Isq Square value of the load current float32 01AD 429
Network.2.Meas.IsqBurst Average square value of load current in burst firing float32 01AC 428
Network.2.Meas.IsqMax Maximum squared current in a 3 phase network. float32 01AE 430
Network.2.Meas.P True power measurement. float32 01B6 438
Network.2.Meas.PBurst True Power measurement in burst firing float32 01B5 437
Network.2.Meas.PF Power Factor float32 01B8 440
Network.2.Meas.Q Reactive Power float32 01B9 441
Network.2.Meas.S Apparent power measurement float32 01B7 439
Network.2.Meas.V Vrms of the load float32 01AF 431
Network.2.Meas.V2 Vrms2 of the load float32 01B0 432
Network.2.Meas.V3 Vrms3 of the load float32 01B1 433
Network.2.Meas.Vavg Average value of Vrms float32 01B2 434
Network.2.Meas.Vline Line voltage measurement float32 01A5 421
Network.2.Meas.Vline2 Line voltage measurement float32 01A6 422
Network.2.Meas.Vline3 Line voltage measurement float32 01A7 423
Network.2.Meas.VrmsMax Maximum rms voltages in the 3 phase network. float32 01C6 454
Network.2.Meas.Vsq Square value of load voltage float32 01B3 435
Network.2.Meas.VsqBurst Average square value of the load voltage in burst firing float32 01BE 446
Network.2.Meas.VsqMax Maximum squared voltages in the 3 phase network. float32 01B4 436
Network.2.Meas.Z Load impedance float32 01BA 442
Network.2.Meas.Z2 Load impedance2 float32 01BB 443
Network.2.Meas.Z3 Load impedance3 float32 01BC 444
Network.2.Setup.ChopOffNb Chop Off Number uint8 01CB 459
Network.2.Setup.ChopOffThreshold1 Chop Off Threshold1 uint8 01C9 457
Network.2.Setup.ChopOffThreshold2 Chop Off Threshold2 uint16 01CA 458
Network.2.Setup.ChopOffWindow Chop Off Window uint16 01CC 460
Network.2.Setup.FreqDriftThreshold Frequency Drift Threshold. float32 01E4 484
Network.2.Setup.HeaterType Heater type of the load uint8 01D4 468
Network.2.Setup.HeatsinkPreTemp Heatsink pre alarm temperature threshold uint8 01CF 463

HA179769
Page 192 Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

Network.2.Setup.HeatsinkTmax Maximum temperature of the heatsink uint8 01C7 455

Network.2.Setup.IextScale External current scale adjustment float32 01D7 471
Network.2.Setup.IMaximum Maximum Current of the stack uint8 01DB 475
Network.2.Setup.INominal Nominal current of the stack float32 01DA 474
Network.2.Setup.NetType The type of network.Set in Instrument.Configuration. uint8 01D8 472
Network.2.Setup.OverIThreshold Over Current Threshold uint16 01D3 467
Network.2.Setup.OverVoltThreshold Over voltage threshold uint8 01CD 461
Network.2.Setup.PLFAdjusted Partial load failure adjusted acknowledge uint8 01D0 464
Network.2.Setup.PLFAdjustReq Partial load failure adjustment request uint8 01D6 470
Network.2.Setup.PLFSensitivity Partial load failure sensitivity uint8 01D1 465
Network.2.Setup.PLUthreshold Partial load unbalance threshold uint8 01D2 466
Network.2.Setup.UnderVoltThreshold Under voltage threshold uint8 01CE 462
Network.2.Setup.VdipsThreshold Voltage Dips Threshold uint8 01C8 456
Network.2.Setup.VextScale External voltage scale adjustment float32 01E5 485
Network.2.Setup.VlineNominal Line nominal value float32 01D5 469
Network.2.Setup.VloadNominal Load Nominal voltage float32 01D9 473
Network.2.Setup.VMaximum Maximum Voltage of the stack uint8 01E6 486
Network.2.Setup.Zref PLF reference load impedance phase 1 float32 01DE 478
Network.2.Setup.Zref2 PLF reference load impedance phase 2 float32 01DF 479
Network.2.Setup.Zref3 PLF reference load impedance phase 3 float32 01E0 480
Network 3. See Network 1 for enumeration values
Network.3.AlmAck.ChopOff Process alarm ack: Chop Off uint8 02D1 721
Network.3.AlmAck.FreqFault System alarm ack: Frequency Fault uint8 02CE 718
Network.3.AlmAck.FuseBlown System alarm ack: Fuse Blown uint8 02CB 715
Network.3.AlmAck.MainsVoltFault Process alarm ack: Mains Voltage Fault uint8 02D4 724
Network.3.AlmAck.MissMains System alarm ack: Missing Mains uint8 02C8 712
Network.3.AlmAck.NetworkDips System alarm ack: Mains Voltage Dips uint8 02CD 717
Network.3.AlmAck.OpenThyr System alarm ack: Open Thyristor uint8 02CA 714
Network.3.AlmAck.OverCurrent Indication alarm ack: Over Current uint8 02D6 726
Network.3.AlmAck.OverTemp System alarm ack: Over Temperature uint8 02CC 716
Network.3.AlmAck.PB24VFail System alarm ack: Power Board 24V Failure uint8 02CF 719
Network.3.AlmAck.PLF Process alarm ack: Partial Load Failure uint8 02D2 722
Network.3.AlmAck.PLU Process alarm ack: Partial Load Unbalance uint8 02D3 723
Network.3.AlmAck.PreTemp Process alarm ack: Pre-Temperature uint8 02D5 725
Network.3.AlmAck.ThyrSC System alarm ack: Thyristor Short Circuit uint8 02C9 713
Network.3.AlmAck.TLF Process alarm ack: Total Load Failure uint8 02D0 720
Network.3.AlmDet.ChopOff Process alarm detection status: Chop Off uint8 02A4 676
Network.3.AlmDet.FreqFault System alarm detection status: Frequency Fault uint8 02A1 673
Network.3.AlmDet.FuseBlown System alarm detection status: Fuse Blown uint8 029E 670
Network.3.AlmDet.MainsVoltFault Process alarm detection Status: Mains Voltage Fault uint8 02A7 679
Network.3.AlmDet.MissMains System alarm detection status: Missing Mains uint8 029B 667
Network.3.AlmDet.NetworkDips System alarm detection status: Mains Voltage Dips uint8 02A0 672
Network.3.AlmDet.OpenThyr System alarm detection status: Open Thyristor uint8 029D 669
Network.3.AlmDet.OverCurrent Indication alarm detection Status: Over Current uint8 02A9 681
Network.3.AlmDet.OverTemp System alarm detection status: Over Temperature uint8 029F 671
Network.3.AlmDet.PB24VFail System alarm detection status: Power Board 24V Failure uint8 02A2 674
Network.3.AlmDet.PLF Process alarm detection status: Partial Load Failure uint8 02A5 677
Network.3.AlmDet.PLU Process alarm detection status: Partial Load Unbalance uint8 02A6 678
Network.3.AlmDet.PreTemp Process alarm detection Status: Pre-Temperature uint8 02A8 680
Network.3.AlmDet.ThyrSC System alarm detection status: Thyristor Short Circuit uint8 029C 668
Network.3.AlmDet.TLF Process alarm detection status: Total Load Failure uint8 02A3 675
Network.3.AlmDis.ChopOff Process alarm: Chop Off uint8 0295 661
Network.3.AlmDis.FreqFault System alarm: Frequency Fault uint8 0292 658
Network.3.AlmDis.FuseBlown System alarm: Fuse Blown uint8 028F 655
Network.3.AlmDis.MainsVoltFault Process alarm: Mains Voltage Fault uint8 0298 664
Network.3.AlmDis.MissMains System alarm: Missing Mains uint8 028C 652
Network.3.AlmDis.NetworkDips System alarm: Mains Voltage Dips uint8 0291 657
Network.3.AlmDis.OpenThyr System alarm: Open Thyristor uint8 028E 654
Network.3.AlmDis.OverCurrent Indication alarm: Over Current uint8 029A 666
Network.3.AlmDis.OverTemp System alarm: Over Temperature uint8 0290 656
Network.3.AlmDis.PB24VFail System alarm: Power Board 24V Failure uint8 0293 659
Network.3.AlmDis.PLF Process alarm: Partial Load Failure uint8 0296 662

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 193
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

Network.3.AlmDis.PLU Process alarm: Partial Load Unbalance uint8 0297 663

Network.3.AlmDis.PreTemp Process alarm: Pre-Temperature uint8 0299 665
Network.3.AlmDis.ThyrSC System alarm: Thyristor Short Circuit uint8 028D 653
Network.3.AlmDis.TLF Process alarm: Total Load Failure uint8 0294 660
Network.3.AlmLat.ChopOff Process alarm latch: Chop Off uint8 02C2 706
Network.3.AlmLat.FreqFault System alarm latch: Frequency Fault uint8 02BF 703
Network.3.AlmLat.FuseBlown System alarm latch: Fuse Blown uint8 02BC 700
Network.3.AlmLat.MainsVoltFault Process alarm latch: Mains Voltage Fault uint8 02C5 709
Network.3.AlmLat.MissMains System alarm latch: Missing Mains uint8 02B9 697
Network.3.AlmLat.NetworkDips System alarm latch: Mains Voltage Dips uint8 02BE 702
Network.3.AlmLat.OpenThyr System alarm latch: Open Thyristor uint8 02BB 699
Network.3.AlmLat.OverCurrent Indication alarm latch: Over Current uint8 02C7 711
Network.3.AlmLat.OverTemp System alarm latch: Over Temperature uint8 02BD 701
Network.3.AlmLat.PB24VFail System alarm latch: Power Board 24V Failure uint8 02C0 704
Network.3.AlmLat.PLF Process alarm latch: Partial Load Failure uint8 02C3 707
Network.3.AlmLat.PLU Process alarm latch: Partial Load Unbalance uint8 02C4 708
Network.3.AlmLat.PreTemp Process alarm latch: Pre-Temperature uint8 02C6 710
Network.3.AlmLat.ThyrSC System alarm latch: Thyristor Short Circuit uint8 02BA 698
Network.3.AlmLat.TLF Process alarm latch: Total Load Failure uint8 02C1 705
Network.3.AlmSig.ChopOff Process alarm signalling status: Chop Off uint8 02B3 691
Network.3.AlmSig.FreqFault System alarm signalling status: Frequency Fault uint8 02B0 688
Network.3.AlmSig.FuseBlown System alarm signalling status: Fuse Blown uint8 02AD 685
Network.3.AlmSig.MainsVoltFault Process alarm signalling status: Mains Voltage Fault uint8 02B6 694
Network.3.AlmSig.MissMains System alarm signalling status: Missing Mains uint8 02AA 682
n


Network.3.AlmSig.NetworkDips System alarm signalling status: Mains Voltage Dips uint8 02AF 687
Network.3.AlmSig.OpenThyr P max =
System alarm signalling Ri H Open Thyristor
status: uint8 02AC 684
Network.3.AlmSig.OverCurrent i =1
Indication alarm signalling status: Over Current uint8 02B8 696
Network.3.AlmSig.OverTemp System alarm signalling status: Over Temperature uint8 02AE 686
Network.3.AlmSig.PB24VFail System alarm signalling status: Power Board 24V Failure uint8 02B1 689
Network.3.AlmSig.PLF Process alarm signalling status: Partial Load Failure uint8 02B4 692
Network.3.AlmSig.PLU Process alarm signalling status: Partial Load Unbalance uint8 02B5 693
Network.3.AlmSig.PreTemp Process alarm signalling status: Pre-Temperature uint8 02B7 695
Network.3.AlmSig.ThyrSC System alarm signalling status: Thyristor Short Circuit uint8 02AB 683
Network.3.AlmSig.TLF Process alarm signalling status: Total Load Failure uint8 02B2 690
Network.3.AlmStop.ChopOff Process alarm stop: Chop Off uint8 02E0 736
Network.3.AlmStop.FreqFault System alarm stop: Frequency Fault uint8 02DD 733
Network.3.AlmStop.FuseBlown System alarm stop: Fuse Blown uint8 02DA 730
Network.3.AlmStop.MainsVoltFault Process alarm stop: Mains Voltage Fault uint8 02E3 739
Network.3.AlmStop.MissMains System alarm stop: Missing Mains uint8 02D7 727
Network.3.AlmStop.NetworkDips System alarm stop: Mains Voltage Dips uint8 02DC 732
Network.3.AlmStop.OpenThyr System alarm stop: Open Thyristor uint8 02D9 729
Network.3.AlmStop.OverCurrent Indication alarm stop: Over Current uint8 02E5 741
Network.3.AlmStop.OverTemp System alarm stop: Over Temperature uint8 02DB 731
Network.3.AlmStop.PB24VFail System alarm stop: Power Board 24V Failure uint8 02DE 734
Network.3.AlmStop.PLF Process alarm stop: Partial Load Failure uint8 02E1 737
Network.3.AlmStop.PLU Process alarm stop: Partial Load Unbalance uint8 02E2 738
Network.3.AlmStop.PreTemp Process alarm stop: Pre-Temperature uint8 02E4 740
Network.3.AlmStop.ThyrSC System alarm stop: Thyristor Short Circuit uint8 02D8 728
Network.3.AlmStop.TLF Process alarm stop: Total Load Failure uint8 02DF 735
Network.3.Meas.Frequency Frequency of the line float32 0262 610
Network.3.Meas.HtSinkTemp Heatsink 1 temperature float32 0264 612
Network.3.Meas.HtSinkTmp2 Heatsink 2 temperature float32 0265 613
Network.3.Meas.HtSinkTmp3 Heatsink 3 temperature float32 0266 614
Network.3.Meas.I Irms of the load float32 024D 589
Network.3.Meas.I2 Irms2 of the load float32 024E 590
Network.3.Meas.I3 Irms3 of the load float32 024F 591
Network.3.Meas.Iavg Average value of Irms float32 0250 592
Network.3.Meas.IrmsMax Maximum rms current in a 3 phase network. float32 026A 618
Network.3.Meas.Isq Square value of the load current float32 0252 594
Network.3.Meas.IsqBurst Average square value of load current in burst firing float32 0251 593
Network.3.Meas.IsqMax Maximum squared current in a 3 phase network. float32 0253 595
Network.3.Meas.P True power measurement. float32 025B 603
Network.3.Meas.PBurst True Power measurement in burst firing float32 025A 602

HA179769
Page 194 Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

Network.3.Meas.PF Power Factor float32 025D 605

Network.3.Meas.Q Reactive Power float32 025E 606
Network.3.Meas.S Apparent power measurement float32 025C 604
Network.3.Meas.V Vrms of the load float32 0254 596
Network.3.Meas.V2 Vrms2 of the load float32 0255 597
Network.3.Meas.V3 Vrms3 of the load float32 0256 598
Network.3.Meas.Vavg Average value of Vrms float32 0257 599
Network.3.Meas.Vline Line voltage measurement float32 024A 586
Network.3.Meas.Vline2 Line voltage measurement float32 024B 587
Network.3.Meas.Vline3 Line voltage measurement float32 024C 588
Network.3.Meas.VrmsMax Maximum rms voltages in the 3 phase network. float32 026B 619
Network.3.Meas.Vsq Square value of load voltage float32 0258 600
Network.3.Meas.VsqBurst Average square value of the load voltage in burst firing float32 0263 611
Network.3.Meas.VsqMax Maximum squared voltages in the 3 phase network. float32 0259 601
Network.3.Meas.Z Load impedance float32 025F 607
Network.3.Meas.Z2 Load impedance2 float32 0260 608
Network.3.Meas.Z3 Load impedance3 float32 0261 609
Network.3.Setup.ChopOffNb Chop Off Number uint8 0270 624
Network.3.Setup.ChopOffThreshold1 Chop Off Threshold1 uint8 026E 622
Network.3.Setup.ChopOffThreshold2 Chop Off Threshold2 uint16 026F 623
Network.3.Setup.ChopOffWindow Chop Off Window uint16 0271 625
Network.3.Setup.FreqDriftThreshold Frequency Drift Threshold. float32 0289 649
Network.3.Setup.HeaterType Heater type of the load uint8 0279 633
Network.3.Setup.HeatsinkPreTemp Heatsink pre alarm temperature threshold uint8 0274 628
Network.3.Setup.HeatsinkTmax Maximum temperature of the heatsink uint8 026C 620
Network.3.Setup.IextScale External current scale adjustment float32 027C 636
Network.3.Setup.IMaximum Maximum Current of the stack uint8 0280 640
Network.3.Setup.INominal Nominal current of the stack float32 027F 639
Network.3.Setup.NetType The type of network. Set in Instrument.Configuration. uint8 027D 637
Network.3.Setup.OverIThreshold Over Current Threshold uint16 0278 632
Network.3.Setup.OverVoltThreshold Over voltage threshold uint8 0272 626
Network.3.Setup.PLFAdjusted Partial load failure adjusted acknowledge uint8 0275 629
Network.3.Setup.PLFAdjustReq Partial load failure adjustment request uint8 027B 635
Network.3.Setup.PLFSensitivity Partial load failure sensitivity uint8 0276 630
Network.3.Setup.PLUthreshold Partial load unbalance threshold uint8 0277 631
Network.3.Setup.UnderVoltThreshold Under voltage threshold uint8 0273 627
Network.3.Setup.VdipsThreshold Voltage Dips Threshold uint8 026D 621
Network.3.Setup.VextScale External voltage scale adjustment float32 028A 650
Network.3.Setup.VlineNominal Line nominal value float32 027A 634
Network.3.Setup.VloadNominal Load Nominal voltage float32 027E 638
Network.3.Setup.VMaximum Maximum Voltage of the stack uint8 028B 651
Network.3.Setup.Zref PLF reference load impedance phase 1 float32 0283 643
Network.3.Setup.Zref2 PLF reference load impedance phase 2 float32 0284 644
Network.3.Setup.Zref3 PLF reference load impedance phase 3 float32 0285 645
Network 4. See Network 1 for enumeration values
Network.4.AlmAck.ChopOff Process alarm ack: Chop Off uint8 0376 886
Network.4.AlmAck.FreqFault System alarm ack: Frequency Fault uint8 0373 883
Network.4.AlmAck.FuseBlown System alarm ack: Fuse Blown uint8 0370 880
Network.4.AlmAck.MainsVoltFault Process alarm ack: Mains Voltage Fault uint8 0379 889
Network.4.AlmAck.MissMains System alarm ack: Missing Mains uint8 036D 877
Network.4.AlmAck.NetworkDips System alarm ack: Mains Voltage Dips uint8 0372 882
Network.4.AlmAck.OpenThyr System alarm ack: Open Thyristor uint8 036F 879
Network.4.AlmAck.OverCurrent Indication alarm ack: Over Current uint8 037B 891
Network.4.AlmAck.OverTemp System alarm ack: Over Temperature uint8 0371 881
Network.4.AlmAck.PB24VFail System alarm ack: Power Board 24V Failure uint8 0374 884
Network.4.AlmAck.PLF Process alarm ack: Partial Load Failure uint8 0377 887
Network.4.AlmAck.PLU Process alarm ack: Partial Load Unbalance uint8 0378 888
Network.4.AlmAck.PreTemp Process alarm ack: Pre-Temperature uint8 037A 890
Network.4.AlmAck.ThyrSC System alarm ack: Thyristor Short Circuit uint8 036E 878
Network.4.AlmAck.TLF Process alarm ack: Total Load Failure uint8 0375 885
Network.4.AlmDet.ChopOff Process alarm detection status: Chop Off uint8 0349 841
Network.4.AlmDet.FreqFault System alarm detection status: Frequency Fault uint8 0346 838

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 195
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

Network.4.AlmDet.FuseBlown System alarm detection status: Fuse Blown uint8 0343 835
Network.4.AlmDet.MainsVoltFault Process alarm detection Status: Mains Voltage Fault uint8 034C 844
Network.4.AlmDet.MissMains System alarm detection status: Missing Mains uint8 0340 832
Network.4.AlmDet.NetworkDips System alarm detection status: Mains Voltage Dips uint8 0345 837
Network.4.AlmDet.OpenThyr System alarm detection status: Open Thyristor uint8 0342 834
Network.4.AlmDet.OverCurrent Indication alarm detection Status: Over Current uint8 034E 846
Network.4.AlmDet.OverTemp System alarm detection status: Over Temperature uint8 0344 836
Network.4.AlmDet.PB24VFail System alarm detection status: Power Board 24V Failure uint8 0347 839
Network.4.AlmDet.PLF Process alarm detection status: Partial Load Failure uint8 034A 842
Network.4.AlmDet.PLU Process alarm detection status: Partial Load Unbalance uint8 034B 843
Network.4.AlmDet.PreTemp Process alarm detection Status: Pre-Temperature uint8 034D 845
Network.4.AlmDet.ThyrSC System alarm detection status: Thyristor Short Circuit uint8 0341 833
Network.4.AlmDet.TLF Process alarm detection status: Total Load Failure uint8 0348 840
Network.4.AlmDis.ChopOff Process alarm: Chop Off uint8 033A 826
Network.4.AlmDis.FreqFault System alarm: Frequency Fault uint8 0337 823
Network.4.AlmDis.FuseBlown System alarm: Fuse Blown uint8 0334 820
Network.4.AlmDis.MainsVoltFault Process alarm: Mains Voltage Fault uint8 033D 829
Network.4.AlmDis.MissMains System alarm: Missing Mains uint8 0331 817
Network.4.AlmDis.NetworkDips System alarm: Mains Voltage Dips uint8 0336 822
Network.4.AlmDis.OpenThyr System alarm: Open Thyristor uint8 0333 819
Network.4.AlmDis.OverCurrent Indication alarm: Over Current uint8 033F 831
Network.4.AlmDis.OverTemp System alarm: Over Temperature uint8 0335 821
Network.4.AlmDis.PB24VFail System alarm: Power Board 24V Failure uint8 0338 824
Network.4.AlmDis.PLF Process alarm: Partial Load Failure uint8 033B 827
Network.4.AlmDis.PLU Process alarm: Partial Load Unbalance uint8 033C 828
Network.4.AlmDis.PreTemp Process alarm: Pre-Temperature uint8 033E 830
Network.4.AlmDis.ThyrSC System alarm: Thyristor Short Circuit uint8 0332 818
Network.4.AlmDis.TLF Process alarm: Total Load Failure uint8 0339 825
Network.4.AlmLat.ChopOff Process alarm latch: Chop Off uint8 0367 871
Network.4.AlmLat.FreqFault System alarm latch: Frequency Fault uint8 0364 868
Network.4.AlmLat.FuseBlown System alarm latch: Fuse Blown uint8 0361 865
Network.4.AlmLat.MainsVoltFault Process alarm latch: Mains Voltage Fault uint8 036A 874
Network.4.AlmLat.MissMains System alarm latch: Missing Mains uint8 035E 862
Network.4.AlmLat.NetworkDips System alarm latch: Mains Voltage Dips uint8 0363 867
Network.4.AlmLat.OpenThyr System alarm latch: Open Thyristor uint8 0360 864
Network.4.AlmLat.OverCurrent Indication alarm latch: Over Current uint8 036C 876
Network.4.AlmLat.OverTemp System alarm latch: Over Temperature uint8 0362 866
Network.4.AlmLat.PB24VFail System alarm latch: Power Board 24V Failure uint8 0365 869
Network.4.AlmLat.PLF Process alarm latch: Partial Load Failure uint8 0368 872
Network.4.AlmLat.PLU Process alarm latch: Partial Load Unbalance uint8 0369 873
Network.4.AlmLat.PreTemp Process alarm latch: Pre-Temperature uint8 036B 875
Network.4.AlmLat.ThyrSC System alarm latch: Thyristor Short Circuit uint8 035F 863
Network.4.AlmLat.TLF Process alarm latch: Total Load Failure uint8 0366 870
Network.4.AlmSig.ChopOff Process alarm signalling status: Chop Off uint8 0358 856
Network.4.AlmSig.FreqFault System alarm signalling status: Frequency Fault uint8 0355 853
Network.4.AlmSig.FuseBlown System alarm signalling status: Fuse Blown uint8 0352 850
Network.4.AlmSig.MainsVoltFault Process alarm signalling status: Mains Voltage Fault uint8 035B 859
Network.4.AlmSig.MissMains System alarm signalling status: Missing Mains uint8 034F 847
Network.4.AlmSig.NetworkDips System alarm signalling status: Mains Voltage Dips uint8 0354 852
Network.4.AlmSig.OpenThyr System alarm signalling status: Open Thyristor uint8 0351 849
Network.4.AlmSig.OverCurrent Indication alarm signalling status: Over Current uint8 035D 861
Network.4.AlmSig.OverTemp System alarm signalling status: Over Temperature uint8 0353 851
Network.4.AlmSig.PB24VFail System alarm signalling status: Power Board 24V Failure uint8 0356 854
Network.4.AlmSig.PLF Process alarm signalling status: Partial Load Failure uint8 0359 857
Network.4.AlmSig.PLU Process alarm signalling status: Partial Load Unbalance uint8 035A 858
Network.4.AlmSig.PreTemp Process alarm signalling status: Pre-Temperature uint8 035C 860
Network.4.AlmSig.ThyrSC System alarm signalling status: Thyristor Short Circuit uint8 0350 848
Network.4.AlmSig.TLF Process alarm signalling status: Total Load Failure uint8 0357 855
Network.4.AlmStop.ChopOff Process alarm stop: Chop Off uint8 0385 901
Network.4.AlmStop.FreqFault System alarm stop: Frequency Fault uint8 0382 898
Network.4.AlmStop.FuseBlown System alarm stop: Fuse Blown uint8 037F 895
Network.4.AlmStop.MainsVoltFault Process alarm stop: Mains Voltage Fault uint8 0388 904
Network.4.AlmStop.MissMains System alarm stop: Missing Mains uint8 037C 892

HA179769
Page 196 Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

Network.4.AlmStop.NetworkDips System alarm stop: Mains Voltage Dips uint8 0381 897
Network.4.AlmStop.OpenThyr System alarm stop: Open Thyristor uint8 037E 894
Network.4.AlmStop.OverCurrent Indication alarm stop: Over Current uint8 038A 906
Network.4.AlmStop.OverTemp System alarm stop: Over Temperature uint8 0380 896
Network.4.AlmStop.PB24VFail System alarm stop: Power Board 24V Failure uint8 0383 899
Network.4.AlmStop.PLF Process alarm stop: Partial Load Failure uint8 0386 902
Network.4.AlmStop.PLU Process alarm stop: Partial Load Unbalance uint8 0387 903
Network.4.AlmStop.PreTemp Process alarm stop: Pre-Temperature uint8 0389 905
Network.4.AlmStop.ThyrSC System alarm stop: Thyristor Short Circuit uint8 037D 893
Network.4.AlmStop.TLF Process alarm stop: Total Load Failure uint8 0384 900
Network.4.Meas.Frequency Frequency of the line float32 0307 775
Network.4.Meas.HtSinkTemp Heatsink 1 temperature float32 0309 777
Network.4.Meas.HtSinkTmp2 Heatsink 2 temperature float32 030A 778
Network.4.Meas.HtSinkTmp3 Heatsink 3 temperature float32 030B 779
Network.4.Meas.I Irms of the load float32 02F2 754
Network.4.Meas.I2 Irms2 of the load float32 02F3 755
Network.4.Meas.I3 Irms3 of the load float32 02F4 756
Network.4.Meas.Iavg Average value of Irms float32 02F5 757
Network.4.Meas.IrmsMax Maximum rms current in a 3 phase network. float32 030F 783
Network.4.Meas.Isq Square value of the load current float32 02F7 759
Network.4.Meas.IsqBurst Average square value of load current in burst firing float32 02F6 758
Network.4.Meas.IsqMax Maximum squared current in a 3 phase network. float32 02F8 760
Network.4.Meas.P True power measurement. float32 0300 768
Network.4.Meas.PBurst True Power measurement in burst firing float32 02FF 767
Network.4.Meas.PF Power Factor float32 0302 770
Network.4.Meas.Q Reactive Power float32 0303 771
Network.4.Meas.S Apparent power measurement float32 0301 769
Network.4.Meas.V Vrms of the load float32 02F9 761
Network.4.Meas.V2 Vrms2 of the load float32 02FA 762
Network.4.Meas.V3 Vrms3 of the load float32 02FB 763
Network.4.Meas.Vavg Average value of Vrms float32 02FC 764
Network.4.Meas.Vline Line voltage measurement float32 02EF 751
Network.4.Meas.Vline2 Line voltage measurement float32 02F0 752
Network.4.Meas.Vline3 Line voltage measurement float32 02F1 753
Network.4.Meas.VrmsMax Maximum rms voltages in the 3 phase network. float32 0310 784
Network.4.Meas.Vsq Square value of load voltage float32 02FD 765
Network.4.Meas.VsqBurst Average square value of the load voltage in burst firing float32 0308 776
Network.4.Meas.VsqMax Maximum squared voltages in the 3 phase network. float32 02FE 766
Network.4.Meas.Z Load impedance float32 0304 772
Network.4.Meas.Z2 Load impedance2 float32 0305 773
Network.4.Meas.Z3 Load impedance3 float32 0306 774
Network.4.Setup.ChopOffNb Chop Off Number uint8 0315 789
Network.4.Setup.ChopOffThreshold1 Chop Off Threshold1 uint8 0313 787
Network.4.Setup.ChopOffThreshold2 Chop Off Threshold2 uint16 0314 788
Network.4.Setup.ChopOffWindow Chop Off Window uint16 0316 790
Network.4.Setup.FreqDriftThreshold Frequency Drift Threshold. float32 032E 814
Network.4.Setup.HeaterType Heater type of the load uint8 031E 798
Network.4.Setup.HeatsinkPreTemp Heatsink pre alarm temperature threshold uint8 0319 793
Network.4.Setup.HeatsinkTmax Maximum temperature of the heatsink uint8 0311 785
Network.4.Setup.IextScale External current scale adjustment float32 0321 801
Network.4.Setup.IMaximum Maximum Current of the stack uint8 0325 805
Network.4.Setup.INominal Nominal current of the stack float32 0324 804
Network.4.Setup.NetType The type of network. Set in Instrument.Configuration. uint8 0322 802
Network.4.Setup.OverIThreshold Over Current Threshold uint16 031D 797
Network.4.Setup.OverVoltThreshold Over voltage threshold uint8 0317 791
Network.4.Setup.PLFAdjusted Partial load failure adjusted acknowledge uint8 031A 794
Network.4.Setup.PLFAdjustReq Partial load failure adjustment request uint8 0320 800
Network.4.Setup.PLFSensitivity Partial load failure sensitivity uint8 031B 795
Network.4.Setup.PLUthreshold Partial load unbalance threshold uint8 031C 796
Network.4.Setup.UnderVoltThreshold Under voltage threshold uint8 0318 792
Network.4.Setup.VdipsThreshold Voltage Dips Threshold uint8 0312 786
Network.4.Setup.VextScale External voltage scale adjustment float32 032F 815

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 197
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

Network.4.Setup.VlineNominal Line nominal value float32 031F 799

Network.4.Setup.VloadNominal Load Nominal voltage float32 0323 803
Network.4.Setup.VMaximum Maximum Voltage of the stack uint8 0330 816
Network.4.Setup.Zref PLF reference load impedance phase 1 float32 0328 808
Network.4.Setup.Zref2 PLF reference load impedance phase 2 float32 0329 809
Network.4.Setup.Zref3 PLF reference load impedance phase 3 float32 032A 810
PLM.AlmAck.PrOverPs Indication alarm acknowledge: Pr Over Ps uint8 06C6 1734
(0 = NoAck, 1 = Ack)
PLM.AlmDet.PrOverPs Indication alarm detection status: Pr Over Ps uint8 06C3 1731
(0 = Inactive, 1 = Active)
PLM.AlmDis.PrOverPs Indication alarm: Pr Over Ps (0 = Enable, 1 = Disable) uint8 06C2 1730
PLM.AlmLat.PrOverPs Indication alarm latch request: Pr Over Ps uint8 06C5 1733
(0 = NoLatch, 1 = Latch)
PLM.AlmSig.PrOverPs Indication alarm signalling status: Pr Over Ps uint8 06C4 1732
(0 = Not latched, 1 = Latched)
PLM.AlmStop.PrOverPs Indication alarm stop request: Pr Over Ps uint8 06C7 1735
(0 = NoStop, 1 = Stop)
PLM.Main.Period Modulation period uint16 06B2 1714
PLM.Main.Type Load Management Type (0 = None, 1 = Sharing, uint8 06B1 1713
2 = IncrT1, 3 = IncrT2, 4 = RotIncr, 5 = Distr,
6 = IncrDistr, 7 = RotIncrDistr)
PLM.Network.Efficiency Load management efficiency factor uint8 06C0 1728
PLM.Network.MasterAddr Address of elected master on the LM network uint8 06C1 1729
PLM.Network.Pmax Max power installed on the PLM network float32 06BC 1724
PLM.Network.Pr Total power on the network after load shedding float32 06BF 1727
PLM.Network.Ps Total amount of power allowed from the network float32 06BE 1726
PLM.Network.Pt Total demanded power on the network float32 06BD 1725
PLM.Network.TotalChannels Total number of channels on the network uint8 06BB 1723
PLM.Network.TotalStation Total number of stations on the LM link uint8 06BA 1722
PLM.Station.Address Load management address uint8 06B3 1715
PLM.Station.NumChan Number of channels for this station uint8 06B5 1717
PLM.Station.PLMOut1 PLM Slot1 Interface output uint16 06B6 1718
PLM.Station.PLMOut2 PLM Slot2 Interface output uint16 06B7 1719
PLM.Station.PLMOut3 PLM Slot3 Interface output uint16 06B8 1720
PLM.Station.PLMOut4 PLM Slot4 Interface output uint16 06B9 1721
PLM.Station.Status Master or slave station status (0 = Pending, uint8 06B4 1716
1 = IsMaster, 2 = IsSlave, 3 = DupplAddr)
PLMChan.1.Group Group in which the channel operates uint8 06D3 1747
PLMChan.1.PLMIn PLM Channel Interface Input uint16 06D5 1749
PLMChan.1.PLMOut PLM Channel Interface Output uint16 06D6 1750
PLMChan.1.PZMax Total Power installed on the channel float32 06D2 1746
PLMChan.1.ShedFactor Shed Factor of the Channel uint8 06D4 1748
PLMChan.2.Group Group in which the channel operates uint8 06E2 1762
PLMChan.2.LMIn PLM Channel Interface Input uint16 06E4 1764
PLMChan.2.LMOut PLM Channel Interface Output uint16 06E5 1765
PLMChan.2.PZMax Total Power installed on the channel float32 06E1 1761
PLMChan.2.ShedFactor Shed Factor of the Channel uint8 06E3 1763
PLMChan.3.Group Group in which the channel operates uint8 06F1 1777
PLMChan.3.LMIn PLM Channel Interface Input uint16 06F3 1779
PLMChan.3.LMOut PLM Channel Interface Output uint16 06F4 1780
PLMChan.3.PZMax Total Power installed on the channel float32 06F0 1776
PLMChan.3.ShedFactor Shed Factor of the Channel uint8 06F2 1778
PLMChan.4.Group Group in which the channel operates uint8 0700 1792
PLMChan.4.LMIn PLM Channel Interface Input uint16 0702 1794
PLMChan.4.LMOut PLM Channel Interface Output uint16 0703 1795
PLMChan.4.PZMax Total Power installed on the channel float32 06FF 1791
PLMChan.4.ShedFactor Shed Factor of the Channel uint8 0701 1793
QStart.AnalogIP1Func Analogue input 1 function uint8 084A 2122

HA179769
Page 198 Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

0 = Unused 1 = Setpoint
2 = SetpointLimit 3 = CurrentLimit
4 = VoltageLimit 5 = PowerLimit
6 = Transfer
QStart.AnalogIP2Func Analog input 2 function (as AnalogIP1) uint8 084B 2123
QStart.AnalogOP1Func Analogue output 1 function uint8 0848 2120
0 = Unused 1 = True Power 2 = IRMS
3 = VRMS 4 = Resistance
QStart.DigitalIP2Func Digital 2 Input function (0 = Unused, 1 = SPSelect uint8 0849 2121
2 = Alarm Ack, 3 = Custom)
QStart.Energy Activate the computation of the energy uint8 0857 2135
QStart.Feedback Main PV for the control block uint8 0847 2119
0 = Open 1 = V2 2 = I2,
3 = True Power 4 = VRMS 5 = IRMS
QStart.Finish Finished Quick start configuration (0 = No, 1 = Yes) uint8 0846 2118
QStart.FiringMode Firing Mode uint8 084E 2126
0 = None 1 = Phase angle 2 = Logic
3 = Burst Var 4 = Burst fix5 = HC
6 = Custom
QStart.LoadCurrent Nominal Current uint8 084C 2124
0 = 16A 1 = 25A 2 = 40A 3 = 50A 4 = 80A
5 = 100A 6 = 125A 7 = 160A 8 = 200A 9 = 250A
10 = 250A 11 = 315A 12 = 400A 13 = Custom 14 =Ext.
QStart.LoadCurrentVal Nominal Current uint16 0856 2134
QStart.LoadType Load Type (0 = Resistive, 1 = transformer) uint8 0851 2129
QStart.LoadVoltage Load Voltage uint8 084D 2125
0 = 100V 1 = 110V 2 = 115V 3 = 120V 4 = 127V
5 = 200V 6 = 208V 7 = 220V 8 = 230V 9 = 240V
10 = 277V 11 = 380V 12 = 400V 13 = 415V 14 =440V
15 = 460V 16 = 480V 17 = 500V 18 = 575V 19 = 600V
20 = 660V 21 = 690V 22 = Custom
QStart.Relay1 Relay 1 function (0 = Unused, 1 = Any alarm, uint8 0850 2128
2 = Network alarm, 3 = Fuse blown)
QStart.Transfer Transfer Mode (0 = None, 1 = V2, 2 = I2) uint8 084F 2127
SetProv.1.DisRamp External input for enabling or disabling a ramp uint8 050C 1292
(0 = No, 1 = Yes)
SetProv.1.EngWorkingSP Working Setpoint when in engineering units float32 0515 1301
SetProv.1.HiRange High range of a setpoint float32 0513 1299
SetProv.1.Limit Setpoint limit scalar float32 0511 1297
SetProv.1.LocalSP Local setpoint float32 0508 1288
SetProv.1.RampRate Ramp rate for the setpoint. float32 050B 1291
SetProv.1.Remote1 Remote setpoint 1 float32 050E 1294
SetProv.1.Remote2 Remote setpoint 2 float32 050F 1295
SetProv.1.RemSelect Remote setpoint selection uint8 0510 1296
SetProv.1.SPSelect Setpoint select uint8 050A 1290
SetProv.1.SPTrack Enable Setpoint tracking uint8 0512 1298
SetProv.1.SPUnits units of the setpoint uint8 0514 1300
SetProv.1.WorkingSP Working or active setpoint float32 0509 1289
SetProv.2.DisRamp External input for enabling or disabling a ramp uint8 0520 1312
(0 = No, 1 = Yes)
SetProv.2.EngWorkingSP Working Setpoint when in engineering units float32 0529 1321
SetProv.2.HiRange High range of a setpoint float32 0527 1319
SetProv.2.Limit Setpoint limit scalar float32 0525 1317
SetProv.2.LocalSP Local setpoint float32 051C 1308
SetProv.2.RampRate Ramp rate for the setpoint. float32 051F 1311
SetProv.2.Remote1 Remote setpoint 1 float32 0522 1314
SetProv.2.Remote2 Remote setpoint 2 float32 0523 1315
SetProv.2.RemSelect Remote setpoint selection uint8 0524 1316
SetProv.2.SPSelect Setpoint select uint8 051E 1310
SetProv.2.SPTrack Enable Setpoint tracking uint8 0526 1318
SetProv.2.SPUnits units of the setpoint uint8 0528 1320
SetProv.2.WorkingSP Working or active setpoint float32 051D 1309
SetProv.3.DisRamp External input for enabling or disabling a ramp uint8 0534 1332

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 199
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

SetProv.3.EngWorkingSP Working Setpoint when in engineering units float32 053D 1341

SetProv.3.HiRange High range of a setpoint float32 053B 1339
SetProv.3.Limit Setpoint limit scalar float32 0539 1337
SetProv.3.LocalSP Local setpoint float32 0530 1328
SetProv.3.RampRate Ramp rate for the setpoint. float32 0533 1331
SetProv.3.Remote1 Remote setpoint 1 float32 0536 1334
SetProv.3.Remote2 Remote setpoint 2 float32 0537 1335
SetProv.3.RemSelect Remote setpoint selection uint8 0538 1336
SetProv.3.SPSelect Setpoint select uint8 0532 1330
SetProv.3.SPTrack Enable Setpoint tracking uint8 053A 1338
SetProv.3.SPUnits units of the setpoint uint8 053C 1340
SetProv.3.WorkingSP Working or active setpoint float32 0531 1329
SetProv.4.DisRamp External input for enabling or disabling a ramp uint8 0548 1352
(0 = No, 1 = Yes)
SetProv.4.EngWorkingSP Working Setpoint when in engineering units float32 0551 1361
SetProv.4.HiRange High range of a setpoint float32 054F 1359
SetProv.4.Limit Setpoint limit scalar float32 054D 1357
SetProv.4.LocalSP Local setpoint float32 0544 1348
SetProv.4.RampRate Ramp rate for the setpoint. float32 0547 1351
SetProv.4.Remote1 Remote setpoint 1 float32 054A 1354
SetProv.4.Remote2 Remote setpoint 2 float32 054B 1355
SetProv.4.RemSelect Remote setpoint selection uint8 054C 1356
SetProv.4.SPSelect Setpoint select uint8 0546 1350
SetProv.4.SPTrack Enable Setpoint tracking uint8 054E 1358
SetProv.4.SPUnits units of the setpoint uint8 0550 1360
SetProv.4.WorkingSP Working or active setpoint float32 0545 1349
Timer.1.ElapsedTime Elapsed Time time32 0916 2326
Timer.1.In Trigger/Gate input (0 = Off, 1 = On) bool 091B 2331
Timer.1.Out Output (0 = Off, 1 = On) bool 0917 2327
Timer.1.Time Time time32 0918 2328
Timer.1.Triggered Triggered Flag (0 = Off, 1 = On) bool 0919 2329
Timer.1.Type Type of Timer (0 = Off, 1 = OnPulse, 2 = OnDelay, uint8 091A 2330
3 = One shot, 4 = MinOnTime)
Timer.2.ElapsedTime Elapsed Time time32 0927 2343
Timer.2.In Trigger/Gate input (0 = Off, 1 = On) bool 092C 2348
Timer.2.Out Output (0 = Off, 1 = On) bool 0928 2344
Timer.2.Time Time time32 0929 2345
Timer.2.Triggered Triggered Flag (0 = Off, 1 = On) bool 092A 2346
Timer.2.Type Type of Timer (As Timer.1.Type) uint8 092B 2347
Timer.3.ElapsedTime Elapsed Time time32 0938 2360
Timer.3.In Trigger/Gate input (0 = Off, 1 = On) bool 093D 2365
Timer.3.Out Output (0 = Off, 1 = On) bool 0939 2361
Timer.3.Time Time time32 093A 2362
Timer.3.Triggered Triggered Flag (0 = Off, 1 = On) bool 093B 2363
Timer.3.Type Type of Timer (As Timer.1.Type) uint8 093C 2364
Timer.4.ElapsedTime Elapsed Time time32 0949 2377
Timer.4.In Trigger/Gate input (0 = Off, 1 = On) bool 094E 2382
Timer.4.Out Output (0 = Off, 1 = On) bool 094A 2378
Timer.4.Time Time time32 094B 2379
Timer.4.Triggered Triggered Flag (0 = Off, 1 = On) bool 094C 2380
Timer.4.Type Type of Timer (As Timer.1.Type) uint8 094D 2381
Total.1.AlarmOut Alarm Output (0 = Off, 1 = On) bool 095C 2396
Total.1.AlarmSP Alarm Setpoint float32 095A 2394
Total.1.Hold Hold (0 = No, 1 = Yes) bool 0961 2401
Total.1.In Input Value float32 095F 2399
Total.1.Reset Reset (0 = No, 1 = Yes) bool 0962 2402
Total.1.Resolution Resolution (0 = X, 1 = X.X, 2 = X.XX, 3 = X.XXX, 4 = X.XXX) uint8 095E 2398
Total.1.Run Run (0 = No, 1 = Yes) bool 0960 2400
Total.1.TotalOut Totalised Output float32 095B 2395

HA179769
Page 200 Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

Total.1.Units Units uint8 095D 2397

0 = None 1 = Temp 2=V 3 = mV,
4=A 5 = mA 6 = pH 7 = mmHg
Total.2.AlarmOut Alarm Output (0 = Off, 1 = On) bool 0971 2417
Total.2.AlarmSP Alarm Setpoint float32 096F 2415
Total.2.Hold Hold (0 = No, 1 = Yes) bool 0976 2422
Total.2.In Input Value float32 0974 2420
Total.2.Reset Reset (0 = No, 1 = Yes) bool 0977 2423
Total.2.Resolution Resolution (as Total.1) uint8 0973 2419
Total.2.Run Run (0 = No, 1 = Yes) bool 0975 2421
Total.2.TotalOut Totalised Output float32 0970 2416
Total.2.Units Units (as Total.1) uint8 0972 2418
Total.3.AlarmOut Alarm Output (0 = Off, 1 = On) bool 0986 2438
Total.3.AlarmSP Alarm Setpoint float32 0984 2436
Total.3.Hold Hold (0 = No, 1 = Yes) bool 098B 2443
Total.3.In Input Value float32 0989 2441
Total.3.Reset Reset (0 = No, 1 = Yes) bool 098C 2444
Total.3.Resolution Resolution (as Total.1) uint8 0988 2440
Total.3.Run Run (0 = No, 1 = Yes) bool 098A 2442
Total.3.TotalOut Totalised Output float32 0985 2437
Total.3.Units Units (as Total.1) uint8 0987 2439
Total.4.AlarmOut Alarm Output (0 = Off, 1 = On) bool 099B 2459
Total.4.AlarmSP Alarm Setpoint float32 0999 2457
Total.4.Hold Hold (0 = No, 1 = Yes) bool 09A0 2464
Total.4.In Input Value float32 099E 2462
Total.4.Reset Reset (0 = No, 1 = Yes) bool 09A1 2465
Total.4.Resolution Resolution (as Total.1) uint8 099D 2461
Total.4.Run Run (0 = No, 1 = Yes) bool 099F 2463
Total.4.TotalOut Totalised Output float32 099A 2458
Total.4.Units Units (as Total.1) uint8 099C 2460
UsrVal.1.HighLimit User Value High Limit float32 07A4 1956
UsrVal.1.LowLimit User Value Low Limit float32 07A5 1957
UsrVal.1.Resolution User Value Display Resolution uint8 07A3 1955
(0 = X, 1 = X.X, 2 = X.XX, 3 = X.XX, 4 = X.XXX)

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 201
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

8.4 PARAMETER TABLE (Cont.)

Parameter path Description Type Hex Dec
UsrVal.1.Status User Value Status (0 = Good, 1 = Bad) bool 07A7 1959
UsrVal.1.Units Units of the value uint8 07A2 1954
0 = None 1 = Temp 2 = V 3 = mV
4=A 5 = mA 6 = pH 7 = mmHg
UsrVal.1.Val The User Value float32 07A6 1958
UsrVal.2.HighLimit User Value High Limit float32 07B4 1972
UsrVal.2.LowLimit User Value Low Limit float32 07B5 1973
UsrVal.2.Resolution User Value Display Resolution (as User Val 1) uint8 07B3 1971
UsrVal.2.Status User Value Status (as User Val 1) bool 07B7 1975
UsrVal.2.Units Units of the value (as User Val 1) uint8 07B2 1970
UsrVal.2.Val The User Value float32 07B6 1974
UsrVal.3.HighLimit User Value High Limit float32 07C4 1988
UsrVal.3.LowLimit User Value Low Limit float32 07C5 1989
UsrVal.3.Resolution User Value Display Resolution (as UserVal.1) uint8 07C3 1987
UsrVal.3.Status User Value Status (as UserVal.1) bool 07C7 1991
UsrVal.3.Units Units of the value (as UserVal.1) uint8 07C2 1986
UsrVal.3.Val The User Value float32 07C6 1990
UsrVal.4.HighLimit User Value High Limit float32 07D4 2004
UsrVal.4.LowLimit User Value Low Limit float32 07D5 2005
UsrVal.4.Resolution User Value Display Resolution (as UserVal.1) uint8 07D3 2003
UsrVal.4.Status User Value Status (as UserVal.1) bool 07D7 2007
UsrVal.4.Units Units of the value (as UserVal.1) uint8 07D2 2002
UsrVal.4.Val The User Value float32 07D6 2006

HA179769
Page 202 Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

9 PREDICTIVE LOAD MANAGEMENT OPTION

9.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

The Predictive Load Management (PLM) system is an assembly of a number of units (‘stations’) working
together in order to minimize transient power demands which could appear on the mains if all the units were
independent. The Predictive Load Management system is described in three sections, viz: Load sequencing
(section 9.2), Load sharing (section 9.3) and Load shedding (section 9.4)

9.1.1 Load Management layout

A Predictive Load Management system can consist of up to 63 Stations, running a maximum of 64 channels,
distributed around the shop floor (maximum cumulative cable length = 100 metres). Each Station manages
either up to four single channels, two, 2-leg channels, or one 3-phase channel. One or more of these
channels can participate in Load Management whilst other channels run independently. Where more than
64 channels are required, two or more independent networks (each with its own master) must be created.
The PLM connector is located behind the driver module door, and Stations are linked together as shown in
figures 2.2.1a and 2.2.1d (location and pinout details respectively).
Station 1 Station i Station n

LMChan.1 LMChan.1 LMChan.1

LMChan.2 LMChan.2 LMChan.2

LMChan.3 LMChan.3
LMChan.3

LMChan.4 LMChan.4
LMChan.4

Softw Softw Softw

are w are w are w
iring iring iring

Addresses must lie between 1

and 63 inclusive.
LoadMng Fn. block LoadMng Fn. block LoadMng Fn. block

Load Manager Master Load Manager Master Load Manager Master

Address 1 Address i Address n

SK2 SK2 SK2

Fieldbus wiring Fieldbus wiring

Figure 9.1.1 Predictive Load Management layout (typical)

Notes:
1. Each Station Address must be unique to the PLM communication link, and must be set between 1
and 63 inclusive. Address 0 disables Load Management communications.
2. The figure above shows all four channels used. In reality, any number between 1 and 4 can be set
up for Load Management.
3. The Station with the lowest address is deemed to be the master.

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 203
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

9.1.2 Power modulation and accuracy

Fixed modulation is automatically selected for all channels participating to the Load Management. The
Modulation period T is constant and is selected (between 50 and 1000 mains periods) during configuration.

T
Ton Toff

Ton
Duty cycle = η =
T
Figure 9.1.2 Modulation period definitions
Ton and Toff are related to the Modulation Period (T) and each corresponds to an integer number of mains
periods. The duty cycle (η = Ton/T) defines the power delivered to the load during the Modulation period.
T is selected during configuration and its value determines the accuracy of the power control. The default
value is 100 cycles.
T (cycles) Accuracy
50 2%
100 1%
200 0.5%
500 0.2%
1000 0.1%
Table 9.1.2 Accuracy versus modulation period

Note: The value of ‘T’ is chosen according to the thermal inertia (speed of response) of the load. For
loads with high thermal inertia, a long modulation period may be chosen, as the control integration
time may be several minutes. Where the load has low inertia, long modulation periods can make the
control process unstable if the modulation period approaches the integration time.

HA179769
Page 204 Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

9.2 LOAD SEQUENCING

Load sequencing is a time-dependent distribution of Energy through the Load (independent of the installed
power per load) in order to avoid big spikes of power demand at the beginning of each conduction period.
There are a number of different load sequencing types as described below. Which particular type is chosen
depends on the loads being driven. The selection is made in the LoadMng ‘Main’ area of configuration
(section 6.21.1).

9.2.1 Incremental control type 1

With this kind of control, several Loads receive a common Setpoint. One channel is modulated with the
required Duty Cycle η. The remaining channels are at 100% (Full conduction) or at 0% (No conduction). The
total power distributed to the Loads is equal to the Setpoint.
For example for 11 Channels and setpoint of 50% (i.e. input of Master channel 1 = 0.5), channels 1 to 5 are
continuously on and channels 7 to 11 are continuously off. Channel 6 modulates with a duty cycle of 50%
(figure 9.2.1)

100%
Chan 11 0%
100%
Chan 10 0%

100%
Chan 9 0%

100%
Chan 8 0%

100%
Chan 7 0%

100%
Chan 6 0%

100%
Chan 5 0%

100%
Chan 4 0%

100%
Chan 3 0%

100%
Chan 2 0%

100%
Chan 1 0%

Figure 9.2.1 Incremental control type 1 example

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 205
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

9.2.2 Incremental control type 2

This kind of control, is similar to Incremental control type 1, but the modulated channel is always channel 1.
Other channels are always either at 100% (Full conduction) or at 0% (No conduction). The total power
distributed to the Loads is equal to the Setpoint.

For example for 11 Channels and setpoint of 50% (i.e. input of Master channel 1 = 0.5), channels 2 to 6 are
continuously on and channels 7 to 11 are continuously off. Channel 1 modulates with a duty cycle of 50%
(figure 9.2.2)
100%

Chan 11 0%
100%

Chan 10 0%

100%

Chan 9 0%

100%

Chan 8 0%

100%
Chan 7 0%

100%
Chan 6 0%

100%
Chan 5 0%

100%
Chan 4 0%

100%
Chan 3 0%

100%
Chan 2 0%

100%
Chan 1
0%

Figure 9.2.2 Incremental control type 2 example

HA179769
Page 206 Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

9.2.3 Rotating Incremental control

This kind of control, is similar to Incremental control type 1, but the modulated channel varies. Non-
modulating channels are always either at 100% (Full conduction) or at 0% (No conduction). The total power
distributed to the Loads is equal to the Setpoint.
Figure 9.2.3 shows the process for 11 Channels and setpoint = 50% (i.e. input of Master channel 1 = 0.5).
100%
Chan 11
0%
100%
Chan 10 0%

100%
Chan 9 0%

100%
Chan 8 0%

100%
Chan 7 0%

100%
Chan 6 0%

100%
Chan 5 0%

100%
Chan 4 0%

100%
Chan 3 0%

100%
Chan 2 0%

100%
Chan 1 0%

Figure 9.2.3 Rotating incremental control example

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 207
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

9.2.4 Distributed control

With this kind of control, each Load has its own setpoint. In order to avoid simultaneous firing in more than
one load, the modulation periods are staggered by a time given by τ = T/N, where T is the modulation
period configured by the user, and N is the number of channels.
Note: Load Sharing, described in section 9.3, below is a more efficient solution to this problem.

100%
Chan 1 0%
Ton
100%
3τ Toff
Chan 4 0%

100%
2τ Ton Toff
Chan 3 0%

100%
Chan 2 τ Ton Toff
0%

100%
Chan 1 Ton Toff
0%
τ τ τ τ
T

Figure 9.2.4 Distributed control (4 channels) example

9.2.5 Incremental/Distributed control

With this kind of control, Loads are grouped together, with each group having a single setpoint which
applies to all the channels in that group. Incremental control type 2 is applied within each group and
distributed control is applied to the groups.
Note: The assigning of channels to groups is carried out, for each relevant Load Management
channel, via its parameter LMChan ‘Group’.

The example in figure 9.2.5a shows 11 channels distributed within two groups.

Group 1
Channel 1 (G11) Output 1
Channel 2 (G12) Output 2
Setpoint Channel 5 (G13) Output 5
Group 1 Channel 6 (G14) Output 6
Channel 7 (G15) Output 7
Channel 11 (G16) Output 11

Group 2
Channel 3 (G21) Output 3
Channel 4 (G22) Output 4
Setpoint
Group 2 Channel 8 (G23) Output 8
Channel 9 (G24) Output 9
Channel 10 (G25) Output 10

Figure 9.2.5a Channel distribution within groups example

For the six channels in group 1, assuming a set point of 60% (i.e. input of the first channel of group 1 = 0.6).
Channel G11 modulates at 60%; channels G12 to G14 are continuously on (100%) and channels G15 and G16
are continuously off. That is, channel 1 modulates at 60%, channels 2, 5 and 6 are on, and channels 7 and 11
are off.

HA179769
Page 208 Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

9.2.5 INCREMENTAL DISTRIBUTED CONTROL (Cont.)

Similarly for the five channels in group 2, assuming a setpoint of 35% (i.e. unput of the first channel of group
2 =0.35), Channel G21 modulates at 75%; G22 is continuously on and G23, G24 and G25 are continuously off.
That is, channel 3 is modulating at 75% (off), Channel 4 is continuously on and channels 8, 9 and 10 are
continuously off.
The modulation period of group 2 is delayed with respect to that of group 1 bt τ = T/g, where g = 2 (i.e. τ =
T/2).
Note: the modulation period T is a constant for all groups.

100%
Chan G25 (10)
0%
100%
Chan G24 (9) 0%
Group 2

100%
Chan G23 (8) 0%

100%
Chan G22 4) τ = T/2
0%

100%
Chan G21 (3) 0%

100%
Chan G16 (11) 0%

100%
Chan G15 (7) 0%

100%
Group 1

Chan G14 (6) 0%

100%
Chan G13 (5) 0%

100%
Chan G12 (2) 0%

100%
Chan G11 (1) 0%

T
Figure 9.2.5b Incremental distributed control example (two groups)

9.2.6 Rotating Incremental Distributed control

This method of control is similar to ‘Incremental distributed control’, described above, but within each
group, the modulating channel number is incremented every modulation period.
100%
Chan G25 (10)
0%
100%
Chan G24 (9)
0%
Group 2

100%
Chan G23 (8)
0%

100%
Chan G22 4)
0%

100%
Chan G21 (3)
0%

100%
Chan G16 (11)
0%

100%
Chan G15 (7)
0%

100%
Group 1

Chan G14 (6)

0%

100%
Chan G13 (5)
0%

100%
Chan G12 (2)
0%

100%
Chan G11 (1)
0%

Figure 9.2.6 Rotating Incremental distributed control example (two groups)

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 209
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

9.3 LOAD SHARING

Load Sharing controls the time distribution of Total Power amongst loads, taking into account the amount
of Power required by each load.

9.3.1 Total power demand

Each burst of power is defined by three parameters
1. P (Maximum load power) (Depends on line voltage and load impedance: P=V2/Z)
2. η (Duty cycle (Ton/T))
3. D (Delay time).
Where more than one load (channel) is being used, the Total power demand varies in a complex way, as can
be seen in the simple example, with just two channels, shown in figure 9.3.1 below.
T

Ton1
D1
P1

D2
P2
Ton2

CB = Cumulative band
CP = Cumulative power

CP1 = CP5 = 0
CP2 = P1 CP3
CP3 = P1 + P2 CP2
CP4 = P2 CP4

CB1 CB2 CB3 CB4 CB5

Figure 9.3.1 Total power demand example

9.3.2 Sharing Efficiency Factor (F)

The Sharing Efficiency Factor (F) is defined as follows:
Pmax –(CPmax –CPmin)
F= Pmax

Where CPmax is the maximum of all the Cumulative Powers and CPmin the minimum. Sharing Efficiency
increases as F approaches 1. That is, the closer CPmax and CPmin are to Pt, the higher the sharing efficiency.

Pmax

T
CPmax

Pt

CPmin

Figure 9.3.2 Sharing efficiency definitions

HA179769
Page 210 Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

9.3.3 Sharing algorithm

B1 to Bn CP1 to CPn
(power setpoints for Sharing algorithm (Cumulative power
channels 1 to n) demands on supply)

Figure 9.3.3a Sharing algorithm overview

The goal of the “Efficient Power” algorithm is to keep the value of F as close as possible to 1. To achieve this,
the following parameters are manipulated:
1. The Delay time (D) for each load modulation
2. The order in which loads are modulated.
The algorithm itself is made of several steps which are computed before each modulation period.
1. The master determines the total number of channels (n)
2. The master determines the setpoint (Power Demand) for each channel. This gives the Duty Cycle and
the Max Power of the Load PZmax.
3. Burst Image Initialisation. Each Burst (Bi) is seen as a Rectangle (Ri), where i is between 1 and ‘n’
inclusive. Eventually, these i rectangles will be placed in time, but initially they are not placed.
4. Cumulative Band Initialisation
5. Calculation of Pt and Pmax from the following equations, where L = duty cycle and H = load power:
n
Pt =  ( Ri L × Ri H )
i =1

6. Rectangle placement. Each rectangle is placed and the bands modified in consequence.
The same algorithm is performed several times and iteratively for all the rectangles. From the result, the
solution with the best Efficiency Factor is taken as definitive result.

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 211
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

9.4 LOAD SHEDDING

Load Shedding controls the total power distribution amongst loads by reducing the amount of Power
distributed for each load so that the global power demanded is less than a given maximum (Ps). Load
Shedding and Load Sharing may be used together if required.

9.4.1 Definitions
Pz = the power installed on a particular channel (zone). For channel ‘i’, Pz is given by the following equation:

Vi 2
Pzimax =
Ri
This parameter (PZMax) is available to the user in the Block ‘LMChan’.
The Total Installed Power is the sum of all the relevant Maximum Load Powers. Thus, for n channels, the total
Installed Power on the network (Pmax) is given by:
n
Pmax =  PZimax
i =1

Pmax is available to the user in the Block ‘LoadMng.Network’.

The actual power demanded on channel ‘i’ depends on the duty cycle as follows:
Pti = ηi x PZimax
Pti is available to the user as parameter ‘PBurst’ in the Block ‘Network.Meas’* if no shedding is applied.
* Note: Not to be confused with ‘LoadMng.Network’.

The total power demanded on the Network is:

n
Pt = i =1
Pt i

This parameter (Pt) is available to the user in the Block ‘LoadMng.Network’, and represents the Mean Power
which would be dissipated in the Load during one Modulation Period, if Load Shedding were not applied.

9.4.2 Reduction of power demand

A further parameter (Ps) is available to the user in the Block ‘LoadMng.Network’. Ps is used to restrict the
power demanded from the network to an absolute maximum value
For example the total installed power could be 2.5MW, but the user wishes to restrict the delivered power
to below a tariff band of 2MW. In such a case Ps would be set to 2MW and power would be shed throughout
the network in order to keep the total demand below 2MW.
If Ps > Pmax, load shedding is disabled.
If Ps≥Pt, no reduction is applied. If Ps<Pt, each duty cycle (η) is reduced by multiplying it by a reduction factor
‘r’ given by the equation below. The reduction factor is applied to each channel.

Ps
r = Pt

HA179769
Page 212 Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

9 4 2 REDUCTION OF POWER DEMAND (Cont.)

The resulting Power for a given channel (i) is:
Pri = r x ηi x Pti
The parameter Pri is available to the user as ‘PBurst’ in the Block ‘Network.Meas’ for each channel.
The resulting power is then:
n
Pr =  Pri
i =1

This parameter ‘Pr’ is available to the user in the Block LoadMng.Network.

Note: if all Shedding Ability Factors (see below) are zero, Pr must be close to Ps

SHEDDING ABILITY FACTOR

For some applications, the power demand must be maintained for particular channels. For this reason a
parameter called ‘Shedding Ability Factor’ can be configured for each channel, to define the threshold at
which any reducing factor is applied to the channel.
This parameter (ShedFactor) is available to the user in the Block ‘LMChan’
The reduction coefficient (r) is recalculated for each channel, in the following way, where ‘s’ is the
ShedFactor:
If si > r, then ri = si; If si <= r, then ri = r
For example, if si = 100% no reducing coefficient is applied to channel ‘i’; if si = 0% the reducing coefficient
r is always applied, as it is, to channel ‘i’.
The resulting Power for a given channel is now: Pri = ri x ηi x Pti
with: Ps ≤ Pr ≤ Pt
Note: If Pr is greater than Ps, due to the shedding ability coefficient applied to some channels on the
Network, an indication alarm ‘PrOverPs’ is issued (see below).

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 213
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

9.4.3 Load shedding comparisons

In this imaginary example, the Network consists of 32 Channels. The Power (PZMaxi) and the Setpoint or Duty
Cycle (Power demand ηi) have the values given below during the relevant modulation period of 100 mains
cycles. The total installed Power on the Network is Pmax = 1.285MW and the Demanded Power is Pt =
433kW
Channe Setpoin Channe Setpoin
Power Power
l No. t l No. t
1 10% 58kW 17 45% 69kW
2 15% 9kW 18 9% 32kW
3 56% 7kW 19 25% 65kW
4 45% 56kW 20 45% 98kW
5 1% 12kW 21 12% 96kW
6 15% 4kW 22 18% 85kW
7 45% 25kW 23 45% 74kW
8 78% 23kW 24 56% 5kW
9 52% 45kW 25 6% 2kW
10 54% 12kW 26 39% 8kW
11 56% 45kW 27 96% 7kW
12 4% 78kW 28 65% 74kW
13 5% 36kW 29 58% 85kW
14 58% 25kW 30 9% 65kW
15 78% 14kW 31 7% 5kW
16 12% 58kW 32 56% 8kW
Table 9.4.3 Channel parameters

WITHOUT LOAD SHARING, SYNCHRONISED

This is the worst case. The simulation in figure 9.4.3a shows the Power profile on the Modulation Period if all
the channels are started at the same time (i.e. with no incremental control applied).

kW Pmax
1200
Max power available (Pmax) = 1285kW
1100 Total power per modulation period (Pt) = 433kW
Efficiency Factor (F) = 0
1000 Reduction factor (r) = 100%

900

800

700 P

600

500
Pt
400

300

200

100

0
Modulation period

Figure 9.4.3a Synchronised without load sharing (r = 100%)

HA179769
Page 214 Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

9.4.3 LOAD SHEDDING COMPARISONS (Cont.)

WITHOUT LOAD SHARING, SYNCHRONISED, REDUCTION FACTOR 50%

Similar to the previous example, but the authorised Power has been set to Ps = 216kW. (Reduction factor ‘r’
is 50% (0.5).

kW Pmax
1200
Max power available (Pmax) = 1285kW
1100 Total power per modulation period (Pt) = 433kW
Efficiency Factor (F) = 0.00933
1000 Reduction factor (r) = 50% (216kW)

900

800
P
700

600

500
Pt
400

300
Ps
200

100

0
Modulation period

Figure 9.4.3b Synchronised without load sharing (r = 50%)

WITHOUT LOAD SHARING NOT SYNCHRONISED

Because modulation periods start at different times, the power profile may be ‘good’ for some modulation
periods, but poor for others.

kW Pmax
1200 Max power available (Pmax) = 1285kW
Total power per modulation period (Pt) = 433kW
1100
Efficiency Factor (F) = 0.62334
1000 Reduction factor (r) = 100% (433kW)

900

800
P
700

600

500
Pt
400

300

200

100

0
Modulation period
Figure 9.4.3c Non-synchronised without load sharing (r = 100%)

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 215
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

9.4.3 LOAD SHEDDING COMPARISONS (Cont.)

WITHOUT LOAD SHARING, NON-SYNCHRONISED, REDUCTION FACTOR 50%

kW Pmax
1200 Max power available (Pmax) = 1285kW
Total power per modulation period (Pt) = 433kW
1100
Efficiency Factor (F) = 0.66848
1000 Reduction factor (r) = 50% (216kW)

900

800

700

600

500 P
Pt
400

300
Ps
200

100

0
Modulation period

Figure 9.4.3d Non-synchronised without load sharing (r = 50%)

WITH LOAD SHARING

In this example, the Sharing algorithm has been applied. The total power and power demand are the same
as in previous examples, but the power profile is approximately flat, with a value close to Pt.

kW Pmax
1200 Max power available (Pmax) = 1285kW
1100 Total power per modulation period (Pt) = 433kW
Efficiency Factor (F) = 0.93696
1000 Reduction factor (r) = 100% (433kW)

900

800

700
P
600

500
Pt
400

300

200

100

0
Modulation period

Figure 9.4.3e Load sharing (r = 100%)

HA179769
Page 216 Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

9 4 3 LOAD SHEDDING COMPARISONS (Cont.)

WITH LOAD SHARING, REDUCTION FACTOR = 50%

kW Pmax
1200 Max power available (Pmax) = 1285kW
Total power per modulation period (Pt) = 433kW
1100
Efficiency Factor (F) = 0.96031
1000 Reduction factor (r) = 50% (216kW)

900

800

700

600

500
Pt
400
P
300

200 Ps

100

0
Modulation period

Figure 9.4.3f With load sharing (r = 50%)

In this example, it can be seen that the Sharing algorithm has been re-calculated with the new values. This
gives a different shape to the global power distribution but, as with the previous example, the power profile
is approximately flat, with a value close to Ps.

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 217
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

9.5 CONFIGURATION

9.5.1 iTools Graphical wiring

Load Management configuration is carried out in the following stages:

STANDARD POWER CONTROL LOOP

Each Channel is built and configured from standard blocks. Figure 9.5.1a shows a typical example.

Figure 9.5.1a Control loop wiring in iTools

Each channel may be of any type, single phase, 2-legs or three phase.
Note: Load Management sets the Modulator type to ‘BurstFix’. Similarly, Burst length is defined by
the LM Master.

LOAD MANAGEMENT CHANNELS (LMCHAN 1 TO LMCHAN 4)

For each Channel, the Modulator Block input ‘LMIn’ must be wired to the LMout parameter of an LMChan
Block. Each channel is then managed by its own LMChan block. Figure 9.5.1b shows a configuration of three
single phase control channels.

GLOBAL LOAD MANAGEMENT CONTROL (LOADMNG)

The LoadMng Block is added. Each LMChan LmIn parameter is wired to a LoadMng LMout parameter.
Figure 9.5.1c shows the complete configuration
Notes:
1. If a channel is not wired to a slot of the LoadMng block, it doesn’t participate to the Load
Management process.
2. On a Given Station, it is allowed to mix channels which participate to the PLM process, and
channels which do not.

CALCULATION AND COMMUNICATIONS

The Unit performs all the operations needed by the Predictive Load Management process transparently to
the user.

HA179769
Page 218 Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

9 5 1 iTOOLS GRAPHICAL WIRING (Cont.)

Figure 9.5.1b LMChan blocks

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 219
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

9 5 1 iTOOLS GRAPHICAL WIRING (Cont.)

Figure 9.5.1c LoadMng blocks

HA179769
Page 220 Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

9.5.2 Predictive Load Management function block details

Full details of Load Management parameters are to be found in sections 6.21 and 6.19 above.

LM TYPE
Configures the type of Load Management, as load sharing or load sequencing (or off).
Function block location LoadMng.Main
Parameter name Type
Accessible Always
Minimum access level for editing Config
Type Enumeration
Values 0: (LMNo). Load Management disabled
1: (Sharing). Load sharing enabled. See section 9.3
2: (IncrT1). Incremental control type 1 (section 9.2.1).
3: (IncrT2). Incremental control type 2 (section 9.2.2).
4: (RotIncr). Rotating incremental control (section 9.2.3).
5: (Distrib). Distributed control (section 9.2.4).
6: (DistIncr). Incremental distributed control (section 9.2.5).

Note: If Type is not ‘LMNo’ and ‘Address’ is non-zero, the Master impose its own Type of Load
Management on the associated slaves.

PERIOD
This configures the modulation period for the Station. This is used only by the PLM master and is imposed
on all slaves. It is recommended that all slaves are configured to have the same modulation period so that
should the master lose control, the newly elected master will inherit the period from the previous master. If
the period is different, the new master imposes its own period on the network at the next power-cycle.
‘Period’ may be set in the range of 50 to 1000 mains periods. The accuracy of the power control is related to
this value. To increase the accuracy you must increase the period (section 9.1.2).
Function block location LoadMng.Main
Parameter name Period
Accessible Always
Minimum access level for editing Config
Type Uint16
Values Min = 50; Max = 1000 mains periods

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 221
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

9.5.2 PREDICTIVE LOAD MANAGEMENT FUNCTION BLOCK DETAILS (Cont.)

ADDRESS
Address of the Station on the Network. This must be configured before Predictive Load Management (PLM)
will operate. The default on delivery is 0 which means that PLM is inhibited. The address may be set in a
range of 1 to 63, the lowest address on the network will negotiate to become the Network Master.
Function block location LoadMng.Station
Parameter name Address
Accessible Always
Minimum access level for editing Config
Type Uint8
Values Min = 1; Max = 63. 0 = PLM disabled for this Station (default).

Ps
The total amount of power allowed on the Network using Load Shedding. Configured by the user in order
to restrict the power demanded from the network.
For example the total installed power could be 2.5MW but it is required that the delivered power be
restricted to below a tariff band of 2MW. In such a case Ps would be set to 2MW and power would be shed
across the network to ensure that the total demand remains below 2MW.
If Ps is set to a value greater than Pmax, Load Shedding is disabled. The default value for this parameter is
set to 5MW. For almost applications, this disables the Load Shedding function
Function block location LoadMng.Network
Parameter name Ps
Accessible With Sharing or Distributed Control only.
Minimum access level for editing Engineer
Type Float32
Values 0 to 99999 watts

SHEDFACTOR
This defines, for each channel, the threshold at which the reducing factor is applied to the modulator for load
shedding.
Function block location LMChan
Parameter name ShedFactor
Accessible With Sharing or Distributed Control only.
Minimum access level for editing Engineer
Type Uint8
Values 0 to 100%

HA179769
Page 222 Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

9.5.2 PREDICTIVE LOAD MANAGEMENT FUNCTION BLOCK DETAILS (Cont.)

GROUP
This allows the channel to be allocated to a specific group for Incremental Distributed and Rotating
Incremental Distributed control types.
Function block location LMChan
Parameter name Group
With ‘Incremental Distributed’ and ‘Rotating Incremental
Accessible
Distributed’
Minimum access level for editing Config
Type Uint8
Values 0 to 7

PZMAX
Total Power installed on the channel (the sum of all the maximum load powers)
Function block location LMChan
Parameter name PZMax
Accessible Always.
Minimum access level for editing Read only
Type Float32
Values Any (Watts)

STATUS
Indicates the current status of the Station.
Function block location LoadMng.Station
Parameter name Status
Accessible Always.
Minimum access level for editing Read only
Type Enumeration
Values 0 (Pending). The election of a master is in progress (section 9.6)
1 (IsMaster). This unit (Station) is the Master.
2 (IsSlave). This unit is a Slave.
3 (DuplAddr). This Station has the same address as one or more
others.
All such Stations are disabled from taking part in Load
Management.

Note: If ‘Pending’ appears permanently, there is a configuration error in the network.

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 223
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

9.5.2 LOAD MANAGEMENT FUNCTION BLOCK DETAILS (Cont.)

NUMCHAN
This parameter indicates how many channels on this Station, are participating in the Load Management
process. See also ‘TotalChannels’, below.
Function block location LoadMng.Station
Parameter name NumChan
Accessible Always
Minimum access level for editing Read only
Type Uint8
Values Min = 1; Max = 4.

Note: It is not necessary that all channels in a Station participate in the Load Management process.

TOTALSTATION
This parameter indicates how many Stations are participating in the Load Management process on this PLM
link.
Function block location LoadMng.Network
Parameter name TotalStation
Accessible Always
Minimum access level for editing Read only
Type Uint8
Values Min = 1; Max = 63

TOTALCHANNELS
This shows how many Channels are participating in the Load Management process on this PLM link.
Function block location LoadMng.Network
Parameter name TotalChannels
Accessible Always
Minimum access level for editing Read only
Type Uint8
Values Min = 1; Max = 64.

HA179769
Page 224 Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

9.5.2 LOAD MANAGEMENT FUNCTION BLOCK DETAILS (Cont.)

PMAX
Indicates the total amount of power which is installed on the Load Management Network and is currently
participating in the Load Management strategy.
Function block location LoadMng.Network
Parameter name Pmax
Accessible Always
Minimum access level for editing Read only
Type Float32
Values No limits (Watts)

PT
Indicates the total amount of power that has been demanded from the network. (The sum of the powers
demanded by each channel participating in the Load Management strategy.)
Function block location LoadMng.Network
Parameter name Pt
Accessible Always
Minimum access level for editing Read only
Type Float32
Values No limits (Watts)

PR
Indicates the total amount of power that has actually been delivered through the network. This value could
be larger than Ps depending upon the Shed Factors of all channels.
Function block location LoadMng.Network
Parameter name Pr
Accessible Always
Minimum access level for editing Read only
Type Float32
Values No limits (Watts)

EFFICIENCY
Indicates how efficiently Load Management is operating as a percentage value. This (F) is calculated from the
equation: F = (Pmax -(PtMax-PtMin))/Pmax
where: PtMax = the maximum peak value of total power during the modulation period.
PtMin = the minimum peak value of total power during the modulation period.
Function block location LoadMng.Network
Parameter name Efficiency
Accessible Always
Minimum access level for editing Read only
Type Uint8
Values 0 to 100%

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 225
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

9.5.2 LOAD MANAGEMENT FUNCTION BLOCK DETAILS (Cont.)

MASTER ADDRESS
Address of elected Master on the PLM network. (Normally the lowest address on the PLM link.) If this Station
is master, this address is the same as the Station’s PLM address, otherwise it is different.
Function block location LoadMng.Network
Parameter name MasterAddr
Accessible Always
Minimum access level for editing Read only
Type Uint8
Values 1 to 63

9.6 MASTER ELECTION

This mechanism ensures that the Active Station with the lowest address is elected the Master. The election
process can be initiated in any of the circumstances detailed below. During the election process, the Station
Status is ‘Pending’.
As soon a Station has been recognized as Master, its Status changes to ‘IsMaster’. As soon a Station has been
recognized as Slave, its Status changes to ‘IsSlave’.

9.6.1 Master Election triggers

1. The election process starts at Initialisation Time and continues until all Stations have found the Master.
2. The election process is initiated if a Station has not received a firing demand for 100ms or more.
3. It is assumed that, if a Master has lost control, it will be re-initialised before being re-inserted into the
Network, automatically activating the Master election process.
4. A new Station inserted into the System automatically triggers the Master election.
Notes:
1. The Election mechanism is asynchronous and may be triggered at any time.
2. During the Election mechanism, Duplicate Address detection is performed. If an address is
recognised as duplicate, the Status of the Station changes to ‘DupplAddr’.

HA179769
Page 226 Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

9.7 ALARM INDICATION

PROVERPS
Indication Alarm: Pr over Ps:
This tells the user that the real Power Pr is greater than the requested ‘shed power’ Ps. This is the case where
a shed factor has been applied to one or more channels. Alternatively, the alarm may be caused by the false
calibration of one or more channels.
This parameter appears only at the Master Station.

9.8 TROUBLE SHOOTING

9.8.1 Wrong Station status

DUPLICATE LM ADDRESS
One or more Stations have the same PLM address. These Stations are excluded from the PLM process.
Note: Zero is not a valid PLM address. When the PLM address is set to zero, the Station is excluded
from the PLM process.

STATION STATUS PERMANENTLY ‘PENDING’

PLM Address is set to 0
Hardware wiring error. Ensure that all ‘High’ pins are correctly daisy chained and that all ‘Low’ pins are
correctly daisy-chained. If there is a break, it is likely that two or more masters will be elected and be working
in opposition with one another.
PLM option board not fitted correctly

STATION TYPE MISMATCH

There is nothing to prevent single-phase and three-phase units being mixed. This should be avoided by
grouping the single-phase units on one PLM Network, and the three-phase units on another.

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 227
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

10 ALARMS
DANGER
EPower alarms protect thyristors and loads against abnormal operation, and provide the user with
valuable information regarding the type of fault. Under no circumstances must these alarms be
regarded as a replacement for proper personnel protection. It is strongly recommended that the
installing authority include independent, system-safety mechanisms to protect both personnel and
equipment against injury or damage, and that such safety mechanisms be regularly inspected and
maintained. Consult the EPower supplier for advice.

10.1 SYSTEM ALARMS

System alarms are considered to be ‘Major Events’ which prevent proper operation of the system, and the
relevant module is placed in standby mode. In some configurations (e.g. four × single-phase) it is possible
that a system alarm generated in one power module will set only that module into standby mode, and the
other three phases will continue as normal.
The following subsections describe each of the possible system alarms.

10.1.1 Missing mains

Supply power is missing from the relevant power module. If one or more phase out of two or three phase
systems are missing, the system stops firing altogether, in order to avoid unbalanced firing. The alarm
trigger depends on the type of load coupling.

10.1.2 Thyristor short circuit

A thyristor short circuit leads to current flow even when not firing.

10.1.3 Thyristor open circuit

This fault means that no current flow occurs, even when the thyristor(s) should be firing. The fault is detected
is by measuring the load voltage, so the fault is not detected if the remote sensing option is fitted.

10.1.4 Fuse blown

High speed fuses are fitted in series with the thyristors in order to protect them.

10.1.5 Over temperature

The thyristor heat sink temperature is measured and if it is considered to be too high for the current
application, the over temperature alarm is set and firing is inhibited. Hysteresis is built in to the measurement
system to ensure that the heat sink is allowed to cool properly before firing can re-commence.

10.1.6 Network dips

This detects a reduction is supply voltage, and if this reduction exceeds a configurable measured value
(VdipsThreshold), firing will be inhibited until the supply voltage returns to a suitable value. VdipsThreshold
represents a percentage change in supply voltage between successive half cycles, and can be defined by
the user in the Network.Setup menu, as described in section 6.20.2.

10.1.7 Mains frequency fault

Triggered if the supply voltage frequency strays out of the range 47 to 63 Hz, or if the mains frequency
changes, for one cycle to the next, by more than 0.18% of base frequency, or by more than 0.9% of the
frequency measured last cycle. Firing stops until the supply frequency returns to a satisfactory state.

10.1.8 Power board 24V fail

The 24 Volt supply rail in the power module has failed. The power module stops firing immediately, and
does not restart until the fault is rectified.

HA179769
Page 228 Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

10.2 PROCESS ALARMS

Process Alarms are related to the application and can be configured either to stop the power module firing
(Standby Mode) or to allow operation to continue. Process alarms can also be configured to be latched and
if so, they have to be acknowledged before the alarm is considered to be non-active. Alarms cannot be
acknowledged until the trigger source has returned to a non-active state.

10.2.1 Total Load Failure (TLF)

No load is connected to one or more power controllers.
The detection is based on RMS load current and RMS load voltage of the last mains half cycle. In case of total
load failure, a load voltage is measured even though load current is equal or close to zero. This method
might not indicate the failed phase accurately in all load configurations (e.g. closed delta configuration for
3 phase load).

10.2.2 Analogue Output Fault

This indicates that the output of this block has failed. This could be due to a short or open-circuit.

10.2.3 Chop Off

Triggered by one of two user configurable parameters viz: ChopOff1 Threshold and ChopOff2 Threshold
(to be found in the Network.setup area of configuration (section 6.20.2)).
‘ChopOff1 Threshold’ triggers the chop off alarm when the load current meets or exceeds the threshold for
more than 5 seconds. Firing stops, and will not re-start until the alarm is acknowledged. The threshold can
be set to any value between 100% and 150% of the nominal load current.
‘ChopOff2 Threshold’ triggers the chop-off alarm if the load current meets or exceeds the ChopOff1
threshold more than ‘Number Chop Off’ times in ‘Window Chop Off’ seconds, where ‘Number Chop Off’ is
configurable between 1 and 16, and ‘Window Chop Off’ can take values between 1 and 65535 seconds
(both values inclusive).
Firing stops in the relevant power module, each time the threshold is met or exceeded. Firing restarts after
100ms providing that the threshold has not been exceeded the specified number of times within the
specified number of seconds. Otherwise, firing remains disabled until the alarm is acknowledged.
Note: for two- or three-phase systems the over-current measurements relate to the maximum
current in any phase, regardless of which phase may be at fault.

10.2.4 Mains Voltage Fault

Two thresholds ‘OverVoltThreshold’ and ‘UnderVoltThreshold’ can be configured as a percentage of
VLineNominal. Both parameters are to be found in the Network.Setup area of configuration (section 6.20.2).
The threshold check of each line voltage is implemented in the corresponding network task of the power
controller. This fault is indicated within 1 mains cycle period.
Note: This Alarm is returned FALSE if the MissingMains Alarm is set on this phase.

10.2.5 Temperature pre-Alarm

This function acts as a warning which becomes active when unexpectedly high operational temperatures are
reached. The warning becomes active before unit operation stops.
HeatsinkPreTemp threshold is configured (between 30°C and 107°C) and if this value is exceeded by the
heat sink in any Power module, the alarm is triggered. A hysteresis of 2°C is applied to avoid fast toggling.
The parameter is to be found in Network.Setup, as described in section 6.20.2.

10.2.6 Closed loop break

This parameter is set to TRUE if the control process cannot be performed. This is normally due to an external
constraint which means the control loop cannot achieve setpoint despite the loop demanding 100% power.
A closed loop break detection is enabled when the loop is demanding its output, if the Active error (SP-PV)
is higher than 10% for 2 integral times the closed loop break is signalled.

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 229
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

10.2.7 Partial Load Failure (PLF)

See also ‘PARTIAL LOAD FAILURE CALCULATIONS’ in section 6.20.2.
This alarm detects a static increase in load impedance by comparing the reference load impedance (as
configured by the user) with the actual measured load impedance over a mains cycle (for phase angle firing)
and over the burst period (for burst and logic firing).
The sensitivity of the partial load failure measurement can be set to any value between 2 to 6 inclusive, where
an entry of 2, for example, means that one half of the elements (or more) must be open circuit in order to
trigger the alarm; an entry of 3 means that one third of the elements (or more) must be open circuit in order
to trigger the alarm, and so on down to one sixth. All elements must have identical characteristics and
identical impedance values and must be connected in parallel).
The relevant parameters (PLFAdjustReq, and PLFSensitivity) are both to be found in Network.Setup, as
described in section 6.20.2.
For three-phase loads, the impedance reference can be set only if the load is balanced.
Note: This Alarm is returned FALSE if the TLF (Total Load Failure) Alarm is set on this phase.

10.2.8 Partial Load Unbalance (PLU)

This alarm is applicable only to three-phase load configurations and indicates when the difference between
highest and lowest current value reaches a threshold (PLUthreshold) configurable between 5% and 50% of
the highest load current. PLUthreshold appears in Network.Setup, as described in section 6.20.2.

10.3 INDICATION ALARMS

Indication Alarms signal events for operator action if required. Indication alarms cannot be configured to
stop power module firing, but they may be latched if required, and if latched, they must be acknowledged
for the Signalling Status to return to the normal (non-alarm) state.

10.3.1 Process Value Transfer active

Indicates when a transfer control mode (e.g. V2 <> I2 P <> I2 or V2 <> I2) is active.

10.3.2 Limitation active

Indicates when the internal firing control loop limits the firing output (I2 or V2) (in order not to exceed the
adjusted maximum value)

10.3.3 Load Over-Current

Indicates when a configurable RMS load current threshold (OverIthreshold) is reached or exceeded. The
parameter is found in the Network.Setup area of configuration (section 6.20.2) and is configurable as 10%
to 400% of Nominal Current.

10.3.4 Over Load Shedding (Ps over Pr) alarm

Applies only to units fitted with the Load Management option (section 9).
Load Shedding reduces the global power demand Pt to a given level Ps. Load Shedding and Load Sharing
may be applied simultaneously if required.
Ps is the reduced Power; Pt is the total demanded Power. If Ps>=Pt, no reduction is applied. If Ps<Pt, each
Duty Cycle is reduced by multiplying it by a reduction factor (r = Ps/Pt):
For some applications, the Power Demand can not be reduced for particular channels, so each load can be
allocated a ‘Shed factor’ during configuration.
The Reduction coefficient (r) is recalculated for each Channel, such that if si > r then ri = si, but if si ≤ r, then ri
= r. Thus if si = 100% the reducing coefficient is never applied; if si = 0% the reducing coefficient r is always
applied as it is.
Thus, the consumed Power is not Ps as requested, but Pr where Ps ≤ Pr ≤ Pt. The alarm Ps over Pt becomes
active when Pr ≥ Ps, to alert the user to the fact that the actual power is greater than the shed power
requested.
Note: This alarm appears only at the Load Management master station.

HA179769
Page 230 Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

11 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

STANDARDS: The product is designed and produced to comply with:

Standard symbol Standard details

EN60947-4-3:2014 (identical to IEC60947-4-3:2014)
Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear - Part 4-3:Contactors and motor-starters - AC
semiconductor controllers and contactors for non-motor loads.
Declaration of conformity available on request.
UL60947-4-1 ; CAN/CSA C22.2 NO.60947-4-1-14
Low-Voltage Switchgear and Controlgear - Part 4-1: Contactors and Motor-Starters -
Electromechanical Contactors and Motor-Starters
U.L. File N° E86160
GOST IEC60947-4-3 : 2014 (identical to IEC 60947-4 3:1999+AMD1:2006+AMD2:2011)
EAC Declaration of conformity for the Customs Union EurAsEC
Other Russian approval: Pattern approval.
Regulatory Compliance Mark (RCM)
For Australian Communication and Media Authority based on compliance to
EN60947-4-3:2014.

INSTALLATION CATEGORIES

Maximum value
Rated impulse Rated
Installation of rated
withstand insulation
Category operational
voltage (Uimp) voltage (Ui)
voltage to earth

Communications II 0.5kV 50V 50V

Standard and optional IO II 0.5kV 50V 50V

Driver module power supply &

II 2.5kV 230V 300V
Auxiliary (Fan) supply

Relays III 4kV 230V 300V

Power Modules (up to 600V) III 6kV 600V 600V

Power Modules (up to 690V) II 6kV 690V 600V

DANGER
Do not exceed the device's ratings.
The insulation barriers of the equipment have been designed for the rating as defined in the table
above at an altitude of 2000m maximum.

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 231
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

DRIVER

WARNING
The Driver Module power supply can work from any supply voltage between 85V ac and 265V ac.
The fans (if fitted) on the power modules are specified for use at 115V ac or 230V ac, as defined at
time of order. It must therefore be ensured that the fan voltage matches the supply voltage, or the
fan will either fail within a short period, or it will be ineffective at cooling.

Driver Module Power Supply & Auxiliary (Fan)

Supply
Rated control supply voltage (Us): 100 to 240 V ac (+10% - 15%)
Frequency range: 47 to 63 Hz
Power requirement: 60W + Power Module fans (15W each for 400/500/630A power modules; 10W each for 160A/250A
modules).

Power Module
Number of modules: Up to four identical units per Driver Module.
Rated operational voltages (Ue): 100 to 600 V ac (+10% - 15%) (CE and UL units) or
100 to 690 V ac (+10% - 15%) (CE units only), as specified at time of order.
Frequency range: 47 to 63 Hz
Rated operational currents (Ie); 16 to 630 A depending on power module.
Power dissipation: 1.3W per Amp, per phase.
Cooling
Up to and including 100A: Natural convection
Above 100A: Fan cooling. Fans are connected in parallel to driver module connector (figure 2.2.1a).
Fan supply voltage: 115 or 230V ac, as specified at time of order (see ‘Caution’ above).
Fan power requirement: 10 W for 160A/250A modules; 15W for 400A, 500 and 630A modules.
Utilization categories AC51: Non-inductive or slightly inductive loads, resistance furnaces
AC56a: Switching of transformers.
Overload conditions AC51: 1 x le continous
AC56a: 1xIe continuous
Rated Duty Uninterrupted duty / continuous operation
Form designation Form 4 (Semiconductor controller)
Rated conditional short-circuit current: CE 92kA all modules except:98kA for 500A modules;105kA for 630A modules.
See paragraph 12.3 for details 690 Volts Maximum; coordination type 1.

UL UL SCCR Rated: 100kA RMS symmetrical amperes, 600 Volts ac Maximum coordination type 1
EPower units do not incorporate branch-circuit protection. It is the user’s responsibility to incorporate
branch-circuit protection upstream of the EPower unit. The installation must comply in its entirety with all
applicable local safety and emissions regulations.
The above branch-circuit protection is necessary in order to meet NEC requirements.
Load Types Single or multiphase control of resistive loads (low/high temperature coefficient and non-aging/aging
types) and transformer primaries. Load voltage/current feedback either internal (standard) or external
(option for use with transformer secondaries for example).

HA179769
Page 232 Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

11 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION (Cont.)

PHYSICAL
Dimensions and fixing centres See figures 2.1.1b to 2.1.1e for details
Weight See accompanying table.

Weight (including 2 kg (4.4 lb) for driver module) lb oz

Current 1 phase 2 phases 3 phases 4 phases 0.1 1.6
kg lb kg lb kg lb kg lb 0.2 3.2
50/100 A 6.5 14.3 11.0 24.3 15.5 34.2 20.0 44.1 0.3 4.8
Weights 0.4 6.4
160 A 6.9 15.2 11.8 26.0 16.7 36.8 21.6 47.6
± 50gm (2 oz) 0.5 8.0
250 A 7.8 17.2 13.6 30.0 19.4 42.8 25.2 55.6 0.6 9.6
400 A 11.8 26.0 21.6 47.6 31.4 69.2 41.2 90.8 0.7 11.2
500 A 14.0 30.9 26.0 57.3 38.0 83.8 50.0 110.2 0.8 12.8
630 A 14.5 32.0 27.0 59.5 39.5 87.1 52.0 114.6 0.9 14.4

ENVIRONMENT
Derating curve at 1000m altitude
Temperature limits Operating: 0°C to 40 °C maximum at 1000m
0°C to 35°C maximum at 2000m 630 Amp unit
(Refer to de-rating curve for upper temperature)
Storage: -25°C to +70°C 500 Amp unit
Altitude (maximum) 1000 metres at 40 °C
2000 metres at 35°C

Maximum current (A)

400 Amp unit
(Refer to de-rating curve for upper temperature)

Humidity limits 5% to 95% RH (non-condensing) 250 Amp unit

Pollution degree Pollution degree 2 160 Amp unit
Atmosphere Non-explosive, non corrosive and non-conductive. 100 Amp unit
Protection CE (according to EN60529) 50 Amp unit
IP10 With internal lug terminals of size as given in Table 2.2.2a
Line/Load termination details
IP00 with power connection adapter (see Table 2.2.2b Power Temperature oC
connection adapter termination details) Derating curve at 2000m altitude
UL Open type
630 Amp unit

External wiring CE Must comply with IEC60364-1 and IEC60364-5-54 and all 500 Amp unit
applicable local regulations.
Cross sections must comply with Table 9 & 10 of IEC60947-1.
Maximum current (A)
400 Amp unit
UL Wiring must comply with NEC and all applicable local regulations.
Used cables must be rated 75°C stranded copper only.
Connection must be made by using listed lugs. 250 Amp unit
Shock (EN60068-2-29) 10g peak; 6ms duration; 100 bumps
Vibration (EN60068-2-6) 67 to 150 Hz at 1g. 160 Amp unit
100 Amp unit
50 Amp unit

Temperature oC

EMC
Standard EN60947-4-3:2014
This product has been designed for environment A (Industrial). Use of this product in environment B (domestic,
commercial and light industrial) may cause unwanted electromagnetic disturbances in which cases the user may be
required to take adequate mitigation measures.

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 233
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

EMC TEST RESULTS (According to EN60947-4-3:2014)

Level Criteria
EMC immunity tests
Requested Achieved Requested Achieved
Electrostatic discharge Air discharge mode 8kV Air discharge mode 8kV
2 2
(test method of EN 61000-4-2) Contact discharge mode 4kV Contact discharge mode 4kV

Radiated radio-frequency electromagnetic field test 10V/m from 80MHz to 1GHz

10V/m from 80MHz to 3GHz 1 1
(test method of EN 61000-4-3) and from 1,4GHz to 2GHz

Fast transient/burst test (5/50 ns) Power ports 2kV / 5kHz Power ports 2kV / 5 kHz
2 1
(test method of EN 61000-4-4) Signal ports 1kV / 5kHz Signal ports 2kV / 5 kHz

Surge Voltage test (1,2/50 μs – 8/20 μs) 2kV line to earth 2kV line to earth
2 2
(test method of EN 61000-4-5) 1kV line to line 1kV line to line

Conducted radio-frequency test 10V (140dBμV) 10V (140dBμV)

1 1
(test method of EN 61000-4-6) from 0,15MHz to 80 MHz from 0,15MHz to 80 MHz

0% during 0.5 cycle & 1 cycle 0% during 0.5 cycle & 1 cycle 2 2

40% during 10/12 cycles 40% during 10/12 cycles 3 2

Voltage dips test
(test method of EN 61000-4-11) 70% during 25/30 cycles 70% during 25/30 cycles 3 2

80% during 250/300 cycles 80% during 250/300 cycles 3 2

Short interruptions test

0% during 250/300 cycles 0% during 250/300 cycles 3 2
(test method of EN 61000-4-11)

Limit level for class A industrial1

Frequency
Test Quasi peak dB Average Comments
(MHz)
(μV) dB (μV)
Radiated radio frequency emission test 30 to 230 40 at 10m N/A
According to EN60947-4-3:2014 Pass
(test method of CISPR11) 230 to 1000 47 at 10m N/A

Conducted radio frequency emission test 0.15 to 0.5 79 66

The conducted emissions can meet
According to EN 60947-4-3:2014 for rated power <20 kVA
5 to 30 73 60 the requirement of IEC60947-4-
(test method of CISPR11)
3:2014 with an external filter added
Conducted radio frequency emission test 0.15 to 0.5 100 90 on the line connections.
According to EN 60947-4-3:2014 for rated power >20kVA
(test method of CISPR11) 0.5 to 5 86 76 This is in line with the rest of the
industry2
5 to 30 90 to 73 3 80 to 60 3

1. This product has been designed for environment A (Industrial). Use of this product in environment B (domestic, commercial and light
industrial) may cause unwanted electromagnetic disturbances in which cases the user may be required to take adequate mitigation
measures.
2. A technical note TN1618 (available upon costumer's request) describes the recommended filter structures which reduce Conducted
radio-frequency emissions.
3. Decrease with log of frequency.

OPERATOR INTERFACE
Display: Four lines of up to 10 characters each. Display pages can be used to view process variable values and to view and
edit the configuration of the unit. (Editing of the configuration is better carried out using configuration software
(iTools).) In addition to the standard displays, up to four ‘custom’ pages can be defined which allow bargraph
displays, text entry etc.
Character format: Seven high x five wide yellow-green LCD dot matrix array.
Push buttons Four push buttons provide page and item entry and scroll facilities.
LED indicators (beacons) Three indicators (PWR. LOC and ALM) are supplied to indicate that power is applied, that Local Control is selected
and that there is one or more active alarm, respectively.

HA179769
Page 234 Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

11 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION (Cont.)

STANDARD INPUTS/OUTPUTS (SK1)
All figures are with respect to driver module 0V, unless otherwise stated.
Number of inputs/outputs
Number of analogue inputs: 2
Number of analogue outputs 1
Number of digital inputs/outputs: 2 (each configurable as an input or an output).
10V (Potentiometer) supply: 1
Update rate Twice the mains frequency applied to power module 1. Defaults to 83.2 Hz (12 ms) if no power applied to
power module 1 or if supply frequency lies outside the range 47 to 6 3Hz.)
Termination Removable 10-way connector. (5.08 mm. pitch)

ANALOGUE INPUTS
Performance: See tables 11.a and 11.b.
Input types: Each input is configurable as one of: 0 to 10V, 1 to 5V, 2 to 10V, 0 to 5V, 0 to 20mA, 4 to 20 mA.
Absolute maxima + terminal: ±16V or ±40mA
- terminal: ±1.5V or ±300mA

ANALOGUE OUTPUTS
Performance: See tables 11c and 11d.
Output types: Each output is configurable as one of: 0 to 10V, 1 to 5 V, 2 to 10V, 0 to 5V, 0 to 20mA, 4 to 20 mA.
Absolute maxima + terminal: (-0.7V or -300mA) or (+16V or + 40mA)
0V terminal: ±2A

10V (POTENTIOMETER) SUPPLY)

Output voltage: 10.3V ± 0.3V @ 5.5mA
Short circuit o/p current: 15mA max.
Ambient temperature drift: ± 0.012%/ °C (typ); ±0.04%/ °C (max.)
Absolute maxima Pin 1: (-0.7V or -300mA) or (+16V or + 40mA)

DIGITAL I/O
Hardware response time: 100μs
Voltage inputs
Active level (high): 4.4V<Vin<30V
Non-active level (low): -30V<Vin<+2.3V
Input impedance: 10kΩ
Contact closure inputs
Source current: 10mA min; 15mA max.
Open contact (non active) resistance: >500Ω
Closed contact (active) resistance: <150Ω
Current source output
Source current: 9mA<Isource <14mA @ 14V
10mA<Isource <15mA @ 0V
9mA<Isource <14mA @ -15V
Open circuit voltage: <14V
Internal pull-down resistance: 10kΩ (to 0 V)
Absolute Maxima + terminal: ±30V or ±25mA
0V terminal ±2A

Notes:
1. Absolute maximum ratings refer to externally applied signals
2. The 10V potentiometer supply is designed to supply two 5kΩ potentiometers connected in parallel with one another.
3. The maximum current for any 0V terminal is ±2A.
4. PLC compatibility : Digital inputs are not 100% compliant with IEC 61131-2 (It is recommended that the user check
compatibility before use

DANGER
The I/O Input & Output, the Communications ports are SELV circuit. They must be connected to
SELV or PELV circuit.

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 235
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

11 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION (Cont.)

Analogue input: Voltage input performance
Parameter Typical Max/Min
Total voltage working input span (note 1) -0.25V to + 12.5V
Resolution (noise free) (note 2) 13 bits
Calibration error (notes 3, 4) <0.25% <0.5%
Linearity error (note 3) ±0.1%
Ambient temperature error (note 3) <0.01%/ºC
Input resistance (+‘ve terminal to 0V) >140kΩ
Input resistance (-‘ve terminal to 0V) 150Ω
Allowable voltage (-‘ve terminal to 0V) ±1V
Series mode rejection of mains
46dB >30dB
interference
Common mode dc rejection 46dB >40dB
Hardware response time 5ms
Note 1: w.r.t. to the relevant -‘ve input Note 3: % of effective range (0 to 5V, 0 to 10V)
Note 2: w.r.t. total working span Note 4: After warm up. Ambient = 25 ºC
Table 11.a Analogue input specification table (voltage inputs)

Analogue input current input performance

Parameter Typical Max/Min
Total current working input span -1mA to +25mA
Resolution (noise free) (note 1) 12 bits
Calibration error (notes 2, 3) <0.25% <0.5%
Linearity error (note 2) ±0.1%
Ambient temperature error (note 2) <0.01%/ºC
Input resistance (+‘ve to -‘ve terminal) 235Ω
Input resistance (-‘ve terminal to 0V) 150Ω
Allowable voltage (-‘ve terminal to 0V) <±1V
Series mode rejection of mains
46dB >30dB
interference
Common mode dc rejection 46dB >40dB
Hardware response time 5ms
Note 1: w.r.t. total working span Note 3: After warm up. Ambient = 25 ºC
Note 2: % of effective range (0 to 20mA)
Table 11.b Analogue input specification table (current inputs)

Analogue output: Voltage output performance

Parameter Typical Max/Min
Total voltage working span
-0.5V to +12.5V
(within ±20mA (typ.) current span)
Short circuit current <24mA
Resolution (noise free) (note 1) 12.5 bits
Calibration error (note 2, note 3) <0.25% <0.5%
Linearity error (note 2) <±0.1%
Ambient temperature error (note 2) <0.01%ºC
Minimum load resistance >800Ω
DC output impedance <2Ω
Hardware response time (10% to 90%) 20ms <25ms
Note 1: w.r.t. total working span Note 3: After warm up. Ambient = 25 ºC
Note 2: % of effective range (0 to 5V,
0 to 10V)
Table 11.c Analogue output specification table (voltage outputs)

HA179769
Page 236 Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

11 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION (Cont.)

Analogue output: Current output performance
Parameter Typical Max/Min
Total current working span
-24mA to +24mA
(within -0.3V to +12.5V voltage span)
Open circuit voltage <16V
Resolution (noise free) (note 1) 12.5 bits
Calibration error (note 2, note 3) <0.25% <0.5%
Linearity error (note 2) <±0.1%
Ambient temperature error (note 2) <0.01%ºC
Maximum load resistance <550Ω
DC output conductance <1μA/V
Hardware response time (10% to 90%) 20ms <25ms
Note 1: w.r.t. total working span Note 3: After warm up. Ambient = 25 ºC
Note 2: % of effective range (0 to 20mA)
Table 11.d Analogue output specification table (current outputs)

RELAY SPECIFICATION

Contact life Resistive loads: 100,000 operations (de-rate with inductive loads as per figure).
High power use Current: <2A (resistive loads)
Voltage: <264V RMS (UL: voltage 250Vac.)
Low power use Current: >1mA
Voltage: >1V
Contact configuration Single pole change-over (one set of Common, Normally open and Normally Closed contacts)
Termination Relay 1 (standard): 3-way connector on underside of Driver Module (figure 2.2.1b)
Watchdog relay (standard): 3-way connector on underside of Driver Module (figure 2.2.1b)
Relays two to four (option): 12-way option module connector (figure 2.2.1a)
Installation category III, assuming that nominal phase to earth voltage is ≤ 300V RMS. Isolation between
Installation Category different relays’ contacts is double isolation, in accordance with the installation category and phase to
earth voltage specified above.
Absolute maximum switching capability <2A at 240V RMS (resistive loads)

Note: Normally Closed and Normally open refer to the relay when the coil is not energised.

1.0
0.9
0.8
0.7
Reduction factor

0.6

0.5

0.4

0.3
1 0.8 0.6 0.4 0.2

Power factor (cos ) φ

Inductive life = resistive life x reduction factor

OPTIONAL INPUT/OUTPUT MODULES (SK3, SK4, SK5)

Up to three input/output modules can be fitted, each containing the inputs and outputs detailed below. Unless otherwise stated below, the
specification for the optional I/O (including relays) is as given above for the standard I/O.

Termination Removable 12-way (5.08mm pitch) connector per module.

Number of modules Up to three
Number of inputs One analogue input and two digital inputs per module
Number of outputs One analogue output per module
Number of relays 1 set of common, normally open and normally closed contacts per module.
10V potentiometer supply o/p voltage: 10.0V ± 0.3V at 5.5 mA

DANGER
The relays outputs are compliant to the SELV requirements; they can be connected to SELV, PELV
circuit or to voltage up to 230V (maximum value of rated operational voltage to earth:300V).

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 237
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

11 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION (Cont.)

MAINS NETWORK MEASUREMENTS
All network measurements are calculated over a full mains cycle, but internally updated every half-cycle. For this reason, power control, current limits and alarms
all run at the mains half-cycle rate. The calculations are based on waveform samples taken at a rate of 20kHz. Measurements on each phase are synchronised to its
own phase and if the line voltage cannot be detected, the measurements stop for that phase. It should be noted that, depending on the configuration, the phase
voltage referred to is one of:
a. the line voltage referenced to neutral in four star,
b. the line voltage referenced to neutral or another phase for single phase or
c. the line voltage referenced to the phase applied to the next adjacent power module for three phase star or delta configurations.

The parameters below are directly derived from measurements for each phase.

Accuracy (20 to 25°C)

Line frequency (F): ±0.02Hz
Line RMS voltage (Vline): ±0.5% of Nominal Vline.
±0.5% of Nominal V for voltage readings >1% of Nominal V. Unspecified for readings lower than 1%Vnom.
Load RMS voltage (V):
±0.5% of Nominal IRMS for current readings > 3.3% of Nominal IRMS. Unspecified for readings = 3.3%
Thyristor RMS current (IRMS):
Nominal IRMS (see note).
Load RMS voltage squared (Vsq): ±1% of (Nominal V)2
Thyristor RMS current squared (Isq): ±1% of (Nominal I)2
True load power (P): ±1% of (Nominal V) × (Nominal I)
Frequency resolution 0.1 Hz
Measurement resolution 11 bits of Nominal value (noise free)
Measurement drift with ambient temp. <0.02% of reading / °C
Further parameters (S, PF, Q, Z, Iavg, IsqBurst, IsqMax, Vavg, Vsq Burst, VsqMax and PBurst) are derived from the above, for each network (if relevant). See section
6.20.1 (Meas submenu) for further details.

Note: For external current feedback, the above specification does not include errors associated with
external current transformers.

EXTERNAL CURRENT TRANSFORMER

Ratio: Chosen such that the full scale output from the current transformer is 5 Amps.

COMMUNICATIONS
CC-Link Protocol: CC-Link version 1.1
Connector: 5 way
Indicators: RUN and ERR

DeviceNet Protocol: DeviceNet

Connector: Five way
Indicators: Network status and Module status

Modbus/TCP Type: 10baseT (IEEE801)

Protocol: Modbus TCP
Connector: RJ45 single port and dual port
Indicators: Tx activity (green) and communications activity (yellow)

EtherNet/IP Protocol: EtherNet/IP

Connector: RJ45 single port and dual port
Indicators: NS (Network status), MS (Module status) and LINK (Link status)

Modbus RTU Protocol: Modbus RTU slave

Transmission standard: Three-wire EIA485
Connector: Twin, parallel-wired RJ45
Indicators: Tx activity (green) and Rx activity (yellow)
Isolation (EN60947-4-3): Installation category II, Pollution degree 2
Terminals to ground: 50V RMS or dc to ground (double isolation).

Profibus Protocol: Profibus DPV1

Connector: 9 way D-type
Indicators: Mode and Status.

Profinet Protocol: Profinet I/O

Connector: RJ45 single port and dual port
Indicators: Link, Network Status and Module Status

HA179769
Page 238 Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

12 MAINTENANCE

12.1 SAFETY
DANGER
1. If the product (EPower) is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection
provided by the product might be impaired.
2. Any adjustment, maintenance and repair of the opened apparatus under voltage, is forbidden
for safety reasons.
3. The product must be installed and maintained by suitably qualified personnel, authorized to
work in an industrial low voltage environment.
4. The product is not suitable for isolation applications, within the meaning of EN60947-1.
5. Before carrying out any wiring to the product, it must be ensured that all relevant power and
control cables, leads or harnesses are isolated from voltage sources.
6. The mains supply fuse within the Driver Module is not replaceable. If it is suspected that the fuse
is faulty, the manufacturer’s local service centre should be contacted for advice.

CAUTION
1. Under some circumstances, the EPower heatsink temperature may rise by more than 50°C and it
can take up to 15 minutes to cool after the product is shut down.
Ensure that any contact with hot surfaces is avoided.
Do not allow flammable or heat-sensitive parts in the immediate vicinity of hot surfaces
Give consideration to additional warnings and barriers to prevent injury.

12.2 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

Please read the warnings above, before attempting to carry out any work on the unit(s).

DANGER
The protective earth ground connections must be tightened according to the torque values defined
in table 2.2.1. Appropriate regular inspections must be performed. Periodicity depends on the local
environment, but should not exceed 1 year.

DANGER
1. Power terminals must be tightened according to the torque values defined in Table 2.2.2..
Appropriate regular inspections must be performed. Periodicity depends on the local
environment, but should not exceed 1 year.
2. The tightening torques for supplemental (high speed) fuses should be checked according to
value defined in table 12.3. Ceramic fuse bodies should be checked for visible cracks.
Appropriate regular inspections must be performed. Periodicity depends on the local
environment, but should not exceed 1 year.

WARNING
1. To maintain maximum cooling efficiency, the heat-sink and fans must be cleaned regularly and
fan operation need to be checked. Periodicity depends on the local environment, but should not
exceed 1 year.

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 239
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

CAUTION
Fans have limited lifetime which depends on environment. As preventive maintenance their periodic
replacement need to be considered.

NOTICE
In order to maintain protection against damage due to electrostatic discharge, any ribbon cable
which is chafed, scratched or otherwise damaged must be replaced. Periodicity depends on the
local environment, but should not exceed 1 year.

HA179769
Page 240 Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

12.3 THYRISTOR PROTECTION FUSES

The thyristors in the Power modules are protected against excess currents by high-speed fuses
(supplemental fuse) within the power modules.
U.L. : With the high speed fuses (supplemental fuse) as described in the table 12.3 below, EPower is suitable
for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 100kA RMS symmetrical amperes, 600 Volts ac
Maximum. (Coordination Type 1)
CE : With the high speed fuses (supplemental fuse) as described in the table 12.3 below, EPower is suitable
for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 92kA all modules except:98kA for 500A
modules;105kA for 630A modules ; 690 Volts Maximum. (Coordination Type 1)

DANGER
1. According to the CE and UL certifications, high speed fuses (supplemental fuses) are mandatory
for compliant installation and protection of the EPower controller against short circuit. See
paragraph 12.3 for details
2. The EPower’s rated short-circuit conditional current is defined for co-ordination type 1. If opening
of either the branch circuit protective or the supplemental (high speed) fuses occurs, the product
shall be examined by suitably qualified personnel and replaced if damaged.

DANGER
1. This product does not contain any branch-circuit protection or internal safety overload
protection. The installer must add branch-circuit protection upstream of the unit, and provide
external or remote safety overload protection to the end installation. Branch circuit shall be rated
according to maximum current in each phase.
CE: branch-circuit protection must be selected according to IEC 60364-4-43 or applicable local
regulations.
UL: branch-circuit protection must be selected according to NEC article 210.20, it is necessary for
compliance with National Electric Code(NEC) requirements.
2. The tightening torques for supplemental (high speed) fuses should be checked according to
value defined in table 12.3. Ceramic fuse bodies should be checked for visible cracks.
Appropriate regular inspections must be performed. Periodicity depends on the local
environment, but should not exceed 1 year.

Power module Eurotherm Spare Part Fuse Manufacturer Fixing Tightening

Manufacturer
rating Reference rating catalog number size torque
50A, 100A & DN000UB69V315L Mersen M8 12 Nm (8.9 ft lb)
SUBEPWR/FUSE160A 315 A
160A 170M1322 M8 12 Nm (8.9 ft lb)
250A SUBEPWR/FUSE250A 350 A 170M1373 EATON M8 12 Nm (8.9 ft lb)
400A SUBEPWR/FUSE400A 550 A 170M3422 COOPER M8 15 Nm (11.1 ft lb)
500A SUBEPWR/FUSE500A 630 A 170M5412 BUSSMAN M10 15 Nm (11.1 ft lb)
630A SUBEPWR/FUSE630A 900 A 170M6413 M12 25Nm (18.5 ft lb)

Table 12.3 Protection fuse details

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 241
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

This page is deliberately left blank

HA179769
Page 242 Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

APPENDIX A REMOTE DISPLAY UNIT

A1 INTRODUCTION
This appendix describes the recommended 32h8e remote display unit for the EPower unit.
This instrument is a horizontal 1/8 DIN indicator and alarm unit that performs the dual function of remote
display and independent ‘policeman’ (to disconnect power should an over temperature or other excess
process condition occur). The unit is intended for indoor use in a permanent installation, enclosed in an
electrical panel. To ensure IP65 and NEMA 4 front sealing against dust and water, the panel should have a
non-textured surface.
Communications between the unit and EPower are via RJ45 ‘Panel comms port’ located on the underside of
the controller module. The communications standard is 3-wire EIA485, and It uses Modbus protocol.
The display unit comes complete with one relay output (OP1) and one analogue output (OP3).

A1.1 SAFETY AND EMC INFORMATION NOTES

DANGER
1. Do not use the 32h8e remote display unit for critical control or protection applications where
human or equipment safety relies on the operation of the control circuit.
2. The 32h8e remote display unit must be installed, connected and used in compliance with
prevailing standards and/or installation regulations
3. If the 32h8e remote display unit is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the
protection provided by the product might be impaired.
4. Any adjustment, maintenance and repair of the opened apparatus (32h8e remote display unit)
under voltage, is forbidden for safety reasons.
5. The 32h8e remote display unit must be installed and maintained by suitably qualified personnel,
authorized to work in an industrial low voltage environment.
6. insulation barriers inside 32h8e remote display unit has been designed to conform to EN 61010
for an altitude of 2000m maximum and installation category II. The rated impulse voltage for
equipment on nominal 230V supply is 2500V.
7. Voltage rating of 32h8e remote display unit.
The maximum continuous voltage applied between any of the following terminals must not
exceed 240Vac:
relay output to logic, dc or sensor connections
any connection to a protective earth ground
8. Live sensors.
The 32h8e remote display unit is designed to operate if the temperature sensor is connected
directly to an electrical heating element. However, you must ensure that service personnel do not
touch connections to these inputs while they are live. With a live sensor, all cables, connectors
and switches for connecting the sensor must be mains rated for use in 240Vac CATII
32h8e remote display unit analogue inputs are not isolated from digital inputs or from logic
outputs.
9. Do not connect AC supply to low voltage sensor input or low-level inputs and outputs of 32h8e
remote display unit.
10.Wiring must comply with all local wiring regulations, i.e. IEC 60364-5-52 and USA, NEC Class 1
wiring methods
11.Enclosure of Live Parts
To prevent hands or metal tools touching parts that may be electrically live, the 32h8e remote
display unit must be installed in an enclosure.

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 243
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

A1.1 SAFETY AND EMC INFORMATION (Cont.)

DANGER
12.The 32h8e remote display unit has been designed for pollution degree 2 according to IEC61010
definition: Normally, only non-conductive pollution occurs. Occasionally, however, a temporary
conductivity caused by condensation may be expected.
Electrically conductive pollution must be excluded from the cabinet in which the product is
mounted. To ensure a suitable atmosphere in conditions of conductive pollution, fit adequate air
conditioning/filtering/cooling equipment to the air intake of the cabinet, e.g. fitting fan-cooled
cabinets with a fan failure detection device or a thermal safety cut-out.
13.Power Isolation
The installation must include a power isolating switch or circuit breaker. This device must be in
close proximity of the 32h8e remote display unit, within easy reach of the operator and marked
as the disconnecting device for the instrument.
14.Charged capacitors
Before removing a 32h8e remote display unit from its sleeve, disconnect the supply and wait at
least two minutes to allow capacitors to discharge. Avoid touching the exposed electronics of the
instrument when withdrawing it from the sleeve.
15.Before carrying out any wiring to the 32h8e remote display unit, it must be ensured that all
relevant power and control cables, leads or harnesses are isolated from voltage sources.
16.. Grounding of the temperature sensor shield.
In some installations it is common practice to replace the temperature sensor while the 32h8e
remote display unit is still powered up. Under these conditions, as additional protection against
electric shock, we recommend that the shield of the temperature sensor is grounded. Do not rely
on grounding through the framework of the machine.

DANGER
The cables used to connect the line supply of 32h8e remote display unit must be correctly protected
by branch-circuit protection. It is the responsibility of the installer to add branch-circuit protection.
Such branch-circuit protection must comply with applicable local regulations.

Reasonable use and responsibility

The safety and EMC of any system incorporating this product is the responsibility of the assembler/installer
of the system.
The information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice. While every effort has been
made to ensure the accuracy of the information, your supplier shall not be held liable for errors contained
herein.
32h8e remote display unit is intended for industrial temperature and process control applications when it
will meet the requirements of the European Directives on Safety and EMC.
Use in other applications, or failure to observe the installation instructions of this manual may impair safety
or EMC. The installer must ensure the safety and EMC of any particular installation.
Failure to use approved software/hardware with our hardware products may result in injury, harm, or
improper operating results
Eurotherm shall not be held responsible for any damage, injury, losses or expenses caused by inappropriate
use of the product (EPower), or failure to comply with these instructions.

HA179769
Page 244 March 20 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

WARNING
1. Safety and EMC
Safety and EMC protection can be seriously impaired if the unit is not used in the manner
specified. The installer must ensure the safety and EMC of the installation.
The 32h8e remote display unit complies with the European Low Voltage Directive 2014/35/EU,
by the application of the safety standard EN 61010.
2. Electrostatic discharge precautions.
Always observe all electrostatic precautions before handling the unit. When the 32h8e remote
display unit is removed from its sleeve, some of the exposed electronic components are
vulnerable to damage by electrostatic discharge from someone directly handling the controller.
3. Service and repair.
The 32h8e remote display unit has no user serviceable parts. Contact your supplier for repair
4. Electromagnetic compatibility.
The 32h8e remote display unit conforms with the essential protection requirements of the EMC
Directive 2014/35/EU. It satisfies the general requirements of the industrial environment defined
in EN 61326.
5. Installation requirements for EMC.
To comply with the European EMC directive certain installation precautions are necessary:
• General guidance. Refer to EMC Installation Guide, Part no. HA025464.
• Relay outputs. It may be necessary to fit a suitable filter to suppress conducted emissions.
• Table top installation. If using a standard power socket, compliance with commercial and light
industrial emissions standard is required. To comply with conducted emissions standard, a suitable
mains filter must be installed.
6. Wiring.
It is important to connect the controller in accordance with the wiring data given in this guide.
Take particular care not to connect AC supplies to the low voltage sensor input or other low-level
inputs and outputs. Only use copper conductors for connections (except thermocouple inputs)
and ensure that the wiring of installations complies with all local wiring regulations. For example,
in the UK use the latest version of the IEE wiring regulations, (BS7671). In the USA use NEC Class
1 wiring methods.
7. Routing of wires.
To minimise the pick-up of electrical noise, the low voltage DC connections and the sensor input
wiring should be routed away from high-current power cables. Where it is impractical to do this,
use shielded cables with the shield grounded. In general, keep cable lengths to a minimum.
8. Hazard of Incorrect Configuration.
9. Incorrect configuration can result in damage to the process and/or personal injury and must be
carried out by a competent person authorised to do so. It is the responsibility of the person
commissioning the controller to ensure the configuration is correct.
10.Loss of Communications
If the output is not wired, but written to by communications, it will continue to be controlled by
the communications messages. In this case take care to allow for the loss of communications

WARNING
11.The designer of any control scheme must consider the potential failure modes which could occur
and provide a means to achieve a safe state during and after a failure.
Independent or redundant devices must be provided for critical control functions.
The control scheme may include communication links. Consideration must be given to the
implications of unanticipated transmission delays or failures of the link.
Each implementation of this equipment must be individually and thoroughly tested for its
intended operation before being placed into service.

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 245
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

WARNING
12.In temperature control applications a danger could be present if the heating remains constantly
on. Apart from potentially spoiling the end product, this could damage the process machinery
being controlled, or cause a fire hazard. Consider the following examples:
• a temperature sensor becoming detached from the process
• thermocouple wiring becoming short circuit
• the controller operating with its heating output constantly on
• an external valve or contactor sticking in the heating condition
• the controller setpoint set too high
The alarm relays within the controller will not give over-temperature protection under all conditions.
The installer must, therefore, fit a separate over-temperature protection device, with an
independent temperature sensor, to isolate the heating circuit should an over-temperature
condition occur.

CAUTION
1. Unpacking and storage - The packaging should contain an instrument mounted in its sleeve, two
mounting brackets for panel installation and an Installation sheet. Certain ranges are supplied
with an input adapter.
If upon receipt, the packaging or the instrument is damaged, do not install the product instead
contact your supplier.
If the instrument is to be stored before use, protect from humidity and dust in an ambient
temperature range of −30C° to +75°C.
2. Cleaning - Do not use water or water based products to clean labels or they will become illegible.
Isopropyl alcohol may be used to clean labels. A mild soap solution may be used to clean other
exterior surfaces of the product.

SYMBOLS
Symbols used on the instrument are defined in the table below

Caution
! refer to accompanying document

Equipment protected throughout by

DOUBLE ISOLATION

HA179769
Page 246 March 20 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

A2 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION
A location should be chosen which is subject to minimum vibrations; the allowable ambient temperature
range is 0 to 55°C (32 to 131°F) and the acceptable humidity range is 5 to 95% RH non-condensing.
To remove the indicator from its Sleeve, ease the latching ears outwards and pull the unit forward. When
plugging back in ensure that the latching ears click into place (maintains the IP65 sealing).
1. An aperture with dimensions as shown in figure A2 should be made in the panel.
2. If it is not already in place, fit the IP65 sealing gasket behind the front bezel of the unit
3. From the front of the panel, insert the unit, through the cut-out.
4. Spring the panel retaining clips into place and secure the unit in position by pushing both retaining
clips forwards, until they bear on the back of the panel.
5. Peel off the protective cover from the display.

96 mm 102.5 mm

Latching ear 90 mm
48 mm

Front view Side view

Retaining clip
Latching ear Sealing gasket (IP65) Sleeve
(2 places)
Max panel thickness = 15 mm.

Panel cutout (mm)

Width: 92 ( -0.0 + 0.8);
Height: 45 ( -0.0 + 0.6)
x Minimum inter-unit spacing (mm):
Horizontal (x) = 10; View on
Vertical (y) = 38. underside
x

Figure A2 Installation dimensions drawing

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 247
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

A3 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION

A3.1 PINOUT
Figure A3.1, below shows the rear terminal arrangement.
Line Supply Output (o/p) 3
100 to 240Vac PV Output (o/p) 1
48 to 62 Hz Dig in B Changeover

Nc Com No

N L 3D 3C 3B 3A LC LB 2B 2A 1B 1A
+

+
V- V+ VI LA C CT HF HE HD AC AB AA

T/C + B(-) A(+) Com

Dig in A
RTD EIA485
Sensor V, mV +
Digital comms

wiring
2R49
mA +

Figure A3.1 Terminal arrangement

A3.2 WIRING

A3.2.1 Termination details

The screw terminals accept wire sizes from 0.5 to 1.5 mm (16 to 22AWG). Hinged insulating covers prevent
accidental contact with live wires. The recommended maximum rear terminal screw torque is 0.4Nm.

A3.2.2 Supply voltage

Please read the safety notes in section A1.1 of this manual. Additionally:
1. Only copper conductors may be used.
2. The power supply input is not fuse protected. Fusing must be provided externally by a type T fuse with
a 2 Amp, 250V rating.

SUPPLY VOLTAGE RANGE

100 to 240Vac, -15%, +10%, 48 to 62 Hz

HA179769
Page 248 March 20 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

A3.2.3 Signal wiring

Notes:
1. Input wires should not be run in proximity with power cables
2. When shielded cable is used, it should be grounded at one point only
3. Any external components (such as Zener barriers) connected between sensor and input terminals
may cause errors in measurement due to excessive and/or unbalanced lead resistance and
leakage currents.

WARNING
Live sensors
The 32h8e remote display unit is designed to operate if the temperature sensor is connected
directly to an electrical heating element. However, you must ensure that service personnel do not
touch connections to these inputs while they are live. With a live sensor, all cables, connectors and
switches for connecting the sensor must be mains rated for use in 240Vac CATII
32h8e remote display unit analogue inputs are not isolated from digital inputs or from logic outputs.

ANALOGUE (MEASURING) INPUTS

V- V+ VI LA V- V+ VI LA V- V+ VI LA V- V+ VI LA
+
806R
2R49 RTD
100k

Attenuator
board

+ +
T/C, mV V mA Resistance
Thermometer

Figure A3.2.3a Input wiring

Notes:
1. For thermocouple inputs, compensation cable suitable for the thermocouple type must be used,
preferably shielded.
2. For voltage inputs an attenuator board must be fitted as shown. A suitable board is available
from the manufacturer.
3. For resistance temperature detectors, the resistance element is wired across V+ and VI; the lead
compensation wire being terminated at V-. The resistance of all three wires must be equal. Line
resistances greater than 22 Ohms cause measurement errors.

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 249
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

OUTPUT WIRING

Output (o/p) 1 Output (o/p) 3 PV

Changeover relay retransmission

Nc Com No

2B 2A 1B 1A 3C 3B 3A LC
+
Outputs configurable as
0 to20mA, 4 to 20mA,
Shown in 0 to 5V, 0 to 10V,
non-energised state 1 to 5V, 2 to 10 V

Relay outputs Analogue

outputs

Figure A3.2.3b Output wiring

HA179769
Page 250 March 20 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

A3.2.4 Digital communications wiring

Pin Definition
Tx Rx 8 Reserved
HF HE HD 7 Reserved
B A Com
6 N/C
5 N/C
Wire colours 8 4 N/C
HD = White/green 3 Isolated 0V (Com)
HE = Orange 1 2 A
HF = White/orange 1 B
Internal connections:
EIA485 Modbus Pin 1 to 5V via 100kΩ
communications Pin 2 to 0V via 100kΩ
32h8e connector EPower connector

Figure A3.2.4 Digital communications pinouts

A3.3 OVER TEMPERATURE APPLICATION WIRING

Figure A3.3 shows a typical application where the Remote Display Unit is used to trip the main contactor to
the EPower units if it detects an over-temperature.
The figure is intended for guidance only, and does not show detailed EPower wiring, this being discussed
in depth in section A2 of this manual.

Notes:
1. When switching inductive loads, the 22nF/100 Ohm snubber (supplied with the instrument)
should be wired across the relay connections as shown.
2. Snubbers pass 0.6mA at 110V and 1.2mA at 230Vac. This is sometimes sufficient to hold high
impedance loads on. Snubbers should not be used in such cases.

L3

L2

L1

Snubber
EPower EPower EPower EPower
Line Supply L auxiliary circuit N driver Power Power Power
100 to 240Vac 32h8e fuse fuse
50/60Hz N Neutral unit 1 unit 2 unit 3

N L 3D 3C 3B 3A LC LB 2B 2A 1B 1A

V- V+ VI LA C CT HF HE HD AC AB AA
SK8
White/orange

White/green

32 1
Orange

Over temperature
Screen
thermocouple Com
Panel comms
Rx/A/+
RJ45 connector
Tx/B/-

Local ground

Figure A3.3 Typical wiring

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 251
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

A4 FIRST SWITCH ON
At first switch on, after the start-up sequence, the initial configuration page is displayed.

Note: the following ‘quickstart’ description apples only to new (not previously configured)
instruments. If the instrument has previously been configured (either at the factory or subsequently)
the instruments starts up showing the relevant process value.

The initial display shows ‘Set1’ on the top line, with a coded display below (figure A4) with its first item
flashing. The lower line is decoded as shown in table A4a.
The ‘mode’ (up/down arrows) are used to scroll through the available choices for each item. Once the
required value is displayed, the scroll key is used to select the next character for editing. Once all five
characters have been edited, further operations of the scroll key call the range high display (allowing the
high range value to be edited using the mode keys), then the range low display (allowing the low range
value to be edited). A further operation calls the Set2 display, which is decoded in table A4b.
After Set2 parameters have been edited, a further operation of the scroll key invites the user to Exit.
Operating the scroll key returns to the Set1 display; operating a mode key to display ‘yes’ quits the quickstart
menu and causes the unit to enter operating mode.

Figure A4 Set 1 display

Input type Display units Decimal places Display top line (PV) colour Home display
B Type B T/C C Degrees Celsius 0 nnnnn G Green N PV only
J Type J T/C F Degrees Fahrenheit 1 nnnn.n R Red A First alarm setpoint (SP) only
K Kelvins 2 nnn.nn C Red in alarm, else green 1 PV + Alarm SP (Read/write)
K Type K T/C
L Type L T/C * None 3 nn.nnn 2 PV + Alarm SP (Read only)
N Type N T/C P % 4 n.nnnn I Current (see note)
R Type R T/C 0 Pa (Pascals) V Voltage (see note)
S Type S T/C 1 mPa (milli Pascals) P Power (see note)
T Type T T/C 2 kPa (kilo Pascals) E Energy (see note)
C Custom T/C 3 Bar
P Pt100 RTD 4 mBar Note:
M Linear 0 to 80 mV 5 PSI The default display for I, V, P and
2 Linear 0 to 20 mA 6 kg/cm Select the first list E is network 1. The ‘page’ key is
4 Linear 4 to 20 mA 7 mmwG used to access the parameter for
0 Linear 0 to 10V dc 8 inwG other networks.
3 Linear 2 to 10V dc 9 mmHg
6 Linear 0 to 5V dc A Torr Select the next list
B litres/hr
D litres/min
E % RH
G %o2 Change to the next
H %Co2 character
J %CP
L V
M Amp
R mA
T mV
U Ohm
W ppm
Y RPM
Z metres/sec

Table A4a Set 1 parameter coding

HA179769
Page 252 March 20 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

A4 FIRST SWITCH ON (Cont.)

Relay output (OP1) Analogue output (OP3) Not used Digital input A Digital input B
x Not configured x Not configured x Not configured x Not configured
H High alarm only 1 4 to 20mA output W Alarm acknowledge W Alarm acknowledge
L Low alarm only 2 0 to 20mA output K Keylock K Keylock
R Rate of change (ROC) alarm only 3 0 to 5 V dc output U Remote up button U Remote up button
N New alarm 4 1 to 5V dc output D Remote down button D Remote down button
O Sensor break only 5 0 to 10V dc output V Recipe 2/ select V Recipe 2/ select
P After power fail only 6 2 to 10V dc output J Alarm inhibit J Alarm inhibit
7 High alarm or sensor break M Peak Reset M Peak Reset
8 Low alarm or sensor break Select the Y Freeze PV Y Freeze PV
9 ROC alarm or sensor break first list
A High alarm or after power fail
B Low alarm or after power fail
C ROC alarm or after power fail
Select the
E High alarm or sensor break or power fail next list
F Low alarm or sensor break or power fail
G ROC alarm or sensor break or power fail Change to
the next
character

Table A4b Set 2 parameter coding

Notes:
1. In order for the unit to act as an over-temperature ‘police officer’, the OP1 alarm type should be
selected as a high alarm.
2. The relay output automatically operates in fail-safe mode, in that it is de-energised in Alarm. It will
thus enter an alarm state when power is removed from the unit.
3. To re-enter quickstart mode,
Remove power from the unit
Keeping the ‘Page’ key operated continuously, restore power and wait until a password is
requested. Release the ‘Page’ key and use the up/down arrow keys to enter the quickstart
password (default = 4).

A5 OPERATING MODE

A5.1 FRONT PANEL LAYOUT

When the instrument starts, or after quitting the quickstart procedure, the Operator level 1 display is entered
and the page defined as the ‘Home’ page in ‘Set 1’ is displayed (unless there are any errors, in which case
the unit displays the relevant error messages). Figure A5.1, below, shows the home page for the case where
‘V’ has been selected as Home display in ‘Set 1’.

Units Network number

Process value
(e.g. RMS Voltage)

Operator buttons
Message centre
Beacons

EPower
communications

Figure A5.1 Display panel details

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 253
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

A5.1 FRONT PANEL LAYOUT (Cont.)

A5.1.1 Front panel details

Process Variable Normally shows the value of the selected process variable. Where EPower variables
are being displayed, the value for network 1 is displayed by default. Other network
values are accessed by using the ‘Page’ key.
If the instrument is in an error state, then an indication of what the error might be is
flashed on and off instead (e.g. ‘Sbr’ is flashed if an input sensor break has been
detected).
Set1 PV colour allows this part of the display to be selected as permanently green
(‘G’, permanently red (‘R’), or normally green but red in error or alarm states (‘C’).
Units Displays the units associated with the currently displayed process value.
Network number For EPower parameters, shows the network for the currently displayed process
variable.
Message centre This displays scrolling event and/or alarm messages (e.g. ‘INPUT SENSOR BROKEN’)
Beacons ALM Indicates an active alarm. Flashes if alarm unacknowledged.
SPX Alternative setpoint. Not used in this application.
REM* Illuminated when ‘Remote Setpoint’ is selected for this EPower network.
RUN Timer or programmer running/held. Not used in this application.
MAN* Illuminated when ‘Local Setpoint’ is selected for this EPower network.
OP1 Illuminated if output 1 (relay) is active.
OP2 Illuminated if output 2 is active. Not used in this application.
OP3 Illuminated if output 3 has been configured to retransmit the process value.
OP4 Illuminated if output 4 is active. Not used in this application.
Operator buttons Four buttons to allow navigation and configuration functions.:
Page key. Toggles between process variable and summary parameters. Also
used (simultaneously with the Scroll key) to acknowledge alarms.
Scroll key. Press to select new parameter. Hold down to scroll through
parameters. Also used (simultaneously with the Page key) to acknowledge
alarms.

Up Arrow. Used to change (increase) a parameter value.

Down Arrow. Used to change (decrease) a parameter value.

Comms indicator If flashing, this arrow head indicates that communications with EPower are
active.
* See REM/MAN BEACONS (below) for more details.

HA179769
Page 254 March 20 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

A5.1.1 FRONT PANEL DETAILS (Cont.)

REM/MAN BEACONS
Table A5.1.1 summarises the operating characteristics of the ‘REM’ and ‘MAN’ beacons which depend on
the network with which the currently displayed value is associated, and on which SetProv function blocks are
enabled (if any).
If no SetProv blocks are enabled, then MAN always illuminated.
Network 1 Otherwise REM/MAN operation depends on SetProv1 ‘SPselect’
parameter.
If no SetProv blocks are enabled, then MAN always illuminated.
If SetProv.1 and SetProv.2 are enabled, REM/MAN operation depends on
SetProv.2 ‘SPselect’ parameter.
Network 2 If SetProv.1 and SetProv.3 are enabled, REM/MAN operation depends on
SetProv.3 ‘SPselect’ parameter.
If only SetProv.1 enabled: REM/MAN operation depends on SetProv1
‘SPselect’ parameter.
If no SetProv blocks enabled, then MAN always illuminated.
If SetProv.1 and SetProv.3 are enabled, REM/MAN operation depends on
Network 3 SetProv.3 ‘SPselect’ parameter.
If only SetProv.1 enabled, REM/MAN operation depends on SetProv1
‘SPselect’ parameter.
If no SetProv blocks enabled, then MAN always illuminated.
If SetProv.1 and SetProv.4 are enabled, REM/MAN operation depends on
Network 4 SetProv.4 ‘SPselect’ parameter.
If only SetProv.1 enabled, REM/MAN operation depends on SetProv1
‘SPselect’ parameter.

Table A5.1.1 REM/MAN beacon characteristics

A5.2 LEVEL 1 OPERATION

Level 1 operation is entered when Set2 is quit, or after applying power to the instrument (other than at first
power-up).
Level 1 operation allows the user to scroll through the various parameters associated with the instrument on
a Read-only basis. The parameters which appear depend on the configuration. Figure A5.2a is an example
showing the display pages where the home page (set 1) is PV only and the configuration comprises one or
more single phase EPower units. Figure A5.2b is an example giving the parameters for a 2x2 leg, three-
phase configuration.

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 255
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

A5.2 LEVEL 1 OPERATION (Cont.)

Exit from Set 2,
or power up

Further
Home display Network 1 networks Final network

100 98 95 A
(if any)
C A RMS current for
MESSAGES IRMS this network
IRMS

450 Total energy since 227 V RMS Voltage for

this network
234 V
ENRGY switch-on or reset VRMS VRMS

180 C Highest value since

switch-on or reset
14728 W Network Power 14844 W
HIGH POWER POWER

120 C Lowest value since

switch-on or reset
200 Total energy for this 250
LOW ENRGY network ENRGY

150 C Alarm 1
threshold. Type
63 % Working setpoint. 57 %
A1 HI WSP See section A5.2.3 to change. WSP
selected in ‘Set 2’.

Figure A5.2a Single phase example configuration

Exit from Set 2,

or power up
Network 2 appears only for
2 x 2 leg configurations

Home display Network 1 Network 2

100 C 50 A 1
Average
current for 50 A 2
Average
current for this
MESSAGES IAVG this network IAVG network

450 Total energy since

switch-on or reset
240 V 1 Average Voltage
for this network
240 V 2 Average Voltage
for this network
ENRGY VAVG VAVG

180 C Highest value since

switch-on or reset
11350 W 1 11350 W 2
HIGH POWER POWER

120 C Lowest value since 150 1 150 2

LOW switch-on or reset ENRGY ENRGY

150 C 71 % 1 69 % 2
Alarm 1 threshold.
Type selected in
A1 HI ‘Set 2’. WSP WSP

62 A 1 62 A 2
IRMS1 IRMS1
Further alarms appear if
configured at level 3
41 A 1 41 A 2
IRMS2 IRMS2

47 A 1 47 A 2
IRMS3 IRMS3

239 V 1 239 V 2
VRMS1 VRMS1

237 V 1 237 V 2
VRMS2 VRMS2

242 V 1 242 V 2
VRMS3 VRMS3

Figure A5.2b Three-phase (2x2leg) example configuration

HA179769
Page 256 March 20 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

A5.2 LEVEL 1 OPERATION (Cont.)

A5.2.1 Process Parameters

ENRGY Energy. Shows the global energy counter in the EPower instrument. This is
only available if the Energy Counter feature is enabled in the connected
EPower instrument.
HIGH Peak High. Shows the highest reading that the indicator has recorded since
switch on or since reset (Level 2).
LOW Peak Low. Shows the lowest reading that the indicator has recorded since
switch on or since reset (Level 2).
A1 (Type) Alarm 1 type and setpoint. Indicates the threshold value for alarm 1. ‘Type’ =
‘Hi’, ‘Lo’ or ‘ROC’ according to configuration (Set 2). This parameter does not
appear if it is ‘Unconfigured’ in Set 2.
An (Type) (‘n’ = 2, 3 or 4) Further alarm types and threshold values, as configured in
level 3 configuration.

A5.2.2 EPower Network summary parameters

IRMS The RMS value of load current (Amps), for this network.
VRMS The RMS value of load voltage (Volts) for this network
POWER Either P or PBurst according to network type. Watts or kilowatts
ENRGY Energy. Shows the energy for this network. This is only available if the Energy
Counter feature is enabled in the connected EPower instrument.
WSP Working setpoint. WSP is the working setpoint currently being used by the
EPower unit and is either the Local setpoint, or the remote setpoint (from an
analogue input or via a communications link).
SP Target setpoint (% or Engineering units) for the network in use. It may be
edited via the remote panel either directly setting the Control Setpoint (if
EPower’s SetProv function block is not enabled) or setting the local setpoint
of the SetProv function block (if it is enabled and its SPSelect parameter is set
to ‘Local’). If the value is greater than 99999, the displayed value is divided
by 1000 and shown with suffix ‘K’ in the format ‘nnnn.nK’ (‘K’ = kilo). (E.G. a
value of 1000000 would be displayed as ‘1000.0K’.
SP.SEL Setpoint Select. Available only in level 2 and if the associated SetProv
function block in EPower is enabled, allowing the user to select between
local (LSP) and remote setpoints (rSP).
E.RST Energy Reset. Available only in level 2 and if the Energy Counter is enabled
in EPower. User Energy total can be reset.
IRMS1 (2) (3) RMS Load current for phase 1 (2) (3). (3-phase networks only)
VRMS1 (2) (3) RMS Load voltage for phase 1 (2) (3). (3-phase networks only)
IAVG Average load current (3-phase networks only)
VAVG Average load voltage (3-phase networks only)

A5.2.3 Setpoint editing from the 32h8E

Operating the up or down arrow key from any of the power summary displays (e.g. IRMS) takes the user to
the WSP display. Further operation of the up or down arrow causes the display to switch to ‘SP’ provided that
the unit is operationg in Local mode (MAN illuminated) rather than Remote mode (REM illuminated). In
Rmote mode, the SP parameter does not appear.
The mode can be changed between local and remote from the SPSEL parameter at level 2, or from the
EPower operator interface, iTools or over a comms link.

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 257
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

Once in SP, the up and down arrows are used to edit the setpoint value. Once this is complete, the display
times out to the original power summary SP page after a few seconds. Figure A5.2.3 attempts to show this
process.
CTL.SP = No This presentation is the only one available up to CTL.SP = Yes
and including version V1.10

30 A Network Display 30 A Network Display

IRMS WSP

20 % The value of the working setpoint is displayed 20 % The value of the working setpoint is displayed
WSP WSP

20 % The value of the local setpoint is displayed 20 % The value of the local setpoint is displayed
SP SP

Use the up/down arrows to edit the value Use the up/down arrows to edit the value

50 % 50 %
SP SP
One the edit is confirmed, or no edit has taken One the edit is confirmed, or no edit has taken
place, the display reverts to the parameter place, the display reverts to the parameter
orginally being viewed orginally being viewed

40 A 40 A
IRMS WSP

Figure A5.2.3 Setpoint editing

HA179769
Page 258 March 20 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

A5.3 LEVEL 2 OPERATION

To switch to level 2 parameters (figure A5.3a):
1. From any display press and hold the page key until the Lev 1 display appears
2. Operate the up or down arrow to display ‘Lev 2’
3. After a few seconds, the ‘Code’ page appears. Use the up arrow key twice to enter the value ‘2’
4. After a few seconds the display reverts to the home display.
To return to level 1:
1. From any display press and hold the page key until the Lev 2 display appears
2. Operate the up or down arrow to display ‘Lev 1’
3. After a few seconds the display reverts to the home display.
The scroll key is used to enter the parameter display from the home display.

Any display
Press and hold
for 2 or 3

LEu 1
GOTO

LEu 2
GOTO
After a few seconds

0
CODE

1
2
2
CODE
After a few seconds

HOME

Figure A5.3a Selecting level 2

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 259
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

A5.3.1 Level 2 parameters

Home
display

1480 Energy counter

ENRGY

No Energy counter reset

E.RST

Off Peak Reset

PRST

127 Peak High

HIGH

18 Peak Low
LOW

130 Alarm 1 setpoint

A1 HI

1 Address
ADDR

PU Home display
HOME

0 Customer ID
ID

nonE Current recipe number

RECNO

nonE Recipe to save

STORE

Display units
UNITS

Figure A5.3.1 Level 2 parameter menu

ENRGY Energy counter. Shows the global energy counter in the EPower instrument. This is
only available if the Energy Counter feature is enabled in the connected EPower
instrument.
E.RST Energy Reset. Allows the energy counter to be reset. Only available only if the Energy
Counter is enabled in EPower. Set to ‘yes’ to reset. Automatically returns to ‘no’.

HA179769
Page 260 March 20 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

PRST Peak Reset. Allows the high and low peak values to be reset (to the current value). Set
to ‘On’ to reset. Automatically returns to ’Off’.
HIGH Peak High. Shows the highest reading that the indicator has recorded since switch on
or since reset (Level 2).
LOW Peak Low. Shows the lowest reading that the indicator has recorded since switch on
or since reset (Level 2).
A1 (Type) Alarm 1 type and setpoint. Indicates the threshold value for alarm 1. ‘Type’ = ‘Hi’, ‘Lo’
or ‘ROC’ according to configuration (Set 2). This parameter does not appear if it is
‘Unconfigured’ in Set 2.
An (Type) (‘n’ = 2, 3 or 4) Further alarm types and threshold values, as configured in level 3
configuration.
ADDR Address. Modbus address (1 to 254) for the instrument
HOME Home display.
PU = process variable Alm = Alarm threshold
PU.AL = Process variable + Alarm SP P.A.ro = PV + Alarm SP (read only)
EP.I = EPower Current EP.U = EPower Voltage
EP.P = EPower Power
ID Customer ID Customised instrument identification number (0 to 9999)
RECNO Current Recipe Number. The current recipe number (1 to 5) or ‘nonE’ if no recipe
running, or FAiL if there are no recipes available. See section A6.2 for further details.
STORE Recipe to save. Takes a ‘snapshot’ of the current recipe values and saves them in a
recipe number from 1 to 5. ‘nonE’ does not save; ‘donE’ appears after a successful
save. See section A6.2 for further details.
UNITS Display units. Table A5.3.1, below, shows the available units in down-arrow scroll
order.

Dis- Dis- Dis-

Unit Definition play Unit Definition play Unit Definition play

nonE No units m-S Milliseconds L-H Litres per hour

°k Kelvins rPm Revs/minute torr Torr
°F Degrees Fahrenheit PPm Parts per milion mmHg mm of mercury
°C Degrees Celsius Ohm Ohms inwG inches of water gauge
kG Kilograms kg mU Millivolts mmwG mm of water gauge
GrAm Grams mA MilliAmps kGcm Kilograms/square cm kg/cm2

mG Milligrams Amp Amps PSi Pounds/square inch

mpH Miles/hour Uolt Volts mbAr Millibar
P.PH %ph % P.CP % carbon potential % bAr Bar
%
PH pH P.CO2 % carbon dioxide kPA KiloPascals
hrs Hours P.O2 % oxygen % mPa MegaPascals
min Minutes P.rH % relative humidity % PA Pascals
SEC Seconds L-m Litres per minute PErc Percent %

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 261
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

A5.4 LEVEL 3 AND CONF LEVEL OPERATION

Any display
To switch to level 3 parameters (figure A5.4): Press and hold for
5 seconds
1. From any display press and hold the page key until ‘Lev 3’ appears
LEu 3 ConF
(‘Lev1’ or ‘Lev2’ appears first - keep holding). GOTO GOTO
2. If required, operate the up arrow to display ‘ConF’ After a few seconds After a few seconds

3. In either case, after a few seconds, the ‘Code’ page appears. Use 0 0
CODE CODE
the up arrow key twice to enter the value ‘3’ (to enter level 3) or ‘4’
1 1
(to enter Configuration level). 2
4. After a few seconds the display reverts to the home display. 2 3
3 4
To return to lower access levels:
3 4
1. From any display press and hold the page key until ‘Lev 3’ or ‘ConF’ CODE CODE
appears After a few seconds
2. Operate the down arrow one or more times to display the required
access level.
3. After a few seconds the display reverts to the home display. HOME

Figure A5.4 Selecting level 3 or Conf

A5.4.1 Level 3/Conf parameters

Most Level 3 and/or Configuration level parameters associated with the remote panel indicator are
described in the 3200i Engineering Handbook (HA029006) available from the manufacturer. There are a
number of additional parameters associated with the 32h8e, which are described below.
Level 3 access level makes those operating parameters, which are not Read only available to the user.
Examples are Input Filter Time Constant, Alarm Delay time, and so on. Level 3 is used, typically, when
commissioning the indicator.
Configuration level enables the fundamental characteristics of the indicator to be changed. This includes the
quick-start code parameters amongst others.
The menu structures for Level 3 and Configuration levels are identical (see figure A5.4.1a) but there are more
parameters available within each ‘heading’ at Configuration level.

HA179769
Page 262 March 20 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

Home
display

ConF
INPUT OP-1 OP-3 LA

See HA029006 for details

of other parameters

LB ALARM RECIP COMMS CAL

ACCES

Select access level

ConF
GOTO

See HA029006 for details of

other parameters
Within menus, the Page key
moves user up one level

Static Home message

OFF
MESG

Auto scrolling

OFF 5 10 30
ASCRL ASCRL ASCRL ASCRL

Hide Homepage
No Yes
HHOME HHOME

Control and Setpoint Display

No Yes
CTL.SP CTL.SP

Figure A5.4.1a Level 3 and configuration level menu structure.

ASCRL Auto scrolling. The up (or down) arrow is used to scroll through the values
available, these being ‘Off’ (No scrolling) or 5, 10 or 30 seconds (where the
selected time value specifies the time between scrolls). See ‘AUTO SCROLL’
below for further details.
HHOME Hide Homepage. If set to ‘Yes’, the home page is never displayed, so the
associated parameters can never be viewed at lower access levels.
CTL.SP Control and Setpoint Display. If set to ‘Yes’ the EPower control parameters
(Current, Voltage, or Power) can be viewed, in Operator level,
simultaneously with it’s associated Setpoint. When displaying an EPower
control parameter, the bottom line of the display is used to display the
working setpoint.
When set to ‘No’, the bottom line of the display is used to display the
parameter name and parameter description (as per other indicator displays).
Also see section A5.2.3.
For all other parameters, refer to the 3200i Engineering Handbook (HA029006).

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 263
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

5.4.1 LEVEL 3/CONF PARAMETERS (Cont.)

AUTO SCROLLING
This causes the EPower summary parameters to scroll through continuously, at a frequency defined by the
value selected for the ASCRL parameter. The actual order of parameter appearance depends on level of
access, and complexity of network.

Note: The 3-phase parameters IRMS1, IRMS2, IRMS3, VRMS1, VRMS2, VRMS3 are not included in
autoscrolling sequences.

IRMS IAVG

VRMS VAVG

POWER POWER

ENRGY ENRGY

WSP SPselect appears WSP

only at access level 2
SPselect SPselect

Single phase Three phase

(single network) (single network)

Network
1 IRMS VRMS Power Enrgy WSP SPselect E/Reset

2 IRMS VRMS Power Enrgy WSP SPselect E/Reset Back to

IRMS
3 IRMS VRMS Power Enrgy WSP SPselect E/Reset

4 IRMS VRMS Power Enrgy WSP SPselect E/Reset

Single phase (Multiple networks)

Network
Enrgy Back to
1 IAVG VAVG Power WSP SPselect E/Reset
IAVG
2 IAVG VAVG Power Enrgy WSP SPselect E/Reset

Three phase (Two networks)

Figure A5.4.1b Various scrolling sequences

Note: For single networks, each EPower summary value (parameter) is displayed in turn. For multiple
networks, the same parameter is displayed for each network in turn, the scroll key being used to
select a different parameter if required.

HA179769
Page 264 March 20 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

A6 OTHER FEATURES

A6.1 ALARMS AND ERRORS

A6.1.1 Alarm indication

Up to four alarms can be set up in configuration level (refer to HA029006 for full details). Each alarm can be
configured as ‘nonE’ (off), HI (high), Lo (low), r.roc (rising rate-of-change) or F.roc (falling rate-of-change).
If any alarm occurs the ALM beacon flashes, any output associated with the alarm becomes active, and the
message area of the display shows a scrolling text message describing the alarm state. If the display is
configured to go red on alarm (Set 2), the PV colour changes to flashing red.

A6.1.2 Alarm acknowledgement

Alarms are acknowledged by operating the Page key and the Scroll key
simultaneously.
Further to this a global acknowledge of EPower alarms occurs when:
1. The indicator home page is selected, or
2. When the EPower Home page is displayed and the Home page is hidden
The results of alarm acknowledgement are as follows:
1. For EPower alarms, the alarm indication at the EPower operator interface is
acknowledged (removed). The alarm indication remains at the 32h8e until the alarm is no longer
active.
2. For Temperature (Process) auto-latching alarms, the alarm beacon and Process value stop flashing.
Any output assigned to the alarm continues to operate until the alarm trigger is no longer active. If
configured to change colour (Set 2), the process value returns to green only when the alarm trigger is
no longer active.
3. For Temperature (Process) manual-latching alarms, acknowledgement has no effect, and the alarm
indication continues until the alarm trigger is no longer active.
4. When EPower and auto-latching process alarms are both present, acknowledgement causes the
beacon and Process Value (PV) display to stop flashing. Should the Process Value alarm subsequently
go non-active, leaving only the EPower alarm, the beacon and PV display will resume flashing. For
manual-latching alarms, acknowledge is ignored and the alarm indication continues until the alarm
trigger is no longer active.
Note: Alarm parameters can be configured in Configuration mode, as described in the 3200i
Engineering handbook HA029006.

A6.1.3 Sensor Break detection and indication

An alarm condition (Sbr) is indicated if the indicator detects a break, or over range condition in the
temperature sensor circuit.

Notes:
1. For a resistance thermometer a sensor break is indicated if any of the three wires is broken.
2. mA sensor breaks are not detected because the effect is masked by the resistor across the input.
3. For Volt inputs, sensor breaks might not always be detected, because the effect is masked by the
attenuator (potential divider) board connected across the input.

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 265
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

A6.1.4 Error indication

The following error indications can appear, flashing, in the top line of the display:
Com.Er Communication error. Modbus transactions between the 32h8e and the
EPower driver module fail. Can be caused by a break in the physical
communications link, by the EPower module being powered down etc.
EP.CnF The number of power modules is selected as zero. The indicator can
therefore not show Current, Voltage or Power values.
EP.Er One or more ‘Fatal’, ‘Config’ or ‘Standby’ error has been detected.
The error condition(s) must be cleared before the 32h8e will respond to operator keystrokes.

A6.1.5 EPower Event and Alarm Messages

The messages shown below are generated by the EPower module and are displayed as scrolling text strings
in the ‘Message centre’ area of the display.
MISS MAINS Supply power to one or more power modules is not connected, or is isolated.
THYR SC A thyristor short circuit has been detected. In such a case, current flows even when
the thyristor is not ‘firing’.
OPEN THYR A thyristor open circuit has been detected. In such a case, no current flows even
when the thyristor is ‘firing’.
FUSE BLOWN One or more of the thyristor protection fuses has ruptured.
OVER TEMP The thyristor heat sink temperature has exceeded the specified limit, and the
thyristor has been shut down. The temperature must fall to below the specified limit
(including the hysteresis value) before firing can re-commence.
VOLT DIPS This detects a reduction in supply voltage. Detection threshold is set up in EPower
configuration (Network/Setup).
FREQ FAULT Supply frequency is below 47Hz or above 63Hz. Firing stops until the supply
frequency has returned to a value between 47Hz and 63Hz.
PB 24V The 24V power rail in a power module has failed. Firing stops and restarts only when
the problem has been resolved.
TLF Total load failure. The load connection from one or more power modules is missing
or open circuit.
CHOP OFF Triggered if the load current meets or exceeds a specified threshold for more than
five seconds. Firing stops until either the alarm is acknowledged or until 100mS has
elapsed, according to configuration. See Network/Setup for further details.
PLF Partial Load Failure. The alarm is triggered if a change in static load impedance is
detected over a mains cycle (phase angle mode) or burst period (burst or logic
mode). The sensitivity of the measurement can be configured as described in the
Network/Setup area of EPower configuration.
PLU Partial Load Unbalance. This alarm is triggered when the difference between the
maximum and minimum currents of a three-phase system exceeds a configurable
threshold. See Network/Setup for further details.
VOLT FAULT One or more phases missing or out of limits.
PRE TEMP Acts as a warning that the operating temperature is unexpectedly high. This alarm
becomes active before unit operation is stopped.
PMOD WDOG One or more power module watchdogs has performed a reset.
PMOD COM ERR A power module communications error has been detected. Typically this would be
caused by a damaged inter-module ribbon cable.
PMOD T OUT A power module communications time out error has occurred. Typically this would
be caused by a damaged inter-module ribbon cable.
CLOSED LP The control loop cannot achieve setpoint, despite the loop demanding 0% or 100%
power. Typically caused by external constraints on the load.
OUT FAULT A short circuit has been detected in the output circuit. Firing is inhibited.

HA179769
Page 266 March 20 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

A6.2 RECIPES
Note: Level two access (section A5.3) is required in order for the user to be able to save and/or
restore ‘recipes’ as described below.

It is possible to store operating values by tacking a ‘snapshot’ of the current settings and storing these
snapshots in one of up to five ‘recipes’. An example would be to store several sets of alarm setpoint values,
one of which can then be recalled for a particular process.
To store values in a recipe:
1. In the level two list of parameters (figure A5.3.1), press the scroll key repeatedly (or hold continuously)
until ‘STORE’ appears.
2. Select a recipe number using the up/down arrow keys. After a few seconds the word donE appears to
indicate that the current parameter values have been saved to the selected recipe number. Previous
values are over-written without confirmation.
To retrieve a recipe:
1. In the level two list of parameters (figure A5.3.1), press the scroll key repeatedly (or hold continuously)
until ‘RECNO’ appears, along with a number (between 1 and 5 inclusive) indicating which recipe was
last selected.
2. Select the required recipe number using the up/down arrow keys. After a few seconds the recipe
number will blink, to indicate that the load is complete. If the selected recipe is empty, the word FAIL
appears instead of the recipe number.

A6.3 EPOWER SETPROV CONFIGURATIONS

If EPower is configured via QuickStart and the analogue input has been set to ‘Setpoint’, then, in a multiple
network configuration, QuickStart will wire SetProv1 ‘workingSP’ to the ‘Main.SP’ of all the networks’ Control
blocks so that all the control blocks share the same setpoint.
Figure A6.3, below shows two examples of this, as displayed in the iTools Graphical wiring editor.

3-phase (2 x 2 leg)
Multiple single phase

Figure A6.3 Setpoint to Control block wiring (iTools graphical wiring editor display)

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 267
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

A6.3 EPOWER SETPROV CONFIGURATIONS (Cont.)

If EPower is configured using QuickStart, and the analogue input is not set to ‘Setpoint’, then none of the Set-
Prov function blocks is enabled and each control block setpoint can be set locally.
If EPower is configured using the iTools Graphical wiring editor, then it is possible to enable all of the SetProv
function blocks, thus allowing each control block to have individual local or remote setpoints. This flexibility
has an effect on the operation of the REM and MAN beacons, as described in section A5.1.1.

A6.3.1 Setpoint availability

MULTIPLE SINGLE PHASE CONFIGURATION
Figure A6.3.1a shows three examples of different single phase setpoint configurations. Figure A6.3.1b, is
similar, but shows three-phase 2 x 2 leg examples.

SetProv.1 Control 1 Control 1 SetProv.1 Control 1

Control 2 Control 2 SetProv.2 Control 2

Control 3 Control 3 SetProv.3 Control 3

With SetProv.1 supplying all control With no SetProv blocks enabled, If each network is wired to its own
blocks, only SP1 is available at the 32h8E. SP1, SP2 and SP3 are all SetProv block. SP1, SP2 and SP3 are all
available at the 32h8E. available at the 32h8E.

Figure A6.3.1a Setpoint availability (multiple single phases)

SetProv.1 Control 1 Control 1 SetProv.1 Control 1

Control 3 Control 3 SetProv.3 Control 3

With SetProv.1 supplying both control If no SetProv.1 blocks enabled. If each network is wired to its own
blocks, only SP1 is available at the 32h8E. SP1and SP2 are both available SetProv block, SP1 and SP2 are
at the 32h8e. available at the 32h8e.

Figure A6.3.1b Setpoint availability (three-phase 2 x 2 leg)

A6.4 PV RETRANSMISSION
EPower parameters may be communicated to a Fieldbus Network Master i.e. SCADA package, PLC or DCS
system. The 32h8e is intended as an independent policeman, and its process PV may also be communicated
to the Fieldbus network master. To this end, the 32h8e PV is written every 1/2 second to the EPower’s
Instrument.Config.RemotePV parameter, which can then be transmitted to the master device.
PV retransmission is also provided as an analogue (V or mA) signal at the analogue output OP3. This may be
used as a back-up to the digitally communicated parameter in the event of a failure of the communications
link.

HA179769
Page 268 March 20 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

A6.5 DIGITAL ALARM OPTIONS

The following source parameters can be logically OR’ed together to give a digital output state.
1.SRC.A
1.SRC.B
1.SRC.C
1.SRC.D
EP.AL
1.SRC.A to 1.SRC.D are described in the Engineering Handbook (HA029006); EP.AL is defined as: All
EPower alarms.

Note: the ALL.A (All Alarms) parameter includes the above EP.AL as well as the indicator alarms.

A6.6 HOME PAGE TIMEOUT

The 32h8e normally forces the display to return to the Home page after a period of keyboard inactivity.
If, however, the current focus is on an EPower parameter, then the HOME Page timeout is not imposed, thus
allowing the user to display a specific Network parameter indefinitely (providing that auto-scrolling is
disabled).

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 269
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

This page is deliberately left blank

HA179769
Page 270 March 20 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

APPENDIX B THREE PHASE FEEDBACK

B1 TRANSFORMER REPRESENTATION AND LABELLING

Figure B1, shows a common way of showing typical three phase transformers of various types. Each type is
useful for particular applications, for example a Delta primary helps with a more even distribution of loading
if the secondary loads are not well matched, whilst a Star wound secondary provides a convenient Earth or
Neutral tap for connection near the transformer.
For closed systems, windings corresponding to a particular phase are marked with a prefix number
indicating that phase, for example ‘1P’ and ‘3S’ represent phase one primary and phase three secondary
respectively. For open Delta systems, each winding is identified by two labels; for example, 1S1 and 1S2
represent the two ends of phase one secondary whilst 2P1 and 2P2 would represent the phase two primary.
The voltages and currents in any one phase are tightly coupled and the primary and secondary voltages are
(more-or-less) in phase with one another. Each phase is 120 degrees out of phase with the other two.

Load 2
Phase 1
3P2 2S1
1P
1S
1P1
2S2 1S2
3P1

Load 1
Secondary
Primary
2P 3S 2P2
3S1
Phase 2 3P 2S 1P2 1S1
Neutral or
ground tap 2P1 3S2
Phase 3
Load 3

Figure B1 Figure B1Typical transformer winding labelling

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 271
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

B2 EXTERNAL FEEDBACK PHASING

WARNING
1. External feedback connections must be correctly phased (figure 2.2.2b) or the unit might switch
to full conduction at start-up.
2. With external feedback: The current transformer should be chosen such that its full-scale output
is 5 amps.

External feedback consists of both current measurement (using a current transformer) and voltage
measurements across the load (tap locations depend on the network layout). The signals from these
feedback elements are terminated at a connector located on the underside of the power units, as shown in
figure B2.

Voltage feedback connector

Load cable exit
V1 V2 V1&V2 None

V2 V1 None V1&V2
Underneath view V1 V2 V1 V2 V1 V2 V1 V2

Module 1 Module 2 Module 3 Module 4

I2 I1 I1& I2 None

I1 I2 None I1&I2

Current feedback connector

Neutral / phase
Load Load voltage reference (Either pin)

External feedback
connections (optional)

Figure B2 External feedback connector locations and pinout

HA179769
Page 272 Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

B2.1 CURRENT TRANSFORMER CONNECTION

Conductor carrying
current to be Feedback signal
S1

S1 S2

Current transformer S2

Figure B2.1a Current transformer labelling

The current transformer terminal S1 must be connected to terminal I1 of the relevant power unit; the current
transformer terminal S2 must be connected to the power unit terminal I2.

Note: S1 and S2 here are not related to the load transformer secondary labels S1 and S2.

The arrow on the current transformer must point towards the load, if the associated voltage tapping is
connected to V1; The arrow on the current transformer must point away from the load if the voltage tapping
is connected to V2. Figure B2.1b shows some correct and some incorrect examples.
Arrow must point towards the
load, if the associated voltage
feedback is connected to V1.

OK Wrong
Ref
Ref

S1 S2 S2 S1
(V1) (V1)
EPower

EPower

V2 V2
Load

Load
Feedback
Feedback

V1 (V2) V1 (V2)
I2 I2
I1 S2 S1 I1 S1 S2

OK Wrong

Arrow must point away from

the load, if the voltage
feedback is connected to V2.

Figure B2.1b Current transformer orientation

DANGER
The cables used to connect the remote voltage sensing inputs (if fitted) and the cable used to
connect the reference input in 4S, 6D and two-leg configurations must be correctly protected by
branch-circuit protection. It is the responsibility of the user to add branch-circuit protection. Such
branch-circuit must comply with applicable local regulations.
UL: The above-mentioned branch-circuit protection is necessary for compliance with National
Electric Code (NEC) requirements.

Note:
1. In each part of the drawing above, the two positions (i.e. solid and dashed) for the current
transformer are alternatives - only one should be used in any one phase.

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 273
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

B2.2 FEEDBACK EXAMPLES FOR TYPICAL THREE PHASE NETWORKS

DANGER
This product does not contain any branch-circuit protection or internal safety overload protection.
The installer must add branch-circuit protection upstream of the unit, and provide external or
remote safety overload protection to the end installation. Branch circuit shall be rated according to
maximum current in each phase.
CE: branch-circuit protection must be selected according to IEC 60364-4-43 or applicable local
regulations.
UL: branch-circuit protection must be selected according to NEC article 210.20, it is necessary for
compliance with National Electric Code (NEC) requirements.

Note:
1. The figures below are intended only as theoretical examples. In order to comply with CE and
NEC requirements, branch circuit protection must be incorporated by the user, upstream of the
equipment. Such protection is not shown in the figures below, for the sake of clarity. The
installation, in its entirety, must comply with all applicable local safety and emissions regulations.
2. For pdf viewers, the colours used in the figures below are used only to improve clarity. No
polarity should be inferred (e.g. blue wires are not necessarily neutral; red is not positive etc.).

B2.2.1 Two phase control with Delta-Star transformer and 3S load

φ1V1
φ1I2
φ1I1
V2 V1 I2 I1
Ref Feedback S1 S2
Phase 1
EPower 1 1P
1S

Lo
3
ad

ad
Lo
V2 V1 I2 I1

1
Ref Feedback 2P N 3S
Phase 2 Load 2
EPower 2 3P 2S

φ2V2 & φ1V2

Phase 3
φ2V1
S1 S2
φ2I2
φ2I1

Figure B2.2.1 Two phase control with Delta-Star transformer and 3S load

HA179769
Page 274 Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

B2.2.2 Two phase control with Delta-Star transformer and 3D load

φ1V1
φ1I2
φ1I1
V2 V1 I2 I1
Ref Feedback S1 S2
Phase 1
EPower 1 1P
1S

Load 1
V2 V1 I2 I1 Lo
2P 3S a d3 ad
2
Phase 2
Ref Feedback N Lo
EPower 2 3P 2S

φ2V2 & φ1V2

Phase 3
φ2V1 S1 S2
φ2I2
φ2I1

Figure B2.2.2 Two phase control with Delta-Star transformer and 3D load

B2.2.3 Three phase control with Delta-Star transformer and 3S load

φ1V1
φ1I2
φ1I1
V2 V1 I2 I1
Ref Feedback S1 S2
Phase 1
EPower 1 1P
1S

Load 1
V2 V1 I2 I1 Lo
Ref Feedback 2P 3S a d3 ad
2
Phase 2 N Lo
EPower 2 3P 2S
S1 S2
φ3V1 φ3I2
φ3I1

V1 I2 I1 φ2V1 S1 S2
V2
φ2I2
Ref Feedback φ2I1
Phase 3
EPower 3

Figure B2.2.3 Three phase control with Delta-Star transformer and 3S load

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 275
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

B2.2.4 Three phase control with Delta-Star transformer and 3D load

φ1V1
φ1I2
φ1I1
V2 V1 I2 I1
Ref Feedback S1 S2
Phase 1
EPower 1 1P
1S

Lo
3
ad

ad
Lo
V2 V1 I2 I1

1
Ref Feedback 2P N 3S
Phase 2 Load 2
EPower 2 3P 2S
S1 S2
φ3V1 φ3I2
φ3I1

V1 I2 I1 φ2V1 S1 S2
V2
φ2I2
Ref Feedback φ2I1
Phase 3
EPower 3

Figure B2.2.4 Three phase control with Delta-Star transformer and 3D load

HA179769
Page 276 Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

B2.2.5 Three phase control with Star-Star transformer and 4S load

CAUTION
In burst mode and primary of transformer load, the star-star configuration is not recommended as it
may become unstable, high speed fuse may blow.

φ1V1
φ1I2
φ1I1
V2 V1 I2 I1
Ref Feedback S1 S2
Phase 1
EPower 1 1P
1S

Load 1
3 Load
V2 V1 I2 I1

2P 3S ad 2
Phase 2
Ref Feedback Lo
EPower 2 3P 2S N
S1 S2
φ3,φ2,φ1V2
φ3V1 φ3I2
φ3I1

V1 I2 I1 φ2V1 S1 S2
V2
φ2I2
Ref Feedback φ2I1
Phase 3
EPower 3

Neutral

Figure B2.2.5 Three phase control with Delta-Star transformer (primary and secondary with neutral tap) and 4S load

B2.2.6 Three phase control with Delta-Delta transformer and 3S load

φ1V1
φ1I2
φ1I1
V2 V1 I2 I1
Ref Feedback S1 S2
Phase 1
EPower 1 1P
1S
Load 1

3 Load
V2 V1 I2 I1

2P 3S ad 2
Phase 2
Ref Feedback Lo
EPower 2 3P 2S
S1 S2
φ3V1 φ3I2
φ3I1

V1 I2 I1 φ2V1 S1 S2
V2
φ2I2
Ref Feedback φ2I1
Phase 3
EPower 3
Figure B2.2.6 Three phase control with Delta-Delta transformer and 3S load

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 277
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

B2.2.7 Three phase control with 6D primary and 4S secondary with 4S load
Commonly used in salt baths and other heat treatment applications, this configuration results in lower
thyristor currents (and therefore costs) at the expense of higher cabling costs.

A Phase 1 C A
φ8
B feedback B

φ1
C

φ1
V2 V1 I2 I1 S2 S1
Ref Feedback 3P2
Phase 1
EPower 1 1P1 1S

Load 1
3P1

2P2 3 Lo
a
3S ad d2
Lo
1P2 2S
S1 S2
2P1 N
Phase 3
D φ!1
feedback
H
E φ!1
G
F φ!8
V2 V1 I2 I1
Ref Feedback S1 S2
Phase 2
EPower 2 φ!,φ ,φ8
Phase 2 φ 1 F
φ 1 E
feedback φ 8 D

G
H

V2 V1 I2 I1
Ref Feedback
Phase 3
EPower 3

Figure B2.2.7 Three phase control with open delta primary and four-wire star secondary, driving 4S load.

B2.2.8 Three phase control with 6D primary /secondary with three independent loads
Rarely used - not recommended because this configuration is not fault tolerant.
Phase 2
H F φ2V1
feedback G
A E φ2V2
φ2I1
φ2I2

B
C S2 S1
D Load 2
V2 V1 I2 I1
Ref Feedback 3P2 2S1
Phase 1
EPower 1 1P1
2S2 1S2
3P1

2P2 3S1
1S1
1P2 Load 1
E
2P1 3S2 S1 S2
F φ1I1
D
G C
H φ1I2 φ1V1
B
V2 V1 I2 I1 A φ1V2

Ref Feedback Phase 1 feedback

Phase 2
EPower 2
Load 3
S1 S2

φ3V2
φ3V1
φ3I2
φ3I1
V2 V1 I2 I1
Ref Feedback
Phase 3
EPower 3

Figure B2.2.8 Three phase control with open delta primary/secondary and four-wire star secondary,
driving three independent, floating loads

HA179769
Page 278 Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

This page is deliberately left blank

HA179769
Issue 15 March 20 Page 279
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

Index
Symbols Load Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
<............................................... 108 Network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
<= . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 AlmLat
<> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Analogue output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
== . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
>............................................... 108 Load Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126, 129
>= . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
AlmSig
Numerics Analogue output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
10 x. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
2-leg wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54, 57 Load Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126, 129
3-delta wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53, 57 Network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Two leg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54, 57 AlmStop
3-star wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52, 56 Analogue output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
4-star wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
6-delta wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53, 56 Load Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126, 129
A Network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
A1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257, 261 Altitude (maximum). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
A1FuseIn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Analog IP
A1TempIn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Func . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
AbsDif . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
Access Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Analog OP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
Acknowledge alarms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58, 93, 254, 265 Func . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Add . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Modbus parameter addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Adding parameters to the Watch list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
ADDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 AnalogIP
Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82, 83, 222 Modbus parameter addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180, 181
Predictive load management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 AND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108, 110
AlarmOut. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Any Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Alarms ASCRL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Acknowledgement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58, 93, 254, 265 Atmosphere operating spec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Global. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Auto scrolling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263, 264
Beacon (Remote panel). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Autoscale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Days / Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 B
Detection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Back to: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Disable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89, 120 Bar Graph Title 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Indication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230, 265 Bar Graph Title 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Latch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Baud. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82, 83
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 Beacons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Process. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 Black wiring editor items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Signalling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Block execution order. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Summary pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Blue
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 Arrow
AlarmSP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164, 167
Align Tops/Lefts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Left/Right. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Alm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
ALM beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254, 265 Wiring editor items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
ALM indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Bring To Front
AlmAck Function block context menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Analogue output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Monitor context menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Wire context menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Load Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126, 129 Burst
Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Fixed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
AlmDet Variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
Analogue output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 C
Load Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126, 129 Capture current values into a data set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 CC-Link
AlmDis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Pinout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Analogue output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Centre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

Index HA179769
Page 280 Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

Chain icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Fragment to file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

Checksum fail error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Function block context menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Chop Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68, 120, 266 Graphic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
ChopOff. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Graphical Wiring Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
ChopOff1Threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118, 229 Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
ChopOff2Threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118, 229 Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 Wire context menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Clear the selected data set. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 Wiring editor items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Click to Select Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147, 149 Count. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
Clip Good, Clip bad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Counter
Closed Loop Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Alarm Acknowledge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Modbus parameter addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174, 175
Alarm detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Create a new empty data set. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Alarm disable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Create a new watch/recipe list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Alarm Latch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Create Compound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146, 152, 153
Alarm Signalling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 CTL.SP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Alarm Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Current feedback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
CLOSED LP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 Currrent transformer (external) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
ClosedLp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Cold Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Custom Pages
Colours Modbus parameter addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175, 176
Function blocks etc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Cut
Software wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Comment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Column enable/disable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156, 157 Function block context menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Com.Er. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 Graphical Wiring Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Comments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Context Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Wire context menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Comms Wiring editor items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Gateway tool. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Cycle Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 D
Modbus parameter addresses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Dashed lines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Remote Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83, 251 Data set creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 Days above . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
User menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Delay
Component Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 (Comms) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
Compounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Conf Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Delayed Trigger. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Conf Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Delete
Conf level Operation (Remote panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 Comment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Configuration level menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Function block context menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Configuration Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Context Menu Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Function block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Wiring editor items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Device Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Control DeviceNet
Menu Pinout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
AlmAck. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
AlmDet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 DHCP Enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
AlmDis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Digital I/O
AlmLat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Modbus parameter addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
AlmSig . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
AlmStop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Digital IP ’Func’ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Diag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Direct Connection (iTools) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Main . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 DisRamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Modbus parameter addresses. . . . . 171, 172, 173, 174 DistIncr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123, 208, 221
Control and Setpoint Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 Distrib . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123, 208, 221
Copy Distributed control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Comment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Div . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Diagram fragment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Down arrow key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58, 254

HA179769 Index
Issue 15 March 20 Page 281
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

Download the selected data set to the device . . . . . . . . 164 Modbus parameter addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Download wiring to instrument. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146, 151 Exp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
DownScale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 External
Driver Unit Current feedback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Fan supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Phrasing examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Signal wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Wiring specification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
DSP Wdog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 F
DSPnoRSP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
DuplAddr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 F.roc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Duplicate Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 Fall Good, Fall Bad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Duty cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204, 211 Fall type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Limiting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Fallback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
E Fallback value. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
E.RST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257, 260 FalseGood/FalseBad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Edit Fan supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27, 232
Comment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
Parameter for selected item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Faultdet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Parameter Value. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Modbus parameter addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Style for selected item. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Feedback mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
User text for selected item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Feedback phasing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 FFGain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
EE Checksum fail error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 FFOffset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Efficiency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125, 225 FFType. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Efficient Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 Find
Electrical installation End . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Driver unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Thyristor power unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Finish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
EMC information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 Firing angle limiting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
Enable Firing Enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Firing Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62, 64, 102
Firing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 FiringOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Modbus parameter addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179, 180
Energy Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Flatten compound. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146, 153
Modbus parameter addresses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176, 177 Follow Wire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Force Exec Break . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Energy counter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 Forward to: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Energy Reset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257, 260 Four star wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Engineer level menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 FREQ FAULT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
EngWorkingSP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Freq Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120, 228
ENRGY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257, 260 FreqDriftThold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31, 118
Enter key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Frequency. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Environment Function Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 Context menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
EP.AL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
EP.CnF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 Fuse
EP.Er . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
EP.I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 Blown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31, 120, 228, 266
EP.P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 Driver Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
EP.U (EP.V) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 Phase/Reference input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
EPower Thyristor protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Panel installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 FuseBlown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 FuseConfig . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
ErrDSP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 G
Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Gateway 1 to 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
Indication (Remote panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 Ghosted wiring editor items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
ErrRestart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Global Ack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
EtherNet Global Disable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 GlobalAck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Go Up/Down a Level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Ethernet I/P GoTo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
Pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Graphical Wiring Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 Greyed-out wiring editor items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Event Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Index HA179769
Page 282 Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

Grid on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 User pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

Group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 Watch/Recipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
H Installation
Half cycle mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Electrical
HeaterType . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Driver module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
HeatsinkPreTemp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 Remote panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
HeatsinkTmax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Thyristor power unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
HHOME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 Mechanical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
HI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 160 Amp units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Hidden parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 250 Amp units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Hide 400 Amp units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Homepage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 50/100 Amp units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Unwired Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 500 Amp units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
HIGH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257, 261 Remote panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
High Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Instr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
HiRange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Instrument
HMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Modbus parameter addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
HOME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 Invert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97, 109, 110
Home Page Timeout (Remote panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 InvPAdata . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
HotSwp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 InvRamCsum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
HSink1 (2) (3) Temp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 InvWires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Humidity limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 IO Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
HWDiffers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Hysteresis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 IP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
IP Address. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
I IP Monitor
I Average . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
I, I2, I3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Modbus parameter addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182, 183
I2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 IP1 Pref Master . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
I2 Burst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 IRMS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
I2 Max . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Irms Max . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
IAVG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 IRMS1(2)(3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 IsGlobal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Idle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 IsMaster, IsSlave. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
IextScale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 iTools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140–167
IMaximum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
In with Load Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Firing Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Input monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 L
Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62, 104
Totaliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 LATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
In1 LEDs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Lgc8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Left arrow key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Maths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Left origin Bar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
In2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Level 1 operation (Remote panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Incremental control Level 2 operation (Remote panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Distributed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Level 3 operation (Remote panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Type 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Lgc2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Type 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Modbus parameter addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183, 184
IncrT1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123, 205, 221 Lgc8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
IncrT2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123, 206, 221 Modbus parameter addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Indication Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Init. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Limit 1(2)(3) active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
INominal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Limit Enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Input LimitAct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Definition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Limitation
Energy counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Alarm Acknowledge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
Modulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Alarm Detection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
Input 1 (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Alarm Disable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Alarm Latch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
InputBrk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Alarm Signalling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
Insert item ahead of selected item Alarm Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Limitation active. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

HA179769 Index
Issue 15 March 20 Page 283
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

Line and Load terminations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Driver unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27

Line power wiring Thyristor power unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Driver unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 MainsFreq . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
LMoverSch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Ln . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 MainVFault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Lo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 MAN beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254, 255
Load Master Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62, 105 Master election process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203–227 MasterAddr. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63, 222 Math2
Alarm menus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Configuration with iTools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 Modbus parameter addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185, 186
Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Max . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
General description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 MaxInom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Meas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 MeasVal
Network menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Analogue input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
Station menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Analogue output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
Trouble shooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 Digital I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Sequencing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Mechanical Installation
Sharing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32, 210 160 Amp units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Shedding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32, 125, 212 250 Amp units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Comparisons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 400 Amp units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62, 102 50/100 Amp units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 500 Amp units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Wiring examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Min . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Load Over-Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 Min On. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Load Tap Changer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Modbus parameter addresses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 Minimum off time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
LoadMng Missing mains. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Blocks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Modbus parameter addresses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 MissMains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120, 228, 266
LoadOverI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Missmains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
LOC indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Modbus RTU
Local/Remote switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Pinout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
LocalSP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Mode
LogFault. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Firing OP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Logic firing mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Modulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Logic Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Modulation period (T). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Loose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Modultr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257, 261 Modbus parameter addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186, 187
Low Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
LTC Mouse
Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Pan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
A1Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
A1Temp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Move selected item
Application Wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 User Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
MainPrm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Watch/Recipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Mul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
M N
MAC1 to MAC6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 NetStatus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
Magenta wiring editor items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 NetwDip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Main Network
Analogue output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
PV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Acknowledge menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
MainPrm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Detect menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Mains Disable menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Frequency fault alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 Latch menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Network measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 Signalling menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Voltage fault alarm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 Stop firing menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Wiring Communications menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83

Index HA179769
Page 284 Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

Dips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 Parameter

Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Blue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Meas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Explorer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148, 151, 157
Modbus parameter addresses. . . . . 187, 190, 193, 195 Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148, 157
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62, 105, 117 Parity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
Network dips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Remote Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
Neutral reference input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Partial Load Failure (PLF)
No. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Nominal Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Nominal Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Partial Load Unbalance (PLU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
nonE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Pass Code editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
Num Chans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Paste
Number of inputs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Comment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
NumberChopOff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Diagram fragment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
NumChan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
O Fragment From File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Occupied Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Function block context menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Graphical Wiring Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
On Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Pulse. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Wire context menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
One Shot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Wiring editor items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
OP1 to OP4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 PB 24V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120, 228, 266
Beacons (LEDs). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 PBurst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
OPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 Peak Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Open an existing watch/recipe file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 Pending. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Open Thyr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120, 266 Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123, 221
Oper. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 PF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Ph'n'ComErr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Operator Ph'n'ComTout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Ph'n'Wdog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Phase angle
Operator interface Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 Reduction burst firing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
OR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108, 110 Phase reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Out Input fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 Polarising pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Invert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Pinout
Maths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 CC-Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 DeviceNet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Ethernet I/P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
OutFault. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Input/Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88, 109 Load management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Definition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Modbus RTU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Modulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Modbus TCP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Short circuit alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 Profibus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Over I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Profinet IO. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
Over Load Shedding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 Relay 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Over Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120, 228, 266 Remote panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Overflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
OverIThreshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119, 230 Watchdog relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
OverTemp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 PLF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59, 120, 266
OverVoltThreshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118, 229 Adjusted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Adjustment request. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
P AdjustReq . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
P.A.ro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 Sensitivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
PA Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88, 103 PLM Channel
Page key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 Configuration with iTools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Pan tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 PLM Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
PAOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 PLMChan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

HA179769 Index
Issue 15 March 20 Page 285
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

Blocks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Digital I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97

Modbus parameter addresses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Relay source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
PLMIn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113, 127 Remote panel (PU). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
PLMOut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 PV Transfer
PLMOut 1 to 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Alarm Acknowledge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
PLU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59, 120, 266 Alarm Detection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
PLUthreshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119, 230 Alarm Disable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
Pmax. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125, 225 Alarm Latch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
PMOD Alarm Signalling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
COM ERR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 Alarm Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
T OUT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 PV.AL (Remote panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
WDOG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 PV1 to PV3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
PMod24V. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 PWR indicator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Polarising pins PWR'n'cal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
External feedback connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Pwr'n'EEProm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
I/O Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Pwr'n'Ribbon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Relay 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 PwrModRev . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Watchdog relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Pz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112, 257 PZMax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127, 212, 223
Power board 24V fail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 Q
Power down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Q. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Power modulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 QS Entry/Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Power module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62, 105 Quickstart
Enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
Power Module 24V Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Modbus parameter addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
PowerMod1Rev . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Pr. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125, 225
R
Pr/Ps alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126, 213, 227 r . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
PrcValTfr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 r.roc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
PRE TEMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 RampRate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Preferred Master . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 RangeHigh
PreTemp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Analogue input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
PreTempHeatsink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Analogue output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
Preventive Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 RangeLow
Pri . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 Analogue input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
Primary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Analogue output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
Process Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 RateDone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Process Value Transfer active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 Ready. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
Profibus Recipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Red wiring editor items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 Redo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Profinet Reduction factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Profinet IO Pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Modbus parameter addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Protective Earth Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Watchdog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Relay 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
PRST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 Func . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62, 63
Ps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125, 212, 222 REM Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254, 255
Ps over Pr. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 Remote
Pt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125, 212, 225 Panel connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
PU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 Remote/Local switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
PU.AL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
PulseLen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Voltage sensing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
PulseScale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Remote 1 (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Push pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Remove
Push to Back . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 All items from this page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Function block context menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Recipe parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Wire context menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Selected item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Pushbuttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Rename Wiring Editor diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
PV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Re-Route
Analogue input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147, 149
Analogue output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

Index HA179769
Page 286 Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

Reset Signal wiring

Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 I/O modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Energy counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Remote panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
IP Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Watchdog and Relay 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Totaliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Single Row . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Resolution Six delta wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53, 56
Energy counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 SK8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Totaliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 SK9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Return key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 SmpHld . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Revision level (Power module). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Snapshot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Ripple Carry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Soft Start/Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Rotating Incremental control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Software version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
Rotating Incremental Distributed control . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 SP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86, 257
RotDisInc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123, 209 SP.SEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
RotIncr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123, 207, 221 SP1 to SP3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Space Evenly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
RUN Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 Specification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
S Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
S1 to S4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Input/output modules
Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11, 243 Optional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Safety Ramp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Save Graphic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Power requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Save the current watch/recipe list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Sbr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 SPSelect. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 SPTrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Scan all device addresses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 SPUnits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Scroll key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 SPX Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Scroll keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Sqrt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Secondary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Standby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71, 85
Select Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109, 124
All . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Control Diag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Maths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Strategy Standby mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Strict. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
Selecting components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Sub. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
SelMax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Subnet 1 Mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
SelMin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Summary pages
SELV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
Sensor Break detection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
Serial Num. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Supply frequency fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Serial number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Supply power wiring
Set 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 Driver unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Set 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 Fuseing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Setpoint editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 Remote panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Setpoint Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 Thyristor power units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
SetProv Switch PA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Symbols. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Modbus parameter addresses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199, 200 System alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Remote panel configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 T
Setup Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147, 149
Comms NetStatus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 TapNb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Target . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
Sharing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Target setpoint scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Algorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 Task Break. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Efficiency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Technical specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Shedding Ability Factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 Temperature limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
ShedFactor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127, 213, 222 Temperature pre-Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Show Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
MAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Thick wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Three delta wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53, 54
Show Wires Using Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Three star wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52, 56
Show/Hide grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Three-phase feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272, 273

HA179769 Index
Issue 15 March 20 Page 287
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

Threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

THYR SC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 Modbus parameter addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201, 202
Thyr SC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120, 228 UsrEnergy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Thyristor UsrUnit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 V
Short/open circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 V Average . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Thyristor heatsink temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 V, V2, V3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Thyristor open circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 V2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Thyristor short circuit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 Burst. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
TI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86, 87 Maxim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Value only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Time Above. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Vdips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Timer VdipsThreshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31, 118, 228
Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 VextScale. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Modbus parameter addresses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Vibration specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
TLF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59, 120, 229, 266 Vline Nominal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117, 118
Total Vline, Vline2, Vline 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 VloadNominal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Volt Dips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120, 266
Total Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 Voltage sensing (remote) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Total Load Failure (TLF) alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229, 266 VoltFault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120, 266
Total power demand. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 VRMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Totaliser
Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
W
Modbus parameter addresses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200, 201 Watch/Recipe editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
TotalOut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Adding parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
TotalStation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 Capture current values into a data set . . . . . . . . . . . 164
TotEnergy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Clear the selected data set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
TotUnit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Create a new empty data set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Trans Enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Create a new watch/recipe list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Trans PV. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Data set creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Transfer function active. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Download the selected data set to the device . . . . 164
Transfer Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62, 67 Insert item ahead of selected item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Transfer Span . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Move selected item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Trigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Open an existing watch/recipe file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
TrueGood/TrueBad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Open OPC Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Remove recipe parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Analogue input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Save the current watch/recipe list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Analogue output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Snapshot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Digital I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Watchdog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60, 71
Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
WindowChopOff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
U Wiring
Undelete Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Comment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Mains
Function block context menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Driver unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Remote panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Thyristor power unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Wiring editor items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Remote panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
UnderVoltThreshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118, 229 Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Undo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Remote panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Unit over temperature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
UnitID Enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Colours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
UNITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 Context Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Units (Totaliser). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Thick wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Unlink Wiring examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Comment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Working setpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 WorkingSP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Up arrow key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58, 254 WSP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Upscale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Use Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
X
User Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 XOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108, 110
Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Z
User Value Z, Z2, Z3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

Index HA179769
Page 288 Issue 15 March 20
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Zref, Zref2, Zref3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

HA179769 Index
Issue 15 March 20 Page 289
 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE

Index HA179769
Page 290 Issue 15 March 20
 Eurotherm: International sales and support www.eurotherm.com
Contact Information Represented by:
Eurotherm Head Office Worldwide Offices
Faraday Close, www.eurotherm.com/worldwide
Durrington,
Worthing, West Sussex,
BN13 3PL
Sales Enquiries General Enquiries
T +44 (0)1903 695888 T +44 (0)1903 268500
F 0845 130 9936 F 0845 265982
Scan for local contacts

© Copyright Eurotherm Limited 2020

Eurotherm by Schneider Electric, the Eurotherm logo, Chessell, EurothermSuite, Mini8, Eycon, Eyris, EPower, EPack, nanodac, piccolo,
versadac, optivis, Foxboro and Wonderware are trademarks of Schneider Electric, its subsidiaries and affiliates. All other brands may
be trademarks of their respective owners.
All rights are strictly reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced, modified or transmitted in any form by any means, nei-
ther may it be stored in a retrieval system other than for the purpose to act as an aid in operating the equipment to which the docu-
ment relates, without the prior written permission of Eurotherm Limited.
Eurotherm Limited pursues a policy of continuous development and product improvement. The specifications in this document may
therefore be changed without notice. The information in this document is given in good faith, but is intended for guidance only.
Eurotherm Limited will accept no responsibility for any losses arising from errors in this document.

HA179769/15 (CN38266) EPower User Guide